mbwtp transformers cable replacement project manual

PROJECT MANUAL

for

MOORES BRIDGES WATER TREATMENT PLANT TRANSFORMERS AND CABLE REPLACEMENT

BID OPENING

September 23, 2020 AT 3:00 P.M.

* * * PLEASE NOTE * * *

These BID DOCUMENTS refer to the Hampton Roads Planning District Commission’s Regional Standards, Fifth Edition, December 2010, as amended, which may be obtained from:

HAMPTON ROADS PLANNING DISTRICT COMMISSION 723 WOODLAKE DRIVE CHESAPEAKE, VA 23320

PHONE (757) 420-8300

ashaner

PE_AShaner

ashaner

Typewritten Text

8-14-20

December 2010 Table of Contents - 1 Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

REGIONAL CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Fifth Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pages PREFACE The Regional Construction Standards i Administrative Structure ii-iii Want to Get Involved? iii Important Notices iv Use of Professional Engineer’s Seal iv

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS Section 101 - Definitions of Terms I General Definitions 101-1 to 101- 4 Section 102 - Bidding Requirements and Conditions I Invitation for Bids 102-1 to 102-3 II Instructions to Bidders 102-4 to 102-12 III Bid Form 102-13 to 102-21 IV Bid Bond 102-22 V Questionnaire 102-23 to 102-27 VI Certification Regarding Debarment 102-28 Section 103 - Award and Execution of Agreement I Award and Execution of Agreement 103-1 to 103-3 II Notice of Award 103-4 to 103-5 III Agreement 103-6 to 103-11 IV Performance Bond 103-12 to 103-13 V Payment Bond 103-14 to 103-15 VI Irrevocable Letter of Credit 103-16 to 103-18 VII Escrow Agreement 103-19 to 103-22 VIII Notice to Proceed 103-23 Section 104 - Scope of Work I Intent of Agreement 104-1 II Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents 104-1 III Explorations and Reports 104-1 IV Underground Facilities 104-1 to 104-2


V Subsurface Conditions 104-2 to 104-3 VI Site Security 104-3 VII Clean-up, Disposal and Restoration 104-3 to 104-4 Section 105 - Control of Work I Reuse of Contract Documents 105-1 II Copies of Contract Documents 105-1 III Contract Documents 105-1 to 105-2 IV Shop Drawings and Submittals 105-2 to 105-5 V Record Drawings 105-5 to 105-7 VI Access to Project 105-7 VII Surveys and Reference Points 105-7 VIII Working Hours 105-7 to 105-8 IX Project Coordination 105-8 to 105-10 X Supervision 105-10 XI Uncovering Work 105-10 to 105-11 XII Removal of Unacceptable Work 105-11 XIII Substantial Completion 105-11 to 105-12 XIV Use of Completed Portions 105-12 XV Final Inspection 105-12 XVI Claims 105-12 to 105-14 XVII Engineer’s Status 105-14 to 105-15 XVIII Notice to Comply Order 105-16 XIX Stop Work Order 105-17 Section 106 - Control of Material I Tests and Inspections 106-1 II Labor, Materials and Equipment 106-1 to 106-2 III Work by Owner 106-2 Section 107 - Legal Relations and Responsibility to the Public I Permits and Regulations 107-1 II Land, Easements, and Rights-of-Way 107-1 to 107-2 III Protection of Work, Property & Persons 107-2 to 107-5 IV Environmental Stipulations 107-5 to 107-8 V Temporary Facilities 107-8 VI Emergencies 107-8 to 107-9 VII Warranty and Guarantee 107-9 VIII. Opening Sections of Projects to Traffic 107-10 IX No Waiver of Legal Rights 107-10 Section 108 - Prosecution and Progress of Work I Patent Fees and Royalties 108-1 II Taxes 108-1 III Notice to Proceed 108-1 IV Pre-Construction Conference 108-1


V Construction Progress Schedule 108-1 to 108-2 VI Subcontracts 108-2 to 108-3 VII Commencement and Prosecution of Work 108-3 to 108-4 VIII Suspension of Work 108-4 IX Termination of Agreement 108-4 to 108-7 X Liquidated Damages 108-7 to 108-9 XI Separate Contracts by Owner 108-9 XII Indemnification 108-9 to 108-10 Section 109 - Measurement and Payment I Measurement and Payment Procedures 109-1 to 109-8 II Change Orders and Field Orders 109-8 to 109-9 III Change Order Form 109-10 IV Application for Payment 109-11 V Escrow Agreement 109-12 to 109-14 VI Affidavit of Payment of Claims 109-15 VII Certificate of Substantial Completion 109-16 VIII Statement of Surety Company 109-17 IX Contractor’s Release 109-18 X Manhole/Structure Protective Coating Post Installation Certification 109-19 to 109-20 XI Standard Bid Items and Units 109-21 to 109-27 Section 110 – Special Provisions I. Construction Drawings 110-1 II. Hampton Roads Planning District Commission Regional Construction Standards 110-1 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 05 Selective Demolition for Electrical 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 28 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.23 Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 05 63 Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 26 11 13 Medium Voltage Unit Substations 26 13 16 Switchgear Modification 26 25 13 Low Voltage Busways 27 00 00 Communications 27 10 23 Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories 33 71 19 Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes 40 90 00 Common Work Results for Process Monitoring and Control Systems 40 90 02 Process Monitoring and Control System Testing 40 90 03 Process Monitoring and Control System Training 40 95 00 Process Control Hardware 40 95 00A Appendix A – PMCS Control Panel Schedule


40 95 00B Appendix B – Circuit Breaker Labeling Schedule Appendices – Index Appendix A: Substance Abuse and Drug-Free Workplace Ordinance Appendix B: Procurement Information Form Appendix C: City of Norfolk Modifications to HRPDC Regional Standards, 5th Edition Appendix D: Measurement and Payment Items Appendix E: Norfolk Details Appendix F: Project Sign Detail Appendix G: Application to Perform Utility Work in Right of Way (Not Used) Appendix H: Soil Borings (Not Used) Appendix I: Tree Protection Notes Appendix J: Contractor’s Use of Temporary Facilities and Staging Areas Appendix K: Virginian Clean Water Revolving Loan Fund (VCWRLF) Contract Inserts (Not Used) Appendix L: Test Hole Data Sheets (Not Used) Appendix M: Requirements for As-Built Drawings, Coordinates, Component Tables, and GPS Files Appendix N: Component Table Format Appendix O: Project Component Table

DIVISION 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Section 200A Division Table of Contents 200A-1 to 200A-2 200 Products and Materials 200-1 to 200-134

DIVISION 3 - ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION Section 300 Division Table of Contents 300-1 to 300-4 301. Clearing and Grubbing 301-1 to 301-5 302. Drainage Structures 302-1 to 302-17 303. Earthwork 303-1 to 303-18 305. Subgrade and Shoulders 305-1 to 305-5 309. Aggregate Base Course 309-1 to 309-3 310. Tack and Prime Coat 310-1 to 310-4 313. Asphalt Surface Treatment 313-1 to 313-5 315. Asphalt Concrete Pavement (NON SUPERPAVE) 315-1 to 315-14 315A. Asphalt Concrete Pavement (SUPERPAVE) 315A-1 to 315A-14 317 Pavement Patching 317-1 to 317-3


DIVISION 4 - MISCELLANEOUS Section 400 Division Table of Contents 400-1 406 Reinforcing Steel 406-1 to 406-4 414. Riprap 414-1 to 414-6

DIVISION 5 - INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION Section 500 Division Table of Contents 500-1 to 500-3 501. Underdrains 501-1 to 501-2 502. Concrete Items 502-1 to 502-14 505 Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers 505-1 to 505-4 507 Fences 507-1 to 507-3 510. Relocating or Modifying Existing Miscellaneous Items 510-1 to 510-3 511. Allaying Dust 511-1 to 511-2 512. Maintaining Traffic 512-1 to 512-18 513. Mobilization 513-1 to 513-1 515. Milling Pavement 515-1 to 515-2 521 Pavers 521-1 to 521-13 530. Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures 530-1 to 530-6

DIVISION 6 - LANDSCAPING Section 600 Division Table of Contents 600-1 to 600-2 602. Topsoil 602-1 to 602-2 603. Seeding 603-1 to 603-3 604. Sodding 604-1 to 604-2 605. Planting 605-1 to 605-5 608. Mowing 608-1 to 608-2

DIVISION 7 - TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES Section 700A Division Table of Contents 700A-1 700. Traffic Control Devices 700-1 to 700-15 704. Pavement Markings and Markers 704-1 to 704-7


DIVISION 8 - WATER AND WASTEWATER UTILITIES Section 800 Division Table of Contents 800-1 to 6 801. Water Distribution Systems 801-1 to 801-19 802. Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems 802-1 to 802-18 803. Sanitary Force Main Systems 803-1 to 803-12 804. Boring and Jacking 804-1 to 804-4 805. Separation of Water Mains and Sewers 805-1 to 805-2 806. Horizontal Directional Drilling 806-1 to 806-10 Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation (Sections 810-822) 810. Sewer Line Cleaning 810-1 to 810-6 811. Television Inspection 811-1 to 811-5 812. Bypass Pumping 812-1 to 812-4 813. Pipe Rehabilitation by Cured-in-Place Method 813-1 to 813-11 814. Pipe Rehabilitation by Fold-and-Form Method 814-1 to 814-10 815. Pipe Bursting 815-1 to 815-7 816. Sewer Pipe Joint Testing 816-1 to 816-3 817. Chemical Grouting 817-1 to 817-4 818. Point Repair by Excavation 818-1 to 818-4 819. Insitu Structural Point Repair 819-1 to 819-4 820. Insitu Point Repair by Sectional Lining 820-1 to 820-3 821. Sanitary Sewer Service Reconnections 821-1 to 821-6 822. Manhole Rehabilitation 822-1 to 822-8

STANDARD DETAILS Standard Details Table of Contents SD-1 to SD-2

PREFACE

December 2010 i Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

THE REGIONAL CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS The Cities and Counties that make up the region of Hampton Roads, Virginia have recognized the need to develop uniform construction standards for improvements in public rights of way. The initial direction is to address “horizontal” improvements and those involving the major elements of roadways, drainage and utilities (water distribution and wastewater collection). With a limited budget and a strong sense of urgency, the intent was to develop standards that would accommodate most of the “typical” construction projects in the region. Therefore, these documents are intended to support the majority of issues the communities face in building minor roads and utilities. Additional specifications and standard details, along with improvements to earlier versions, will be an ongoing effort. The Regional Construction Standards are a reference document comprised of Technical Specifications, Standard Details and “Front-End” documents (the legal framework and administrative provisions for construction contracts). The user should normally prepare Construction Drawings and Special Provisions for individual projects. The Special Provisions are tied to the Regional Construction Standards by reference (Section 110) and should address any particular administrative, procedural, legal, or technical requirement of the project and/or the locality; supplemental or modified specifications and standard details; along with the appropriate completed bidding documentation. The vast majority of the Standards (Technical Specifications and Standards Details) should NOT be reproduced when projects are bid for construction. Municipalities typically reproduce only the Front-End Documents, which include the Special Provisions (Section 110). These Standards were developed under the auspices of the Hampton Roads Planning District Commission (HRPDC) and represent a collaborated effort of the 16 communities that constitute the HRPDC, the Hampton Roads Sanitation District (HRSD), and the Hampton Roads Utility and Heavy Contractors Association (HRUHCA). Many municipal, HRSD and HRUHCA representatives have spent countless hours serving on committees that guided, edited, refined, and established these Regional Construction Standards. Designers, material suppliers, contractors, attorneys, purchasing agents and consulting engineers have provided timely and insightful comments, along with the Virginia Department of Transportation, the Virginia Department of Health - Office of Drinking Water Programs, and the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality. While diligent effort has been made to provide reliable, accurate, and up-to-date information, neither the communities of Hampton Roads, HRPDC, or its consultants, can place a guarantee on the correctness of the data or information contained in this document. The authors and editors do hereby disclaim any responsibility or liability in connection with the use of these Regional Construction Standards or of any data or other information contained therein.

This document may be obtained electronically at www.hrpdcva.gov or by purchasing a CD at the offices of the HRPDC. The front end documents are available in Microsoft Word software, while the technical specifications and standard details are available in Acrobat Reader (.pdf) format. The user must acknowledge all modifications to the Regional Construction Standards and illustrate changes in the Front End documents using strikethroughs and bold for deletions and additions, respectively. The user is entirely responsible and completely liable for misrepresentations to this document.

Hampton Roads Planning District Commission

723 Woodlake Drive Chesapeake, Virginia 23320

(757-420-8300)

2101 Executive Drive

Hampton, Virginia 23666 (757-262-0094)

PREFACE

December 2010 ii Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

ADMINISTRATIVE STRUCTURE The Organizational Structure for the maintenance of HRPDC’s Regional Construction Standards is illustrated in the accompanying figure and briefly described below. Program Administration HRPDC is responsible for the administration of the financial and contractual issues for the continued implementation of the Regional Construction Standards program.

Full Committee The Full Committee (FC) is the governing body for the Standards. The Full Committee consists of up to 34 voting members – up to two voting representatives from each of the 16 cities and counties in the Hampton Roads Planning District and one voting member from the Hampton Roads Sanitation District (HRSD) and the Hampton Roads Utility and Heavy Contractors Association (HRUHCA). Technical Review Committee The Technical Review Committee (TRC) is a standing subcommittee established by the Full Committee to provide technical reviews of the Regional Construction Standards. The TRC updates and edits the document and prepares new technical specification sections and standard details. The TRC collects information from individuals, jurisdictions and agencies with an emphasis on reviewing Special Provisions to determine common elements or improvements that could be incorporated into the future editions or amendments. Ad-Hoc Committees At key stages of development of the document or for special assignments, Ad Hoc Committees are formed and are often referred to as Focus Groups or Task Force Committees. In the past, Focus Groups have been convened to provide critical input of the Standards prior to the completion of new editions. Focus Groups have included: City and County Attorneys and Purchasing Agents whose task has been to review the front-end portion of the document; and, consulting engineers, contractors, and suppliers who have reviewed the

HRPDC

Full Committee Engineering/Management

Consultant

Legal Consultant

Standing Sub Committee

Technical Review Committee

Ad Hoc Committees

Task Forces Focus Groups

PREFACE

December 2010 iii Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

entire document, with emphasis on the technical specifications and the standard details. Task Force Committees have also been convened to study specific assignments, such as the Manhole Coatings Task Force that addressed specific issues dealing with new, precast, manhole coatings. Engineering/Management/Legal Consultant A consultant is used for technical, management, legal advice and also performs training. The consultant serves at the pleasure of HRPDC and provides guidance and support for the committees, as well as HRPDC. More information regarding the organizational structure and procedures used to maintain and implement the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards may be found at http://www.hrpdcva.gov/Regional_Construction_Stnds/REGCONST_Home.asp.

Want to get involved?

If you would like to help provide quality construction practices and simplify the bidding and construction administration process throughout the Hampton Roads region, HRPDC would like you to join one of the above described functions. Please e-mail DFarmer@ HRPDCVA.gov or call 757-420-8300.

PREFACE

December 2010 iv Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

IMPORTANT NOTICES! New editions of the Regional Construction Standards are anticipated approximately every three to four years. The time interval allows the users to become more familiar with the document, while the need for updating Special Provisions in each locality is greatly reduced to keep up with newer versions. When modifications are required between editions, “Proposed Revisions” are considered by the Technical Review Committee. If approved by the TRC, the Full Committee will then consider these Proposed Revisions for adoption. If approved by the Full Committee, the Proposed Revision becomes a “Publication Update” which is then posted on the HRPDC Web Site. Notification of a recently adopted Update is e-mailed to the jurisdictions, who are responsible for accepting the Update on behalf of their locality and including the Update in their Special Provisions. Other users wishing to be notified via e-mail should contact HRPDC for inclusion on an e-mail tree. Continuing workshops and training sessions are also provided to the Hampton Roads localities and the general public to facilitate the implementation and understanding of the document. More information including meeting dates, status of Proposed Revisions, Regional Construction Standards sections downloads, etc. may be found at the HRPDC website mentioned above.

USE OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER’S SEAL In Virginia, a professional engineer may only affix his seal to plans and specifications that he has either directly prepared or were prepared under his direct supervision. The seal indicates that the professional engineer has had complete control and direction over, and accepts responsibility for, the sealed work. (See 18 Va. C10-20-760). Since the Regional Construction Standards were developed by consensus of committees comprised of experienced individuals representing various industry groups rather than under the complete direction and control of a professional engineer, the Regional Construction Standards are not sealed, nor would it be appropriate for the Regional Construction Standards to be sealed without reference to the application of the Regional Construction Standards to a specific project. When a professional engineer prepares design documents for a specific project and incorporates the Regional Construction Standards into that design by reference, the professional engineer’s seal of the particular plans, specifications and drawings for that project represents his approval of the Regional Construction Standards as incorporated by reference into such particular plans, specifications and drawings for such project. In other words, the professional engineer who stamps or seals any plans, specifications, reports or other documents incorporating the Regional Construction Standards by reference is responsible for assuring that such plans, and the Regional Construction Standards as incorporated into such plans by reference, are adequate and appropriate for the particular project. Although it is encouraged that the Regional Construction Standards be used as appropriate and applicable to public right of way projects in Hampton Roads, the ultimate decision about what goes into such plans, specifications, reports, or other documents for a specific project must be that of the professional engineer who signs and seals them.

December 2010 101 - 1 Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

SECTION 101

DEFINITIONS OF TERMS I. GENERAL DEFINITIONS Wherever used in the Contract Documents, the following terms shall have the meanings indicated and shall be applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: 1.1 Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or

change the Bid Documents or the Contract Documents. 1.2 Agreement - The written agreement between the Owner and the Contractor covering the Work to be

performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein.

1.3 Application for Payment - The form provided in the Contract Documents which is to be used by the

Contractor in requesting progress and final payments and which is to include such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

1.4 Bid - The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for

the Work to be performed. 1.5 Bid Documents - Documentation issued prior to the bid date, including documentation accompanying

the Bid (Drawings, Project Specifications, HRPDC Regional Construction Standards, Addenda, and Special Provisions) and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award.

1.6 Bidder - Any person, firm or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work. 1.7 Bonds - Performance and Payment Bonds furnished by the Contractor and the Contractor's surety in

accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.8 Bid Security - Bid Bonds and other instruments of surety, furnished by the Contractor or the

Contractor's surety in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.9 Change Order - A written order to the Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the

Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents that authorizes an adjustment in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time; issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.

1.10 Completion Date - The date specified in the Notice to Proceed for final completion of the Work. 1.11 Contract Documents - The Agreement, including the Bid Documents, Notice of Award, Notice to

Proceed, Field Orders, Change Orders, and modifications. 1.12 Contract Price - The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms and conditions of the

Agreement.


1.13 Contract Time - The number of calendar days stated in the Agreement for the completion of the

Work. Calendar days shall be understood to be consecutive. 1.14 Contractor - The person, firm or corporation with whom the Owner has executed the Agreement. 1.15 Day - A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Calendar

days shall be understood to be consecutive. 1.16 Defective - An adjective, which when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is

unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to the Owner’s acceptance.

1.17 Drawings - The plans that show the character and scope of the Work to be performed. 1.18 Effective Date of the Agreement - The date indicated in the introductory paragraph of the Agreement. 1.19 Engineer - The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement. In the event the Owner

should not require the services of the Engineer, then the powers, duties, and responsibilities conferred in the Contract Documents to the Engineer shall be construed to be those of the Owner.

1.20 Field Order - A verbal or written order effecting a change in the Work not involving an adjustment in

the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, issued by the Engineer or Owner to the Contractor during construction.

1.21 Final Completion - All work, including punch list items noted at the final inspection, is complete to

the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.22 Laws and Regulations - Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders

of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. 1.23 Liens - Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real or personal property. 1.24 May - The term "may" is permissive. 1.25 Notice - All written notices, demands, instructions, claims, approvals, and disapprovals required to

obtain compliance with the Contract Documents. Any written notice by either party to the Agreement shall be sufficiently given if delivered to or at the last known business address of the person, firm or corporation constituting the party to the Agreement, or to his, their, or its authorized agent, representative or officer, or when enclosed in a postage envelope addressed to such last known business address and deposited in a United States mailbox. Notice shall be deemed received within 3 business days of U.S. Mail Service postmark date.

1.26 Notice of Award - A written notice by the Owner to the apparent Successful Bidder stating that upon

compliance by the apparent Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated therein, within the time specified, the Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.

1.27 Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to the

Engineer, if appropriate) fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on


which the Contractor shall start to perform its obligations under the Agreement. 1.28 Owner - The public body or authority, corporation, association, firm or person with whom the

Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided. 1.29 Owner's Representative - The person, firm or corporation named by the Owner to act as the Owner’s

agent. 1.30 Partial Utilization - Use by the Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose

for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.31 Project - The entire Work as described in the Contract Documents, including Work that is necessary

and incidental to the furnishing of all materials, services, equipment, labor and supplies required to install, perform, and complete all items of Work in accordance with Contract Documents

1.32 Reference Standards - Those bulletins, standards, rules, methods of analysis or test, codes, and

specifications of other agencies, engineering societies, or industrial associations referred to in the Contract Documents. These refer to the latest edition, including amendments in effect and published at the time the Project was advertised, unless specifically referred to by edition, volume, or date.

1.33 Regional Construction Standards - The construction standards, published by the Hampton Roads

Planning District Commission (HRPDC) as amended from time to time. 1.34 Responsible Bidder - A person or firm who, in the sole opinion of the Owner, has the capability in all

respects, to fully perform the contractual requirements as well as the moral and business integrity and reliability to assure good faith performance.

1.35 Responsive Bidder - A person or firm who has submitted a bid that conforms in all material respects

to the Bid Documents. 1.36 Resident Project Representative - The authorized representative of the Engineer or Owner who is

assigned to the Project or any part thereof. 1.37 Roadway Prism - All of the land or area within the right of way that needs to be cut, filled, graded, or

otherwise disturbed to produce the design cross section, including, but not limited to, areas for curbs, ditches, sidewalks, paths, and slopes to match existing grade.

1.38 Rock - Any indurated material with a minimum compressive strength of 200psi that requires drilling,

wedging, blasting, or other methods of brute force for excavation. 1.39 Shall - The term "shall" is mandatory. 1.40 Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, specified design related submittals,

and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for the Contractor and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

1.41 Special Provisions - Requirements in addition to or modification of the HRPDC Regional

Construction Standards. 1.42 Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents or HRPDC Regional Construction

Standards consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems,


standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.

1.43 Standard Details - Those portions of the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards consisting of

drawings, explanatory of another drawing, indicating in detail and at a larger scale, the design, location, composition and correlation of elements and materials.

1.44 Subcontractor - A person, firm or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or with

any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. 1.45 Substantial Completion - That date certified by the Owner when the construction of the Project or a

specified part thereof is sufficiently completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, including completion of all tests, so that the Project or specified part can be utilized for the purpose for which it is intended.

1.46 Successful Bidder - The lowest, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom the Owner (on the basis

of the Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. 1.47 Supplier - Any person or organization that supplies materials or equipment for the Work, including

that fabricated to a special design. 1.48 Underground Facilities - All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks,

tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water.

1.49 Work - All labor, materials, equipment, transportation, supervision, or other facilities, duties or

incidentals necessary for execution and completion of the Project in compliance with the Contract Documents.

End of Section

December 2010 102-1 Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

SECTION 102

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS

I. INVITATION FOR BIDS Long Form PROJECT: Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement LOCATION: Norfolk, Virginia CONTACT NAME AND NUMBER: Ram Javvaji, (757) 664-6724 Due to the closure of public offices, the City of Norfolk will receive sealed bids for the above titled Project online through the City’s electronic bid service provider, ProcureNow, until 3:00 p.m. local time on Thursday, May 7, 2020. Please follow the link below to submit an electronic bid for this Project: https://secure.procurenow.com/portal/norfolk/projects/4761 The City of Norfolk will receive sealed Bids for the above titled Project at the office of the Department of Utilities located at 401 Monticello Avenue, 2nd floor, Norfolk, VA 23510 until X:XX p.m. local time on XX, XX XX, 2020, at which time the Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. Any Bids received after the specified time and date will not be considered. The Work under this Project consists of the replacing two transformers including demolition and replacement of the transformer concrete pads, replacing the 5kV Primary Feeder cables, replacing the secondary busway, replacing power meters and mechanical relays, and installing new Arc Flash labels as required by the Arc Flash Study. Transformers, feeder cables, etc. must be replaced one feed at a time, with the other feed kept in service. Substantial completion shall occur 330 days following the date of Notice to Proceed (NTP). Final completion shall occur 360 days following the date of the NTP. The full Invitation for Bids is available at the Department of Utilities (757-664-6701), on the City of Norfolk’s web site, http://www.norfolk.gov/Bids.aspx, on the DemandStar web site, http://www.demandstar.com, and on the eVA web site, https://eva.virginia.gov and in the local office of Builders and Contractors Exchange, Inc. (757-858-0680) and the Virginia Minority Supplier Development Council (757-823-4587). Electronic copies of the Bid Documents are available at no cost online at the City’s web site under the “Utilities” heading. All prospective bidders and anyone wishing to receive addenda to the Bid Documents must be on the Plan Holders List. The procedure for registration on the Plan Holders List follows: go to http://www.norfolk.gov/Bids.aspx under the “Utilities” heading, click on this project’s title in the first screen, click on the Plan Holders List on the second screen and complete the registration form. Contact the Project Manager if you have any questions regarding downloading the Bid Documents or Plan Holders registration. Bid Security in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bid shall be submitted with each Bid. It is the policy of the City of Norfolk to facilitate the establishment, preservation, and strengthening of small businesses and businesses owned by women and minorities and to encourage their participation in the City’s procurement activities. Toward that end, the City encourages these firms to compete and encourages non-minority firms to provide for the participation of small businesses and businesses owned by women and minorities through partnerships, joint ventures, subcontracts, and other contractual opportunities. Bidders (offerors) are asked, as part of their submission, to describe any planned use of such businesses in fulfilling this contract.


“Bidders must comply with the following: the President’s Executive Order #11246 prohibiting discrimination in employment regarding race, color, creed, sex, or national origin; the President’ Executive Order #12138 and 11625 regarding utilization of MBE/WBE firms; the Civil Rights Act of 1964. Bidders must certify that they do not or will not maintain or provide for their employees any facilities that are segregated on the basis of race, color, creed, or national origin.” By execution of the Bid Form and Contract Documents the contractor certifies to the afore mentioned requirements. The Hampton Roads Planning District Commission’s Regional Construction Standards, Fifth Edition, December 2010, are hereby referenced and are part of the Bid Documents, except as may be modified by the Special Provisions of this Project or as may be shown by bold type for additions and strike-throughs for deletions. Copies of the Regional Construction Standards may be purchased at the offices of the HRPDC, 723 Woodlake Drive, Chesapeake, VA 23320 (Telephone 757-420-8300) or Executive Tower, Suite 1-C, 2101 Executive Drive, Hampton, VA 23666 (Telephone 757-262-0094). The latest Fifth edition of the Regional Construction Standards and Publication Updates may be downloaded at the HRPDC website http://hrregconstds.org/ Bid Security in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bid shall be submitted with each Bid. A MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE will be held on Wednesday, September 9, 2020, at 10:00 a.m. local time at the Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant, 6040 Water Works Road, Norfolk, VA 23502. We will meet in the first parking lot on the right after the security gate. Bidders must be present at the start of this meeting. Contractor registration in accordance with Title 2.2 Chapter 43, Code of Virginia is required. The Bidder shall include in its Bid the following notation: "Licensed Virginia Contractor No. _______." Evidence of a Class A Certificate of Registration must be shown before the bid may be received and considered under a general or sub-contract of $40,000.00 or more or when the volume of work is $300,000.00 or more within any given twelve (12) month period. For jobs of at least $1,500.00 but less than $40,000.00, bidders are required to show evidence of a Class B Certificate of Registration. Under the aforesaid law, it is a Class I misdemeanor to bid or engage in any work without appropriate Class A or Class B license. The State Registration number must appear on the envelope containing the bid whenever the bid amounts to $1,500.00 or more. Withdrawal of Bids due to error shall be subject to and in accordance with Section 2.2-4330 of the Code of Virginia and the Contract Documents. Procedures for submitting, withdrawing and evaluating Bids and other pertinent information are contained in the Instructions to Bidders. All bids will be evaluated in accordance with the City of Norfolk Procurement Procedures and the City reserves the right to waive informalities and to reject bids. The decision to award will be posed in a designated public area in accordance with Virginia Code 11-66(A). All construction contracts must comply with Section 33, 1-58 of the Code of the City of Norfolk, VA 1979, as amended, regarding Substance Abuse and Drug-Free Work Place policy for City Construction Contracts. (See Appendix A) The Owner reserves the right to waive minor non-substantive informalities in the Bid, to reject any/or all Bids, to award any Bid in whole or in part and award the Bid considered to be in the best interest of the Owner. The Owner also reserves the right to negotiate with the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder should Bid exceed available funds.


The City of Norfolk does not discriminate in the solicitation or awarding of contracts on the basis of race, religion, faith-based organizations, color, national origin, age, disability or any other basis prohibited by state or federal law. By: Cherryl F. Barnett, P.E.

Engineering Manager


II. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Bid Documents 1.1. Complete sets of Bid Documents shall be used in preparing Bids. Neither the Owner nor the

Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bid Documents.

1.2. The Owner, in making copies of the Bid Documents available on the above terms does so only for

the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer or license or grant permission for any other use.

1.3. The Special Provisions for this Project as set forth in Section 110 were prepared by Gannett

Fleming, Inc. and are dated August 2020. Additional Special Provisions for this Project appear as modifications to the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards by strike-throughs for deletions and bold type for additions in Sections 100 through 109.

1.4. The Drawings for this Project, prepared by Gannett Fleming, Inc. and dated August 2020, are

defined as follows:

Sheet No. Description G1 Cover C1 Civil Site Plan C2 Civil Drain and Grate Details E001 Electrical Cover Sheet E101 Electrical Site Plan – Demolition E102 Electrical 4160V One-Line Demolition E103 Electrical 480V One-Line Demolition E201 Electrical Site Plan – New Work E202 Electrical Partial Control Site Plan E301 Electrical 4160V One-Line New Work E302 Electrical 480V One-Line New Work E401 Electrical Details

2. Examination of Contract Documents and Project Site. 2.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid: A. to examine thoroughly the Bid Documents; B. to visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy the Bidder as to the general, local and site

conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work; C. to study and carefully correlate the Bidder’s knowledge and observations with the Bid

Documents and such other related data; and,

D. to promptly notify the Owner of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies which the Bidder has discovered in or between the Bid Documents and such other related documents or field/site conditions.


2.2 Reference is made to Sections 104 III and 104 IV, for information relating to reports, explorations, underground facilities, and easements. On request, at the discretion of the Owner, the Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. The Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition, including reseeding and/or resodding any disturbed areas upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests and studies, and hold the Owner harmless from any damage to property or injury to persons resulting from or arising out of such exploration, investigation, tests, and studies. The Bidder shall obtain and comply with all local and state permitting requirements.

3. Interpretations and Addenda. 3.1. No oral explanation in regard to the meaning of the Contract Documents will be made, and no oral

instructions will be given before the award of the Work. Discrepancies, omissions or doubts as to the meaning of the Contract Documents shall be communicated in writing to the Owner for interpretation. Bidders should act promptly and allow sufficient time for a reply to reach them before the submission of their Bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an addendum to the Contract Documents, which will be forwarded to all known Bidders, and its receipt shall be acknowledged on the Bid Form. All questions shall be received no later than 7 days prior to the date for opening of Bids.

3.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Contract Documents. 4. Bid Security. 4.1. Each bid shall be accompanied by a scanned version in in Portable Document Format (pdf) of

a Bidder’s bond issued by a company authorized and licensed to transact business as surety in the Commonwealth of Virginia, a certified check, or cash escrow, in an amount equal to not less than five (5) percent of the total amount of the Bid. A fully executed original of the Bidder’s bond, certified check or cash escrow will be required at a later date for award and execution of the construction contract. Upon approval of the Owner’s attorney, in accordance with Section 2.2-4338, Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended, a Bidder may furnish a personal bond, property bond, or bank or savings and loan association’s letter of credit on certain designated funds for the amount required for the Bid Security. The Bid Security shall be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of attorney for the surety attorney-in-fact. Said bid security shall be left with the Owner, subject to the conditions specified herein, as a guarantee of good faith on the part of the Bidder that if the bid is accepted, the Bidder shall execute the contract. If a certified check is offered as guarantee, it shall be made payable to the ‘City Treasurer of Norfolk, VA.’

4.2. The Bid Security shall be returned to all except the three (3) lowest Bidders within ten (10) days after

the date of Bid opening. The Bid Security will be returned to the three (3) lowest Bidders within five (5) days after the execution of an Agreement and Performance and Payment Bonds and Certificates of Insurance have been approved by the Owner. None of the three (3) lowest Bids shall be deemed rejected, notwithstanding acceptance of one of the Bids, until the Agreement has been executed by both the Owner and the Successful Bidder.

5. Liquidated Damages. 5.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in Section 108-X and in Section 102 III (Bid Form).


6. Preparation of Bid. 6.1. All blanks on the Bid Form shall legibly and carefully be completed in ink. 6.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or

other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature.

6.3. Bids by unincorporated organizations shall be executed in the organization’s name and signed by an

individual having authority to enter into a contract on behalf of such organization, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the organization shall be shown below the signature. For example, if such organization is a Limited Liability Company, the Bid shall be signed by its manager, or if such organization is a Limited Partnership, the Bid shall be signed by a general partner.

6.4. All names shall be typed or printed in ink below the signature. All names shall be the legal name of

the corporation, unincorporated organization and/or individual. 6.5. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which shall be

filled in on the Bid Form). 6.6. The address, telephone number, e-mail address and fax number for communications regarding the

Bid shall be provided. 6.7. It is understood and agreed that, in the event an Agreement is executed for the supplies, equipment or

services included in the Bid, no indication of such sales or services to the Owner shall be used in any way in product literature or advertising without the written consent of the Owner.

7. Quantities and Unit Prices. 7.1. The Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any class or portion of the Work.

No such change in the Work shall be considered as a waiver of any condition of the Agreement nor shall such change invalidate any of the provisions thereof. Payment will be made at the unit or lump sum prices under the Agreement only for the work actually performed or materials furnished and accepted.

7.2 Bidders shall include in their Bid prices the entire cost of each item set forth in the Bid, and it is

understood and agreed that there is included in each lump sum or unit price bid item the entire cost necessary or incidental to the completion of that portion of the work, unless such incidental work is expressly included in other lump sum or unit price bid items.

8. General Equipment or Material Specification. 8.1. When the Bid Documents specify one or more manufacturer's brand names or makes of materials,

devices or equipment as indicating a quality, style, appearance or performance, with the statement "or equal," the Bidder shall base the Bid on either one of the specified brands or an alternate brand which the Bidder intends to substitute. Use of an alternate shall not be permitted unless it has been found to be equal or better by the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.


8.2. The burden of proof as to the comparative quality and suitability of alternative equipment, articles or

materials shall be upon the Bidder. The Bidder shall furnish at its own expense, such information relating thereto as may be required by the Owner. The Owner shall be the sole judge as to the comparative quality and suitability of alternative equipment, articles or materials and the Owner’s decisions shall be final. Any other brand, make or material, device or equipment which, in the opinion of the Owner is recognized to be the equal of that specified, considering quality, workmanship and economy of operation and is suitable for the purpose intended, shall be accepted. In the event of any adverse decision by the Owner, no claim of any sort shall be made or allowed against the Engineer or Owner. Samples, if requested by the Bidder, may be returned at the Bidder’s expense.

8.3. If in the sole discretion of the Owner an item proposed by the Contractor does not qualify as an “or equal” item it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner any such information as the Owner may request to evaluate the substitute item to include estimates of costs or credits, redesign, claims or schedule impacts, warranty or maintenance issues or payment of any license or royalty that could directly or indirectly result from acceptance of the substitute. Any cost or time impacts to the project schedule caused by the Contractor’s submission of a substitute shall be borne by the Contractor. Any costs incurred by the Owner or by the Owner’s Engineer in reviewing the suitability of the substitute item shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner may refuse to accept a substitute unless an acceptable adjustment in the contract price is offered by the contractor.

9. Proprietary Material and Equipment Specification. 9.1 Where any item of equipment or material is specified by proprietary name, trade name, catalog

reference, or name of one or more manufacturers, without the addition of such expressions as "or equal," it is to be understood that those items are so specified for reasons of standardization in maintenance and operation, or for reasons of obtaining desirable features best suited to the require-ments of the Specifications. This specific equipment shall form the basis of the Bid and be furnished under the Agreement. Where two or more items of equipment or material are named, the Contractor has the option to use either.

10. Additive/Alternate Bids 10.1. Additive Bids

Additive bid items are those in addition to the base Bid items. Bidders shall submit additive Bids on all items as shown on the Bid form. Award shall be based on the lowest responsive and responsible Bid for base Bid plus all additive bid items listed and in accordance with any criteria in the Special Provisions.

10.2. Alternate Bids Alternate bid items are those where more than one type of improvement may be considered for a

portion or all of the Work due to the character of the improvement and uncertainties which may be encountered during construction. If alternate Bids are requested for a portion of or all of the Work, Bidders shall submit alternate Bids for all alternate(s) the Bidder or its Subcontractor is qualified to perform. Award shall be based on the lowest responsive and responsible Bid for the base Bid plus the amount added or deleted for the alternate bid items selected by the Owner and in accordance with


any criteria in the Special Provisions. The alternates selected shall be at the sole discretion and in the best interests of the Owner.

11. Submission of Bids. 11.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation for Bids and shall be sealed,

marked with the Project title and name and address of the Bidder, and accompanied by the bid guarantee and other required documents. The Bid may not be changed by markings on the envelope. Only the amounts indicated on the Bid Form will be considered in determining the final Bid amount.

11.2. When a license is required, the Bidder shall include in its Bid over the Bidder’s signature the

following notation: "VIRGINIA LICENSED CONTRACTOR NO. ___________" (Ref. Title 2.2, Chapter 43, and Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Code of Virginia).

11.3. When a license is not so required and a person who is not the holder of a License enters a Bid, such

person shall include in its Bid over the Bidder’s signature the following notation: "LICENSING NOT REQUIRED UNDER VIRGINIA STATE CODE."

11.4. The Contractor shall complete and submit the Debarment Certification form. A copy of the form is

included in Section 102, VI at the end of this Section.

11.5. The Contractor shall complete and submit the Non Collusion Affidavit form. A copy of the form is included in Section 102, III.K in this section.

12. Receipt and Opening of Bids. 12.1. Bids will be opened publicly at the time and place and under the conditions stated in the Invitation

for Bids. The Owner's Representative whose duty it is to open Bids will decide when the specified time has arrived. No responsibility will be attached to any such person for the premature opening of a Bid not properly addressed and identified. It is the responsibility of the Bidder to assure that the Bid is delivered to the designated place of receipt prior to the time set for the receipt of Bids. No Bid received after the time designated for receipt will be considered.

12.2. Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly.

12.3. Electronic bids shall be submitted in Portable Document Format (pdf) as single pages or any

combination thereof, up to and including, a single image which includes all the required documents.

12.4. Bids will be available to the public after the bid opening through the City’s electronic bid service provider. The Bid Tabulation will be posted to the City’s website.

13. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance. 13.1. All Bids shall remain subject to acceptance for 90 Days after the day of the Bid opening, but the

Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date, or extend the acceptance period an additional 90 days with the consent of the apparent low bidder and surety.


14. Withdrawal of Bids. 14.1 Withdrawal of Bids filed with the Owner may be made only by an authorized representative of

the firm submitting the Bid. A request to withdraw a bid may be made by submission of a scanned letter on firm letterhead in pdf format via email from an email address that can be verified to be exclusively used by the Bidder. The letter shall 1) certify that the signer is an authorized representative of the Bidder, 2) request the withdrawal of the Bid and 3) be signed by the authorized representative. Such withdrawal shall be submitted to the City’s designated project manager by email prior to the deadline designated in the advertisement for receipt of Bids. Withdrawal of Bids filed with the Owner may be made only by a representative of the firm submitting the Bid, who shall appear in person prior to the deadline designated in the advertisement for receipt of Bids. Such representative shall furnish satisfactory identification and proof that they are authorized to withdraw the Bid. Telephone, e-mail, or facsimile notices will not be considered. Additions and/or deletions marked on the outside of the Bid envelope will not be considered.

14.2 In accordance with Section 2.2-4330(A)(i) of the Code of Virginia, as amended, If the Bid price was

substantially lower than the other Bids solely to a mistake therein, provided the Bid was submitted in good faith, and the mistake was a clerical mistake as opposed to a judgment mistake, and was actually due to an unintentional arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a quantity of work, labor, or material made directly in the compilation of a bid, which unintentional arithmetic error or unintentional omission can be clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from inspection of original work papers, documents, and materials used in the preparation of the Bid sought to be withdrawn and provided further the Bidder shall give notice in writing of his claim of right to withdraw within two (2) business days after the Bid opening, then the Bid may be withdrawn. The Bidder shall, within the following two (2) business days provide the subjective data required in this section to satisfy the Owner’s representative that the grounds for such withdrawal do exist.

14.3 Should the Bidder refuse to enter into the Agreement after notification of award, the Bid Security

shall be forfeited. 14.4 No Bid may be withdrawn under this section when the result would be the awarding of the

Agreement on another Bid to the same Bidder or to another Bidder in which the ownership of the withdrawing Bidder is more than five percent.

14.5 If a Bid is withdrawn under the authority of this section, the remaining Bids shall be evaluated to

determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder. 14.6 No Bidder who is permitted to withdraw a Bid shall, for compensation, supply any material or labor

to or perform any subcontract or other work agreement for the person or firm to whom awarded, or otherwise benefit, directly or indirectly, from the performance of the Project for which the withdrawn Bid was submitted.

14.7 If withdrawal of any Bid is denied, the Bidder shall be notified in writing stating the reasons for this

decision. Any Bidder who desires to appeal a decision denying withdrawal of Bid shall, as sole remedy, institute legal action provided by Section 2.2-4358 and Section 2.2-4364(B), Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended.


15. Evaluation of Bids. 15.1. In evaluating Bids, the Owner shall consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the

Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit and lump sum prices, and additive/alternate bid items if requested in the Bid Form.

15.2. The Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors and other persons and

organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material or equipment) proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and other persons and organizations shall be submitted as specified in the Bid Documents.

15.3. The Owner may conduct such investigations as deemed necessary to establish the responsibility,

qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Bid Documents to the Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time.

15.4. Bids will be based upon the estimated quantities shown in the Bid Form. Bids will be compared on

the basis of a total computed price; arrived at by taking the sum of the estimated quantities of each Bid Item, multiplied by the corresponding unit price bid, and any lump sum Bids on the individual items. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. The right to reject any or all Bids or to accept any Bid considered of advantage to the Owner is reserved.

15.5. Unless all Bids are canceled or rejected, the Owner reserves the right granted by Section 2.2-4318 of

the Code of Virginia, as amended, to negotiate with the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder to obtain a Contract Price within the funds budgeted for the construction project. Negotiations with the lowest Bidder may include both modification of the Contract Price and the Scope of Work/Specifications to be performed. The Owner shall initiate such negotiations by Written Notice to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder that its Bid exceeds the available funds and that the Owner wishes to negotiate a lower Contract Price. The Owner and the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder shall agree to the times, places, and manner of negotiations.

15.6. The acceptance of a Bid will be a notice in writing, signed by the Owner, and no other act shall

constitute the acceptance of a Bid. 15.7 The Owner reserves the right to waive minor informalities in the Bid, to reject any/or all Bids, to

award any Bid in whole or in part, and to award the Bid considered to be in the best interest of the Owner.

16. Qualifications of Bidders and Subcontractors. 16.1. The Contractor’s Questionnaire is included in the Bid Documents and shall be submitted upon

request within 72 hours with the signed bid form. This information will assist the Owner in investigations and determination of the Contractor's qualifications to perform the Work.

16.2. To demonstrate their qualification to perform the Work, each Bidder shall be prepared to submit

further written satisfactory evidence that the Bidder has sufficient experience, necessary capital, materials, machinery and skilled workers to complete the Work. If financial statements are required


they shall be of such date as the Owner shall determine and shall be prepared on forms acceptable to the Owner. The Owner may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the Work. The Owner's decision or judgment on these matters shall be final, conclusive and binding.

16.3. The apparent low Bidder shall, within seven consecutive days after the day of the bid opening,

submit to the Owner a list of all Subcontractors who will be performing work on the Agreement. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of experience and qualification for each such Subcontractor, person and organization. If the Owner, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, other person or organization, the Owner may, before giving the Notice of Award, request the apparent low Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid price. If the apparent low Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the contract shall not be awarded to such Bidder, but his declining to make any such substitution will not constitute grounds for sacrificing his Bid Security. For any Subcontractors, other person or organization so listed and to whom Owner does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award, it will be deemed the Owner has no objection.

16.4. By submitting their Bid, Bidders certify that they are not now debarred by the Federal Government or

by the Commonwealth of Virginia or by any other state, or by any town, city, or county, from submitting Bids on contracts for construction covered by this solicitation, nor are they an agent of any person or entity that is now so debarred.

16.5. If the Bidder is organized as a stock or nonstock corporation, a limited liability company, a business

trust, or a limited partnership, or is registered as a registered limited liability partnership, the Bidder must be authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth as a domestic or foreign entity if so required by Title 13.1 or Title 50 of the Code of Virginia, or as otherwise required by law. The Bidder shall include the identification number issued by the State Corporation Commission on the Bid form or describe why the Bidder is not required to be so authorized. Any Bidder failing to do so shall not be awarded the Contract unless the Owner issues a waiver of this requirement and administrative policies and procedures are established by the locality. If the Bidder allows its existence to lapse, or its certificate of authority or registration to transact business in the Commonwealth of Virginia to expire, or be revoked or cancelled, such will be deemed as an act of default enabling the Owner to all remedies for default, including but not limited to revocation of this Agreement.

17. Sham or Collusive Bids. 17.1. The Bids of any Bidder or Bidders who engage in collusive bidding shall be rejected. Any Bidder

who submits more than one Bid in such a manner as to make it appear that the Bids submitted are on a competitive basis from different parties shall be considered a collusive Bidder.

17.2. The provisions contained in Sections 2.2-4367 through 2.2-4377, Code of Virginia, as amended, and

Section(s) of the Code of the City/County of Virginia, as amended, shall be applicable to all contracts solicited or entered into by Owner. By submitting their Bids, all Bidders certify that their Bids are made without collusion or fraud, and that they have not offered or received any kickbacks or inducements from any other Bidder, Supplier, manufacturer or subcontractor in connection with their Bid, and they have not conferred with any public employee having official responsibility for this procurement transaction, any payment, loan, subscription,


advance, deposit of money, services or anything of more than nominal value, present or promised, unless consideration of substantially equal or greater value was exchanged.

18. Time of Essence 18.1 As the provisions hereof relating to the time for performance and completion of the Work are for the

purpose of enabling the Owner to proceed with the construction of public improvements in accordance with pre-planned programs, such provisions are of the essence.


III. BID FORM Bids to be opened: Time 3:00 P.M., Wednesday, September 23, 2020 Work to be Completed in: Substantial Completion: 330 Calendar Days Final Completion: 360 Calendar Days Liquidated Damages: One Thousand Dollars and No Cents ($1000.00)

per calendar day after time for Substantial Completion has expired. Five Hundred Dollars and No Cents ($500.00) per calendar day after time for Final Completion has expired.

Performance Bond: 100% Payment Bond: 100% Bid Security: 5% Contractor and owner recognize that time is of the essence of this agreement and that the owner will suffer financial loss if the work is not completed within the times specified, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the contract documents. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by the owner if the work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, owner and contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty), contractor shall pay owner One Thousand Dollars and No Cents ($1000.00) for each calendar day that expires after the time specified for substantial completion until the work is substantially complete. After substantial completion, if contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining work within the contract time or any proper extension thereof granted by owner, contractor shall pay owner Five Hundred Dollars and No Cents ($500.00) for each calendar day that expires after the time specified for final completion and readiness for final payment until the work is completed and ready for final payment. If substantial completion is not achieved by the time of final completion then liquidated damages for both substantial and final completion shall run concurrently until substantial completion is achieved. To: Director of Utilities City of Norfolk, Virginia A. BID PRICE OPTION A - LUMP SUM BID Not Used OPTION B - COMBINATION LUMP SUM AND UNIT PRICE BID In compliance with the Bid Documents, titled Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement, and all Addenda issued to date all of which are part of this Bid, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all items including materials, supervision, labor, and equipment in strict accordance with, said Contract Documents, for the sum of:


(1) LUMP SUM BID 1. Storm Water Improvements LUMP SUM BID: ($_____________) (2) UNIT PRICE BID ITEM NO. ITEM UNIT QUANTITY UNIT PRICE TOTAL PRICE

2 Temporary Power MO 6 3 5kV Switchgear Modifications EA 15

4 Transformer 3A/3B Primary Feeders LF 1500

5 Fiberglass Cable Tray Additional Supports EA 7

6 Fiberglass Cable Tray Replacement Covers LF 420

7 5kV Transformers EA 2 8 480V Feeders (Cable Bus) LF 140

9 480V Switchboard 3A/3B Modifications EA 2

10. CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION WIRING 10A GRC Conduit 3/4" LF 550 10B GRC Conduit 1" LF 200 10C GRC Conduit Fittings 3/4" EA 144 10D GRC Conduit Fittings 1" EA 48 10E Conduit Hangers EA 133 10F THHN-THWN Stranded Copper

Cable LF 3600

10G Stakon Lugs, #12 - #10 EA 24 10H Wire Terminations, #16 - #14 EA 114 10I Control Panel, CP-4160 EA 1 10J Control Panel, CP-480 EA 1 10K Transformer Protection Relays,

SEL-787 EA 2

10L Protection Relay Enclosures, with Test Switches

EA 2

10M UTP Copper Cable, 4-pair CAT 5E

LF 2000

10N UTP Cable Connector, RJ45 CAT 5E

EA 40

10O UTP Patch Cord, RJ45/RJ45 CAT 5E, 5ft

EA 20

10P Data Outlet, Outlet Box EA 20 11. FIBER OPTIC CABLES

11A PVC #80 Conduit & Fittings, 1-1/2" in Trench

LF 20

11B GRS Conduit & Fittings, 1-1/2” LF 250


ITEM NO. ITEM UNIT QUANTITY UNIT PRICE TOTAL PRICE

11C Fiber Optic Cable, Outside Plant Multi-Mode, 12-strand

LF 600

11D Innerduct, 1" Diameter, UV Resistant

LF 600

11E Fiber Optic Cable, Indoor Multi-Mode, 12-strand

LF 400

11F Fiber Optic Connectors, Jumpers, Etc.

EA 70

TOTAL OF ALL UNIT PRICES ($ )

Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on actual quantities provided, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. The prices quoted shall include without exception all materials, supervision, labor, equipment, appliances, clean-up, applicable sales, use and other taxes, insurance, building permit or fees, and the Contractor's labor, overhead, profit, mobilization and other mark-ups, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents. Include allowance for waste where appropriate. The unit prices shall be maintained throughout the Contract Time. Unit prices shall be used in determining additions or deductions from the total Contract Price in the event of changes due to unforeseen conditions in the Work. TOTAL BASE BID (LUMP SUM PLUS TOTAL UNIT PRICE BID): ($____________________) ______________________________________________________ In Words OPTION C - UNIT PRICE BID Not Used


MBE/WBE Compliance Checklist Name of Recipient/Prime Contractor: ___________________________________________________ Project Name: ______________________________________Project Number: _________________ Check Procurement Type: (Check applicable boxes)

Service – Engineering Services – Legal Construction Contractor (Prime) Construction Contractor (Subcontract) Supplies Equipment

In order to be in compliance with the federal procurement requirements, funding recipients and contractors are obligated to make reasonable efforts, otherwise known as “good faith efforts,” to solicit Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (MBE) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (WBE) in their procurement methods. The goal of this good faith effort is to increase contracting opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. It is not sufficient to just have a competitive bidding process that is open to MBE/WBE firms. Funding recipients and contractors must seek out qualified MBE/WBE firms. Recipients are required to include provisions in their bid documents and take affirmative steps to solicit MBE/WBE firm participation in procuring services, supplies, equipment and in awarding construction contract. The successful prime contractor must also seek MBE/WBE firm participation in obtaining subcontracts for construction work, equipment, services and supplies prior to bid submittal. Demonstration of good faith efforts must be documented. This checklist is designed to facilitate and document compliance with “good faith efforts.” Failure to comply with MBE/WBE procurement requirements will result in the recipient incurring costs that are ineligible for reimbursement from our program. Please check boxes where activities are completed and provide documentation; explain unchecked boxes in comments below and use additional pages if necessary:

Certified Affidavit of Publication of Newspaper advertisement soliciting MBE/WBE participation. (Suggested advertisement language: Minority Owned Businesses (MBEs) and Women Owned Businesses (WBEs) are encouraged to respond.)

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________

Your advertisements from publications that target MBE/WBE firms. (Only consider when it is believed that this advertisement may increase MBE/WBE participation.)

___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Obtain current lists of MBE/WBE firms. (Documentation must be on file and available for examination. A possible resources is: http://dmbe.virginia.gov/)

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________


List sources used to identify MBE/WBE firms:

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

Identify potential MBE/WBE firms for direct solicitation (you may attach your list).

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

Directly solicit MBE/WBE firms. Provide list of MBE/WBE firms solicited and solicitation letters sent to all MBE/WBE firms. (Solicit those MBE/WBE firms that you would reasonably expect to respond and submit a quote.)

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

Description of contacts (i.e. telephone calls) and dates of contacts with MBE/WBE firms.

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

Description how you identified portions of work that could be divided or subcontracted and performed by qualified MBE/WBE firms. (Reduced contract size/quantities when economically feasible to permit participation of MBE/WBE firms.)

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

Copies of MBE/WBE firm certification information for all proposed prime and subcontractor MBE/WBE firms.

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Successful bidders/offerors should take reasonable affirmative steps to subcontract with MBE and WBE firms whenever additional subcontracting opportunities arise during the performance of the contract. Comments: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________ _____________________ Recipient/Contractor’s Signature Date


B. ADDENDA

The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:

Addendum No. Dated: . Addendum No. Dated: . Addendum No. Dated: .

C. We agree to enter into an Agreement with the City of Norfolk, Virginia within ten (10) days of the

award of same to us for the price named in our Bid.

D. It is expressly agreed by us that the City of Norfolk, Virginia shall have the right to reject any and all Bids and to waive any minor non-substantive errors in the Bid and accept the Bid in the (Locality’s ) best interests.

E. In default of the performance on our part of the conditions of Bid, our failure to enter into an

Agreement with the City of Norfolk, Virginia, within the time above set, we herewith furnish a Bid Security in the amount of $ , which shall be absolutely forfeited to the City of Norfolk, Virginia, but otherwise the said Bid Security shall be returned.

F. We agree to begin Work at any time we may be notified by the Owner, and complete all of the Work

embraced in the Agreement within _______ Days; G. [This applies to projects over $200,000 unless otherwise indicated]. I/We elect to utilize the Escrow

Account Procedure described in the provision of this bid if determined to be the successful low Bidder. ___________ (write "Yes" or "No").

___________ Bid total does not qualify for escrow account option H. The undersigned has read all sections under "Instructions to Bidders." I. By signing the attached, the bidder certifies that a copy of the City of Norfolk Department of

Utilities Standard Specifications is in the Bidder’s possession, and that all work called for in the contract documents will be done in accordance with these specifications as prioritized in Section II.19.1.

J. By signing, each signatory acknowledges any strike-throughs contained herein, unless hand-written.


K. CONTRACTOR'S REGISTRATION, SCC NUMBER AND SIGNATURE Registered Virginia Contractor Class and No.____________________________ Registration Expires ___________________________________________ State Corporation Commission (SCC) Number

(NOTE: FAILURE TO INCLUDE CONTRACTOR’S REGISTRATION and SCC NUMBER ARE GROUNDS

FOR REJECTION OF THE BID.) Contractor________________________________ Signed_______________________ Date_____________________________________ Title_________________________ NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write state of incorporation under signature. MAILING ADDRESS AND TELEPHONE/E-Mail/FAX NUMBER OF BIDDER: ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ( ) [Telephone] E-mail________________________; FAX_______________________

IF CORPORATION, PROVIDE NAME AND MAILING ADDRESS AS REQUIRED BELOW. PRESIDENT SECRETARY TREASURER IF PARTNERSHIP, PROPRIETORSHIP, LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY OR OTHER FIRM, PROVIDE NAME AND MAILING ADDRESS OF EACH PARTNER, PROPRIETOR, OR MEMBER OF FIRM.


L. NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT City of Norfolk, Virginia project: Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement Bid Date: September 23, 2020 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA City of Norfolk This day personally appeared before the undersigned, a Notary Public in and for the City/County and State aforesaid, _____________________________________ who having been first duly sworn according to law, did depose and aver as follows:

(a) That he/she is___________________________________________________________

(Owner, Partner, President, etc.) of _______________________________________________________________

(insert name of Bidder) (b) That he/she is personally familiar with the Bid of _________________________________ (Insert Company Name) submitted in connection with the above captioned Owner’s project. (c) That said Bid was formulated and submitted in good faith as the true bid of said Bidder.

1. In preparation and submission of this Bid, the Bidder did not either directly or indirectly, enter into any combination or agreement with any person, firm or corporation or enter into any agreement, participate in any collusion, or otherwise take any action in the restraint of free, competitive bidding in violation of the Sherman act (15 U.S.C. Section 1) or sections 59.1-9.1 through 59.1-9.17 or sections 59.1-68.6 through 59.1-68.8 of the Code of Virginia.

2. The undersigned Bidder hereby certifies that neither this Bid nor any claim resulting

therefrom, is the result of, or affected by, any act of collusion with, or any act of another person or persons, firm or corporation engaged in the same line of business or commerce; and that no person acting for or employed by the Owner has any personal interest in this Bid.

3. The undersigned hereby further agrees that upon request of the Owner, the records

and books pertaining to this Bid will be voluntarily supplied, furnished, and released to the Owner.

4. The undersigned hereby further certifies that the Bidder has not knowingly falsified,

concealed, misled, or covered up by any trick, scheme, or device a material fact in connection with this bid. The undersigned also certifies that the Bidder has not made any false, fictitious or fraudulent statements or representations or made or used any


false writing or documents knowing the same to contain any false, fictitious or fraudulent statement or entry in connection with this Bid.

5. The undersigned further agrees that the Bidder will comply with section 2.2-4374 of the Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended, and has not bought or purchased any equipment from any person employed by the Owner as an independent contractor to furnish architectural or engineering services for this Project, nor from any partnership, association or corporation in which such architect or engineer has a pecuniary interest.

6. The undersigned further agrees to inform and require compliance by the following

persons and entities with this anti-collusion statement as a condition of payment: all subcontractors, consultants, subconsultants, or any person, corporation, or legal entities that provide or furnish labor, material, equipment, or work related to this project.

7. All Covenants and Agreements made by the Contractor are made by it on behalf of

the Contractor and its successors, personal representatives and assigns, the same as if they had been specifically named in each instance.

And further this deponent saith not.

_____________________________ Name of Company/Bidder _____________________________ Title (Owner, Partner, President)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20___ My commission expires: , 20 ______________________________________ Notary Public


IV. BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned, ___________________________ as Principal, and ___________________________________________________________________as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto ______________________ as OWNER in the penal sum of _____________ _________________________________________________________________________(Five Percent) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors and assigns. Signed, this ______day of ___________, 20__. The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the OWNER a certain BID, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into an Agreement in writing, for the _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said BID shall be rejected, or (b) If said BID shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver an Agreement in the

Form of Agreement attachment hereto (properly completed in accordance with said BID) and shall furnish a BOND for faithful performance of said Agreement, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the OWNER may accept such BID; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year set forth above.

______________________ Principal ______________________ Surety By: ________________________ Attorney-in-Fact IMPORTANT - Surety companies executing BONDS shall appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth of Virginia.


V. QUESTIONNAIRE If requested by the Owner, the The following questions shall be answered in full by the Bidder, and returned to the Owner within 72 hours. and submitted with the signed bid form. 1. Name of Company: __________________________________________________________ Trade Name (if different from Company Name): ___________________________________ Principal Office Address: _____________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ Telephone No(s).: _________________________________________________________ Fax No(s).:_________________________________________________________________ a. If a Corporation, answer the following: When Incorporated: ____________________________________________________ In What State: ________________________________________________________ Names and Addresses of Directors: ________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Names and Addresses of Shareholders: _____________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ b. If an Unincorporated Organization, answer the following: Date of Organization: __________________________________________________ Names and Addresses of Owners or Members: ______________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ Type and State of Organization: __________________________________________ c. If a Partnership, state whether Partnership is General or Limited:_________________ Names and Addresses of Owners or Partners: _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________


2. a. How many years has this Bidder been in business as a Contractor under its present business name?____________________________________________________

b. What are prior names of this Bidder, if any? __________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. How many years’ experience in this type of construction work has this Bidder had: 1) As a Contractor _______________ 2) As a Subcontractor _____________ 4. Provide a list of uncompleted Contracts at present held by this Bidder (attach supplemental sheet if

necessary): Type of Percentage Contract Work Amount Completed ________________________ _______________________ ___________ _____________ _______________________ _______________________ ___________ _____________ _______________________ _______________________ ___________ _____________ _______________________ _______________________ ___________ _____________ _______________________ _______________________ ___________ _____________ _______________________ _______________________ ___________ _____________ 5. List the Bidder's crew foremen and supervisors proposed for this Project and their years of related

experience: Years of Dates of Employment Name Experience with Bidder ______________________ _______________________ _____________________ ______________________ _______________________ _____________________ ______________________ _______________________ _____________________ 6. What construction equipment does this Bidder own that is available for the proposed work (attach

supplemental sheet if necessary)? ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________


7. Does this Bidder plan to subcontract any part of this work? If so, list name, address, years experience, and type and amount of work to be performed by each subcontractor:

___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 8. Provide a list of projects similar in character and scope to the Work specified under this Contract

which have been successfully completed by this Bidder and proposed subcontractors or employees with principal roles in this contract during the past three five years (attach supplemental sheet if necessary).

(The term "completed" means accepted and final payment received from the Owner or authorized representative).

Contact Owner's Person Location & Name/ (Name and Date Contract Type of Work Address Telephone) Completed Price ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________


9. Have you ever performed work for a municipal corporation, local governing body, or similar agency previously? (If all such bodies are listed under 8, this question need not be completed).

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ 10. a. Has this Bidder ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? ___________ If yes, give

name of Owner, name of Bonding Company and circumstances: _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

b. Is this Bidder debarred by the Federal Government or by the Commonwealth of Virginia or by any other state, or by any town, city, or county?

Yes _________ No ___________ If yes, please provide details: _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ c. Has this Bidder ever had any judgements entered against it for the breach of contract for

construction? _______ If yes, please provide details:

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

d. Give a summary of your financial statement. (List assets and liabilities, use an insert sheet, if necessary).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

11. State approximate largest dollar volume of work performed by this Bidder in one year: ___________________________________________________________________________ 12. Give two (2) Banking Institution References: a. Name: _______________________________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________________________ Credit Available: ______________________________________________________


b. Name: _______________________________________________________________ Address: _____________________________________________________________ Credit Available: ______________________________________________________ 13. List three material suppliers and amount of credit available: ___________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________________________ _________________________________ 14. List insurance coverage and amount (or attach certificate of insurance): ___________________________________ _________________________________ Liability-Property ___________________________________ _________________________________ Liability-Personal Injury ___________________________________ _________________________________ Vehicle and Equipment ___________________________________ _________________________________ Other - Identify 15. Bonding reference - List surety company and highest coverage: ___________________________________________________________________________ 16. Have you or your authorized representative, personally inspected the location of the proposed Work,

and do you have a clear understanding of the requirements of the Bid Documents?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

The undersigned hereby authorizes and consents to any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the Owner in verification of this statement of contractor's qualifications. Also, if it is the apparent low Bidder, the undersigned hereby agrees to furnish the Owner upon request, a complete and current financial statement:

Contractor:____________________________________________________________________ By:__________________________________________________________________________ Title: ______________________ Date: __________________


VI. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT

This is to certify that this person/firm/corporation is not now debarred by the Federal Government or

by the Commonwealth of Virginia or by any other state, or by any town, city, or county, from

submitting Bids on contracts for construction covered by this solicitation, nor are they an agent of

any person or entity that is now so debarred.

_________________________________ Name of Official _________________________________ Title _________________________________ Firm or Corporation _________________________________ Date

End of Section


SECTION 103

AWARD AND EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT I. AWARD AND EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT 1. Notice of Award. 1.1. A Notice of Award will be issued by the Owner, or the Bids rejected as soon as reasonably possible,

but no later than 90 Days after the date of the opening of Bids. The Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date, or extend the acceptance period an additional 90 days with the consent of the apparent low bidder and surety.

1.2. The Owner reserves the right to waive any minor informalities, to reject any and all Bids in whole or

in part, and may advertise for new Bids if, in its judgment, the best interests of the Owner will be served.

1.3. At the time of the issuance of the Notice of Award, the Owner shall publicly post an announcement

of the award on/at http://norfolk.gov/Bids.aspx 2. Signing of Agreement. 2.1. When the Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by 4

original copies of the Agreement, with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within 10 Days thereafter the Contractor shall sign and deliver all the original copies of the Agreement and attached documents to the Owner with the required Bid Security and Certificate of Insurance. Within 30 Days thereafter the Owner shall deliver one fully signed copy to the Contractor.

2.2. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute the Agreement within the time specified, the amount of Bid

Security shall be paid to the Owner. In such case the Owner, at its discretion, may award the Work to the second Successful Bidder, or reject all Bids.

3. Performance and Payment Bonds. 3.1. The Successful Bidder shall execute and provide to the Owner, within 10 Days following Notice of

Award, Performance and Payment Bonds with surety in an amount equal to 100% of the accepted Bid. The sureties of all Bonds shall be of such surety company or companies as are approved by the Owner and are authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth of Virginia. If the execution is by an attorney-in-fact, a power of attorney evidencing the authority of such attorney shall be attached to the Bond. Such power of attorney shall bear the same date as the Bond to which it is attached.

3.2. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise

by Laws and Regulations and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U. S. Treasury Department.

3.3. Performance and Payment Bonds shall remain in full force during the warranty period defined in

Section 107, VII.


4. Contractor’s Insurance. 4.1. The Contractor shall provide and keep in full force and affect during the performance of the Work

the kinds and amounts of insurance specified in Section 4.3 below and shall comply with all other provisions of this Section. Such insurance shall be provided and kept in full force by insurance companies authorized to do business in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and regulated by the Virginia Bureau of Insurance. All premiums and other costs of such insurance shall be paid by the Contractor. It will be assumed that the consideration paid or to be paid to the Contractor for the performance of the Work includes the premiums and other such costs of such insurance, and the Owner shall not be responsible therefore. Each insurance policy and certificate of insurance shall be signed by duly authorized representatives of such insurance companies in the State and shall be countersigned by duly authorized agents of such companies. The Contractor shall not be required to furnish the Owner with copies of the insurance contracts required by this Section unless requested from time to time by the Owner; but the Contractor shall provide on forms furnished by the Insurance Company or Owner a Certificate of Insurance issued by such Insurance Companies, in which the company shall irrevocably warrant that the insurance is provided to enable the Contractor to comply with and provide the required insurance; (provided, however, that in no event shall the insurance contract be expanded to afford coverage which is greater than the maximum coverage approved for writing in the Commonwealth of Virginia) and that it will not be canceled unless at least thirty days' prior written Notice to the effect is given to the Owner, anything in such insurance contract to the contrary notwithstanding, and that the insurance contract has been endorsed accordingly.

4.2. The Contractor shall provide the certificate of insurance to the Owner within 10 Days following the

Notice of Award. 4.3. Insurance Requirements:

A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the life of this Agreement such Comprehensive General Liability Insurance including product and completed operations liability insurance as will provide protection from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether such performance is by Contractor, or by Subcontractor, by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and shall otherwise bear responsibility therefore. The Contractor further agrees that all limits will be made available which are excess of the amounts below:

(1) Workers Compensation and Employers Liability

Coverage A - Statutory Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000

A broad form of all states endorsement shall be attached.

(2) Commercial Auto Liability Including Hired and Non-Owned Car Liability

Coverage

Limit of Liability - $1,000,000 Per Occurrence


The Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the life of this Agreement such commercial automobile liability insurance including employer’s non-ownership liability and hired car liability insurance to protect him and any Subcontractors performing Work covered by this Agreement from claims for damages, whether such operations be by him or any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them.

(3) Commercial General Liability Including Contractual and Completed

Operations.

Limit of Liability - $1,000,000 Per Occurrence

(4) Excess Liability Including Employers Liability, Commercial Auto Liability and Commercial General Liability.

Limit of Liability - $1,000,000 Per Occurrence $3,000,000 Aggregate

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing the Work site and shall assume all risk for vandalism or other damage that may occur, to project components, during construction.

C. The Owner shall be named as an additional insured on the Commercial General Liability per

ISO 2010 on a primary basis. The Contractor shall obtain a waiver of subrogation from its insurers on Worker’s Compensation and All Risk Insurance policies. This requirement may be satisfied by obtaining appropriate endorsements to any master or blanket policy of insurance maintained. Owner’s Commercial General Liability shall not contribute in any loss payment insured under the Contractor’s Commercial General Liability policy

D. Contingent liability and property damage insurance to protect the Owner (or his employees

and agents, including the Engineer) shall be provided by endorsements to general liability or property damage policies. All aforesaid policies shall be endorsed to provide that the insurance company shall notify the Owner if policies are to be terminated or altered during the life of the contract.

E. The General Liability insurance shall carry a contractual liability endorsement covering the

hold harmless agreements contained in the Owner standard contract and the certificates filed with the Owner shall show that the contractual liability coverage has been obtained.

F. Insurance coverage for personal injury and property damage, including insurance on vehicles

and equipment, shall be in the same company. G. The Contractor shall also be required to submit to the Owner evidence of insurance coverage

or self-insurance for all claims arising under the Worker’s Compensation Laws of the State of Virginia.

H. The Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, and the Owner’s officers,

agents, employees, and other representatives, against any liability, loss or expense (including the loss of use of the Project), due to any act or omission of Contractor or any of their Subcontractors or of any of their respective employees in connection with the Work of the Contractor hereunder or due to any omissions or supervisory acts of the Owner in connection with the Work performed by the Contractor.


II. NOTICE OF AWARD TO: _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ PROJECT TITLE: Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement The Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you for the above described Work in response to its Invitation for Bids dated , 2020, and Instructions to Bidders. You are hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for the Work in the amount of $______________. You are required by the terms of the Bid Documents to fully execute and return all 4 copies of the Agreement along with the required Contractor’s Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and Certificates of Insurance, and Procurement Information Form within 10 Days from the date of this Notice of Award. The Certificate of Insurance must name the City of Norfolk as beneficiary (additional insured). It should also be accompanied by a Government Cancellation Clause/Statement guaranteeing a 30-day written cancellation notice. The certificate should also show that you have obtained:

1. Workmen’s Compensation Insurance (including occupational diseases) covering the employees of the contractor and any of his subcontractors.

2. Public Liability Insurance naming the City of Norfolk as additional insured.

3. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with contractual liability coverage of at least

$500,000/$1,000,000 for bodily injury and $250,000/$500,000 for property damage.

4. Automobile Liability Insurance including bodily injury and property damage for owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles with minimum limits per occurrence of $500,000/$1,000,000 for bodily injury and $250,000/$500,000 for property damage.

Because these are requirements for all construction projects in the City of Norfolk, work on the project cannot begin until they are fulfilled. As soon as the Agreement, bond forms, and certificate of insurance are submitted, the City will begin processing the necessary papers. You may begin work on the project after the Agreement and Notice to Proceed are issued to you. The Hazards Communication Policy adopted by the Department of Utilities will be in effect during all work performed on and around City-owned facilities and properties. If you do not have a copy of this policy, please contact this office at 664-6701. We will be glad to send a copy to you. If you fail to execute the Agreement and to furnish said Bonds and Certificate of Insurance within 10 Days from the date of this Notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner’s acceptance of your Bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Security. The Owner will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law.


You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to the Owner. The notice of award shall not be construed as notice to proceed. Dated this day of , 20 . OWNER CONTRACTOR ________________________________ _____________________________ Owner Contractor By: ________________________________ By:______________________________ Name Name Title:_______________________________ Title:_____________________________

THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


III. AGREEMENT This AGREEMENT, dated this ______ day of _________, 2020, by and between The City of Norfolk, Virginia, acting by and through the City Manager, hereinafter called the Owner; and (Insert the Contractor’s Company Name), (a corporation or an unincorporated organization organized and existing under the laws of the State of Virginia or, an individual trading under the above name) hereinafter called the Contractor. 0 WITNESSETH: The Owner and Contractor, for the consideration stated herein, agree as follows: A. Scope of Work

The Contractor shall perform all required Work and shall provide and furnish all labor, materials, necessary tools, expendable equipment and utility and transportation service and all else required to complete the construction of the Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement project all in strict accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, including any and all Addenda, and in strict compliance with the Contract Documents, the terms of which are incorporated herein by reference. It is understood and agreed that said labor, materials, tools, equipment and service shall be furnished and said Work performed and completed under the direction and supervision of the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Owner or its authorized representative.

B. Engineer

This Project has been designed by Gannett Fleming, Inc., who is hereinafter called the Engineer. However, the Norfolk Department of Utilities will act as the Owner’s Representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to the Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. In the event the Owner should not require the services of the Engineer for any or all parts of the project, the power, duties, and responsibilities conferred hereto to the Engineer shall be construed to be those of the Owner or its authorized representative.

C. Guarantee

All materials and equipment, furnished by the Contractor, and all construction involved in this Agreement are hereby guaranteed by the Contractor to be free from defects owing to faulty materials or workmanship for a period of one year after date of Substantial Completion of the Work. All Work that proves defective, by reason of faulty material or workmanship within said period of one year, shall be replaced by the Contractor free of cost to the Owner. These guarantees shall not operate as a waiver of any of the Owner’s rights and remedies for default under or breach of the Agreement which rights and remedies may be exercised at any time within the period of any applicable statute of limitations.


D. The Owner shall pay the Contractor as just compensation for the satisfactory performance of the Work, subject to any additions or deductions as provided in the contractor’s bid, Section 102, Clause III Bid Form submitted September 23, 2020.

The Contract Price is _______________________________________________($__________) based upon unit and/or lump sum prices extended as submitted in the contractor’s bid, Section 102, Clause III Bid Form dated September 23, 2020.

E. Payments

The Owner will pay the Contract Price to the Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in Section 109 of the Hampton Roads Planning District Commission Regional Construction Standards, Fifth Edition, as referenced in Section I. below and as specifically revised for this Project.

F. Time

The undersigned Contractor agrees to commence Work within 10 Days after the date of Notice to Proceed and further agrees to Substantially Complete all Work under this Agreement within 330 Calendar Days from the date of the Notice to Proceed and to reach Final Completion of all Work under this Agreement within 360 Calendar Days from the date of the Notice to Proceed.

G. Applicable Law/Compliance

(1) Applicable Law

This Agreement shall be deemed to be a Virginia contract and shall be governed as to all matters of validity, interpretations, obligations, performance, or otherwise, exclusively by the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia, and all questions arising with respect thereto shall be determined in accordance with such laws. Regardless of where actually delivered and accepted, this Agreement shall be deemed to have been delivered and accepted by the parties in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

(2) Compliance with all Laws

Contractor shall comply with all federal, state and local statutes, ordinances, and regulations, now in effect or hereafter adopted, in the performance of Work set forth herein. Contractor represents that it possesses all necessary licenses and permits required to conduct its business and will acquire any additional license and permits necessary for performance of this Agreement prior to the initiation of Work. [If the Contractor is a corporation] Contractor further expressly represents that it is a corporation in good standing in the Commonwealth of Virginia and will remain in good standing throughout the term of the contract. Contractor shall at all times observe all health and safety measures and precautions necessary for the sanitary and safe performance of the contract Work.

(3) Venue

Any and all suits for any claims or for any breach or dispute arising out of these Contract Documents shall be maintained in the appropriate court of competent jurisdiction in the City of Norfolk.


(4) Environmental Considerations

Any cost or expense associated with environmentally related violations of the law, the creation or maintenance of a nuisance, or releases of hazardous substance, including but not limited to, the cost of any clean up activities, removals, remediation, responses, damages, fines, administrative or civil penalties or charges imposed on the Owner, whether because of actions or suits by any governmental or regulatory agency or by any private party, as a result of the release of any hazardous substances, or any noncompliance with or failure to meet any federal, state or local standards, requirements, laws, statutes, regulations or the law of nuisance by the Contractor (or its agents, officers, employees, subcontractors, consultants, subconsultants, or any other persons, corporations, or legal entities employed, utilized, or retained by the Contractor) in the performance of this Agreement or related activities, shall be paid by the Contractor.

(5) Non-Discrimination/Drug-Free Workplace Provisions

(a) Employment discrimination by Contractor shall be prohibited. During the performance of this Agreement, Contractor agrees as follows:

(i) Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or any other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification/consideration reasonably necessary to the normal operation of Contractor. Contractor will conform to the provisions of the Federal Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, as well as the Virginia Fair Employment Act of 1975, as amended, where applicable, the Virginians With Disabilities Act, the Americans With Disabilities Act, and the Code of Virginia § 2.2-4311. If the award is made to a faith-based organization, the organization shall not discriminate against any recipient of goods, services, or disbursements made pursuant to the Agreement on the basis of the recipient’s religion, religious belief, refusal to participate in a religious practice, or on the basis of race, age, color, gender or national origin and shall be subject to the same rules as other organizations that contract with public bodies to account for the use of the funds provided; however, if the faith-based organization segregates public funds into separate accounts, only the accounts and programs funded with public funds shall be subject to audit by the public body. Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

(ii) Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or

on behalf of the Contractor, will state that Contractor is an equal opportunity employer.

(iii) Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal

law, rule or regulations shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section.


(iv) Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing subsections (i) and (ii), and (iii) in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

(b) During the performance of this Agreement, Contractor agrees as follows:

(i) Contractor will provide a drug-free workplace for Contractor’s employees. (ii) Contractor will post in conspicuous places, available to employees and

applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in Contractor’s workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.

(iii) Contractor will state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees

placed by or on behalf of Contractor that Contractor maintains a drug-free workplace.

(iv) Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing subsections (i), (ii)

and (iii) in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

(v) For the purposes of this section, “Drug-free workplace” means a site for the

performance of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a Contractor, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the contract.”

(6) Compliance With Federal Immigration Law

At all times during which any term of this Agreement is in effect, the Contractor does not and shall not knowingly employ any unauthorized alien. For purposes of this section, an “unauthorized alien” shall mean any alien who is neither lawfully admitted for permanent residence in the United Sates nor authorized to be employed by either Title 8, section 1324a of the United States Code or the U.S. Attorney General.

(7) Compliance With State Law – Authorization To Transact Business In The Commonwealth

Contractor hereby represents that it is organized as a stock or nonstock corporation, limited liability company, business trust, or limited partnership or registered as a registered limited liability partnership and is authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth as a domestic or foreign business entity if so required by Title 13.1 or Title 50 or as otherwise required by law.

H. Liquidated Damages The damage and loss to the Owner resulting from failure of the Contractor to complete the Work

within the time specified in this Agreement, plus any extension of time granted, shall be stipulated in


Section 108.X, and Section 102.III, Bid Form. Damage monies may be withheld on partial and final payment to the Contractor. (See Section 102.III Bid Form and Section 108.X for explanation and specified dollar amounts.) Liquidated damages as stipulated in the Bid Form, in the amount of $1,000.00 per Calendar Day for failure to meet the substantial completion date and $500.00 per Calendar Day for failure to meet the final completion date will be assessed by the Owner for failure of the Contractor to complete the Work on or before the Date of Substantial and Final Completion stated above or as may be modified by duly executed Change Orders. If Substantial Completion has not been achieved by the scheduled Final Completion date, the liquidated damages for Substantial Completion will run until Substantial Completion is achieved.

I. Component Parts of the Contract

This Agreement includes all completed components of the Bid and Contract Documents as defined in Section 101 of the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards (Latest Edition indicated in the Invitation For Bids), as revised for this Project all of which are incorporated herein by reference.

J. Binding

This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

K. Changes to the Agreement

No provision of this Agreement shall be changed, amended, modified, waived, or discharged except as agreed to in writing by the Owner and the Contractor.

L. Emergency Services

Under emergency conditions the City reserves the right to utilize the Contractor for related services, as deemed appropriate to help resolve the emergency. During the contract period, if an emergency situation (natural or man-made) occurs, the Contractor agrees to dedicate the personnel allocated to this project to assist the Owner during the recovery period. The Owner shall direct this work in writing and costs will be paid according to the rates for Additional Services. Hourly rates for these services will be at the rates agreed upon under this agreement.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed as of the day and first above written in 4 (four) counterparts each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original. OWNER CONTRACTOR City of Norfolk _____________________________ Owner Contractor By: ________________________________ By: __________________________ City Manager Title: _________________________ Date: ____________________________ Attest: ________________________ Address: ______________________ Attest: ______________________________ ______________________________ City Clerk ______________________________ ______________________________ APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Contractor’s Registration No.:_________________

(If Contractor is a corporation or an unincorporated organization, attach evidence of authority to sign)

____________________________________ Director of Utilities

[Corporate Seal]

APPROVED AS TO FORM: ____________________________________ Deputy City Attorney I hereby certify that the money required for this contract (agreement, obligation or expenditure) is in the City Treasury to the credit of the fund from which it is to be drawn, and not appropriated for any other purpose. Account No: Amount: Contract No: Vendor Code: ____________________________________ Director of Finance


IV. PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No.________________ Amount: $_______________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that _______________________________________ ________________________________of __________________________________________________ , hereinafter called the Contractor and _________________________ a corporation duly organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of _______________, hereinafter called the Surety, and authorized to transact business within the Commonwealth of Virginia as the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto _____________________________ as Owner, in the sum of _____________________________________________________dollars ($__________), lawful money of the United States of America, for payment of which, well and truly be made to the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents as follows: THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT: WHEREAS, the Contractor has executed and entered into a certain Agreement, hereto attached, with the Owner dated ___________________, 20____, for ___________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ NOW THEREFORE, if the Contractor, and its successors and assigns, shall at all times duly, promptly, and faithfully perform the Work and any alteration in or addition to the obligations of the Contractor arising thereunder, including the matter of infringement, if any, of patents or other proprietary rights, and shall assure all guarantees against defective workmanship and materials, including the guarantee period following final completion by the Contractor and final acceptance by the Owner and comply with all the covenants therein contained in the Specifications, Drawings, and other Contract Documents required to be performed by the Contractor, in the manner and within the times provided in the Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damage which it may suffer by reason or failure to do so, and shall fully reimburse and repay it all outlay and expenses which it may incur in making good any default, and reasonable counsel fees incurred in the prosecution of or defense of any action arising out of or in connection with any such default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the Surety, for value received, for itself and its successors and assigns, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Work to be performed thereunder, or payment thereunder before the time required therein, or waiver of any provision thereof, or assignment, subletting or transfer thereof or any part thereof, shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or any such payment, waiver, assignment, subcontract or transfer. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. Whenever Contractor shall be declared by Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Owner having performed Owner’s obligations thereunder, the Owner shall have the right, at its option, to require the Surety to promptly proceed to remedy the default within 30 days of notice by proceeding or procuring others to


proceed with completing the Agreement with its terms and conditions; and all reserves, deferred payments, and other funds provided by the Agreement to be paid to Contractor shall be paid to Surety at the same times and under the same conditions as by the terms of that Agreement such fund would have been paid to Contractor had the Agreement been performed by Contractor; and Surety shall be entitled to such funds in preference to any assignee of Principal of any adverse claimant. Notwithstanding the above, the Owner shall have the right, with the approval of the Surety which shall not be unreasonably withheld, to take over and assume completion of the Agreement and be promptly paid in cash by the Surety for the cost of such completion less the balance of the Contract price. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, all above parties bounded together have executed this instrument this ____ day of ______________, 20___, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and those presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. CONTRACTOR _________________________________ By:__________________________(Seal) Name:________________________ Title:_________________________ ___________________________ Attest SURETY __________________________________ By:__________________________(Seal) ____________________________ Attest APPROVED AS TO FORM: ____________________, 20____ _______________________________________________________ DEPUTY CITY ATTORNEY NOTE: Date of Bond shall not be prior to the date of the Agreement. If the Contractor is a partnership, all partners shall execute the Bond. IMPORTANT: The Surety named on this Bond shall be one who is licensed to conduct business in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and named in the current list of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies, as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent shall be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act for the Surety at the time of signing of this Bond.


V. PAYMENT BOND Bond No.________________

Amount: $_______________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that ______________________________________ ________________________________________of___________________________________________ _________________hereinafter called the Contractor and _____________________ a corporation duly organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State ___________________, hereinafter called the Surety, and authorized to transact business within the Commonwealth of Virginia as the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto __________________________________ as Owner, in the sum of__________________________ dollars ($__________), lawful money of the United States of America, for payment of which, well and truly be made to the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents as follows: THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT: WHEREAS, the Contractor has executed and entered into a certain Agreement, hereto attached, with the Owner dated ___________________, 20___, for _____________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ NOW THEREFORE, if the Contractor shall promptly make payments to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the Agreement, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, repairs on machinery, equipment, and tools consumed, used or rented in connection with the construction of the Work, and all insurance premiums on the Work, and for all labor performed in the Work, whether by Subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Work to be performed thereunder, shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, all above parties bounded together have executed this instrument this ____ day of ______________, 20___, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and those presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. CONTRACTOR By: (Seal) Name:________________________ Title:_________________________ ____________________________ Attest SURETY __________________________________ By: __________________________(Seal) ____________________________ Attest APPROVED AS TO FORM:____________________, 20_________ _______________________________________________________ DEPUTY CITY ATTORNEY NOTE: Date of Bond shall not be prior to the date of the Agreement. If the Contractor is a partnership, all partners shall execute the Bond. IMPORTANT: The Surety named on this Bond shall be one who is licensed to conduct business in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and named in the current list of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies, as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent shall be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act for the Surety at the time of signing of this Bond.



VI. IRREVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDIT

IRREVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDIT NO. _______

WORDS IN PARENTHESES ARE INSTRUCTIONS. ANY VARIATIONS WILL BE REJECTED.

BANK LETTERHEAD

Marcus D. Jones, City Manager DATE City of Norfolk 810 Union Street 1101 City Hall Building Norfolk, VA 23510 To Whom It May Concern:

We hereby authorize the City Manager, or agent, to draw on us for the account of (Developer’s Name and Address) up to an aggregate amount of U.S. Dollars (Amount) available by your drafts at sight accompanied by certification of Director, Department of Public Works, that the developer failed to complete installation or performance in accordance with a plan known as (Plan Name and Number) or otherwise failed to perform in accordance with an agreement dated ____________ between (Developer’s Name) and the City. This Letter of Credit is irrevocable and unconditional. We hereby further agree that: (a) Drafts drawn under and in compliance with the terms of this Letter of Credit will be duly honored if

presented at our office on or before (This Date Must Be At Least Six Months After Agreement Expiration Date).

(b) Funds available under this Letter of Credit shall be paid by us in such amounts and at such times as

determined by the Director, Department of Public Works, or the City Manager, in their sole discretion, provided that the amount drawn shall not exceed the aggregate amount specified herein. Checks will be made payable to “Treasurer, City of Norfolk” and directed to the attention of the City Manager.

(c) We shall have no right, duty, obligation or responsibility to evaluate the performance or non-

performance of the underlying contract between our customer and the beneficiary of this Letter of Credit.

(d) We hereby agree that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to work to be performed or

to the plans and specifications relating to the same, shall in any way affect our obligations under this Letter of Credit and we hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition, on the understanding that no such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition shall increase the amount of our obligation under this Letter of Credit.

(e) It is a condition of this Letter of Credit that it will be automatically extended for successive six (6)

month periods of time unless thirty (30) days prior to an expiration date we notify the Director,


Department of Public Works, in writing by registered mail, that we elect not to renew this Letter of Credit for such additional period.

(f) Upon receipt by you of such notice of non-renewal or in the event of a default, you may draw

hereunder by means of your drafts on us, at sight accompanied by your written certification that you have not released liability under the aforesaid agreement or undertaking and the proceeds of your draft will be used by you to meet eventual payments under your agreement or until your undertaking is satisfied. You will refund to us the amount paid, less any amounts which may have been paid by you in the meantime under this agreement or undertaking. A default shall be deemed to have occurred on the part of the Developer whenever, in the sole judgment of the City Manger or the Director, Department of Public Works, the Developer is not diligently and satisfactorily completing the improvements for which the Letter of Credit has been given as security or at the date the underlying agreement, or any extension thereof, expires.

(g) If the issuer of this Letter of Credit becomes critically undercapitalized, as defined in the Code of

Federal Regulations, or insolvent, as defined in any applicable federal or state statute or regulation, the City shall be immediately entitled to draw on this Letter of Credit. In such event, you may draw on this Letter of Credit by means of your drafts on us, at sight accompanied by certification of the City Manager or the Director, Department of Public Works, that the issuer of this Letter of Credit has become critically undercapitalized, as defined in the Code of Federal Regulations, or insolvent, as defined in any applicable federal or state statute or regulation. The refund provisions of paragraph (f) above would also apply to a draft under this paragraph.

(h) Except so far as otherwise expressly stated, this Letter of Credit is subject to the Uniform Customs

and Practice for Documentary Credits, International Chamber of Commerce in effect on the date of issuance. The amount of any draft drawn hereunder must be endorsed on the reserve side hereof. All drafts must be marked “Drawn under (Bank’s Name) Letter of Credit (No. and Date as above)”.

(i) Approval of this Letter of Credit by the City shall be deemed acceptance without further notice to the

bank and/or the Developer. ______________________________ (Bank Name) By: ______________________________ (Signature) ______________________________ (Print or type name and title)


ACKNOWLEDGMENT (Notarization) STATE OF _______________________:

COUNTY/CITY OF ________________:

I, ______________________________, a Notary Public in and for the State and County/City

aforesaid, do hereby certify that _______________________________ whose name is signed to the

foregoing, this day personally appeared before me in my State and County/City aforesaid and acknowledged

the same.

Given under my hand this ______ day of ___________________, 20_____.

____________________________________ Notary Public My Commission Expires: _______________ CITY OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA APPROVED AS TO FORM AND CORRECTNESS: _____________________________________ City Attorney’s Office



VII. ESCROW AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT made and entered into this ____________ day of _________________, 20____, by, between and among the City of Norfolk, Virginia (hereinafter “City”), a municipal corporation chartered by the Commonwealth of Virginia: ___________________________________________________________ (hereinafter “Contractor”),

(Name of Bank)

(Address of Bank) a trust company, bank, or savings and loan institution with its principal office located in the Commonwealth of Virginia (hereinafter referred to collectively as “Bank”) and

(Name of Surety)

(Address of Surety) (hereinafter “Surety”) provides: I. The city and the Contractor have entered into a contract with respect to the city of Norfolk Bid No. ___________________________, __________________________________________________________________________

[entitled or described as]

(“the contract”). This Agreement is pursuant to, but in no way amends or modifies the contract. Payments made hereunder or the release of funds from escrow shall not be deemed approval or acceptance of performance by the Contractor. II. In order to assure full and satisfactory performance by the Contractor of its obligations under the contract, the City is required thereby to retain certain amounts otherwise due the Contractor. The Contractor has, with the approval of the City, elected to have these retained amounts held in escrow by the Bank. This agreement sets forth the terms of the escrow. The Bank shall not be deemed a party to, bound by, or required to inquire into the terms of, the contract or any other instrument or agreement between the City and the Contractor.

III. The City shall from time to time pursuant to its contract pay to the Bank amounts retained by it under the contract. Except as to amounts actually withdrawn from escrow by the City, the Contractor shall look solely to the Bank for the payment of funds retained under the contract and paid by the City to the Bank.

The risk of loss by diminution of the principal of any funds invested under the terms of this contact shall be solely upon the Contractor. Funds and securities held by the Bank pursuant to this Escrow Agreement shall not be subject to levy, garnishment, attachment, lien, or other process whatsoever. Contractor agrees not to


assign, pledge, discount, sell or otherwise transfer or dispose of his interest in the escrow account or any part thereof, except to the Surety. IV. Upon receipt of checks or warrants drawn by the City and made payable to it as escrow agent, the Bank shall promptly notify the Contractor, negotiate the same and deposit or invest and reinvest the proceeds in approved securities in accordance with the written instructions of the contractor. In no event shall the Bank invest the escrowed funds in any security not approved. V. The following securities, and none other, are approved securities for all purposes of this Agreement:

(1) United States Treasury bonds, United States Treasury Notes, United States Treasury

Certificates of Indebtedness or United States Treasury Bills, (2) Bonds, notes and other evidences of indebtedness unconditionally guaranteed as to

the payment of principal and interest by the United States, (3) Bonds or notes of the Commonwealth of Virginia, (4) Bonds of any political subdivision of the Commonwealth of the Bank or deposit by

the Contractor, a Standard and Poor’s or Moody’s Investors Service rating of at least “A”, and

(5) Certificates of deposit issued by commercial Banks located within the Commonwealth, including , but not limited to, those insured by the Bank and its affiliates,

(6) Any bonds, notes, or other evidences of indebtedness listed in Sections (1) through (3) may be purchased pursuant to a repurchase agreement with a bank, within or without the Commonwealth of Virginia having a combined capital, surplus and undivided profit of not less than $25,000,000, provided the obligation of the Bank to repurchase is within the time limitations established for investments as set forth herein. The repurchase agreement shall be considered a purchase of such securities even if title, and/or possession of such securities is not transferred to the Escrow Agent, so long as the repurchase obligation of the Bank is collaterized by the securities themselves, and the securities have on the date of the repurchase agreement a fair market value equal to at least 100% of the amount of the repurchase obligation of the Bank, and the securities are held by a third party, and segregated from other securities owned by the Bank.

No security is approved hereunder which matures more than five years after the date of its purchase by the Bank or deposit by the Contractor. VI. The Contractor may from time to time withdraw the whole or any portion of the escrowed funds by depositing with the Bank approved securities in an amount equal to, or in excess of, the amount so withdrawn. Any securities so deposited or withdrawn shall be valued at such time of deposit or withdrawal at the lower or par or market value, the latter as determined by the Bank. Any securities so deposited shall thereupon become a part of the escrowed fund. Upon receipt of a direction signed by the City Manager or Assistant City Manager, the Bank shall pay the principal of the fund, or any specified amount thereof, to the City of Norfolk for the account of the project. Such payment shall be made in cash as soon as is practicable after receipt of the direction.


Upon receipt of a direction signed by the City Manager or Assistant City Manager or Director of Public Works or Director of Utilities, the Bank shall pay and deliver the principal of the fund, or any specified amount thereof, to the Contractor, in cash or in kind, as may be specified by the Contractor. Such payment and delivery shall be made as soon as is practicable after receipt of the direction. VII. For its services hereunder the Bank shall be entitled to a reasonable fee in accordance with its published schedule of fees or as may be agreed upon by the Bank and the Contractor. Such fee and any other costs of administration of the Agreement shall be paid from the income earned upon the escrowed fund and, if such income is not sufficient to pay the same, by the Contractor. VIII. The net income earned and received upon the principal of the escrowed fund shall be paid over to the Contractor in quarterly or more frequent installments. Until so paid or applied to pay the Bank’s fee or any other costs of administration such income shall be deemed a part of the principal of the fund.

IX. The Surety undertakes no obligation hereby but joins in this Agreement for the Sole purpose of acknowledging that its obligations as surety for the Contractor’s performance of the contract are not affected hereby.



WITNESS the following signatures, all as of the day and year first above written.

CITY OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA By: ______________________________________ City Manager or Assistant City Manager

ATTEST: ________________________________ __________________________________________ City Clerk Contractor APPROVED AS TO FORM AND CORRECTNESS: By: ______________________________________ Officer, Partner or Owner _________________________________ Deputy City Attorney (Seal) Name: ____________________________________ Title: _____________________________________ __________________________________________ Bank By: ______________________________________ Signature Name: ____________________________________ Title: _____________________________________ __________________________________________ Surety By: ______________________________________ Signature Name: ____________________________________ Ref: DOT FORM C-8 Title: _____________________________________ REV 1/1/87 MGR/gt 12/21/89 1 If executed by Attorney-in-Fact, fully-executed Power of Attorney is attached. The power is

recorded in Norfolk Circuit Court in Deed Book No. _________, Page ___________.


VIII. NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: ___________________________ DATE: _________________________________

___________________________ PROJECT: Moores Bridges Water Treatment ___________________________ Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement ___________________________ You are hereby notified to commence Work in accordance with the Agreement dated ____________________, 20___, on or before ____________________, 20___, and you are to substantially complete the Work within ___________ Days thereafter and reach Final Completion of the Work within _____ Days thereafter. The date of Final Completion of all Work is therefore ____________________, 20___. Liquidated damages as stipulated in the Bid Form, in the amount of $1000.00 per Calendar Day for failure to meet the substantial completion date and $500.00 per Calendar Day for failure to meet the final completion date will be assessed by the Owner for failure of the Contractor to complete the Work on or before the Date of Substantial and Final Completion stated above or as may be modified by duly executed Change Orders. If Substantial completion has not been achieved by the scheduled Final completion date, the liquidated damages will run concurrently until substantial completion is achieved. OWNER: City of Norfolk BY: __________________________________ TITLE: ________________________________ ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE: Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by: _____________________________ this the ____________ day of __________________, 20 ____ CONTRACTOR:______________________ BY: _______________________________ TITLE: _____________________________

End of Section

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant Transformers and Cable Replacement August 2020 City of Norfolk

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 104

SCOPE OF WORK

I. INTENT OF AGREEMENT 1.1. The intent of the Agreement is to provide for completion of the Work specified therein. 1.2. If, during the performance of the Work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall so report to the Owner in writing at once and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby, except in the case of emergency or public safety, shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from the Owner however, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof.

II. AMENDING AND SUPPLEMENTING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.1. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the

Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by a Change or Field Order pursuant to Section 109 II.

III. EXPLORATIONS AND REPORTS 3.1. Reference is made to the Special Provisions for identification of those reports of explorations and

tests of subsurface conditions at the site that have been utilized by the Owner in preparation of the Contract Documents.

3.2. The Contractor shall visit the site of the proposed Work and make such explorations as the

Contractor determines to be necessary. IV. UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 4.1. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing

Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to the Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others.

4.2. The Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such

information and data. The Contractor shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and data, for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work with the owner’s of such Underground Facilities during construction, for the safety and protection of said facilities, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which will be considered as having been included in the Contract Base Bid.

4.3. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was not shown

or indicated in the Contract Documents and which the Contractor could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, the Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before performing any Work affected thereby, identify and immediately notify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written Notice thereof to that owner and to the Owner. The Owner will promptly review the Underground Facility to determine the extent to which the Contract Documents should be modified to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the


Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During such time the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of any such Underground Facility which is in service or which is to be placed in service. The Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility in service or which is to be placed in service, which directly and unavoidably impacts the installation of the Work, that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which the Contractor could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of.

4.4. If the existence of an Underground Facility described above unavoidably impacts the installation of

the Work, the Contractor shall, to the fullest extent possible, continue the Work on other portions of the site. All delays must be shown by the Contractor to be directly attributable to said unforeseen conditions and limited to the time actually occasioned by such unforeseen conditions, and that the Contractor has prosecuted the other portions of the Work to the fullest extent possible.

4.5 The Contractor shall comply with the Underground Utility Damage Prevention Act, Section 56-

265.14 through 56-26532, Code of Virginia of 1950, as enacted and amended, and shall be responsible for notifying the owners of utilities and requesting the locating and marking of all underground facilities before beginning any excavation.

4.6 The Contractor should be aware that in some instances buried cables, gas lines, sewer lines, and water

lines 2-inches and smaller in diameter may have to be excavated by hand and slightly relocated to facilitate construction of the Work under this Agreement. This shall be considered incidental to the Work, and the Contractor will not be eligible for additional compensation.

4.7 At points where the Contractor’s operations are adjacent to the properties of any utility, including

railroads, and damage to which might result in considerable expense, loss, or inconvenience, Work shall not commence until arrangements necessary for the protection thereof have been completed.

4.8 The Contractor shall cooperate with owners of utility lines so that removal and adjustment operations

may progress in a reasonable manner, duplication of adjustment work may be reduced to a minimum, and services rendered by those parties will not be unnecessarily interrupted.

4.9 If any utility service is interrupted as a result of accidental breakage or of being exposed or

unsupported, the Contractor shall promptly notify the proper authority and shall cooperate with the authority in the restoration of service. If utility service is interrupted, repair work shall be continuous until service is restored. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to utilities that are attributable to his neglect or methods of performing the Work.

V. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 5.1. The Contractor shall promptly, and if possible, before such conditions are disturbed, except in the

event of an emergency, notify the Owner by written Notice of:

A. subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents; or

B. unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, differing materially from those

ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents.


5.2. The Owner shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it is confirmed that such conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or in the time required for, performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment shall be made and the Agreement shall be modified by a Change Order. Any claim of the Contractor for adjustment hereunder shall not be allowed unless the Contractor has given the required written Notice; provided that the Owner may, if the facts so justify, consider and adjust any such claims asserted before the date of final payment.

5.3 All required written Notices shall be submitted to the Owner within 20 Days after occurrence of the

event giving rise to such claim, or within 20 Days after the claimant recognizes the condition, whichever is later.

VI. SITE SECURITY 6.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security and safety of all project facilities including, but

not limited to, all equipment, materials, site structures, and construction thereon. All security measures deemed necessary by the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall be at the Contractor’s expense at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all site security until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner.

VII. CLEAN-UP, DISPOSAL AND RESTORATION 7.1. The Contractor shall maintain the site of the project in an orderly and clean condition and shall at

intervals of no more than three (3) working days and at its expense, remove and legally dispose of accumulations of rubbish or refuse materials, surplus concrete, mortar and excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill from public and private property and rights-of-way. Washings from concrete mixers or mixing boxes shall not be deposited directly or indirectly in the drainage or sewer system or on paved streets. The Contractor shall keep the site, inclusive of vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes through the site, free of dirt and dust by periodic blading, power brooming, watering or other approved means. Road surfaces adjacent to the work area shall be cleaned of soil with mechanical brooms or other approved methods at the end of each working day. Road shoulders and driveways shall be stabilized so as to allow traffic flow (including mail and paper delivery vehicles, school buses and emergency vehicles) by the end of each working day.

7.2. The Contractor shall confine all equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the

operations of workmen to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, or the requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with materials or equipment.

7.3. The Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded with weights that will

endanger the structure, nor shall any part of the work be subjected to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

7.4. Upon completion and before final acceptance of the Work performed under the Agreement, the

Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of all rubbish, surplus or discarded materials, false work, forms, temporary structures, field offices, signs, temporary erosion and siltation control measures, and equipment and machinery, and shall leave the site and ground occupied in connection with the performance of the Work in the conditions existing before the Work was started, to the satisfaction of the Owner.

7.5. All waste materials, including but not limited to excavated materials, demolished pavement, arboreal

(landscaping) waste and other debris, that are not suitable for Project related purposes (e.g., backfill) or are surplus to the needs of the Project, both as determined by the Owner, shall become the


property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of all such material in accordance with his accepted Disposal Plan, as specified below, at no additional cost to the Owner.

A. The Contractor shall submit a Disposal Plan for review and acceptance by the Owner prior to

performing any Work that might generate waste materials. The plan shall include a complete description of the materials that are expected to be encountered and their proposed disposal site(s). The Contractor may change his Disposal Plan only by written notice to the Owner. The acceptance of a plan and/or any related notice to the Owner must be evidenced by a written response from the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall insure that all permits related to his disposal operations have been

obtained, and the Contractor shall comply with all requirements of those permits. The Contractor shall show evidence that all required permits have been obtained for all disposal sites by submitting a copy of all such permits to the Owner as part of the Contractor's Disposal Plan.

End of Section


SECTION 105

CONTROL OF WORK

I. REUSE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing

or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the Owner shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Contract Documents (or copies thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of the Engineer; and, they shall not reuse any of the Contract Documents on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of the Owner and Engineer and specific written verification by the Owner.

II. COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.1. The Owner will furnish to the Contractor up to five (5) copies of the Contract Documents as are

reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.

III. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.1. The Contract Documents will govern the Work set forth therein. 3.2. In cases of conflicts, Special Provisions shall govern over the Regional Construction Standards;

Specifications shall govern over Drawings; figure dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions; and, detailed Drawings shall govern over general Drawings; unless, the interpretation would result in a violation of any law or regulation applicable to the performance of the Work. The order of precedence shall be as follows:

1. Change Orders

2. Field Orders

3. Executed Agreement and Notice To Proceed (NTP)

4. Addenda

5. Special Provisions

6. Consultant generated Project Specific Technical Specifications

7. Consultant generated Drawings

a. Figure dimensions

b. Scaled dimensions

8. Norfolk Department of Utilities, Standard Design Criteria Manual


9. Norfolk Department of Public Works, Norfolk City Design Standards and Right of Way Excavation and Restoration Manual

HRDPC Regional Construction Standards with Norfolk Modifications 3.3. The Contractor shall, upon discovering any error, omission, or discrepancy in the Contract

Documents, immediately notify the Owner. IV. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS 4.1. The Contractor shall compile a complete and comprehensive schedule of all the submittals

anticipated to be made during the progress of the Work. The schedule shall include a list of each type of item for which the Contractor’s drawings, Shop Drawings, material affidavits, material samples, guarantees, or other types of submittals are required. The Contractor may submit a completed copy of the Approved Products List (APL) for all standard sewer, water, and force main items. The APL can be accessed on the City of Norfolk Website at https://www.norfolk.gov. All items used shall have been manufactured within two (2) years of the bid date of the project.

4.2. Prior to each submittal, the Contractor shall carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item

or sample submitted with any other item or sample being submitted and verify that each item and sample adheres in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

4.3. The Contractor shall certify that all materials used in the Work are in complete compliance with all

specified provisions. Certification shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from its responsibility of furnishing satisfactory materials. At the time of each submission, the Contractor shall in writing call the Owner's attention to any deviations that the Shop Drawings or samples may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

4.4. The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies, plus the number of copies desired to be returned, of

Shop Drawings or submittals that are required by Section 105 or the Special Provisions for a total of not more than ten (10). Each submission shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal in duplicate, listing the contents of the submission and identifying each item by reference to specification section or Drawing. The data shown on the Shop Drawings shall be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show the Owner the materials and equipment the Contractor proposes to provide.

4.5. The Contractor shall also submit samples to the Owner for review and approval in accordance with

the accepted schedule of submittals. Each sample shall be identified clearly as to material, supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which intended and otherwise as the Owner may require for review. The review of a separate item or sample will not indicate approval of any assembly in which the separate item or sample functions.

4.6. The Contractor is responsible for submitting all Shop Drawings and schedules in a timely manner to

avoid delaying the Work. The Owner shall within 21 days after receipt, return Shop Drawings and schedules to the Contractor indicating approval or disapproval. Shop Drawings will not be reviewed prior to award of contract.

4.7. Review and/or approval of Shop Drawings will be for general conformance with the Contract

Documents and shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing materials and equipment of proper dimension, size, quality, quantity, and all performance characteristics to


efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. Approval shall not be construed as permitting any departure from the Project requirements, authorization of any increase in price, or approval of departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished by the Owner.

4.8. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or sample, the Contractor shall have determined and verified:

A. All field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto;

B. All materials with respect to the intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage,

assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the work; and

C. All information relative to the Contractor’s sole responsibility in respect of means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and progress incident thereto.

4.9. Each Shop Drawing and sample submission shall bear a stamp or specific written indication that the

Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligation under the Contract Documents with respect to the Contractor’s review and approval of that submission. The Contractor’s Shop Drawing stamp shall be as follows (or as otherwise approved by the Owner and Engineer):


(Owner’s Name) (Project Name) Shop Drawing No.: _________________________________________ Specification Section: ______________________________________ With respect to this Shop Drawing or Sample, I have determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated this Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. _____ No variation from Contract Documents _____ Variation from Contract Documents as shown (Contractor’s Name and Address) By: _____________________________________________________ Date: _________________________

4.10. The Engineer will review and approve or disapprove or return as incomplete Shop Drawings and

samples in accordance with the schedule of submittals submissions accepted by the Engineer. The Engineer’s review and approval or disapproval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The Contractor shall make corrections required by the Engineer, and shall return the requested number of copies of Shop Drawings and samples for review and approval. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by the Engineer on previous submittals. Upon approval, two marked copies will be returned to the Contractor.

4.11. No progress payments will be made to the Contractor until the schedules are submitted to and

acceptable to the Engineer. The progress schedule shall be acceptable to the Engineer as being the Contractor’s schedule for the orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Contract Times, but such acceptance will neither impose on the Engineer responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve the Contractor from the Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

4.12. The Engineer will record time required by the Engineer or Engineer’s consultants for excessive

submittal review occasioned by the Contractor’s re-submission, in excess of one re-submission of a required submittal, caused by unverified, unchecked or un-reviewed, incomplete, inaccurate or erroneous, or nonconforming submittals. The Engineer's costs will be an estimated average billing rate for labor plus related expenses.


4.13. Within ten (10) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the

Engineer for approval a schedule listing the manufacturer of the items of equipment and materials proposed for the construction. Following approval of the schedule, no changes in material or equipment from those listed will be allowed except in unusual or extenuating circumstances. When such circumstances arise, the Contractor shall request, in writing, the Owner’s approval of the proposed change, stating the circumstances necessitating such a change. The intent of this schedule is to name the manufacturers of material specified by a product standard and to designate which manufacturer will be used when more than one has been named for an item. The schedule shall not be interpreted as allowing any change from base Bid items or those substitute items offered with the Bid and accepted in the Agreement.

V. RECORD DRAWINGS 5.1.The Contractor shall keep one record copy of all Special Provisions, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda,

Written Amendments, Change Orders, Shop Drawings, Owner-approved submittals, and samples at the site in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These documents shall be available to the Owner for examination and shall be submitted to the Owner upon completion of the Work. As-built information (including dimensions, materials, existing utilities) shall also be included on the Drawings. Progress payments may be withheld for failure to keep neat, accurate and complete record drawings. Record Drawings shall be submitted with monthly invoices.

5.2.The Contractor shall include any field changes, deviations from the Drawings due both to field conditions

and Change Orders. 5.3.Record information for projects shall include the following as a minimum:

A. Size, horizontal and vertical location of all existing utilities uncovered during the course of the work. This shall include telephone cables and conduits, TV cables and conduits, electrical cables and conduits, gas lines, water line, sewer force mains, sanitary sewers, storm sewers and the like.

B. Horizontal and vertical location of the water, force main, sanitary and storm sewer installed

at every 100-foot station, at interconnections, and at fittings, tees, bends and offsets. The frequency and location of survey shots will match the proposed grade elevations shown on the Drawings.

C. Location of lines plugged or capped, blowoffs, and air vents.

D. Location of all restraining devices used; for example, thrust blocks, retainer glands, tie rods,

etc. E. Location of all valves, ends of all lines and other fittings shall be accurately located by

triangulation from two permanent structures, which will be visible on the ground surface. F. Location and size of all taps and service line connections made, including corporation stops

(if any) used for testing purposes. G. Size (if greater than ¾”), material, depth and location of both ends of the water service lines


are required. H. Rim elevations of manholes and invert elevations of pipes entering and exiting the manhole.

I. Size, material, depth and location of sewer laterals including:

1. Measurements taken from the nearest downstream manhole, then measure over

perpendicular from that point on the main to the end of the lateral. All measurements are taken from the center of the manhole cover.

2. If lateral comes out of a manhole in a cul-de-sac; triangulation from that manhole will be required.

3. Measured depth from the finished grade at the end of the lateral.

J. Information required for public storm drain systems:

1. Size, material and location of all storm sewer lines.

2. Elevations shall be provided for all ditch, pipe and structure inverts and rims. 5.4 The Record Drawings shall include the following minimum accuracy for survey measurements and

field measurements.

A. Horizontal accuracy:

1. Both surface and subsurface gravity sanitary sewer systems shall be measured in a survey to +/- 1.0 foot at the structure location.

2. Both surface and subsurface pressure systems shall be measured in a survey to +/-

1.0 foot at the structure location.

3. Curb/curb and gutter shall be measured in a survey to +/- 1.0 foot at high points, low points, curb returns, and various other positions following good engineering, construction and surveying practices.

4. Storm Water Management Facilities (SWMF) shall be measured in a survey to +/-

1.0 foot, including the top of bank, bottom of bank, edge of water, pipes, structures, and setback distances to property lines and/or right-of-way lines and any unusual feature of each SWMF.

5. Utility system components including, but not limited to, fire hydrants, meter vaults,

meter boxes, water services, corporation stops, fittings, thrust restraint, laterals, cleanouts, valves, blowoff assemblies, air vent assemblies, water sampling stations, etc. shall be measured in a survey to +/- 1.0 foot.

6. Project landscaping shall be measured in a survey to +/- 1.0 foot. Only large

significant features, such as trees, will be surveyed. The species and caliper (size) shall be noted.


7. Street signs and light poles shall be measured in a survey to +/- 1.0 foot.

B. Vertical accuracy:

Survey Accuracy Field Measurement Manhole Rim +/- 0.01 ft. Manhole Invert +/- 0.01 ft. Gravity Sewer Slope +/- 0.02% Valve Depth +/- 0.1 ft. Pressure/vacuum systems +/-0.05 ft. SWMF +/- 0.01 ft. Curb/curb and gutter +/- 0.01 ft. Offset +/- 1.0 ft. Lateral Depth +/- 0.25 ft.

VI. ACCESS TO PROJECT 6.1. The Owner, the Owner’s Representatives, the Engineer, testing agencies and governmental agencies

with jurisdictional interests shall have access to the Project at all times for their observations, inspecting, and testing. The Contractor shall provide proper and safe conditions for such access.

VII. SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS 7.1. The Owner shall furnish all necessary Drawings showing property lines and/or easements and the

location of the Work. The Contractor shall provide a land surveyor licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be responsible for the accuracy of this Work.

7.2. The Owner has established or will establish such general reference and control points and

benchmarks on or about the Project site as will enable the Contractor to proceed with the Work. Prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed, if the Contractor finds that any previously established reference points have been destroyed or misplaced, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner, and the Owner shall replace such general reference points and benchmarks at the Owner’s expense.

7.3. The Contractor shall protect and preserve the established control points, bench marks and monuments

and shall make no changes in locations without the written approval of the Owner. Any of these which may be lost or destroyed or which require shifting because of necessary changes in grades or locations shall, subject to prior approval of the Owner, be replaced and accurately located by the Contractor, at no expense to the Owner.

7.4. The contractor shall be responsible for the layout of the proposed work in its entirety. The

layout shall be performed by a Licensed Land Surveyor and based on NAVD 88 (92) Datum. VIII. WORKING HOURS

For Work located within the public right-of-way normal working hours shall be in accordance with the requirements of the approved Right-of-Way Permit. For Work located outside the public right-of-way N normal working hours shall be 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through


Friday, except that Work shall not start any earlier than one-half hour after sunrise or continue beyond one-half hour prior to sunset. If the Contractor desires to perform Work outside the normal working hours, on Holidays, or on weekends, the Contractor shall request permission, in writing, 48-hours in advance to allow arrangements to be made. The Contractor may shall be charged an inspection fee by the Owner if such work is approved.

8.2. The Contractor shall designate a representative and furnish a telephone number at which the

representative may be contacted at any time after working hours. This representative shall be empowered and authorized to provide such personnel and equipment as may be required to remedy emergency situations that may develop after normal working hours, or on weekends and holidays.

8.3. The Contractor shall receive approval of the Owner, in advance, of any work to be performed on

Holidays. The Owner reserves the right to deny permission to work on Sundays and/or Holidays without cause.

Holidays are as listed below: New Years Day 1st day of January Martin Luther King’s Birthday 3rd Monday in January President’s Day 3rd Monday in February Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day 4th day in July Labor Day 1st Monday in September Veteran’s Day 11th day of November Thanksgiving Day 4th Thursday in November Day after Thanksgiving Friday after 4th Thursday in November Christmas Eve 24th day of December Christmas Day 25th day of December

If January 1, July 4, Veterans Day or Christmas fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered the Holiday. If these dates fall on a Saturday, the previous Friday shall be considered the Holiday. The Contractor’s attention is called to Section 109-1.5.C.1.d. regarding Owner compensation by the Contractor for overtime work performed outside normal working hours.

IX. PROJECT COORDINATION 9.1 Coordination with Owner

A. The Contractor shall coordinate all construction activities with the Owner and shall obtain the Owner’s approval as to schedule of Work, permits, temporary work, and traffic control.

B. Progress meetings shall be held monthly on a date to be set by the Owner. The Contractor

shall be present at all progress meetings. If progress is not made as scheduled, or if the Owner desires to discuss revised progress schedules or the quality of workmanship or other aspects of the work, additional progress meetings can be required.


C. The Owner may construct or reconstruct any utility service in the highway or street or grant a permit for the same at any time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages occasioned thereby other than a consideration of an extension of time.

D. When authorized by the Owner, the Contractor shall allow any person, firm, or corporation

to make an opening within the limits of the Project upon presentation of a duly executed permit from the Owner. When directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall satisfactorily repair portions of the Work disturbed by the openings. The necessary Work will be paid for as extra Work in accordance with these specifications and shall be subject to the same conditions as the original Work performed.

9.2 Coordination with Utilities

A. The Owner and Contractor agree that disruption to public services shall be avoided whenever possible and minimized when it is not avoidable. In cases where the disruption of existing facilities could adversely impact public service delivery, acceptable duration(s) and time(s) of the outages shall be coordinated between the Contractor and Owner, so as to explicitly minimize disruption to public service delivery.

B. Before the initiation of any excavation, the Contractor shall locate all existing utilities,

culverts, and other structures. Work shall be coordinated with affected utility companies. Prior to excavation, the Contractor shall contact MISS UTILITY at (800) 552-7001 and comply with all MISS UTILITY requirements.

C. All existing utilities, both public and private (including sewer, gas, water, electrical services,

etc.), shall be protected and their operation shall be maintained throughout the course of the Work. Any temporary shutdown of an existing service shall be arranged by the Contractor between the Contractor and the responsible agency. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and defend and hold the Owner harmless from the result of any damage that may occur as a result of the Contractor’s activities.

D. If any utility service is interrupted as a result of accidental breakage or of being exposed or

unsupported, the Contractor shall promptly notify the proper authority and shall cooperate with the authority in the restoration of service. If utility service is interrupted, repair work shall be continuous until service is restored. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to utilities that are attributable to his neglect or methods of performing the work.

E. The Owner shall provide Utility companies with copies of the construction plans and or

scope of work prior to construction. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide each affected utility company with a copy of the proposed schedule of progress prior to commencing work.

F. Existing facilities (such as water and sewer valves) shall be operated only by the facility

owner or under the direct supervision of the facility owner’s personnel. The Contractor shall inform the owner at least 48-hours in advance of the need for the operation of existing facilities.

G. At points where the Contractor’s operations are adjacent to the properties of any utility,

including railroads, and damage to which might result in considerable expense, loss, or


inconvenience, Work shall not commence until arrangements necessary for the protection thereof have been completed.

H. The Contractor shall cooperate with owners of utilities so that location, removal and

adjustment operations may progress in a reasonable manner; duplication of adjustment work may be reduced to a minimum; and, services rendered by those parties will not be unnecessarily interrupted.

I. The Contractor should be aware that in some instances buried cables, gas lines, water lines,

etc., two inches and smaller in diameter may have to be excavated by hand and slightly relocated to facilitate construction of the Work under this contract. This shall be considered incidental to the Work, and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

J. Should the location of any pipe or conduit greater than two-inches in diameter, pole, or other

structures, above or below the ground be such that in the opinion of the Owner or his representative its removal, realignment, or change will be required due to work to be performed under this Contract, the removal, realignment, or change will be done as a Change Order, or will be done by the Owner of the obstructions, without cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain at his own expense the structures until such removal and before and after such realignment or change. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damages or extra compensation because of the presence of said structure, or because of any delay in the removal or relocation of the same.

X. SUPERVISION 10.1. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, and shall be solely responsible for the means,

methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. The Contractor shall employ and maintain on the Project a qualified supervisor who shall have been designated in writing by the Contractor as the Contractor's representative at the site. The Contractor’s supervisor shall have full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor and all communications given to the Contractor’s supervisor shall be the same as if mailed to the business address of the Contractor. The Contractor’s supervisor or a designated representative of the Contractor shall be present on the site at all times as required to perform adequate supervision and coordination of the Work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing prior to any change of supervisor, and receive the Owner’s approval for the replacement.

10.2. Upon notification to the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to suspend the Work until such time

as a supervisor satisfactory to the Owner is assigned to the project. Contract Time shall not be extended for such suspension nor shall the Contractor be entitled to any additional payment of any kind whatsoever as a result of such suspended work.

10.3. Any employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor who is deemed unsuitable may be removed from

the job site by the Owner, provided that Written Notice and just cause is given to the Contractor. Said employee shall be removed immediately upon receipt of said Notice.

XI. UNCOVERING WORK 11.1. If any work has been covered or concealed without the Owner’s approval prior to being covered or

concealed, the Owner may request to see such work and it shall be exposed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay the cost of opening or uncovering and replacement and shall, in addition, at no


cost to the Owner, make the necessary corrections to bring the work into accord with the Contract Documents.

11.2. Uncovering work shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the Contractor has given the Owner

timely notice of the Contractor’s intention to cover the same and the Owner has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

11.3. If the Owner considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work previously approved be re-

inspected or tested by others, the Contractor, at the Owner’s request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as the Owner may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, materials, tools, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, the Contractor shall bear all the expenses of such uncovering, exposure, observation inspection and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, the Contractor will be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time or both directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.

XII. REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE WORK 12.1. All Work that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be

unacceptable. 12.2. The Contractor shall remove or correct all unacceptable and defective Work or materials. The

replacement of Work and materials shall conform to the Contract Documents or be in a manner acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such correction and/or removal and replacement.

12.3. Work done contrary to or regardless of the instructions of the Owner, Work done beyond the lines

shown or as directed, except as herein provided, or any extra Work done without authority, will be considered unauthorized and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Agreement. Work so done may be ordered removed or replaced at no cost to the Owner.

12.4 If the Work is defective, or the Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable

materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, the Owner may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Contractor does not remedy, remove, or replace the rejected or condemned Work as instructed by the Owner within the time period stated by the Owner but in no case to exceed 30 Days after receiving written Notice, such remedy, removal, or replacement may be accomplished by the Owner at the Contractor’s expense.


XIII. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 13.1. Prior to Final Payment, but following completion of all required tests and inspections, the Contractor

may request in writing that the Owner certify that the entire Project or any phase of the Project is Substantially Complete and request the Owner issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. Within fourteen (14) working days the Owner will conduct an inspection of the Project with the Contractor and either issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion or notify the Contractor in writing of the incomplete items. The Certificate and attachments shall include the following:

A. A listing of responsibilities for the security, operation, safety, maintenance, utilities and

insurance on the substantially completed portion;

B. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment; and,

C. The maximum time for items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. 13.2. The Owner shall have the right to exclude the Contractor from the Project or phase of the Work

certified to be Substantially Complete; however, the Owner will allow the Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct the Work.

XIV. USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS 14.1. The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed

portions of the Work, not-withstanding that the time for completing the entire Work or such portions may not have expired, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any Work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time or both as the Owner and the Contractor may agree by a Change Order.

XV. FINAL INSPECTION 15.1. Upon receiving written Notice from the Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed upon portion is

complete, the Owner will make a final inspection with the Contractor, and will notify the Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such work or remedy such deficiencies.

15.2. This procedure shall be repeated until all items are corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner. Only

written notification to the Contractor from the Owner will constitute final acceptance of any part of the Work under the Agreement.

XVI. CLAIMS 16.1. All claims, disputes, demands and other matters in question arising out of or relating to the

Agreement or the Contract Documents, except for claims which have been waived by the Contractor’s acceptance of final payment, will be addressed in accordance with the provisions of the Virginia Public Procurement Act and as stated herein; provided, however, the provisions of Section 2.2-4366 of that Act will not be applicable without the separate express written consent of the Owner.


16.2. Early or prior knowledge by the Owner of an existing or impending claim for damages could alter the plans, scheduling, or other action of the Owner or result in mitigation or elimination of the effect of the act objected to by the Contractor. Therefore, a written statement describing the act of omission or commission by the Owner or its agents that allegedly caused damage to the Contractor and the nature of the claimed damage shall be submitted to the Owner at the time of occurrence or beginning of the Work upon which the claim and subsequent action are based. If such damage is deemed certain in the opinion of the Contractor to result from his acting on an order from the Owner, he shall immediately take written exception to the order. Submission of a notice of claim as specified shall be mandatory. Failure to submit such notice shall be a conclusive waiver to such claim for damages by the Contractor. An oral notice or statement will not be sufficient nor will a notice or statement after the event.

The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of potential claim items for extra work. If the Contractor is directed by the Owner or performs work which is mutually deemed by the Contractor and the Owner not to be included under any of the items of the Bid and which has not been specifically ordered in writing by the Owner as extra work, the Contractor shall make a claim to the Owner for extra payment for such work by Written Notice within five (5) days after the occurrence, with detailed cost data to support the claim or the claim will not be considered.

If the Contractor’s claim contains data that cannot be verified by the Owner’s records, the data shall be subject to a complete audit by the Owner or its authorized representative if they are to be used as a basis for claim settlement. If the Contractor wishes to make claim for an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time, he shall submit all supporting data to the Owner and Engineer within twenty (20) Days from the time of initial occurrence. Failure to submit such data within twenty (20) Days shall be a conclusive waiver to such claim by the Contractor.

16.3 Claims, disputes, and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and claims in respect to changes in the Contract Price or Contract times will be referred initially to the Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written Notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Engineer and the Owner promptly (but in no event later than twenty (20) days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data shall be submitted to the Engineer and the Owner promptly, (but not later than twenty (20) days) after the start of such occurrence or event and monthly thereafter for continuing events unless the Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The Owner shall submit any response to the Engineer and the Contractor within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contractor’s last submittal (unless the Engineer allows additional time).

The Engineer shall render a written decision within twenty (20) days of receipt of the Owner’s response. The Engineer’s written decision on such claim, dispute, or other matter shall be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless, within twenty (20) days after issuance of the Engineer’s written decision, either party appeals the decision by giving the other party and the Engineer written notice of a request for negotiation.


Within ten (10) days of the delivery of said Notice, senior representatives of the Owner and the Contractor, having authority to settle the dispute, and the Engineer shall meet at a mutually acceptable time and place, and thereafter as often as they reasonably deem necessary, to exchange relevant information and to attempt to resolve the dispute. The Owner’s representative will participate in good faith during the negotiation and will have authority to approve changes in the Contract Time and Price. In the event a mutually acceptable decision cannot be reached through negotiation within twenty (20) days of the appealing party’s Notice, (or mutually agreeable longer period), or if the party receiving such Notice will not meet within ten (10) days, the Owner or Contractor may declare, by written Notice, delivered to the other party and to the Engineer, that the negotiation was unsuccessful and may initiate further appeal.

Any further appeal shall be initiated by written Notice of the appeal by the Owner or Contractor to

the Engineer and non-appealing party within twenty (20) calendar days of receipt of the Notice of unsuccessful negotiation. Failure to issue a Notice of appeal within said period will result in the Engineer’s decision being final and binding to the fullest extent allowed by law. If a written Notice of appeal is issued, the claim or dispute may be submitted for non-binding mediation at the discretion of Owner. If Owner chooses non-binding mediation, it shall be a condition precedent to the institution of any further administrative, legal or equitable proceedings by either party

If the Owner requests mediation upon issuance of the Notice of appeal, the parties shall endeavor to

agree to a single mediator to mediate the dispute in a session not to exceed one-half day in length, unless extended by the agreement of both parties. If the parties cannot agree on a single mediator, they shall request the chief judge of the local state circuit court to designate a mediator. Unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, the mediation shall occur within ten (10) days of the mediator’s selection. The costs of the mediation shall be paid by the parties on a pro rata basis.

The results of successful mediation will be implemented by a Change Order. Should the mediation

be unsuccessful, it shall be terminated by written Notice to all involved by the mediator or Owner or Contractor. The dispute resolution process shall then proceed in accordance with paragraph 16.4.

16.4. A formal proceeding may then be instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent

jurisdiction within the Owner’s locality, to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable state and city laws and regulations.

In the event of any litigation between the parties arising out of this Agreement, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover its attorneys’ fees and expert fees, as well as all other costs and expenses of such litigation.

16.5. The Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or

disagreements with the Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner and the Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

XVII. ENGINEER’S STATUS 17.1. All Work shall be performed under the general observation of the Engineer (if specified in the

Special Provisions, otherwise, the Owner shall serve as the Engineer at its discretion). The Contractor


shall carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The construction means, methods, techniques, sequences of procedures, and safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work shall be at the direction and the responsibility of the Contractor. The Engineer shall have authority to and shall reject any and all Work whenever it is necessary to do so in order to insure the proper execution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall have no authority to approve or order changes in the Work that alter the terms or conditions of the Agreement. The Owner shall confirm by written Notice within fourteen (14) calendar Days any oral order, direction, requirement or determination.

17.2. In case of the termination of the employment of the Engineer, the Owner may appoint a capable and

reputable Engineer as a replacement. The status under the Agreement of the Engineer shall be that of the former Engineer.

17.3. Approval by the Engineer of any materials, plans, equipment or drawings proposed by the

Contractor, shall be construed only to constitute an approval of general design. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor for any responsibility for the accurate and complete performance of the work in accordance with Contract Documents, or from any duty, obligation, performance guarantee or other liability imposed upon him by the provisions of the Agreement.

17.4 The Contractor may be required to accompany the Owner for an on-site review of the project after

award, but prior to the pre-construction conference and issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The purpose of the on-site review will be to compile a property report that will list, according to the following categories, the properties affected by construction as determined mutually by the Contractor and the Owner, or his representative.

A. Unrestrained access to and from residences and business locations. This includes but is not

limited to, the following types of scheduled projects: 1. Street repair (non-emergency) or improvement projects. 2. Utilities repair (non-emergency) or improvement projects. 3. Sidewalk repair (non-emergency) or improvement projects.

B. Right to enjoy one’s residence or business free of disturbing and unusual environmental changes as a result of an Owner-authorized construction project. Examples of such changes are excessive noise, dust, light, as well as unusual working hours and odors. This includes, but is not limited to, projects such as: 1. Drainage repair (non-emergency) or improvement projects. 2. Sewage repair (non-emergency) or improvement projects.

C. The right to properly plan for the relocation of one’s personal property which must be moved as a result of an Owner-authorized construction project. This includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Trees, shrubs, plants and flowers. 2. Play equipment. 3. Portable buildings. 4. Fences (above grade or underground electric pet containment). 5. Automobiles.

The property report is to remain on file with the Owner and the Contractor until project closeout.


XVIII. NOTICE TO COMPLY ORDER

See page 105-15. XIX. STOP WORK ORDER See page 105-16.

End of Section


CITY/COUNTY OF

NOTICE TO COMPLY

Department of

Pursuant to Section of the Code of the City/County

of , Virginia, as amended, a City Manager/County

Administrator Designee inspected your site at

on , 20 at a.m. / p.m.

The following conditions of noncompliance were noted:

SILT FENCE DOWN

DISTURBED AREAS NOT STABILIZED

SEDIMENT TRAPPING DEVICES NOT INSTALLED PROPERLY

TRACKING ON PUBLIC ROAD

OTHER:

The following corrective measures are needed to bring you into compliance:

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

These measures are to be completed before , 20 . Notice ordered by _______________________________, on _____________, 20 . (Designee of City Manager/County Administrator)

Hand Delivered ____________ Certified Mail __________ If you have any questions, please call .

(Telephone number)


CITY/COUNTY OF

STOP WORK ORDER

Permit Number

Date

Department of

Pursuant to Section of the Code of the

City/County of , Virginia, as amended, a substantial

Code violation exists at . You are

hereby notified that further work at this location must be

IMMEDIATELY DISCONTINUED

Corrective Measures Required:

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

Ordered by: _______________________________, on ____________, 20 . (Designee of City Manager/County Administrator)

Notice served to , on , 20 .

Stop Work Order in Effect Until

(Signature of Enforcement Officer)


SECTION 106

CONTROL OF MATERIAL

I. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 1.1. All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and test by the Owner at

any time during manufacture and/or construction. The Owner shall have the right to reject defective material and workmanship or require their correction. The City will furnish testing services for compaction and concrete.

1.2. The Contractor shall provide at its expense the testing and inspection services required by the

Contract Documents. The Owner will provide at his expense all inspection and testing services not required by the Contract Documents; provided, however, the Contractor will be responsible for the payment of all failing tests.

1.3. The Contractor shall furnish promptly without additional charge all reasonable facilities, labor, and

materials, necessary and convenient for making such tests as may be designated in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall work with the Owner and the Engineer in scheduling and coordinating Owner provided testing or inspection services.

1.4. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public body having

jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereto) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by someone other than the Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish the Owner the required certificates of inspection, or approval. All Components shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing lab. The Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for the Owner’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to the Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.

1.5. Inspections, tests or approvals by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligations to

perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6. The failure of the Owner to reject or condemn materials and workmanship not conforming to the

Contract Documents shall not prevent the Owner from rejecting materials and workmanship found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents at any time prior to the acceptance of the completed Work, nor shall it be considered as a waiver of any nonconformance with the Contract Documents which may be discovered later, or as preventing the Owner at any time prior to the expiration of the guarantee period or of the expiration of any applicable statutory limitation period for legal actions for Contractor default from recovering damages for work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

II. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1. The Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work

and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site.


2.2. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.

2.3. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the

Contract Documents. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All material shall be manufactured within two (2) years of the bid date of the project.

2.4 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to legally dispose of all excess material at his expense

unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and/or noted in the Specifications. 2.5 No material that is not required for the Work on this Project may be stored on site or within the

Project boundaries or on land designated for Project use, unless approved by the Owner in writing prior to placement.

Equipment Rental Reimbursement Rates: The contractor shall use the monthly rate, or a percentage thereof, for equipment as stated in the most current edition of the Rental Rate Blue Book for any and all claims for extra compensation, which may arise in the course of the work. Rates are based on Twenty-two (22) work days per month.

III. WORK BY OWNER 3.1. The Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by the Owner’s own forces, have

other work performed by utility owners, or let other direct contracts for Work at the site. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, Written Notice will be given to the Contractor prior to starting any such other work.

End of Section


SECTION 107

LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC I. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS 1.1. The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses pay all charges, fees and taxes and give all

notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the Work except those provided by the Owner, and specified in the Special Provisions.

1.2. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for knowledge of and shall abide by each and every law,

rule or regulation of all public bodies having political jurisdiction over the Project and in force at the time of the Contract; including, the safety of persons or property and the protection of persons and property form damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection and hold harmless the Owner and its agents, officers, or employees against any claim for liability arising from or based on any violation, whether by himself, his agents, his employees or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents are at variance with any such law, he shall promptly notify the Owner in writing. The Contractor shall execute and file the documents, statements, and affidavits required under any applicable federal or state law or regulation affecting his Bid or Agreement or prosecution of the Work thereunder. The Contractor shall permit examination of any records made subject to such examination by any federal or state law or by regulations promulgated thereunder by any state or federal agency charged with enforcement of such law. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any damages for delay occasioned by compliance with such laws. Where such laws are changed during the course of the Agreement, and where such changes create additional costs to the Agreement or affect the time of the Agreement, such changes shall be made effective through Change Orders prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.3. The Contractor shall comply fully with the U.S. Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulation

promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended, and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, as amended. The Contractor shall also comply fully with the Overhead High Voltage Act as set forth in Chapter 30, Title 59.1 of the Code of Virginia; Subpart P - “Elevations, Trenching and Shoring”, of the Virginia Occupational Safety and Health Standards for Construction Industry; the Virginia Confined Space Standard 1910.146 of the Virginia Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry; and the “Underground Utility Damage Prevention Act” as set forth in Chapter 10.3, Title 56 of the Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended. The above listing of safety laws and regulations is for informational purposes and in no way alters or limits Contractor’s responsibility to comply with the safety laws of all public bodies having jurisdiction as set forth in Section 107-1.2 above.

II. LAND, EASEMENTS, AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY 2.1. Prior to issuance of Notice to Proceed, the Owner shall obtain all land, easements, and rights-of-way

necessary for carrying out and for the completion of the work to be performed and pursuant to the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified herein or otherwise mutually agreed. A land surveyor licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia must perform the layout. Easements for temporary uses and detours requested by the Contractor and approved by the Owner in lieu of a detour within the right of way or easement area shall be acquired by the Contractor without the Owner being a party to the Agreement.


2.2. The Owner shall provide to the Contractor information that delineates and describes the lands owned,

rights-of-way, or easements acquired, and permits obtained. 2.3. The Contractor shall provide at its own expense and without liability to the Owner any additional

land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary construction facilities, or for storage of materials. The Contractor shall not use private property in connection with the Work unless prior written permission is obtained from the property owner. A copy of the written permission indicating the name, address, and phone number of the property owner shall be furnished to the Owner. Upon completion of the use of the property, the Contractor shall also furnish the Owner a release signed by the property owner indicating that the property has been satisfactorily restored.

2.4. The Contractor shall acquire all necessary and appropriate Permit(s) from the locality, VDOT, or

both, for entrance(s) to off-site storage or lay-down yard(s) and shall abide by all conditions required by the Permit. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs incurred in acquiring the Permit and all costs associated with the efforts necessary to comply to Permit requirements.

The Contractor shall utilize the most direct means of access to the Work area and shall not access the Work area through adjacent neighborhoods, parking areas, etc. Any and all damages to adjacent areas resulting from the Contractor’s activities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor and shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense, to the complete satisfaction of the Owner, locality/VDOT, and the affected property owner(s).

III. PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY & PERSONS 3.1. The Contractor will be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions

and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to all employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby, all the Work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, and other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary watchmen, barricades, lights, and warning signs, and take all necessary precautions for the protection and safety of the public.

3.2. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any

public body having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for safety and protection, and shall notify owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. The Contractor shall remedy all damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone for whose acts any of them will be liable.

3.3. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty shall

be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner

3.4. In accordance with generally accepted construction practices, and the requirements of OSHA, the

Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the Project site. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The Contractor


shall comply with Federal and State safety regulations, at the site of the Work and provide such equipment and medical facilities as necessary to supply first aid service to anyone who may be injured. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Owner all accidents whatsoever arising out of, or in connection with, the performance of the Work whether on, or adjacent to, the site and which caused death, personal injury or property damages, giving full details and statement of witnesses. In addition, if death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accidents shall be reported immediately to both the Engineer and the Owner. If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any subcontractor on account of any accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts, in writing, to the Owner.

3.5. Until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall have charge and care thereof

and shall take every precaution against damage to the Work or to any part thereof by action of the elements or from any other cause whether installed, in storage, or off-site. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good damage to any portion of the Work occasioned by any of the foregoing causes before final acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. The Owner may reimburse the Contractor for repair of damage to Work attributable to unforeseeable causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. In case of suspension of work, the Contractor shall be responsible for the Project and shall take such precautions as may be necessary to prevent damage to the Work, provide for erosion and environmental control and drainage control, and erect any necessary temporary structures, signs, or other facilities at his own expense. During the suspension of Work, the Contractor shall properly and continuously maintain in an acceptable growing condition all living material in newly established plantings, seedings, and soddings furnished under the Contract and shall take adequate precautions to protect new tree growth and other important vegetation against damage.

3.6. Emergency traffic such as police, fire and disaster units shall be provided reasonable access to the

work area at all times. The Contractor shall coordinate partial or full street closures with all emergency services, such as police, fire and disaster units, and shall bear the responsibility of notification to same of all closures, blockages and re-openings.

3.7. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the Work and as directed by the Owner, remove from the

Owner’s property and from all public and private property and rights-of-way, at its own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, debris, piles of earth, foreign matter, and waste materials resulting from his operations. The site of the Work shall be restored to the conditions existing before the Work was started, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Lawns, pavements, sidewalks, and other surfaces shall be preserved where practicable, but if damaged, shall be fully restored.

3.8. The Owner may take corrective action if the Contractor fails to perform cleanup and restoration in an orderly, continuous, and expeditious manner. The Owner may take corrective action three days after delivery of notice to do so to the Contractor and deduct the cost from any monies due the Contractor.

3.9. The Contractor shall preserve property and improvements along the lines of and adjacent to the Work

unless their removal or destruction is called for by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall use suitable precautions to prevent damage to such property.

3.10. When the Contractor finds it necessary to enter on private property, he shall secure from the property

owner or lessee a written permit for such entry prior to moving thereon. An executed copy of this permit shall be furnished to the Owner.

3.11. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage or injury to property during the prosecution of the


Work resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the method of executing the Work or attributable to defective Work or materials. This responsibility shall not be released until final acceptance of the Project.

3.12. When direct or indirect damage is done to property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect or

misconduct in the method of executing the Work or in consequence of the non-execution thereof on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall restore such property to a condition substantially equal to that existing before such damage was done by repairing, rebuilding or restoring, as may be directed by the Owner, or making settlement with the property owner. The Contractor shall secure from the property owner a release from any claim against the Owner without additional compensation therefor. A copy of this release shall be furnished to the Owner.

3.13. All property boundary markers shown on the Drawings or discovered during the course of

construction shall be protected. All property boundary markers disturbed due to construction activities shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. Property boundary markers shall be restored by a surveyor licensed in the State of Virginia and all restored property boundary markers shall be shown on the Record Drawings.

3.14. The Contractor shall employ a licensed Plumbing Contractor, who shall obtain the necessary permits

and shall do all Work on private property in accordance with the International Plumbing Code, latest edition. The Owner will obtain the permission of the property owner to work on private property. No payment will be made for work done on private property until all restoration work is complete to the satisfaction of the Owner and the homeowner. The Contractor shall be paid based on the number of permits that have been signed and approved by the Building and Codes Inspector as evidenced by copies of the approved permits submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. Copies of permits shall be submitted with monthly invoices.

3.15. The Contractor will notify the affected property owners, in writing ten (10) calendar Days prior to

commencement of Work. “Affected Property Owners” shall be those property owners whose properties are affected by construction on the Project in the following manner: (i) restrained access to and from residences and business locations; (ii) interference with the right to enjoy one’s residence or business free of disturbing and unusual environmental changes as a result of the Project, such as excessive noise, dust, light, as well as unusual working hours and odors; and (iii) the relocation of personal property, such as trees, shrubs, plants and flowers, play equipment, portable buildings, fences and automobiles, which must be moved as a result of the Project. Such Notice shall be deemed properly given if mailed by first class, postage prepaid, to the address for the property owners shown in the local tax records.

3.16. It shall be the Contractor’s paramount responsibility to additionally notify each residence and

business that construction adjacent to their property is imminent. This notification will be given and noted no less than 48 hours prior to Work commencing adjacent to the affected property. The Notice from the Contractor shall be written and may be hand delivered to each affected residence and business. A separate Notice shall be delivered each time the entrance to each residence and business will be blocked or inaccessible.

A. If this Notice is mailed, time is to be allowed such that receipt by the addressee is at least 48

hours prior to Work commencement. Such Notice shall be deemed properly given if mailed by first class, postage prepaid, to the address for the property owners shown in the local tax


records. A duplicate copy of each mailed Notice is to be forwarded to the Owner.

B. If this Notice is hand delivered, a duplicate copy of each Notice is to be forwarded to the Owner indicating the date of delivery and if personal contact was achieved.

IV. ENVIRONMENTAL STIPULATIONS 4.1. Any cost associated with violations of the law including, but not limited to, remediations, clean up

cost, fines, administrative or civil penalties or charges, and third party claims imposed on the Owner by any regulatory agency or by any third party as a result of the Contractor’s noncompliance with federal, state, or local environmental laws and regulations or nuisance statutes by the Contractor or by Subcontractors, consultants, sub-consultants, or any other persons, corporations or legal entities retained by the Contractor for this Agreement, shall be paid by the Contractor.

No separate payment will be made for the Work or precautions described herein except where

provided for as a specific item in the Agreement or except where provision has been made for such payment in these specifications.

4.2. Pollution:

A. Water

The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution throughout the duration of the project to prevent pollution of rivers, streams, and impoundments. Pollutants such as chemicals, fuels, lubricants, bitumens, raw sewage, paints, sedimentation, and other harmful material shall not be discharged into or alongside rivers, streams, or impoundments or into channels leading to them.

Construction discharge water shall be filtered to remove deleterious materials prior to discharge into state waters. During specified spawning seasons, discharges and construction activities in spawning areas of state waters shall be restricted so as not to disturb or inhibit aquatic species that are indigenous to the waters. Neither water nor other effluence shall be discharged onto wetlands or breeding or nesting areas of migratory waterfowl. When used extensively in wetlands, heavy equipment shall be placed on mats. Temporary construction fills and mats in wetlands and flood plains shall be constructed of approved non-erodible materials and shall be removed by the Contractor to natural ground when the Owner so directs. If the Contractor dumps, discharges, or spills any oil or chemical that reaches or has the potential to reach a waterway, he shall immediately notify all appropriate jurisdictional state and federal agencies and shall take immediate actions to contain, remove, and properly dispose of the oil or chemical.

Excavation material shall be disposed of in approved areas above the mean high water mark shown on the plans in a manner that will prevent the return of solid or suspended materials to state waters. If the mark is not shown on the plans, the mean high water mark shall be considered the elevation of the top of stream banks. 1. All waste materials, including but not limited to excavated materials,

demolished pavement, arboreal (landscaping) waste and other debris, that are


not suitable for project related purposes (e.g. backfill) or are surplus to the needs of the project, both as determined by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of all such material in accordance with his accepted Disposal Plan at no additional cost to the City.

2. The contractor shall submit a Disposal Plan for review and acceptance by the

Engineer prior to performing any work that might generate waste materials. The plan shall include a complete description of the materials that are expected to be encountered and their proposed disposal site(s). The Contractor may change his Disposal Plan only by written notice to the Engineer. The acceptance of a plan and/or any related notice to the Engineer must be evidenced by a written response from the Engineer.

3. The Contractor shall insure that all permits related to his disposal operations

have been obtained, and the Contractor shall comply with all requirements of those permits. The Contractor shall show evidence that all required permits have been obtained for all disposal sites by submitting a copy of all such permits to the Engineer as part of the Contractor’s Disposal Plan.

Construction operations in rivers, streams, or impoundments shall be restricted to those areas where channel changes are shown on the plans and to those that shall be entered for the construction of structures. Rivers, streams, and impoundments shall be cleared of false-work, piling, debris, or other obstructions placed therein or caused by construction operations.

The Contractor shall prevent stream constriction that would reduce stream flows below the minimum, as defined by the State Water Control Board, during construction operations. If it is necessary to relocate an existing stream or drainage facility temporarily to facilitate construction, the Contractor shall design and provide temporary channels or culverts of adequate size to carry the normal flow of the stream or drainage facility. The Contractor shall submit a temporary relocation design to the Owner for review and acceptance in sufficient time to allow for discussion and correction prior to beginning the work the design covers. Costs for the temporary relocation of the stream or drainage facility shall be included in the Contract Price for the related pipe or box culvert.

When a live watercourse must be crossed by construction vehicles more than twice in any six month period, a temporary vehicular stream crossing constructed of nonerodible material shall be provided. Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the latest edition of the Virginia Erosion and Sedimentation Control Handbook.

B. Air

The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the State Air Pollution Control Law and Rules of the State Air Pollution Control Board, including notifications required therein.

Burning shall be performed in accordance with applicable local laws and ordinances and under the constant surveillance of watchpersons. Care shall be taken so that the burning of materials does not destroy or damage property or cause excessive air pollution. The


Contractor shall not burn rubber tires, asphalt, used crankcase oil, or other materials that produce dense smoke. Burning shall not be initiated when atmospheric conditions are such that smoke will create a hazard to the motoring public or airport operations. Provisions shall be made for flagging vehicular traffic if visibility is obstructed or impaired by smoke. At no time shall a fire be left unattended.

Asphalt mixing plants shall be designed, equipped, and operated so that the amount and quality of air pollutants emitted will conform to the Rules of the State Air Pollution Control Board. Emission standards for asbestos incorporated in the EPA's National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants apply to the demolition or renovation of any institutional, commercial, or industrial building, structure, facility, installation, or portion thereof that contains friable asbestos.

C. Noise

The Contractor's operations shall be performed so that exterior noise levels measured during a noise-sensitive operation shall not be more than 80 decibels within 100 feet from the point of origin or within ten (10) feet of a noise-sensitive facility. Noise-sensitive facility is any facility for which lowered noise levels are essential if the facility is to serve its intended purpose. Such facilities include, but are not limited to, those associated with residences, hospitals, nursing homes, churches, schools, libraries, parks and recreational areas.

The Owner may monitor construction-related noise. If construction noise levels exceed the specified limits, the Contractor shall take corrective action before proceeding with operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with the abatement of construction noise and the delay of operations attributable to noncompliance with these requirements.

The Owner may prohibit or restrict to certain portions of the project any work that produces objectionable noise between 9 P.M. and 7 A.M. If other hours are established by local ordinance, the local ordinance shall govern.

Equipment shall in no way be altered so as to result in noise levels that are greater than those produced by the original equipment.

When feasible, the Contractor shall establish haul routes that direct his vehicles away from developed areas and ensure that noise from hauling operations is kept to a minimum. These requirements are not applicable if the noise produced by sources other than the Contractor's operation at the point of reception is greater than the noise from the Contractor's operation at the same point.

D. Forest Fires

The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent and suppress forest fires in any area involved in construction operations or occupied by him as a result of such operations. The Contractor shall cooperate with the proper authorities of the state and federal governments in reporting, preventing, and suppressing forest fires. Labor, tools, or equipment furnished by the Contractor upon the order of any forest official issued under


authority granted the official by law shall not be considered a part of the Contract. For fires originating by no fault of the Contractor, the Contractor may negotiate with the proper forest official for compensation for such labor, tools, or equipment.

4.3. Archeological, Paleontological, and Rare Mineralogical Findings:

In the event of the discovery of prehistoric ruins, Indian or early settler sites, burial grounds, skeletal remains, relics, artifacts, fossils, stone tools, meteorites, or other articles of archeological, paleontological, or rare mineralogical interest during the prosecution of work, the Contractor shall act immediately to suspend work at the site of the discovery and notify the Owner. The Owner will immediately notify the proper state authority charged with the responsibility of investigating and evaluating such finds. The Contractor shall cooperate and, upon request by the Owner, assist in protecting, mapping, and removing the findings. Findings shall become the property of the Owner unless they are located on federal lands, in which event they shall become the property of the U.S. government. When such work delays the progress of the Work, the Owner will give consideration to adjustments in the Contract Time limit. However, no adjustment in Contract Price nor Time will be allowed for delays that do not exceed 2 working days from the time the Contractor is notified to stop work. If the contractor is assisting in removing the remains, the Owner will give consideration to adjustment in payment.

V. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 5.1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat, sanitary condition such accommodations for the

use of employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of any governing body and regulatory agency having jurisdiction.

The Contractor shall pay for and furnish temporary facilities (such as light, power, and water)

complete with connecting piping, wiring, lamps, and similar equipment as necessary. The Contractor shall install, maintain, and remove temporary facilities upon completion of the Work. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and bear all costs in connection with temporary facilities at no expense to the Owner. The use of temporary facilities shall be in compliance with the requirements of the facility owner.

5.2. The Contractor shall provide at least one self-contained single-occupant toilet unit of the chemical, or

aerated recirculation type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar non absorbent material. Unit shall be emptied and serviced regularly

VI. EMERGENCIES 6.1. In emergencies affecting the safety of persons, or the Work, or property at the site or adjacent thereto,

the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Owner, shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall give the Owner prompt Written Notice of any significant changes in the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby. Any compensation, claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and a Change Order shall be issued to document the changes.


6.2. During the contract period, if an emergency situation (natural or man made) occurs, the Contractor agrees to dedicate the equipment and personnel allocated to this project to assist the Owner during the recovery period. The Owner shall direct this work and costs will be paid on a time and material basis. Pre-approved rates will be applied as backed up by certified payrolls and rental rates.

6.3. If an emergency situation should occur (natural or manmade) during the contract period and

the project is shut down for any length of time, the contractor shall not receive any monetary compensation, with the exception of work performed to prepare the site for the impending event. However, an extension on contract time will be allowed.

VII. WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 7.1. The Contractor shall warrant and guarantee to the Owner that all Work is in accordance with the

Contract Documents and is not defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to the Contractor. The Contractor shall promptly correct all defective Work performed and replace defective materials or items found deficient during the final inspection, in a manner satisfactory and at no additional cost to the Owner for a period of one (1) year following the date of Substantial Completion; provided, however, if the local ordinances or code regarding warranties and guarantees, or if any provision in the local ordinances or code regarding the timing of performance or defect bonds conflicts with such one (1) year period, the local ordinance or code shall control. This warranty and guarantee shall not operate as a waiver of any of the rights and remedies of the Owner for default under or breach of the Agreement which rights and remedies may be exercised at any time within the period of any applicable statute of limitations.

The City shall hold a “pre-final” inspection to test all valves and hydrants. The City Inspector and representatives from the Water Distribution Division shall be present for the inspection. The final inspection will not be held until all deficiencies found in the pre-final inspection have been corrected.

7.2. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed

or replaced under this Article, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one (1) year after such corrections or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Repetitive malfunction of an equipment or product item shall be cause for replacement and an extension of the correction period to a date one (1) year following acceptable replacement. A repetitive malfunction shall be defined as the third failure of an equipment or product item following original acceptance.

7.3. If the Contractor does not promptly correct the defective Work or replace defective materials, the

Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all costs of such removal and replacement shall be paid by the Contractor.

7.4. Certain equipment or items may be required in the Contract Documents to be warranted for periods

longer than one year. 7.5. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before

Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Contract Documents or by Change Order.


VIII. OPENING SECTIONS OF PROJECTS TO TRAFFIC 8.1. When specified in the Contract or when directed by the Owner, certain sections of the Work may be

opened to traffic. 8.2. On any section of the Work opened by order of the Owner where the Contract Documents do not

provide for traffic to be carried through the Work and the Contractor has not been dilatory in prosecuting the Work, the Contractor will not be required to assume any expense entailed in maintaining the road for traffic. Such expense will be borne by the Owner or will be compensated for by Change Order. Repair of slides and repair of damage attributable to traffic will be compensated for by Change Order. The cost of all other repairs shall be borne by the Contractor.

8.3. On any section of the Work opened by the order of the Owner where the Contract Documents do not

provide for traffic to be carried through the Work, any additional cost for the completion of other items of Work that are occasioned because of the changed working conditions will be compensated by Change Order.

8.4. If the Contractor is dilatory in completing the Work, he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for

maintenance during the period the section is opened to traffic prior to final acceptance. Any expense resulting from the opening of such portions under these circumstances, except for slides, shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall conduct the remainder of the construction operations so as to cause the least obstruction to traffic.

IX. NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS 9.1. The Owner shall not be precluded or stopped by any measurement, estimate, or certificate made

either before or after final acceptance of the Work and payment therefor from showing (1) the true amount and character of the Work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, (2) that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or (3) that the Work or materials do not conform with the provisions of the Contract. The Owner shall not be precluded or stopped, notwithstanding any such measurement, estimate, or certificate, and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor or his surety, or both, such damage as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the Owner or any representative of the Owner, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the Work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the Owner shall operate as a waiver of any portion of the Contract or of any power herein reserved or of any right to damages. A waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. The Owner reserves all rights, privileges, immunities and defenses available to it at law.

End of Section


SECTION 108

PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF WORK

I. PATENT FEES AND ROYALTIES 1.1. The Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the

performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of the Owner its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by the Owner in the Contract Documents.

1.2. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold

harmless the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer’s Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

II. TAXES 2.1. The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by the

Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the Project that are applicable during the performance of the Work. (The Contractor may apply to the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality for tax exempt status for certain wastewater products.)

III. NOTICE TO PROCEED 3.1. Written Notice to Proceed will be given after the Agreement has been executed and the required Bid

Security and insurances have been filed with and approved by the Owner. 3.2. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and all other governing bodies having jurisdiction, of the time

and location that work will begin at least 48 hours prior to beginning Work. IV. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 4.1. Within ten (10) Days of the Effective Date of the Agreement, a conference attended by the

Contractor, the Owner, and others as appropriate will be held to discuss the Project, and to discuss procedures relating to Shop Drawings, submittals, Applications for Payment, and other Project issues, and to establish a working relationship among the parties as to the Work.

V. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 5.1. Within ten (10) Days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Contractor shall submit a written

schedule to the Owner showing the proposed order of Work and indicating the time required for completion of major items of Work. This schedule shall take into account the passage or handling of


traffic with the least practicable interference and the orderly, timely and efficient prosecution of the Work. The schedule will be used as an indication of the sequence of the major construction operations and as a check on the progress of the Work.

A. A construction schedule in the form of a critical path shall be submitted to the Owner

as part of the submittal process prior to beginning construction and shall be updated when duration or sequencing changes.

B. Upon receipt of an approved “Work Schedule”, the Contractor shall submit to the

Owner, within 10 days,

1. An estimated payment schedule by each month of project duration. 2. A composite curve to show the estimated value of work completed and stored

materials less specified retainage. 3. key months when work will be 50, 80, 90, and 100 percent complete shall be

established. 4. Identify when facilities will be fully operational.

C. During the course of work, the Contractor shall update with new composite curves at

key months or whenever variation is expected to be more than plus or minus 10 percent. The original or previous composite curves shall be retained as dashed curves on all updates.

D. The Owner reserves the right to audit all reports and schedules. For cost-

reimbursement contracts, change orders issued for fixed priced contracts or other contracts in excess of $30,000, which include the provisions of services, the Contractor shall retain all books, records and other documents relative to this contract for five (5) years after final payment or until audited by the Office of the City Auditor or designee, whichever is sooner. The City of Norfolk Utilities Department its authorized agents and/or City Auditors shall have full access to and the right to examine and duplicate any of said materials during said period.

5.2. The Contractor shall update the progress schedule monthly to reflect any schedule changes required

to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The updated schedule shall be submitted to the Owner for acceptance with the monthly application for progress payment; no payment will be made if the updated schedule is not submitted. All proposed adjustments in the progress schedule shall generally conform to the progress schedule then in effect and will comply with any provisions of the general requirements applicable thereto.

VI. SUBCONTRACTS 6.1. Except as otherwise noted, contract Work, the cost of which is at least fifty percent (50%) of the total

Contract Price shall be performed by the Contractor’s own organization. 6.2. No part of the Work shall be transferred or subcontracted without prior written consent of the Owner,

and no such consent or approval shall release the Contractor from any obligations to the Owner or persons employed by the Subcontractors, or to those supplying materials to the Subcontractors.


6.3. The Contractor agrees that it is as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of its Subcontractors and persons either directly or indirectly employed by the Subcontractors as it is for the acts or omissions of persons directly employed.

6.4. Nothing contained in the Agreement shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor

and the Owner. 6.5. The Contractor shall provide the Owner, in writing, the names of any minority and

disadvantaged business subcontractors to be used on the project on the form provided, including the estimated dollar amount of such subcontract and the minority classification of such subcontractors. A minority and disadvantaged business is one that is at least 51% owned by an Asian American, Black, Hispanic, American Indian, Eskimo, Aleut, or Female. No contract pay applications or invoices will be reviewed or processed until the Owner receives this information.

VII. COMMENCEMENT AND PROSECUTION OF WORK 7.1. The Contractor shall commence Work within ten (10) Days of the date specified in the Notice to

Proceed. Time being of the essence of this Project, the Contractor shall prosecute the Work diligently, using such means and methods of construction as will secure its full completion within the time period specified in the Agreement. No Work shall be done at the site prior to the date specified in the Notice to Proceed.

7.2. The Contractor shall proceed with the Work at such rate of progress to insure full completion within

the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the Contract Time for the completion of the Work as specified in the Agreement is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the Project.

7.3. The Contract Time will commence on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 7.4. Once the Contractor has commenced Work, it shall be prosecuted continuously and to the fullest

extent possible except for interruptions caused by delays authorized or ordered by the Owner by a Change Order or by weather.

Except as set forth below, Contractor agrees that it will make no claim for damages arising from delay and that the Contractor’s sole remedy for delay is to request a Change Order as set forth herein. The Contract time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner determines if: i) The Contractor is delayed in the progress of work by any act or omission of the Owner or

the Engineer, or by any separate Contractor employed by the Owner, or by strikes, lockouts, fire, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipated, or acts of nature;

ii) Such delay affects the overall completion of the work;

iii) The Contractor gives written notice to the Owner within 48 hours of the start of the

occurrence, stating the cause of the potential delay and estimate of the possible time extension involved; and


iv) The Contractor gives written notice to the Owner of any actual time extension requested as

a result of the aforementioned occurrences within 10 days after the delay has been remedied.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, it is agreed that this paragraph does not prevent Contractor from making a claim for costs or damages for unreasonable delay caused by acts of omissions of the Owner, its agents or employees due to causes within their control, provided that the Contractor satisfies the notice requirements contained herein.

7.5. Gifts, gratuities, or favors shall not be given or offered by the Contractor to personnel of the Owner. 7.6. The Contractor shall not employ any personnel of the Owner or the Engineer for any services without

the prior written consent of the Owner. 7.7. Workers shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform properly the Work assigned to them.

Workers engaged in special or skilled work shall have sufficient experience in such work and in the operation of equipment required to perform it properly and satisfactorily. Any person employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor who, in the opinion of the Owner, does not perform his work in a proper and skillful manner or is intemperate or disorderly shall, at the written request of the Owner, be removed forthwith by the Contractor or subcontractor employing the person and shall not be employed again on any portion of the work without the approval of the Owner.

7.8. Equipment shall be of sufficient size and in such mechanical condition as to meet the requirements of

the Work and produce a satisfactory quality of work. Equipment and the Contractor’s methods and means shall be such that no damage to the roadway, adjacent property, or other highways will result from its use. The Owner may order the removal and require replacement of unsatisfactory equipment.

VIII. SUSPENSION OF WORK 8.1. The Owner may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period

of not more than 90 Days or such further time as agreed upon by the Contractor, by Written Notice to the Contractor. Such Notice shall specify the date on which Work shall be resumed and the Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so specified. The Contractor will be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension if the Contractor makes a claim in accordance with the Contract Documents, except that no such increase or extension shall be allowed if the suspension was due to a failure by the Contractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Agreement.

IX. TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT 9.1. Termination for the Convenience of the Owner

The performance of Work under this Agreement may be terminated by the Owner in accordance with

this section in whole, or in part(s), whenever the Owner shall determine that such termination is in the best interest of the Owner. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Agreement is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.


After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall: A. Stop Work under the Agreement on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of

termination. B. Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities, except as may be

necessary for completion of such portion of the Work under the Agreement that is not terminated.

C. Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the

Work terminated by the notice of termination.

D. Assign to the Owner, and as directed by the Owner, all of the right, title and interest of the Contractor under the orders and subcontracts so terminated. The Owner shall have the right and discretion to settle or pay any and all claims arising out of the termination of such orders and subcontracts.

E. Settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such termination of orders and

subcontracts, with the approval or ratification of the Owner. This approval or ratification will be final for all purposes of this section.

F. Transfer title and deliver to the Owner, as directed by the Owner, the fabricated or

unfabricated parts, Work in process, completed Work, supplies, and other materials produced as a part of or acquired in connection with the performance of the Work terminated by the notice of termination, and the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if the Agreement has been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the Owner.

G. Use his best efforts to sell as directed or authorized by the Owner, property of the type

referred to in Paragraph F above; provided, however, that the Contractor shall not be required to extend credit to any purchaser. The proceeds of any such transfer or disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the Owner to the Contractor under this Agreement or shall otherwise be credited to the Contract price or cost of the Work covered by this Agreement or paid in such manner as directed by the Owner. The Contractor may acquire any such property under the conditions prescribed and at a price or prices approved by the Owner.

H. Complete performance of that Work which was not terminated by the Owner.

I. Take such action as may be necessary, or as the Owner may direct, for the protection and

preservation of the property related to this Agreement which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the Owner has, or may acquire, an interest.

J. Within 30 Days after the receipt of the Notice of termination, the Contractor may submit a

list to the Owner for approval, certified as to quantity and quality of any or all items of, inventory not previously disposed of, exclusive of items, the disposition of which has been directed or authorized by the Owner, and may request the Owner to remove such approved items or enter into a storage agreement covering the same. Not later than 15 Days thereafter, the Owner will accept title to such approved items and remove them or enter into a storage


agreement covering same. The list submitted shall be subject to final verification by the Owner upon removal of the items, or if the items were stored within 45 Days from the date of submission of the list. Any necessary adjustment to correct the list as submitted shall be made prior to final settlement.

K. Within 30 Days after receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit to the

Owner his termination claim. Such claim shall be submitted in writing. Upon failure of the Contractor to submit its termination claim within the time allowed, the Owner may, at its discretion, reject such termination claim. Such termination claim shall include the cost of the following:

1. The cost of supplies accepted by the Owner and not previously paid for by the

Owner, appropriately adjusted for any saving of freight or other charges. 2. The cost incurred in the performance of the Work terminated, including Initial cost

and preparatory expense allocable thereto, but exclusive of any cost attributable to supplies paid or to be paid for by the Owner.

3. The cost of settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of Work under

subcontracts or orders which are properly chargeable to the terminated portion of the Agreement, exclusive of amounts paid or payable on account of supplies or materials delivered or services furnished by subcontractors or vendors prior to the effective date of notice of termination and previously paid for by the Owner.

4. A reasonable amount of profit or commission, which will be determined based on the

Project's specific overhead and expense data at the rate computed in the original Contract Price or, at the discretion of the Owner, as determined by an audit. The cost of the audit will be borne by the Contractor.

5. Cost of reasonable storage, transportation and other costs incurred in connection with

the protection or disposition of property allocable to this termination portion of the Agreement.

6. The total sum to be paid to the Contractor shall not exceed the Contract Price as

reduced by the amount of payments previously made and its further reduced by the Contract Price of Work not terminated. Said total sum shall also be reduced by the reasonable value, as determined by the Owner, of property which is destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged so as to become undeliverable to the Owner or to a buyer.

9.2. Termination with Cause/Default In the event that the Contractor shall for any reason or through any cause be in default of the terms of

this Agreement, the Owner may give the Contractor written Notice of such default by certified mail/return receipt requested at the address set forth herein.

Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall have ten (10) Days from the date such notice is mailed in

which to cure the default. Upon failure of the Contractor to cure the default, the Owner may immediately cancel and terminate this Agreement as of the mailing date of the default notice.


Upon termination, the Contractor shall withdraw its personnel and equipment, cease performance of any further Work under this Agreement, and turn over to the Owner any Work in process for which payment has been made.

In the event of violations of law, safety or health standards and regulations, this Agreement may be

immediately canceled and terminated by the Owner and provisions herein with respect to opportunity to cure default shall not be applicable.

9.3. Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Agreement

Should the Work be stopped for a period of 90 Days or more, through no fault of the Contractor, or should the Owner fail to pay the Contractor any payment within a reasonable length of time after said payment shall become due, the Contractor may, upon seven (7) Days written notice to the Owner, stop Work, or terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed, plus any loss actually sustained, plus reasonable profit and damage; provided, however, the total recovery from Owner shall not exceed the Contract Price.

X. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 10.1. It is mutually understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and Owner that in the execution

of the Work, time is an essential element of the Agreement, and it is important that the Work proceed vigorously to completion.

10.2. The Owner has the right to deduct any liquidated damages from any money in the Owner’s hands,

otherwise due, or to become due, to the Contractor, and to sue for and recover any additional compensation for damages for non-performance of the Work or failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time.

10.3. The assessment of liquidated damages for failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time

shall not constitute a waiver of the Owner’s right to collect any additional damages that the Owner may sustain by failure of the Contractor to carry out the terms of the Agreement.

The contract will contain a clause deducting One Thousand Dollars and No Cents ($1000.00) per calendar day as liquidated damages for failure to complete work prior to the established Substantial Completion date. And an additional Five Hundred Dollars and No Cents ($500.00) per calendar day as liquidated damages for failure to complete work prior to the established Final Completion date. If substantial completion is not achieved by the time of final completion then liquidated damages for both substantial and final completion shall run concurrently until substantial completion is achieved.

10.4. In the event of delay in the completion of the Work as specified beyond the Completion Date as

adjusted by Change Orders, it would be difficult to determine the exact amount of the loss or damages suffered by the Owner due to delays in completion of the Agreement. Therefore, for every -Day of delay past Completion Date of this Agreement as adjusted by Change Orders, the Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety will be liable to the Owner, as liquidated damages for delay and not as a penalty, in the sum designated in Section 102, III. Bid Form, and in paragraph H of the Agreement between Contractor and Owner as set forth in Section 103, for each and every calendar Day the Contractor shall be in default, as follows:


A. If Substantial Completion has not been achieved by the scheduled Substantial Completion date, the Substantial Completion liquidated damages shall accrue each day until Substantial Completion is achieved.

B. If neither Substantial Completion nor Final Completion has been achieved by the scheduled

Final Completion date, only Substantial Completion liquidated damages shall occur each day until Substantial Completion is achieved and, thereafter, Final Completion liquidated damages shall accrue each day until Final Completion is achieved.

C. If Substantial Completion has been achieved but Final Completion has not been achieved by

the Final Completion date, Final Completion liquidated damages shall accrue each day until Final Completion is achieved.

D. Substantial Completion liquidated damages and Final Completion liquidated damages shall

not run concurrently.

E. The scheduled Final Completion date shall not be extended, in any case, solely because Substantial Completion was not achieved by the scheduled Substantial Completion date.

F. This paragraph will not apply to delays in completion of the Work due to acts of God, acts of

the Public Enemy, acts of the Government (in either its sovereign or contractual capacity), fires, floods, strikes, or unusually severe weather, provided, that the Contractor shall, within five (5) days from the end of the month in which such delay occurred, notify the Owner in writing of the causes of delay and the facts relating thereto; and, provided that such delay occurs prior to the Substantial Completion date or, if Substantial Completion has been achieved, such delay occurs prior to the Final Completion date. Failure to provide such notice shall preclude the Contractor from claiming that delays resulted from the acts of God, acts of the Public Enemy, acts of the Government (in either its sovereign or contractual capacity), fires, floods, strikes, or unusually severe weather.

G. Nothing in the above clause shall be interpreted as limiting in any way, the Owner’s right to

proceed against the Contractor for additional damages or losses. Liquidated damages are for delay only and are in addition to any other rights available to the Owner by contract or law. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, the Contractor shall waive any defense as to the validity of such liquidated damages as set forth herein on the grounds that such liquidated damages are void as penalties or are not reasonably related to actual damages.

10.5. Weather shall be considered “unusually severe”, only if a weather condition (or any combination of

weather conditions) prevents the Contractor from working a number of workdays during a calendar month, which number exceeds the number of workdays listed below for that calendar month. Delays will only be allowed for the amount of lost work days in excess of the following:

January 6 July 4 February 4 August 3 March 4 September 3 April 3 October 3 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 5

10.6. The Contractor shall anticipate the potential loss of the number of workdays listed above for each calendar month due to weather, and shall schedule the Work accordingly. Any schedules submitted shall include the above number of days each month as lost days. The Owner shall determine, upon


examination of submitted evidence, whether or not weather prevented the Contractor from performing Work on the days claimed by the Contractor. The Owner’s determination shall be final and binding upon the parties.

10.7. The Work shall be considered complete when the following criteria have been met; all items of the

Work have been constructed, inspected and accepted by the Owner and further that all punch list items have been corrected and the Owner has issued a letter of acceptance.

XI. SEPARATE CONTRACTS BY OWNER 11.1. The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with the Project, the work under

which may proceed simultaneously with the execution of this Agreement. The Contractor shall afford other separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and the Contractor shall take all reasonable action to coordinate its Work with theirs. If the work performed by the separate contractor is defective or so performed as to prevent the Contractor from performing the Work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner upon discovering such conditions. Upon receiving notification, the Owner shall take such appropriate steps as are necessary to allow the Contractor to perform Work under the Agreement, and appropriate extensions of time and change orders will be given to the Contractor, pursuant to the Agreement, to compensate for any delays and extra costs caused by separate contractor's performance.

XII. INDEMNIFICATION 12.1. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold

harmless the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer’s Consultants and officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including, but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act, errors, omissions, recklessness, or intentionally wrongful conduct of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person or entity.

12.2. In any and all claims against the Owner or any of the Owner’s consultants, agents, officers, directors,

or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any such Subcontractor, supplier or other person or organization under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.


12.3. The indemnification obligations of the Contractor shall not extend to the damages caused by the Owner and the Owner’s consultants, officers, directors, employees or agents resulting from the negligent preparation or approval of, Drawings, or Specifications.

End of Section


SECTION 109

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

I. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.1. General

A. Measurement will be made on the basis of completion of the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents and the appropriate specification section. B. Measurement of quantities will be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner.

The methods of measurement and computations used in determination of quantities of materials furnished and installed shall be those generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice.

C. The term "Complete in Place" will mean that the item of Work shall be furnished and

installed in accordance with the Contract Documents complete with all appurtenances necessary for the item to be used for its intended function. Testing and acceptable results shall be included.

D. Linear foot and vertical foot measurements shall be measured along the horizontal plane of

the ground or paved surface. E. Area computations shall be made on the surface. Pay measurements for area computations

will not exceed plan dimensions as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Owner in writing.

F. No payment will be made for length, width, or depth, in excess of that shown on the

Drawings or specified in the Specifications for any construction, unless otherwise approved by the Owner in writing.

G. The term "Each" when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment for the

Work described in the Contract Documents. H. The word "Lump Sum" when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment for

Work described in the item, including all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

I. Quantities will be measured and paid for in accordance with one of the following methods,

and as specified on the Bid form

1.2 Incidental Items A. There are numerous incidental items of work that are required to complete the Project.

While these items may not be specifically mentioned or illustrated by the Contract Documents and there may be no specific pay items listed for them, the Contractor will be required to perform those incidental tasks that can be anticipated through inspection of the


Contract Documents, inspection of the construction area, and experience in this class of construction.

B. Items considered incidental work shall not be measured for payment or paid for as such

unless specified as unit price by items on the bid form. These items and their costs shall be included in the unit prices or lump sum bid for the pay items unless bid separately. Incidental items include but are not limited to the following:

1. Allaying dust and mud 2. Daily cleanup, Daily Pavement restoration 3. Excavation and dewatering 4. Furnishing, hauling, placing, manipulating, and compacting material 5. Location of existing utilities 6. Material royalties 7. Mobilization and demobilization 8. Offsite disposal of excess excavated, surplus and remnant excavated materials 9. Permits, unless provided by the Owner 10. Removal and replacement of existing signs, fences, mail boxes, and similar existing

improvements 11. Site restoration and cleanup 12. Site security 13. Stakeout and surveying 14. Traffic control 15. Minor relocation of buried cables, gas lines, water lines, sewer lines, or similar

utility lines 2 inches and smaller in diameter 16. Construction entrances 17. Pavement marking 18. Final Surface restoration 19. Top soil and seeding 20. Clearing and grubbing 21. Protection of existing utilities and other facilities.

C. Description of Measurement and Payment Items Refer to Section 110 - Special Provisions. Appendix D

1.3 Schedule of Values for Lump Sum Bid Items

A. Within fourteen (14) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values for all of the Work which shall include quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and shall subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices shall include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. The Owner shall review the schedule and shall respond in writing to the Contractor within ten (10) Days either approving or disapproving the schedule. If the schedule of values is disapproved, the Contractor shall resubmit the schedule with revised value or additional substantiating data and the Owner shall either approve or disapprove the revised schedule within ten (10) Days. No payments shall be processed or approved until the schedule of values is approved by the Owner.


1.4 Application for Progress Payment by Contractor

A. Unless otherwise provided in this Section, the Owner shall make monthly progress payments to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved Application for Payment for Work performed during the preceding calendar month as approved by the Owner.

B. At least ten (10) Days before each partial progress payment (but not more often than once a

month), the Contractor shall submit to the Owner an Application for Payment filled out and signed by the Contractor for the Work completed during the period covered by the partial progress payment estimate and supported by such data as is required by the Contract Documents.

C. The schedule of values for lump sum items established as provided in Section 109-1.2 shall

serve as the basis for progress payments and shall be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to the Owner.

D. Record drawings must be submitted with monthly invoices per section 105.V

1.5 Payment for Material on Hand

If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work, but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other instrument documenting that the materials and equipment are free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, all of which will be satisfactory to the Owner. The Owner, at its sole discretion, may not pay for stored materials without prejudice and without cause.

1.6 Review of Applications for Progress Payments

A. The Owner shall, within ten (10) Days after receipt of each Application for Payment, make such investigations as deemed necessary to verify the accuracy of the Application for Payment and either accept the application as accurate and suitable for payment or return the Application to the Contractor indicating in writing the Owner’s reasons for refusing payment. If payment is refused, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application and the Owner shall have an additional ten (10) Days after receipt of the corrected Application for Payment from the Contractor to determine whether this Application is accurate and suitable for payment.

B. The Owner shall, within 30 Days after acceptance of the Application for Payment, make

payment to the Contractor. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount because claims have been made against the Owner on account of the Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work, or because Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, or because there are other claims entitling the Owner to a set-off against the payment. The Owner shall give the Contractor immediate written Notice stating the reasons for its failure to make payment.

C. The Owner may also refuse to make payment of the full amount because there are other

items entitling the Owner to retain set-offs from the amount recommended, including but not limited to:


1. Owner compensation to the Engineer for actual costs for extra personnel hours for

labor plus expenses because of the following Contractor caused events:

a. Witnessing re-testing of corrected or replaced defective work.

b. Return visits to manufacturing facilities to witness factory testing or re-testing.

c. Evaluation of proposed substitutes and in making changes to Contract

Documents occasioned thereby.

d. Overtime worked by the Contractor necessitating the Engineer, Resident Project Representative (and support staff, if any), to work overtime.

2. Liability for liquidated damages incurred by the Contractor as set forth in the

Agreement.

3. Loss to Owner caused by Contractor acts or omissions including, but not limited to:

a. Defective Work not remedied;

b. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims against the Contractor;

c. Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or

for materials or labor;

d. A reasonable doubt that the Project can be completed for the balance then unpaid;

e. Failure to maintain (each month) the record set of Drawings and

Specifications. Failure to provide the Owner with record Drawings and Specifications within thirty (30) calendar Days from the date of the Substantial Completion;

f. Failure to periodically remove and dispose of accumulated debris, rubbish,

and discarded/damaged materials;

g. Persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents;

h. A reasonable doubt that the Work will be completed within the Contract

Time.

4. Failure of the Contractor to submit an updated progress schedule or other required supporting documentation (if requested by the Owner) to the Owner with the monthly application for progress payment.


1.7 Retained Funds

A. The Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of the total amount of each partial progress payment to assure faithful performance of the Agreement by the Contractor. The Owner may reduce the retainage to an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the value of the Work remaining to be completed after the Work has achieved Substantial Completion. The Owner will release all remaining retainage upon Final Payment.

B. Pursuant to and in accordance with Section 2.2-4334 of the Code of Virginia, the Contractor

may exercise the option to use the escrow account utilization procedure with respect to retained funds. The Contractor may do so by indicating its preference for this procedure in the appropriate space provided on the Bid Form.

1. Should this option be selected, the Contractor shall execute the Escrow Agreement

and shall submit same to the Owner in the manner prescribed by law. If the Escrow Agreement form is not submitted as noted, the Contractor shall forfeit such rights to the use of the escrow account utilization procedure.

2. In order to have retained funds paid to an escrow account, the Escrow Agreement shall be executed by the Contractor, the escrow agent, and the surety, and shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner for approval by the Owner’s attorney. The Contractor’s escrow agent shall be a trust company, bank or savings institution with its principal office located in the Commonwealth of Virginia. The Escrow Agreement shall contain the complete address of the escrow agent and surety, and the executed Escrow Agreement will be authority for the Owner to make payment of retained funds to the Escrow Agent. After approving the Escrow Agreement, the Owner shall pay to the escrow agent the funds retained as provided herein except that funds retained for lack of progress or other deficiencies on the part of the Contractor shall not be paid to the Escrow Agent. The Escrow Agent may, in accordance with the terms of the Escrow Agreement, invest the funds paid into the escrow account and pay earnings on such investments to the Contractor or release the funds to the Contractor provided that such funds are fully secured by approved securities.

3. Retained funds invested and securities held as collateral for retainage may be

released only as and when directed by the Owner. When the Final Payment is paid, the Owner shall direct to the Contractor monies due as determined by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to recall retained funds and to release retained funds to the surety upon receipt of written request from the Contractor or in the event of default.

4. The escrow account procedure shall apply to any contract for the sum of Two

Hundred Thousand Dollars ($200,000), or more, for construction of highways, roads, streets, bridges, parking lots, demolition, clearing, grading, excavating, paving, pile driving, miscellaneous drainage structures, and the installation of water, gas, sewer lines, and pumping stations.

1.8 Conditions of Payment to Contractor A. All material and Work covered by partial progress payments shall thereupon become the sole


property of the Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for the safety and protection of all materials and Work upon which payments have been made or the restoration or replacement of any damaged or stolen Work or property or as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all the terms of the Agreement

B. Prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner, with the concurrence of the Contractor, may use any

completed or substantially completed portions of the Work. Such use shall not constitute an acceptance of such portions of the Work.

C. The Owner shall have the right to enter the premises for the purpose of doing work not covered by

the Contract Documents. This provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of the Work, or the restoration of any damaged Work except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Owner.

D. The Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner or the Owner's agents harmless from all claims

growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, tools and all supplies, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall, at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature designated above have been paid, discharged, or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so the Owner may, after having notified the Contractor, either pay unpaid bills or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged whereupon payment to the Contractor shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents but in no event shall the provisions of this Section be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to either Contractor, the Surety, or any third party. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract Documents by the Owner to the Contractor and the Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor for any such payments made in good faith.

E. The Contractor shall take one of the two following actions within seven (7) days after receipt of

amounts paid to the Contractor by the Owner for Work performed by the Subcontractor under the Agreement:

1. Pay to the Subcontractor the proportionate share of the total payment received attributable to

the Work performed by the Subcontractor under the Agreement; or

2. Notify the Owner and Subcontractor, in writing, or his intention to withhold all or a part of the Subcontractor’s payment with the reason for nonpayment.

F. All contracts awarded by the Contractor to a Subcontractor for any portion of the Work shall

include:

1. An interest clause that obligates the Contractor to pay interest to the Subcontractor on all amounts owed by the Contractor that remain unpaid after seven (7) days following receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Owner for Work performed by the Subcontractor under that contract, except for amounts withheld as allowed.

2. An interest rate clause stating, “Unless otherwise provided under the terms of this contract, interest shall accrue at the rate of one percent per month.”


3. A payment clause that requires (i) individual contractors to provide their social security

numbers and (ii) proprietorships, partnerships, limited liability companies and corporations to provide their federal employer identification numbers.

G. The Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to

include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements as specified in Section 1.7 above, with respect to each lower-tier Subcontractor.

H. A Contractor’s obligation to pay an interest charge to a Subcontractor pursuant to the payment

clause in this section may not be construed to be an obligation of the Owner. A contract modification may not be made for the purpose of providing reimbursement for such interest charge. A cost reimbursement claim may not include any amount for reimbursement for such interest charge.

1.9 Final Payment

After the Contractor has completed all corrective Work as determined by a final inspection to the satisfaction of the Owner and has delivered all maintenance and operations manuals, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for partial progress payments. Within thirty (30) days after approval, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor the amount stated, less all prior payments and advances to or for the account of the Contractor. All prior estimates and payments including those relating to extra Work shall be subject to correction by this payment, which is called the Final Payment. The Contractor's obligation to perform the Work and complete the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither approval of any progress or Final Payment by the Owner nor the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any payment by Owner to Contractor under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Project or any part thereof by Owner, nor any act of acceptance by Owner nor any failure to do so, nor any correction of defective Work by Owner shall constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.10 Acceptance of Final Payment Constitutes Release

The acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Payment shall be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with this Work excepting the Contractor's claims for interest upon Final Payment, should this payment be improperly delayed. No payment, final or otherwise, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall the same relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the Contractor or his Surety from any obligation under the Contract, the Performance Bond and Payment Bond.

1.11 Assignments

Neither party to the Agreement shall sell, transfer, assign or otherwise dispose of the whole or any parts of the Agreement or of the right, title or interest therein without the prior written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner.


1.12 Payment Affidavit

The Owner, before making any payment, including the final payment, if it is deemed that such procedure necessary to protect his interests, may require the Contractor to furnish an affidavit from all subcontractors and material suppliers used in conjunction with this Contract that each has been paid in full, or in the alternative, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information, all payments have been made and that there is no basis under which a claim against the payment bond could be filed. However, the Owner may make payments in part or in full to the Contractor without requiring the affidavits, and the payments so made shall not impair the obligations of any Surety or Sureties on any bond or bonds furnished under this Contract.

II. CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS 2.1. The Owner may at any time, as the need arises, order changes within the scope of the Work without

invalidating the Agreement. If such changes increase or decrease the amount due under the Contract Documents, or in the time required for performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment shall be authorized by Change Order.

2.2. The Contract Price and Contract Time may be changed only by a Change Order, approved by the

Owner prior to the performance of the Work by the Contractor or granted by the Owner upon written Notice by Contractor submitted in accordance with Section 104-5.2 and 5.3 or Section 105-16.2. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for increase or decrease in the Contract Price or Contract Time shall be established in accordance with the following methods in the order of precedence listed below:

A. established contract unit prices; B. an agreed lump sum or unit price established by direct negotiation between the Contractor

and the Owner; or,

C. In the event that any changes in the Work are not settled under A. and B. above, the Contract Price shall be adjusted for non-negotiated items in accordance with the following:

1. In any case such change involves extra Work which is performed by the Contractor, the

Contract Price shall be increased by fifteen (15%) for overhead and profit. (a) the direct cost of such Work, as mutually agreed upon or otherwise as determined in accordance with the Contract Documents, and (b) ten percent (10%) of the amount of (a) to cover Contractor’s additional job (field and home office) overhead, and (c) five percent (5%) of the sum of (a) and (b) to cover Contractor’s additional job profit.

2. In any case such change involves extra Work which is performed by a Subcontractor, the

Contract Price shall be increased by ten percent (10%) of total determined in paragraph C(1) above for overhead and profit. (a) the amount paid by the Contractor to the Subcontractor for such extra Work, and (b) seven and one-half percent (7-1/2%) of the amount paid to the Subcontractor to cover the Contractor’s additional job (field and home office) overhead and (c) five percent (5%) of the sum of (a) and (b) to cover Contractor’s additional job profit. On Work performed by the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor shall be allowed overhead and profit in accordance with paragraph C(1) above.

3. In the case of either subparagraph 1 or 2 above, the Contract Price shall also be increased by

the corresponding increase in the cost of the Contractor’s performance bond.


2.3. It is the Contractor's responsibility to notify his Surety of any change affecting the general scope of

the Work or change in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time so that the amount of the applicable Bonds shall be adjusted accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish proof of such adjustment to the Owner.

2.4. Whenever changes, alterations, additions, omissions, or revisions are called for by the Owner for

which the necessary Drawings and details have been completed and submitted to the Contractor, or when changes, alterations, additions or omissions are clearly given in writing to the Contractor, the Contractor is to submit an itemized statement of quantities and prices incidental to such revisions, changes, additions and omissions.

2.5. The Owner may at any time order minor changes within the scope of Work by issuing a Field Order.

The Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any changes in the Work so ordered by the Owner unless the Contractor believes that such Field Order entitles the Contractor to a change in Contract Price or Time or both, in which event the Contractor shall give the Owner written Notice thereof within seven (7) days after the receipt of the ordered change. The Contractor shall not execute such changes pending the receipt of an executed Change Order or further instruction from the Owner. The Owner shall respond to such written Notice from Contractor within twenty-one (21) days after receipt.

2.6. If any item in the Agreement is determined to be unnecessary for the proper completion of the Work

contracted, the Owner may, upon written Notice to the Contractor, eliminate such item from the Agreement. Payment will not be made for such item except that the Contractor shall be compensated for the actual cost of any Work performed for the installation of such item and the net cost of materials purchased, including freight and tax costs, as evidenced by invoice. No additional compensation will be made for overhead or anticipated profit.

2.7. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time due to

any condition or alleged condition if:

A. The Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time the Contractor made a final commitment to the Owner in respect of Contract Price and Contract Time by the submission of a Bid; or

B. The existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a

result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test or study of the site and contiguous areas required by the Contract Documents to be conducted by or for the Contractor prior to the Contractor making such final commitment; or

C. The Contractor failed to give the written Notice within the time and as required by Section

104-5.2 and 5.3 or Section 105-16.2.


2 CHANGE ORDER

PROJECT: CONTRACT TIME:CHANGE ORDER No. CONTRACT No.:DATE OF CO: VENDOR CODE:

Description of work under this contract:

Changes Ordered:See attached Supplemental Sheet

Reason for Change Order:

Put a brief explanation for the C.O. (Use the explanation you put in the "Summary of Scope of Services" section of the Document Transmittal Form).

Subject to the following conditions an equitable adjustment is established as set out below:

( ) Not Changed ( ) Not Changed( ) Increased By OVER $10,000.00 Dollars ( ) Increased By Calendar Days( ) Decreased By Dollars ( ) Decreased By Calendar Days

Contract Amount adjusted to $**** Bonded amount is $***. Bond rider is / is not required. (The Bonded Amt PLUS CO Amt should equal Contract Adjusted Amount)The foregoing is in accordance with the items listed on the supplemental sheet(s)and as listed below:

A. The aforementioned change, and work affected thereby, is subject to all contract stipulations and covenants.B. The rights of the City are not prejudiced; andC. All claims against the City which are incidental to or as a consequence of the aforementioned changes are

satisfied.

We are sending you the four (4) original copies of this change order for your acceptance. Please return to us

the 4 original copies, all bearing your dated signature. One copy will be returned to you after approval by the City.

City of Norfolk

Company:By: Kristen M. Lentz P.E.

Director Signature: Date:

I hereby certify that the money required for this change order is in the City Treasury to the credit of the fund from which it is to be drawn and not appropriated for any other purpose.

$Date

Approved as to form byCity Attorney: 6/2013

Deputy City Manager Date

Amount Account No. Director of Finance

City of NorfolkDEPARTMENT OF UTILITIES

CHANGE ORDER

Contract Time

Calendar Days

Contract Price

Accepted by Contractor

Date


IV. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

PROJECT SUMMARY

Date:____________________________ Contractor’s Name:_______________________________________ Project Name:_______________________________________ Project Number:_______________________ Original Contract Amount: $________________ Original Contract Time: ________________ days Adjusted Contract Amount (by approved Change Orders): $________________ Adjusted Contract Time (by approved Change Orders): _______________ days Adjusted Contract Completion Date: _______________

STATUS OF WORK PERFORMED

A. Total Value of All Work Performed to Date: $_______________ B. Less _______% Retained by Owner: $_______________ C. Net Amount Earned on Contract to Date: (A-B) $_______________ D. Less Amounts of Previous Payments Approved: $_______________ BALANCE DUE THIS PAYMENT: (C – D) $_______________ Value of Work Remaining to be Completed: $_____________ Percentage Complete to Date (Value/Time): % % CERTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR I certify to the best of my knowledge and belief that all items and amounts on the face of the attached estimate and invoice and this Application for Payment are correct; that all Work has been performed and/or material supplied in full accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including all duly authorized deviations, substitutions, alterations, additions and/or deletions; that the foregoing is a true and correct statement of the Contract Price up to and including the last day of the period covered by this estimate and Application for Payment; that no part of the "BALANCE DUE THIS PAYMENT" has been received; that all previous Progress Payments received on this Agreement have been applied by the undersigned to discharge in full all obligations of the undersigned incurred in connection with the Work covered by prior applications for payment under this Agreement; and that all materials and equipment incorporated in said payment or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment are free and clear of all liens, claims, security interest and encumbrances. APPROVALS This Application for Payment has been checked, verified and approved for payment by: ______________________ _________________________________________________________ Contractor By Title Date ______________________ ________________ ________________________ _______________ Construction Inspector By Title Date ______________________ ________________ ________________________ _______________ Engineer (Consultant) By Title Date ______________________ ________________ ________________________ ______________ Project Manager (City of Norfolk) By Title Date


V. ESCROW AGREEMENT THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , 20 , by, between and among the (Owner) and _________________________________(Contractor), and__________________________________________________ (Bank), a trust company, bank, or savings and loan institution with its principal office located in the Commonwealth and ___________________________________ (Surety), provides: 5.1. The Owner and the Contractor have entered into an Agreement dated (month, date, year), with

respect to a Project titled _____________________________________ (the Agreement). This Escrow Agreement is pursuant to, but in no way amends or modifies the Agreement. Payments made hereunder or the release of funds from escrow shall not be deemed approval or acceptance of performance by the Contractor.

5.2. In order to assure full and satisfactory performance by the Contractor of its obligations under the

Agreement, the Owner is entitled to retain certain amounts otherwise due the Contractor, known as retainage. The Contractor has, with the approval of the Owner, elected to have such retainage held in escrow by the Bank. This document sets forth the terms of the escrow. The Bank shall not be deemed a party to, bound by, or required to inquire into the terms of the Agreement or any other instrument or agreement between the Owner and the Contractor.

5.3. The Owner shall from time to time pursuant to its Agreement pay to the Bank amounts retained by it

under the Agreement. Except as to amounts actually withdrawn from escrow by the Owner, the Contractor shall look solely to the Bank for the payment of funds retained under the Agreement and paid by the Owner to the Bank.

The risk of loss by diminution of the principal of any funds invested under the terms of this Escrow Agreement shall be solely upon the Contractor.

5.4. Funds and securities held by the Bank pursuant to this Escrow Agreement shall not be subject to

levy, garnishment, attachment, lien or other process whatsoever. The Contractor agrees not to assign, pledge, discount, sell or otherwise transfer or dispose of its interest in the escrow account or any part thereof, except to the Surety.

5.5. The following securities, and none other, are approved securities for all purposes of this Escrow

Agreement:

A. Unites States Treasury Bonds, United States Treasury Notes, Unites States Treasury Certificates of Indebtedness or United States Treasury Bills;

B. Bonds, notes and other evidences of indebtedness unconditionally guaranteed as to the

payment of principal and interest by the United States.

C. Bonds or notes of the Commonwealth of Virginia;

D. Bonds of any political subdivision of the Commonwealth of Virginia, if such bonds carried, at the time of purchase by the Bank or deposit by the Contractor, a Standard and Poor’s or Moody’s Investors Service rating of at least “A”; and,


E. Certificates of deposit issued by commercial banks located within the Commonwealth, including, but not limited to, those insured by the Bank and its affiliates.

F. Any bonds, notes, or other evidences of indebtedness listed in Paragraphs A through C may

be purchased pursuant to a repurchase agreement with a bank, within or without the Commonwealth of Virginia having a combined capital, surplus and undivided profit of not less than $25,000,000, provided the obligation of the Bank to repurchase is within the time limitations established for investments as set forth herein. The repurchase agreement shall be considered a purchase of such securities even if title, and/or possession of such securities is not transferred to the Escrow Agent, so long as the repurchase obligation of the bank is collateralized by the securities themselves, and the securities have on the date of the repurchase agreement a fair market value equal to at least 100% of the amount of the repurchase obligation of the Bank and the securities are held by a third party, and segregated from other securities owned by the Bank.

No security is approved hereunder which matures more than five years after the date of its purchase by the Bank or deposit by the Contractor.

5.6. The Contractor may from time to time withdraw the whole or any portion of the escrowed funds by

depositing with the Bank securities approved, in writing, by the Owner in an amount equal to, or in excess of, the amount so withdrawn. Any securities so deposited or withdrawn shall be valued at such time of deposit or withdrawal at the lower par or market value, the latter as determined by the Bank. Any securities so deposited shall thereupon become a part of the escrowed fund.

Upon receipt of a direction signed by the chief administrative and financial official of the Owner, the Bank shall pay the principal of the fund, or any specified amount thereof, to the Owner. Such payment shall be made as soon as is practicable after receipt of the direction.

Upon receipt of a direction signed by either the chief administrative or the chief financial official on behalf of the Owner, the Bank shall pay and deliver the principal of the fund, or any specified portion thereof, to the Contractor, in cash or in kind, as may be specified by the Contractor. Such payment and delivery shall be made as soon as is practicable after receipt of the direction.

5.7. For its services hereunder the Bank shall be entitled to a reasonable fee in accordance with its

published schedule of fees or as may be agreed upon by the Bank and the Contractor. Such fee and any other costs of administration of this Escrow Agreement shall be paid from the income earned upon the escrow fund and, if such income is not sufficient to pay the same, by the Contractor.

Under no circumstances shall the Owner be responsible to the Bank for any fee or costs of administering this Escrow Agreement, account, or escrow fund.

5.8. The net income earned and received upon the principal of the escrow fund shall be paid over to the

Contractor in quarterly or more frequent installations. Until so paid or applied to pay the Bank’s fee or any other costs of administration such income shall be deemed a part of the principal of the fund. All income earned shall be reported by the Bank to the Internal Revenue Service and other taxing authorities on the Contractor’s Tax. I.D. Number, except for interest withdrawn by the Owner pursuant to paragraph IV.


5.9. The Surety undertakes no obligation hereby but joins in the escrow Agreement for the sole purpose of acknowledging that its obligations as surety for the Contractor’s performance of the Agreement are not affected hereby.

WITNESS the following signatures, all as of the day and year first above written. OWNER: ______________________________________ Name of Owner By: _______________________________________ Name

_______________________________________ Title

CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________ Name of Contractor ______________________________________ Contractor’s Tax I.D. Number By: ______________________________________ Officer, Partner, or Owner BANK: ______________________________________ Name of Bank ______________________________________ Mailing Address for Payments ______________________________________ Account Number By: ______________________________________ President/Vice-President SURETY: _______________________________________ Name of Surety By ________________________________________ Attorney-in-Fact


VI. AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF CLAIMS BY: (Contractor) ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ THIS DAY _______________________________________________ personally appeared before me, ___________________________________________, a Notary Public in and for the City/County/State of Virginia, and being by me first duly sworn states that all Subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials have been paid all sums due them to date for work performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement between: (Owner) and____________________________________________________________________(Contractor) dated ____________, 20___, for the construction of ___________________________________ ___________________________________________ or arrangements have been made by the Contractor satisfactory to such Subcontractors and suppliers with respect to the payments of such sums as may be due them by the Contractor. ________________________ CONTRACTOR BY: __________________________ TITLE: _______________________ ___________________________________ DATE: _______________________ SEAL OF CONTRACTOR Subscribed and sworn to before me this

______ day of , 20___.

My commission expires on the _____ day of , 20___.

______________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC __________________________________ NOTARY SEAL


VII. CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Project Description: Project No ______________________ _____________________________________________ Other: __________________________ Location: Completion Date: _______________ Contract Date:____________________ Contract For: Contractor: ______________________ Owner: _________________________________________ This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following specified parts thereof: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ TO WIT: The Owner and Contractor are hereby advised that the work to which this certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and that all Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents on:

______________________________ Date of Substantial Completion

A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all items of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When this certificate applies to a specified part of the Work, the items in this tentative list shall be completed or corrected by the CONTRACTOR within _______ days of the above date of substantial completion. The date of substantial completion is the date which all guarantees and warranties begin, except as follows: ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ This certificate is issued, accepted, and acknowledged by: ______________________ ________________ ________________________ ____________ Engineer By Title Date ______________________ ________________ ________________________ ____________ Contractor By Title Date ______________________ ________________ ________________________ __________ Owner By Title Date


VIII. STATEMENT OF SURETY COMPANY IN ACCORDANCE with the provisions of the AGREEMENT dated , 20 , BETWEEN ______________________________________________________________________

(OWNER) AND ____________________________________________________________________________

(CONTRACTOR) THE ____________________________________________________________________________

(SURETY) SURETY on the Material and Labor Payment BOND of: ______________________________________________________________________________

(CONTRACTOR) after a careful examination of the books and records of said CONTRACTOR or after receipt of an affidavit from CONTRACTOR, which examination of affidavit satisfies SURETY that all claims for labor and materials have been satisfactorily settled, hereby approves of the final payment to the said __________________________________________________________, CONTRACTOR, and by these presents witnesseth that payment to the CONTRACTOR of the final estimates shall not relieve SURETY of any of its obligations to ______________________________________________________________________________ (OWNER) as set forth in the said SURETY COMPANY'S BOND. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said SURETY has hereunto set its hand and seal this ______ day of __________________, 20___. ATTEST: (SEAL) _____________________________ BY _________________________________ PRESIDENT ____________________________________ NOTE: This statement, if executed by any person other than the President or Vice President of the Company, shall be accompanied by a certificate of even date showing authority conferred upon the person so signing to execute such instruments on behalf of the Company represented.


IX. CONTRACTOR'S RELEASE KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: (Contractor) of _______________________ County/City and State of ________________ does hereby acknowledge that he has received this day from the (Owner) the sum of One Dollar ($1.00) and other valuable consideration in full satisfaction and payment of all sums of money owing, payable and belonging to (Contractor) Dated ______________, 20___. NOW, THEREFORE, the said (Contractor) (for myself, my heirs, executors and administrators; for itself, its successors and assigns) do by these presents remise, release, quitclaim and forever discharge the said _______________________________________, Owner, its successors and assigns, of and from all claims and demands arising from or in connection with the said Agreement dated _________________, 20____, and of and from all, and all manner of action and actions, cause and causes of action and actions, suits, debts, dues, duties, sum and sums of money accounts, reckonings, bonds, bills, specialties, covenants, contracts, agreements, promises, variances, damages, judgements, extents, executions, claims and demand, whatsoever in law or equity, or otherwise which against the said _______________________________________________, Owner, its successors and assigns ever had, now have, or which (I, my heirs, executors, or administrators; it, its successors and assigns) hereafter can, shall or may have, for upon or by reason for any matter, cause or thing whatsoever, from the beginning of the world to the date of these presents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF (Contractor) has caused these presents to be duly executed this _________ day of ____________________, 20____. Signed, Sealed and Delivered in the Presence of: _______________________________ CONTRACTOR_________________________ (SEAL) BY:_____________________________ __________________________ Title _______________________________ ATTEST: _______________________________ SECRETARY


X. MANHOLE/STRUCTURE PROTECTIVE COATING POST INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION (Submit prior to Substantial Completion)

Project Name

Owner

Contractor

Agreement No. Applicator __________________________ I

Company Name: __________________________

Address: ________________________________

________________________________

Telephone: ______________________________ This applicator is certified by ___________________________, Coatings Manufacturer, located at

(Address) and approved in the proper application of the specified coating system. The materials and workmanship for Type B (80 mil) coatings systems are warranted for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the project. ______________________________________________ __________________ Coatings Manufacturer Authorized Representative/Title Date

Coating System:_________________________________________________________

(Use Separate Form For Each Coating System Applied)

Date

Applied

Manhole/ Structure Number

Actual Substrate Conditions

Ambient Air Conditions

Min/Max Recoat

Dry Film Thickness

CSP Rating

Temp. (°F)

Moisture (Yes/No)

Temp. (°F)

Humidity (%)

(Hrs/Hrs) (Avg) (Min)

I certify that the coating system identified below was installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations at the conditions listed below. Applicator Date


Date

Applied

Manhole/ Structure Number

Actual Substrate Conditions

Ambient Air Conditions

Min/Max Recoat

Dry Film Thickness

CSP Rating

Temp. (°F)

Moisture (Yes/No)

Temp. (°F)

Humidity (%)

(Hrs/Hrs) (Avg) (Min)

XI. STANDARD BID ITEMS AND UNITS


Section Bid Item Category Unit

301 Clearing and grubbing Clearing and Grubbing ACRE or LS

301 Tree protection fencing Clearing and Grubbing LF or EA

302 Storm sewer pipe (diameter and type) Drainage Structures LF

302 Pipe culverts (waterway opening) Drainage Structures LF

302 Pipe reducers (larger diameter) Drainage Structures LF

302 Jacked pipe (diameter and type) Drainage Structures LF

302 Reinstalled pipe (diameter) Drainage Structures LF

302 End sections (standard and size) Drainage Structures EA

302 End walls Drainage Structures EA

302 Box culverts (waterway opening) Drainage Structures LF

302 Pipe grate Drainage Structures LF or EA

302 Drop / yard inlets, catch basins, and intake boxes

Drainage Structures EA

302 Base section (drop inlets and manholes) Drainage Structures LF

302 Manhole (0-6' depth) (4 or 5 foot diameter) Drainage Structures EA

302 Manhole (>6' depth) (4 or 5 foot diameter) Drainage Structures VF

302 Conflict manhole Drainage Structures EA

302 Concrete spring boxes Drainage Structures EA

302 Junction boxes Drainage Structures EA

302 Reconstructed manholes Drainage Structures EA

302 Precast Arches Drainage Structures LF

303 Regular excavation Earthwork CY

303 Pavement demolition (type and depth of pavement) [in proposed pavement]

Earthwork SY

303 Pavement demolition (type and depth of pavement) [outside proposed pavement]

Earthwork SY

303 Curb & gutter demolition Earthwork LF

303 Existing structure demolition Earthwork EA

303 Existing pipe demolition Earthwork LF

303 Existing Sidewalk Demolition Earthwork SY

303 Existing Driveway Demolition Earthwork SY

303 Undercut Excavation (regular) Earthwork CY

303 Select Material (min. CBR) Earthwork CY

303 Select Bedding (regular) Earthwork CY or TON

303 Suitable Fill (regular) Earthwork CY or TON

303 Backfill of Undercut Excavation (regular) Earthwork CY or TON

303 Surcharge placement and removal Earthwork CY

303 Settlement plate Earthwork EA

303 Geotextile fabric for Base Preparation Earthwork SY

303 Select Bedding/Backfill of Undercut Excavation (trenching)

Earthwork CY or TON

303 Undercut Excavation (trenching) Earthwork CY

303 Sheeting, bracing, and shoring left in place Earthwork LS



(trenching)

303 Rip-Rap for erosion control Earthwork TON or SY

303 Check dam (log or rock) Earthwork EA

303 Baled straw check dam Earthwork EA

303 Temporary silt fence Earthwork LF

303 Geotextile fabric for Erosion Control Earthwork SY

303 Temporary filter barrier Earthwork LF

303 Sediment basin excavation Earthwork CY

303 Slope drain Earthwork EA

303 Siltation control excavation for Sedimentation Traps and Basins

Earthwork CY

303 Inlet Protection ( type of device) Earthwork EA

303 Construction entrance Earthwork EA

305 Select material - Type I Subgrade and Shoulders TON

305 Select material - Types II or III Subgrade and Shoulders CY

305 Gravel Driveway Replacement Subgrade and Shoulders EA

309 Aggregate material (base course) Aggregate Base Course CY or TON

309 Aggregate base material (base course for curb and gutter)

Aggregate Base Course CY or TON

310 Tack coat Tack and Prime Coat GALLON

310 Prime coat Tack and Prime Coat GALLON or

SY 313 Asphalt surface treatment Asphalt Surface Treatment SY 315/ 315A

Asphalt concrete (type and class) Asphalt Concrete Pavement TON or SY

315/ 315A

Bituminous Leveling Course Asphalt Concrete Pavement TON

315/ 315A

Edge clipping of shoulders Asphalt Concrete Pavement LF

315/ 315A

Asphalt Driveways (Thickness) Asphalt Concrete Pavement SY or EA

317 Pavement Patch Pavement Patching LF or SY

406 Reinforcing steel or welded wire mesh Reinforcing Steel POUND

406 Epoxy-coated reinforcing steel Reinforcing Steel POUND

414 Dry riprap (class and depth) Riprap SY or TON

414 Mortared riprap Riprap SY

414 Grouted riprap Riprap SY or TON

414 Dumped riprap Riprap SY or TON

414 Concrete riprap in bags Riprap CY

414 Erosion control rip rap Riprap SY or TON

501 Underdrain and combination underdrain Underdrains LF

501 Geotextile Fabric Underdrains LF

502 Curb, combination curb and gutter (detail designation)

Concrete Items LF

502 Gutter, standard, radial and entrance Concrete Items SY or LF



502 Paved ditch Concrete Items SY or LF

502 Paved flume Concrete Items SY or LF

502 Street Connection pavement Concrete Items SY or LF

502 Energy Dissipators Concrete Items EA

502 Sign island Concrete Items EA or SY

502 Median barriers (including delineators) Concrete Items LF

502 Median Strips Concrete Items LF or SY

502 Directional island curb Concrete Items LF

502 Hydraulic cement concrete sidewalks (thickness)

Concrete Items SY

502 Concrete steps (concrete)/Reinforcing Steel

Concrete Items CY /LBS

502 Handrails Concrete Items LF

502 Geotextile drainage fabric Concrete Items SY

502 Curb Cut Ramps Concrete Items SY

502 Composite Detectable Warning Panels Concrete Items SF

502 Concrete Driveway Replacement (Pipe Installation)

Concrete Items EA

502 Concrete Driveway Concrete Items SY

505 Guardrail (Standard) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF

505 Radial guardrail (Standard) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF

505 Reuse guardrail (Standard) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF

505 Median barrier (Standard) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF

505 Intermediate anchorage assembly Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers EA

505 Terminal Guardrail Treatment (Back of ditch)

Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF

505 Terminal Guardrail (Roadway side) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers EA

505 Reuse guardrail terminal (Standard and type)

Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF or EA

505 Fixed object attachment (Standard) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers EA

505 Special design guardrail bridge attachment (B or Str. No.)

Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LS

505 Cable barricade (Standard) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers EA

505 Guardrail terminal site preparation (Standard)

Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers EA

505 Bull nose barrier Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers EA

505 Guardrail terminal (Standard and type) Guardrail and Steel Median Barriers LF or EA

507 Fences (Standard and Height) Fences LF

507 Gate (Standard and Length) Fences EA

510 Remove, reset, relay, adjust, install, modify, reconstruct relocate, existing (Item or standard)

Relocating or Modifying Existing Miscellaneous Items

EA, LF, SY, CY or LS

510 Adjust structure heights Relocating or Modifying Existing Miscellaneous Items

EA

511 Allaying dust Allaying Dust HR

512 Flagger Service (Certified) Maintaining Traffic HR



512 Flagger Service (Police-assisted)) Maintaining Traffic HR

512 Pilot vehicle Maintaining Traffic HR

512 Electronic Arrow Maintaining Traffic HR

512 Warning Light Maintaining Traffic DAY

512 Group 2 Channelizing Devices Maintaining Traffic DAY,

512 Traffic barrier service (per location) (Type and/or standard)

Maintaining Traffic LF

512 Traffic barrier service guardrail termination (standard)

Maintaining Traffic EA or LF

512 Impact attenuator service (Type) Maintaining Traffic EA

512 Temporary signalization Maintaining Traffic LS

512 Construction pavement marking (type and message)


512 Construction pavement message marking (type and width)

Maintaining Traffic EA

512 Temporary Pavement marker ([ ]-way) Maintaining Traffic EA

512 Eradication of existing pavement marking (per 6-inch width)


512 Temporary Detour (standard and type) Maintaining Traffic LF

512 Crusher run aggregate (No. 25 or 21A) Maintaining Traffic TON

512 Type III Barricades Maintaining Traffic EA

512 Construction Signs Maintaining Traffic SF

512 Truck Mounted Attenuator Maintaining Traffic HR

512 Portable Traffic Control Signal Maintaining Traffic LS

512 Portable Changeable Message Sign Maintaining Traffic HR 512 Maintenance of Traffic Maintaining Traffic LS

513 Mobilization (3 payments) Mobilization & Demobilization LS

515 Milling Pavement Milling Pavement SY

521 Pavers Pavers SF

530 Abandon Pipe, (diameter/flowable fill) < larger than 2-inch>

Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures

LF or CY

530 Abandon Meter Boxes Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures

EA

530 Abandon Laterals and Cleanouts (on Active Mains)

Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures

LF or EA

530 Abandon Drainage Structures Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures

EA

530 Abandon Metallic Structures Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures

EA

530 Abandon Manholes Abandonment of Existing Pipelines EA

530 Abandon Meter/Valve Vaults/Boxes Abandonment of Existing Pipelines and Structures

EA

602 Topsoil (4-or 6-inch depth) Topsoil ACRE or SY

603 Lime, fertilizer, seed and mulch Seeding ACRE or SY

604 Sod, fertilizer and lime Sodding SY

605 Plants (Type and size) Planting EA



605 Mulching and remulching Planting 100 SF

608 Mowing Mowing HR or LS

700 Concrete foundation (Standard, type and, size)

Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Electrical service (Standard and type) Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Luminaire arm (Length) Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Lighting pole (Standard luminaire mounting height, and length of luminaire arm)


700 Signal pole (Standard, length, number, and length of arms)


700 Overhead sign structure Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Bridge-mounted sign structure (Location) Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Pedestal pole (Standard and length) Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Wood pole (Class and length) Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Conductor Cable (Size/number) Traffic Control Devices LF

700 Conduit (Type and size) Traffic Control Devices LF

700 Trench Excavation (Standard) Traffic Control Devices LF

700 Junction box (Standard) Traffic Control Devices EA 700 Sign Posts Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Test Bores Traffic Control Devices EA

700 Electrical service grounding electrode (per 10 foot)


700 Bored Conduit Traffic Control Devices LF

704 Pavement line marking (Type and/or class and width)

Traffic Control Devices LF

704 Pavement message marking (Message) Traffic Control Devices EA

704 Pavement marker (Type, [ ]-way, and/or type pavement)


801 Water main (Type & diameter) Water Distribution Systems LF

801 Fire hydrant assembly (Type I, II or III) Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Water sampling stations Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Gate valves (size and diameter) Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Butterfly Valves (diameter) Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Water Meter Box Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Tapping sleeve/valve (diameter) Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Blowoff Assembly Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Manual air vent assembly Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Type K copper service lines (jack and pull) (single or dual)

Water Distribution Systems LF or EA

801 Type K copper service lines (open cut) (single or dual)

Water Distribution Systems LF or EA

801 Private Service Relocations Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Polyethylene encasement Water Distribution Systems LF

801 Connections to existing water mains Water Distribution Systems EA



801 Plugging Existing 2” Water Main Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Offset of Existing Water Main Water Distribution Systems LF

801 Cut in Tees Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Cut in Crosses Water Distribution Systems EA

801 Cut in Valves Water Distribution Systems EA

802 Gravity sewer pipe (diameter, type and depth 0-6, 6-8, 8-10, 10-12,12-14,14-16,16-18,18-20, >20')

Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems LF

802 Sewer laterals (type and diameter) Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems LF or EA

802 Manhole, 0' to 6' in depth (4-or 5-foot dia.) Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Manhole extra depth (4-or 5-foot dia.) Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems VF

802 Drop Manhole (inside or outside) Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Standard manhole frame and cover Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Watertight manhole frame and cover Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Clean-out assemblies (mainline and service lateral)

Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Remote Camera/TV Inspection Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems LF

802 Connections to existing manholes Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Connections from existing manholes Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Manhole and Mainline Cleanout adjustment rings

Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems EA

802 Manhole/Structure Coatings (Type A or B, 4- or 5-foot manhole diameter)

Sanitary Gravity Sewer Systems VF or EA

803 Force main (type and diameter) Sanitary Force Main Systems LF

803 Manual air vent assembly Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

803 Gate valves (size and diameter) Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

803 Tapping sleeve/valve (size and diameter) Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

803 Connections to existing force mains or manholes

Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

803 Interior Pipe Corrosion Lining (Diameter) Sanitary Force Main Systems LF

803 Offset of Existing Force Main Sanitary Force Main Systems LF

803 Cut in Tees Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

803 Cut in Crosses Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

803 Cut in Valves Sanitary Force Main Systems EA

804 Bore and jack casing (diameter) Boring and Jacking LF

806 Horizontal Directional Drill Horizontal Directional Drilling LS

Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation

(Sections 810-822)

810 Light Cleaning (diameter) Sewer Line Cleaning LF

810 Heavy Cleaning (diameter and number of passes greater than 3)

Sewer Line Cleaning LF

810 Manhole Cleaning Sewer Line Cleaning EA



811 Television Inspection (CCTV Only) Television Inspection LF

812 Bypass Pumping / Flow ~_____ MGD (Flow > 2 MGD)

Bypass Pumping LS

813 CIPP Method/Wall Thickness=___mm (Diameter)

Pipe Rehabilitation By Cured-In-Place Method

LF

813 Removal of Intruding Service Lateral Connections (Ferrous or Non-Ferrous)

Pipe Rehabilitation By Cured-In-Place Method

EA

814 Fold and Form Method / Wall Thickness = SDR _____ (diameter)

Pipe Rehabilitation By Fold and Form Pipe Method

LF

814 Removal of Intruding Service Lateral Connections (Ferrous or Non-Ferrous)

Pipe Rehabilitation By Fold and Form Pipe Method

EA

815 Pipe Bursting Pipe Bursting LF

815 Sealing and Benching Manholes Pipe Bursting EA

816 Sewer Joint Testing (diameter) Sewer Joint Testing EA

817 Chemical Joint Sealing / Grouting Chemical Grouting GAL

818 Sewer Point Repair (diameter, material, and depth 0-6, 6-8, 8-10, 10-12, 12-14, 14-16,16-18, 18-20, >20')

Point Repair By Excavation LF

819 Insitu Structural Point Repair / Wall Thickness = ____ mm (diameter)

Insitu Structural Point Repair LF

820 Insitu Point Repair by Sectional Lining / Wall Thickness =___mm (diameter)

Insitu Point Repair By Sectional Lining

LF

821 Service Laterals (diameter and material) Sanitary Sewer Service Reconnection

LF

822 Manhole Cementitious Coating (4- or 5-ft diameter)

Manhole Rehabilitation VF

822 Manhole Frame Seals Manhole Rehabilitation EA

End of Section


SECTION 110

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

I. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS:

Plans are the property of the Owner and shall not be used for any purposes other than those specified in these Contract Documents.

II. HAMPTON ROADS PLANNING DISTRICT COMMISSION REGIONAL

CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS:

Prior to Construction, the Contractor is required to obtain a copy of the Hampton Roads Planning District Commission Regional Construction Standards (Fifth Edition), from the Hampton Roads Planning District Commission located in Chesapeake, Virginia. The following modifications, additions, or deletions to the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards are hereby incorporated into the contract documents.

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 05 Selective Demolition for Electrical 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 28 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.23 Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 05 63 Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 26 11 13 Medium Voltage Unit Substations 26 13 16 Switchgear Modification 26 25 13 Low Voltage Busways 27 00 00 Communications 27 10 23 Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories 33 71 19 Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes 40 90 00 Common Work Results for Process Monitoring and Control Systems 40 90 02 Process Monitoring and Control System Testing 40 90 03 Process Monitoring and Control System Training 40 95 00 Process Control Hardware 40 95 00A Appendix A – PMCS Control Panel Schedule 40 95 00B Appendix B – Circuit Breaker Labeling Schedule APPENDICES Appendix A: Substance Abuse and Drug-Free Workplace Ordinance Appendix B: Procurement Information Form Appendix C: City of Norfolk Modifications to HRPDC Regional Standards, 5th Edition Appendix D: Measurement and Payment Items


Appendix E: Norfolk Details Appendix F: Project Sign Detail Appendix G: Application to Perform Utility Work in Right of Way (Not Used) Appendix H: Soil Borings (Not Used) Appendix I: Tree Protection Notes Appendix J: Contractor’s Use of Temporary Facilities and Staging Areas Appendix K: Virginian Clean Water Revolving Loan Fund (VCWRLF) Contract Inserts (Not Used) Appendix L: Test Hole Data Sheets (Not Used) Appendix M: Requirements for As-Built Drawings, Coordinates, Component Tables, and GPS Files Appendix N: Component Table Format Appendix O: Project Component Table

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 00-1 Common Work Results for Electrical Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for basic electrical studies and reports, material handling, and other

basic electrical materials and methods.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 05 – Selective Demolition for Electrical 3. Section 26 05 13 - Medium-Voltage Cables 4. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables 5. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 6. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports Systems for Electrical Systems 7. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems 8. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems 9. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 10. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 11. Section 26 11 13 – Medium Voltage Unit Substations 12. Section 26 13 16 – Switchgear Modifications 13. Section 26 25 16 – Cable Bus Assemblies 14. Section 27 00 00 – Communications 15. Section 27 10 23 – Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories 16. Section 33 71 19 – Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. America National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. ANSI/IEEE 141, Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for

Industrial Plants - Red Book 2. ANSI/IEEE 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Buff Book 3. ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00, General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,

Power and Regulating Transformers.

C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA): 1. ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians.


D. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. ANSI/NEMA MG 1, Motors and Generators 2. NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee

Workplaces.

F. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS, BASIS OF DESIGN, AND ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. All substitutions to identified materials or equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of Division 01. In any case of conflict between such requirements of Division 1 and this paragraph, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

B. Whenever an item of material or equipment is identified by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the identification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, material or equipment of other Suppliers may be proposed.

C. Where substitutions to identified items are permitted, any proposed substitution or alternate must fully comply with the following in order to be considered by the Engineer: 1. Be of a reputable manufacturer, 2. Be fully compliant with the requirements of this Section and the Drawings, 3. Be fully compatible with all interfacing items and work, and with the installation

environment, 4. Be appropriate (as determined by the Engineer) for the proposed application, and 5. Be equivalent (as determined by the Engineer) in character, performance, and

quality to any identified Basis of Design.

D. Where a specific manufacturer or product is identified as the Basis of Design or listed first in a list of acceptable manufacturers, the overall project design is based on the identified manufacturer or product. If the Contractor elects to substitute a manufacturer or product which differs from the identified Basis of Design, the Contractor shall bear all efforts and costs of any design changes necessary in order to achieve finished work which is equal in character, performance, and quality to the original design depicted in the Contract Documents. Such changes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: changes to ratings and/or features of other equipment, changes to material sizes and/or types, new material and/or equipment, and changes to structural and/or architectural features (including room sizes). Approval by the


Engineer of a proposed substitute item shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

E. The listing of specific manufacturers is solely intended to identify reputable manufacturers who are known to provide quality products of the general type specified. Such listing is in no way intended to imply that the identified manufacturers product(s) have been verified to satisfy the specified requirements, or to be equivalent to any identified Basis of Design manufacturer. Nor does such a listing imply acceptance of products which do not meet the specified requirements, ratings, features, dimensions, and functions as indicated.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Testing Agency Qualifications:

a. Use a NETA accredited testing agency, or approved equal, that is accredited for the region in which the Contract work is performed.

b. Submit the testing agency’s qualifications to the Engineer for approval.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform all electrical work in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 70,

the National Electrical Code.

C. Certifications: 1. Submit evidence with all Product Data that the products represented meet testing

agency quality verification requirements, including agency listing and labeling requirements. a. Such evidence may consist of either a printed mark on the data or a separate

listing card. b. Submit a written statement from those product manufacturers that do not

provide evidence of the quality of their products that indicates why an item does not have quality assurance verification. 1) Such statements provided in lieu of quality assurance verification are

subject to the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and equipment to the work site in accordance with the requirements of Division 01. 1. Deliver materials and equipment in a clean condition.

a. Provide packaging that plugs, caps, or otherwise seals openings both during shipping and temporary storage.

2. Provide equipment needed for unloading operations and have such equipment on the work site to perform unloading work when the material and equipment is delivered. a. Clearly identify pick-points or lift-points on electrical equipment crating and

packaging.


b. In the absence pick-points or lift-points on equipment crating and packaging, identify pick-points or lift-points on the equipment itself.

B. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of Division 01. 1. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. 2. When unloading materials and equipment, provide special lifting harnesses or

apparatus as required by manufacturers.

C. Store electrical materials and equipment, whether on-site or off-site, in accordance with Division 01 and the following: 1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for storing the items. 2. Store electrical equipment and products under cover.

a. Except for electrical conduit, store electrical equipment and products in heated warehouses or enclosed buildings with auxiliary heat and that provide protection from the weather on all sides.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the

requirements of Division 01, other Contract requirements, and as follows: a. Organize Operation and Maintenance Manuals by Specification Section and

equipment number as designated on the Contract Drawings. b. Include suppliers, supplier addresses, and supplier telephone numbers for the

equipment and products furnished. 2. 60 days prior to the request for final payment, prepare and submit two copies of

the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer for approval. 3. Upon approval of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit

corrected copies as follows: a. Electronic copy to the Engineer for record. b. Deliver four copies to the Owner.

4. Insert final record drawings in each set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals at Project Closeout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS

A. Grounding and Bonding Materials: 1. Provide grounding and bonding materials in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 26.

B. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide hangers and supports for electrical equipment in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 28.


C. Electrical Identification Materials: 1. Provide electrical identification materials in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 53.

D. Wire and Cable: 1. Provide medium-voltage electrical wire, cable, and accessories in accordance with

the requirements of Section 26 05 13. 2. Provide low-voltage electrical wire, cable, and accessories in accordance with the


E. Conduit and Raceway: 1. Provide conduit and raceway as indicated, as appropriate for the application per

NFPA 70, and in accordance with the following: a. Conduit and Tubing: Provide electrical conduit and tubing in accordance

with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13. b. Boxes: Provide electrical boxes in accordance with requirements of Section

26 05 33.23.

2.02 SPECIALIZED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Provide specialized electrical equipment (i.e. cable bus assemblies, unit substations, etc.) as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the various Technical Sections of these Specifications.

2.03 SHOP FINISHING

A. For electrical equipment, factory-apply paint and coating systems that at a minimum meet the requirements of the NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All work shall be performed, and all equipment installed, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, National Electric Code requirements, and accepted industry standard.

B. Refer to the various Technical Sections of these Specifications for specific installation requirements.

3.02 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. If the factory finish of factory-finished items is damaged for any reason, refinish the item. 1. If an item that has several surfaces has damage on one surface, refinish the entire

damaged surface. a. Surface Preparation:


1) Outside the damaged area, lightly sand the entire surface and perform additional sanding to profile the damaged paint edge.

2) Prepare the surfaces of damaged areas in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform electrical testing as detailed in Section 26 05 63 and in each Specification Section.

B. Have electrical work inspected as required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Submit a copy of the certification of inspection with the final project closeout

documents and post the original in the electrical room on-site, protected by a metal frame with a protective plate glass cover.

C. The quality of finishing and refinishing work is subject to approval by the Engineer.

3.04 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment to test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended by the Engineer, pending completion of the electrical system study.

3.05 RECORDING OF CONDUCTOR LENGTHS

A. Measure and record the lengths of all feeder and branch circuit conductor as follows: 1. Low voltage (600V and less) circuits:

a. Feeders to panelboards, switchboards, and similar distribution equipment. 2. All medium voltage circuits.

B. Measure lengths of conductors by pulling a conduit measuring tape into the raceway prior to installing the conductors. Remove the tape from the raceway prior to, or during, installation of the conductors. Use a tape which is marked in maximum 1-foot increments.

C. Record the measured length of raceway at the time of measuring. Measure and record the conductor lengths between the ends of the raceway and the conductor terminations as a separate notation when the conductors are installed.

D. Submit recorded lengths in a typewritten spreadsheet format, with five separate columns: 1. Circuit identification 2. Measured raceway length 3. Measured length from end of raceways to conductor terminations at first end 4. Measured length from end of raceways to conductor terminations at second end 5. Total length.


PART 4 APPENDIX A - PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING CONDITIONS


END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 05-1 Selective Demolition for Electrical Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 05

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of material for demolition and salvaging existing electrical systems, wiring, raceways, supports, equipment and minor repair of underlying structure.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 – General Requirements.

1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Refer to Electrical Drawings for additional information.

B. Remove two 5kV to 480V, 1500kVA, Delta-Wye Transformers (3A/3B).

C. Remove two concrete transformer pads.

D. Remove direct buried conduit /duct bank at transformers to facilitate installation of new transformers.

E. Remove 5kV Primary Feeder cables from the 5kV switchgear to Transformers 3A/3B.

F. Remove secondary 480V busway from Transformers 3A/3B to Switchboards DS3A and DS3B.

G. Remove 5kV power meters and mechanical relays.

H. Remove 480V power meters.

I. Remove fiberglass cable tray top cover.

J. Transformers, feeder cables, etc. must be replaced one feed at a time, with the other feed kept in service.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.04 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate all power outages with the Owner, retaining one 5 kV feeder and transformer, and the associated 480V busway / switchboard, in service at all times.


B. Perform demolition in a manner not to delay or interfere with other operations of work in the Project and operations of the Owner.

1.05 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule all work with the Owner through the Owner’s designated representative. Start no work in an area until a schedule has been prepared, submitted and approved.

B. Coordinate the work schedule with the Owner, Engineer, and/or other Contractors. Coordinate the work so not to interfere or conflict with the performance of work by the Owner or other Contractors.

1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Care shall be used so not to impede the ongoing operations of the Owner.

B. Demolition work, as specified herein, is not intended to be performed as a wrecking operation but as work relative to the performance of the various construction operations of the Project.

C. Existing Conditions: 1. Demolition information shown or otherwise indicated on the Drawings is based

on visual field examination and existing record documents. While the information provided is believed to be correct, no assurance is implied relative to its total completeness or accuracy. Report discrepancies to Construction Manager for disposition of the Engineer before disturbing existing installations.

2. The Contractor hereby distinctly agrees that neither the Construction Manager, the Engineer nor the Owner is responsible for the correctness or sufficiency of the information given and after his own Site Investigation: a. That he must have no claim for delay or extra compensation or damage on

account of the information given; and b. That he must have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility

under the Contract with respect to the above stated stipulations.

D. Protection: Exercise care during demolition work to confine demolition operations to the areas as indicated on the Drawings. The physical means and methods used for protection are at the Contractor's option. However, the Contractor will be completely responsible for replacement and restitution work, of whatever nature, at no expense to the Owner. 1. Additionally, if public safety is endangered during the progress of the demolition

work, provide adequate protective measures to protect public pedestrian and vehicular traffic on streets and walkways.

2. Conform signs, signals and barricades to requirements of Federal, State and local laws, rules, regulations, precautions, orders and decrees.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Basic Electrical Materials: Those products such as conduit, raceway, wire and cable, support devices, fasteners, and control devices as required for work of this Section are specified in other Sections.

B. Equipment along with machinery and apparatus, motorized or otherwise, used to perform the demolition may be chosen at the Contractor's discretion. However, the chosen equipment shall perform the work within the limits of the Contract requirements.

C. Patching Materials: Patching materials shall match, as nearly as practical, the existing material for each surface being patched.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that measurements and existing circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Equipment, machinery and apparatus, motorized or otherwise, used to perform the demolition work may be used as chosen at the Contractor's discretion, but which will perform the work within the limits of the Contract requirements.

C. Verify that abandoned wiring and electrical equipment serve only the abandoned facility.

3.02 DEMOLITION

A. General: The means and methods of performing electrical demolition and removal operations are the sole responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified. However, equipment used, and methods of demolition and removal will be subject to approval of the Construction Manager and the Engineer. 1. Remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new

construction as indicated and/or as required. 2. Remove exposed abandoned conduit systems, including abandoned conduit

systems above accessible ceiling systems. 3. Remove wiring in abandoned conduit systems to source of power supply. 4. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify

installations and provide access panels or plates as appropriate. 5. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with

existing electrical installations, and as specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

6. Equipment:


a. Disconnect and remove electrical equipment where so indicated on the Drawings.

b. Disconnect and remove abandoned distribution equipment, panelboards, disconnect switches and motor starters as indicated on the drawings or as otherwise required due to the removal of associated equipment.

7. In exposed through-structure conduit locations, or where concealed conduits become exposed by penetrating a structural floor, wall or ceiling, the abandoned conduits must be cut below the finished structural surface in order to perform surface patching.

B. System De-activation: Prior to demolition and removal work, de-activate existing electrical systems as indicated.

C. Use means and methods for permanent disconnection, which render the remaining electrical systems and apparatus in conformity with NFPA 70.

D. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. 1. Conform temporary wiring to the requirements of NEC Article 305, General

Requirements. 2. Temporary electrical service work as specified in Division 1, General

Requirements.

E. Remove all wiring from disconnected circuits, feeders, and equipment unless otherwise specified or indicated. Remove all exposed raceways and related supports. Cut all exposed raceways flush with floor and plug.

F. Coordinate electrical power outages with requirements in Section 26 05 00.

G. General: The means and methods of performing electrical demolition and removal operations are the sole responsibility of the Contractor except as otherwise specified. Use equipment and methods that do not damage items to remain or salvaged and areas adjacent to demolition operations. Use methods that do not interfere with Owner’s operations and which do not cause excessive dust. Remove debris as it accumulates.

H. Cutting: Perform cutting work of existing structure materials by such methods as will prevent extensive damage beyond the immediate area of cutting.

I. Debris Removal: Dispose of demolition debris off site in a lawful manner. Containerize or otherwise store debris as work is in progress.

J. Patching: After demolition and removal work is performed patch the existing structure as required to match surrounding finish and appearance including the appropriate surface decoration.

K. Abandoned Electrical Equipment and Apparatus: Existing electrical equipment and apparatus in or on the structures not claimed as salvage by the Owner shall become the


property of the Contractor and may not be disposed of on the site but removed and disposed of in a lawful manner off-site.

L. Salvage: The Owner shall have the right to claim as salvage any items and materials removed under the work of this Section. 1. Should such right of salvage be exercised by the Owner, move and neatly store

removed items on the site in a location agreeable to the Owner and in a manner approved by the Engineer.

2. Items to be salvaged for the Owner shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Existing 5 kV primary feeder cables from the existing 5 kV switchgear to

existing transformers 3A/3B. b. Existing 480V busway feeds from existing transformers 3A/3B to existing

switchboards DS3A/DS3B.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 13-1 Medium-Voltage Cables Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 13

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of material for furnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting medium voltage cable, shielded cable, communication cable, and accessories.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 11 13 – Medium Voltage Unit Substations.


A. Provide new 5kV feeders from the existing 5kV switchboard to new transformers (medium voltage substations) 3A and 3B. Route via existing concrete trenches, existing fiberglass cable tray, and existing conduits where possible. Provide new direct buried and exposed conduits as indicated on the Drawings and/or as required.

B. Refer to Electrical Drawings for additional information.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B8: Specification for concentric lay stranded copper

conductors, hard, medium hard, or soft.

B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA S-68-516: Ethylene-Propylene Insulated Wire & Cable for the

Transmission & Distribution.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 48 Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current

Cable Terminations 2.5 kV Through 765 kV.

D. National Electrical Manufacturer’ Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA WC 5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire & Cable for the

Transmission & Distribution 2. NEMA WC 7 Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulated Wire & Cable for

Transmission & Distribution 3. NEMA WC8 Standard for Ethylene Propylene Rubber


4. NEMA WC 26 Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

F. Underwriter’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables 2. UL 510 Insulating Tape 3. UL 1072 Medium Voltage Power Cables.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform all submittals in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

B. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence of testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on the data or by a separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a written statement indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Such statements are subject to the approval of the Owner and the Engineer.

C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Provide product data for all products provided. Indicate clearly the usage of each product. As a minimum, submit catalog cuts for the following: 1. All wires and cables 2. All lugs 3. All connectors 4. Tools used to crimp connectors 5. Tapes 6. Pulling lubricant.

D. Tension Calculations: 1. Submit Tension Cable Pulling calculations for all underground power runs.

Calculations shall include both pull load and tensions, along with safety factors, for all cables.

2. Design conduit runs so as not to exceed tension limits of manufacturer. Provide additional pulling points as required to limit the tension.


A. Provide products that are: 1. Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 2. Certified as meeting the standards of Underwriters Laboratory by the Electrical

Testing Laboratory (ETL).

B. Conform all work to regulatory requirements of all state, local, and national governing codes and requirements.

C. Conform all work to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.


D. Provide certificates for medium voltage cable installer’s experience and qualifications. Installation must be performed by or under the direct supervision of a technician having training and experience in the terminating of medium voltage cables. Individual(s) must have 3 or more years recent experience terminating medium voltage cables.

E. Install work under supervision of skilled licensed electricians.

F. Factory test cable in accordance with ICEA 5-68-516 and UL Standard 1072.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect items from damage during delivery, storage and handling in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and as detailed below.

B. Package all wire and cable to conform to NEMA WC-26.

C. Store all products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS

A. Furnish copper conductors of 98 percent conductivity in sizes designated by American Wire Gauge (AWG) listed and labeled by UL for all wiring.

B. Furnish conductors of sizes as indicated on the Drawings for medium voltage service.

C. Medium Voltage Power Wiring: 1. Type: Provide Type MV-105, 133 percent insulation level, 3-conductor shielded

power cable, rated 5 kV for 4,160-volt service, meeting ICEA S-68-516 and UL1072, and sunlight resistant and Listed for use in cable tray.

2. Conductors: Provide (3) single, uncoated Copper Conductors, compact stranded per ASTM B-496

3. Strand Shields: Provide extruded semiconducting ethyl propylene rubber (EPR) strand shield/screen over each conductor.

4. Insulation: Provide tree-resistant ethyl propylene rubber insulation qualified for 90 degrees C continuous operating temperature in wet locations, 120 degrees C emergency operating temperature, and 250 degrees C short circuit operating temperature.

5. Insulation Screens: Provide extruded semiconducting EPR screen over the insulation of each conductor.

6. Phase Identification Tape: For each conductor; integrated into the assembly between the insulation screen and the shield.

7. Shields: Apply 5-mil uncoated copper tape shield over the insulation screen of each conductor; helically applied with 12.5 percent nominal overlap.

8. Assembly: Cabled with fillers in the interstices and binder tape overall.


9. Jacket: Provide overall 80-mil polyvinyl jacket over the cable assembly. 10. Identification:

a. The cable shall carry throughout its length color coded marker thread, as per NEMA requirements, for the purpose of manufacturer identification.

b. Each length of cable shall be durable printed on the surface and repeated at intervals of 24 inches (61mm) or less with the following information: 1) Manufacturer's Name 2) Cable size and type 3) Insulation type 4) Voltage classification 5) Function 6) Foot marker.

D. Neutral conductor: n/a.

E. Ground conductors: Green, cross linked Thermosetting polyethelyne Type XHHW, 600V, conforming to NEMA WC-7 and UL 44; or Thermoplastic Insulated Wire, Type THW, 600V, conforming to NEMA WC-5.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Okonite Company; Okoguard Okoseal Type MV-105 2. Southwire 3. Houston Wire 4. General Cable (Prysmian) 5. Or Approved equal.

2.02 WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

A. Grounding connectors: Conform to Section 26 05 26.

B. Medium Voltage Cable Termination Kits: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Elistomold b. Amp c. Burndy d. Ilsco e. Or Approved equal.

C. Coordinate cable terminations with connection provisions included in medium voltage unit substation primary sections.

D. Terminators: Medium voltage terminations shall comply with the requirements of IEEE Standard 48, Class 1, slip-on cable terminators rated for use with cable provided. The termination material shall be the product of one manufacturer who shall furnish all components in the form of a kit that includes complete instructions, which shall be followed for fabrication and installation. Cable terminations shall be furnished with and include stress-relief and shield grounding.


E. Stress Cones: Provide a Class 3 indoor stress cone conforming to IEEE Std. 48 for 5kV minimum.

F. Medium Voltage Cable: 1. Mechanical compression connectors: Furnish compact high copper bronze or

brass alloy, two-hole, capable of being installed with one wrench with two clamping bolts. Single conductor, or multiple conductor, brass or bronze bolts with plated steel screws are unacceptable. Provide silicon-bronze fasteners for bolting connectors to connections.

2. Crimped compression connectors: Furnish two-hole crimped connectors of high-conductivity seamless electrolytic wrought copper, electrolytically tin-plated, with two holes, color-coded to match dies. Provide adequate area for conduction of the flowing current. Provide tooling to crimp connectors from same manufacture as connectors.

2.03 TAPE

A. Arc-Proofing Tape: Scotch 77.

B. Vinyl Insulating Tape: Scotch 33+, black.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 3M, Scotch 2. Plymouth 3. Permacel 4. Or Approved equal.

2.04 CABLE FIREPROOFING

A. The fire and arc proofing tape shall consist of a flexible conformable unsupported intumescent elastomer. The tape shall be not less than .030 inches thick and be capable of over 100 percent elongation. The tape shall be non-corrosive to metallic cable sheaths and compatible with synthetic cable jackets (i.e. semi-conducting URD type, polyethylene, P.V.C., etc.). It shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, salt water, gases and sewage.

B. The wrapped tape shall be secured by a band, consisting of two layers (the second wrapped directly over the first) of glass cloth electrical tape. The completed installation of single half-lapped layer of arc and fireproofing tape shall be capable of withstanding a high current (60 Hz) fault arc temperature of 13,000 degrees K for 70 cycles.

C. Fire and arc proofing tape shall conform to Scotch 77 as manufactured by the 3M Company, and glass cloth electrical tape shall conform to Scotch 69 as manufactured by the 3M Company.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all conduits, junction boxes, electrical vaults and handholes for cleanliness, lack of burrs, conduits alignment, completeness, and correct deficiencies.

B. Ensure that two locknuts and insulating grounding bushings are installed on all conduits that do not have threaded hubs.

C. Check that proper sized boxes are installed. Boxes and conduit fittings must conform to NEC article 370 bending requirements.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Swab all conduits with a nylon brush and steel mandrel.

B. Ascertain that pulling calculations have been made and are available for long runs and pulls as indicated in this Section. Ascertain that a means of controlling pulling tension is installed on any mechanical assist device to be used for pulling cable.

C. Pre-lubricate all conduits for which the pulling tension calculations are based on a coefficient of friction less than that of a dry conduit.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install all wiring outside of equipment in conduit. 2. Install all medium voltage wiring, along with associated neutral and ground wires

in raceways, enclosures, pull boxes, and junction boxes that contain no other low voltage wiring cable or fiber optic cable.

3. Do not perform wiring until work, which might cause damage to the wires, cables or conduits has been completed. Take the necessary precautions to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt or other foreign material in the conduits during the execution of the work.

B. Equipment Ground Conductors: Include a green equipment ground conductor with all runs; wire type as specified in Section 26 05 26 and sized as shown in Table one and Table two of Section 26 05 26.

C. Provide a 600-volt rated ground wire in each conduit. Size as indicated on the Drawings but not smaller than that required by the National Electrical Code.

D. Cable Pulling: 1. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the inspection, handling,

storage, temperature conditioning prior to installation, bending and training limits, pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installation of all cable. Use quadrant blocks located properly along the cable run. Remove from the jobsite


and replace cables that were subjected to excessive bending; cables that were subjected to excessive tension; and cables with cracked, damaged or nicked, outer jackets.

2. Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole, handholes or buildings of the highest elevation. Flexible cable feeds shall be used to convey cables through the manhole opening and into the duct runs.

3. Lubricate all cables during pulling with lubricants specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer.

4. Limit cable pulling tensions to the maximum pulling tensions recommended by the cable manufacturer. Use dynameter to measure pulling tensions on all runs pulled with mechanical assistance, and for all runs where calculations are required to be submitted. If pulling tension is exceeding during pulling, remove cables and permanently mark as unusable and remove from site.

5. Installation of cables in handholes: Install cable along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls, so as not to interfere with duct entrances. Bend cables to radius larger than the minimum bend radius recommended by cable manufacturer or IPCEA. Support cable on brackets and insulators spaced at a maximum of two feet apart.

6. Lubricants must be utilized and must be as approved by the cable manufacturer.

E. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for requirements for measuring and recording of conductor lengths.

3.04 TERMINATION

A. Terminate all cable using pre-approved termination kits and stress cones.

B. Employ qualified high voltage cable splicers experienced in terminating cables to make terminations or provide direct insight supervision of apprentices doing termination and splicing.

C. Ground all shields with insulated Type XHHW or THW grounded wire.

D. Use crimped lug for terminating conductor and match lug to equipment. Use multi-hole lug where equipment permits.

E. Leave sufficient cable slack for reterminating cable twice. This slack may be left in the equipment or the nearest accessible pulling point.

3.05 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

A. Color code all feeder wires and cables as specified in Section 26 05 23.


Phase Above 600 Volts A Brown, with an additional four separate wraps of red tape B Orange, with an additional four separate wraps of red tape C Yellow, with an additional four separate wraps of red tape N White with Red Tracer EGC Green

B. Identify all power wiring by circuit and switchgear, and motor control center number.

C. Identify all places providing access to cables whether at equipment or elsewhere with “Danger - High Voltage” and “Keep Out” signage with voltage indicated in Section 26 05 23.

D. Each length of cable shall be durable printed on the surface and repeated at intervals of 24 inches or less with the following information: 1. Manufacturer's Name 2. Cable size and type 3. Insulation type 4. Voltage classification 5. Function.

3.06 GROUNDING

A. Non-current carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment shall have a maximum resistance to solid "earth" ground not exceeding the values indicated in Section 26 05 63 of these Specifications.

3.07 TESTING

A. Electrical Testing: Perform a continuity and insulation test as required in Section 26 05 63.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 19-1 Low-Voltage Electrical Conductors & Cables Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS & CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning,

and protecting low voltage cable, shielded cable, and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 3. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing for Electrical Systems 6. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems 7. Section 26 13 16 – Switchgear Modifications.


A. Refer to Electrical Drawings for additional information.

B. Transformer Wiring: 1. Install wiring, in conduit, from each distribution transformer’s CT (current

transformers) termination enclosure and route to the new SEL787 relays, located in the 480V Building.

C. Other power, control, and/or alarm or status wiring as indicated on the Drawings.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 1202 - Standard for Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cables.

C. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA WC 26/EEMAC 201 - Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):


1. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

F. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA T-29-520 - Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test @ 210,000 BTU.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conductors in Raceway and Conduit Systems: 1. Provide conduit systems for installing the wiring that is outside of equipment. 2. Except for raceway or conduit for control wires or where otherwise indicated on

the Contract Drawings, design raceway and conduit systems so that the maximum number of low-voltage current carrying conductors (per NFPA 70, Article 310) in each raceway or conduit does not exceed three, plus a ground.

B. Cable Tension Design Requirements: 1. Design conduit runs so that the tension limits set by the wire and cable

manufacturers will not be exceeded. a. Provide additional pulling points as required to limit the tension to acceptable

levels.

C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: 1. Submit low-voltage ground, power, and control wiring product data as listed

below for the products provided as the Work of this Section; and clearly indicate the usage of each product on the data submitted. a. Wires and cables b. Lugs c. Connectors d. Tapes e. Pulling lubricant f. Tools used to crimp connectors.

D. Use of Trade Names: 1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the

basis of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required. a. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose

products are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contract requirements.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 01, Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data:

a. Wires and cables b. Lugs c. Connectors d. Tape


e. Pulling lubricant. 2. Samples:

a. Wire samples. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Design Data. 1) Tension cable pulling calculations for all underground power runs.

b. Certificates. 1) Testing agency/quality verification.

c. Manufacturer’s Instructions. 1) Cable manufacturer’s recommendations.

d. Qualification Statements. 1) Documented experience of the installing firm 2) Qualifications of the licensed electricians supervising the Work.


A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications:

a. To install the Work of this Section, employ the services of a firm specializing in installing wire, cable, and accessories, and that has a minimum of 3 years’ experience doing so. 1) Submit the documented experience of the firm installing the wire, cable,

and accessories. b. To supervise installation of the Work of this Section, employ licensed

electricians. 1) Submit the qualifications of the licensed electricians supervising the

Work of this Section.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in

NFPA 70, and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.

C. Certifications: 1. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved

by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and the application intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products. a. Provide copper conductors listed and labeled by UL for all wiring.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Imprint insulated conductors with the date of manufacture, the wire type, and the

manufacturer.


2. Package wire and cable in conformance with the requirements of NEMA WC 26/EEMAC 201.

3. Protect items from damage during delivery, handling, and installation. a. Comply with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for inspection,

handling, storage, temperature conditioning, bending and training limits, pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installing cable.

b. Submit the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for inspection, handling, storage, temperature conditioning, bending and training limits, pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installing cable

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Wire and cable manufactured more than 12 months before delivery to the Site is

unacceptable for use under this Contract, and will be rejected.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products indoors on blocking or pallets. 2. Protect items from damage during storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS

A. Conductor Design Requirements: 1. Provide conductors of the proper size and ampacity ratings based on Article 310

of NFPA 70. a. Provide copper conductors that have 98 percent conductivity. b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, at a minimum provide

conductors of the following American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes: 1) For power and branch feeder circuits: 12 AWG.

a) For power and branch feeders, provide solid copper low-voltage conductors for sizes up to and including 10 AWG, provide stranded copper low-voltage conductors for 8 AWG and larger sizes.

2) For control circuits: 14 AWG. 3) For alarm and status circuits: 14 AWG.

B. Insulation Design Requirements: 1. Provide low voltage ground, power, and control wiring having the proper

insulation types as follows: a. For underground wiring:

1) For sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG: Type XHHW-2. 2) For sizes 8 AWG and larger: Type RHW-2 or XHHW-2.

b. For wiring located outdoors: 1) For sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG: Type XHHW-2. 2) For sizes 8 AWG and larger: Type RHW-2 or XHHW-2.

c. For wiring that is wholly in dry indoor locations: Type dual-rated Type THHN/THWN.


2. Color Coding of Wires: a. Insulation shall be factory colored per Tables 26 05 19-1 below. The use of

tape for color coding is prohibited.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Continental Wire & Cable Company 2. SouthWire 3. General Cable 4. CME Wire & Cable Inc. 5. Or Approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. 600 Volt Rated Multi-Conductor Cable: 1. Provide multi-conductor cable that is suitable for use indoors or outdoors;

exposed or concealed; as open wiring; in any raceway, underground duct, or cable tray; direct buried; or embedded in concrete. a. Provide cable that is UL listed as Type MC in compliance with the

requirements of UL 1569, and is UL listed for 90 degrees Celsius dry or wet, for direct burial, for cable tray use, and as sunlight resistant.

2. Assemble the cable with non-hygroscopic fillers and binder tape. a. Insulated Conductors:

1) Provide uncoated stranded copper conductors, complying with the requirements of ASTM B 8 for Class B conductors.

2) Provide cross-linked polyethylene type XHHW-2 insulation rated for 600 volts.

b. Grounding Conductors: 1) Provide uninsulated copper conductors.

c. Cover the overall assembly with a single strip of interlocked aluminum tape, and then apply an outer final jacket of black flame-retardant PVC.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. General Cable Technologies Corporation b. The Okonite Company c. Or Approved equal.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Pulling Lubrication and Lubricant: 1. Lubricant shall provide reduced tension on all types of cable jackets, dry to a thin

lubricating film that retains its lubricity for an extended period and won't cement in the cables.

2. The cable pulling lubricant shall produce a low coefficient of friction on a wide variety of cable jacket materials. The lubricant shall be UL listed. It shall be easy to handle and adhere well to the cable. Where appropriate, it shall also be tested and approved for use with CSPE (chlorosulfonated polyethylene) fire-retardant cable jackets where these materials are utilized.


3. The lubricant shall be UL or CSA Listed and Labeled and shall pass the IEEE 1210, Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable. It shall pass physical compatibility tests on LLDPE, XLPE, CPE, and PVC cable jacket or sheath materials. It shall not stress crack polyethylene per ASTM Standard 1693. There shall be no significant changes in the conductive properties of XLPE and EPR semi-conducting compounds when the lubricant's effect on volume resistivity is tested according to IEEE Standard 1210.

4. Lubricant to be specification-grade type that does not promote flame propagation when used with fire-retardant cables and systems, is harmless to humans, environmentally safe, and compatible with all common cable jacket materials

5. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes. The lubricant shall have less than a 6.0% solids residue after drying for 24 hours at 105°C.

6. Where CPE insulated wire and/or cable is rated for Low Smoke / Zero Halogen type, only Polywater Type LZ shall be utilized.

7. Specific lubricants for fiber-optic and other special cable installations shall be determined by the cable / lubricant manufacturers and the Contractor shall provide submittal information, including MSDS documentation and other information verifying suitability of products and general specification compliance as outlined herein.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. PolyWater - DynaBlue b. 3M - Type WL c. Greenlee - Type GEL d. Or Approved equal.

B. Tapes: 1. Vinyl Insulating Tape:

a. Provide UL-listed flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) backed insulating tape with a pressure sensitive adhesive, such as black Scotch® 33+ Vinyl Electrical Tape, that is resistant to abrasion, acids, alkalis, and copper corrosion; resistant to, hot, cold and wet weather; and resistant to damage from UV sunlight exposure.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M, Scotch b. Plymouth c. Permacel d. Or Approved equal.

C. Wire and Cable Connections: 1. Grounding Connectors:

a. Provide grounding connectors conforming to the requirements of Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cables Larger Than Number 6: a. Mechanical compression connectors:


1) Provide mechanical compression connectors that are capable of connecting single or multiple conductors, and of being installed with one wrench. a) Type: Compact, two-hole mechanical compression connectors

having two clamping bolts. (1) Connector Body: Provide a high copper bronze or brass alloy

body. (2) Bolts: Provide brass or bronze bolts; plated steel screws are

unacceptable. (3) Fasteners: Provide silicon-bronze fasteners for bolting

connectors to connections. b. Crimped Compression Connectors:

1) Provide two-hole crimped compression type connectors fabricated from high conductivity, seamless, electrolytic wrought copper, electrolytically tin-plated, and color coded to match the dies.

2) Provide crimped compression type connectors with adequate area to conduct the electrical current.

3) To crimp connectors, provide crimping tools from the same manufacturer that manufactured the connectors.

3. Control Wiring Connections: a. For control wiring connections at terminal boards, provide crimped nylon-

insulated ring terminals. b. For control wiring splices, provide nylon insulated butt splices with

insulation grips. c. For joining more than two control wires, provide junction boxes with

terminal boards. d. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Thomas & Betts Corp. 2) AMP Inc. 3) Ilsco Corp. 4) Ideal Industries, Inc.

4. Connectors for Other Conductors: a. Any of the applicable types listed for larger wire may be provided. b. Screw Terminal Connections:

1) For making terminal connections of stranded copper wire to screw terminals, provide nylon insulated crimped compression terminals with copper barrel on the wire.

2) For making terminal connections of solid copper wire to screw terminals, provide screw lock connectors.

c. Wire Nuts: 1) For making splices of copper wire, provide pre-insulated, UL-listed,

solderless connectors of the spring-lock or compression type that can be installed by hand or using tools.

2) Use of wire nuts in underground or below grade locations is prohibited. d. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Thomas & Betts Corp.


2) Tyco Electronics, AMP Inc. 3) Ilsco Corp. 4) FCI-Burndy® Products 5) Or Approved equal.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: 1. 600 Volt Rated Multi-Conductor Cable:

a. 70,000 BTU/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test: 1) 600 Volt rated multi-conductor cable must pass the vertical tray flame

test requirements of UL 1569, IEEE 383, and IEEE 1202. b. 210,000 BTU/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test:

1) 600 Volt rated multi-conductor cable must pass the vertical tray flame test requirements of ICEA T-29-520.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Install the work of this Section only under the supervision of licensed electricians.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all conduits, junction boxes, electrical vaults, and handholes to verify that they are clean, that they do not have burrs, that conduits are properly aligned, and that they are complete. 1. Ensure that, on all conduits without threaded hubs, two locknuts are installed. 2. Ensure that, in all conduits with wires larger than No. 10, bushings are installed. 3. Ensure that grounding bushings and fittings are installed at all places specified in

Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding, or otherwise required by the NEC. 4. Verify that proper sized boxes are installed.

B. Verify that boxes and conduit fittings conform to the bending requirements specified in Article 314 of NFPA 70 (NEC).

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Verify that pulling calculations have been made and are available for long conduit runs and pulls as indicated in this Section.

B. Do not begin installing wiring until other work which might cause damage to the wires, cables, or conduits has been completed. 1. Correct deficiencies in conduits, junction boxes, electrical vaults, and handholes

that have been discovered by the inspection required in Paragraph 3.02.A.

C. Prepare conduits to receive wire and cable.


1. Swab the conduits with a nylon brush and steel mandrel. 2. Pre-lubricate the conduits for which the pulling tension calculations are based on

a coefficient of friction less than that of a dry conduit.

D. Verify that a means of controlling the pulling tension on the wire or cable is installed on the mechanical assist devices furnished for pulling cable.

E. Take the necessary precautions to prevent water, dirt, or other foreign material from accumulating in the conduits during the execution of wiring work.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Low Voltage Ground, Power, and Control Wiring: 1. Neutral Conductors:

a. For each single-phase and each multi-phase feeder with loads connected line-to-neutral, provide separate neutrals.

b. Size each neutral the same as the largest phase conductor. 2. Equipment Ground Conductors:

a. Provide a green equipment ground conductor with all runs. 1) Provide the equipment ground conductor wire type as specified in

Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.

B. Pulling Cable: 1. Establish a feed-in point at the manhole, handhole, or building located at the

highest elevation of the run, and pull cables down grade using flexible cable feeds to convey the cables into the duct runs through the feed-in point opening. a. Furnish quadrant blocks located properly along the cable run. b. Limit cable pulling tensions to the maximum pulling tensions recommended

by the cable manufacturer. 1) Measure the cable pulling tension on all runs pulled with mechanical

assistance and for all cable runs where calculations are required to be submitted by using a dynameter.

2) Remove cables subjected to excessive bending and tension and that are cracked or have damaged or nicked outer jackets from the Site, and replace these cables with new undamaged cables. a) If pulling tension is exceeding during pulling, remove the affected

cables and mark them as not to be reused. c. Lubricate cables with lubricants during pulling.

C. Terminating Cable: 1. Terminate cable using materials and methods indicated or specified herein, or in

accordance with the written instructions of the cable manufacturer or termination kit manufacturer. a. For equipment connections, provide split bolt or compression type connectors,

mechanical compression connectors, or crimped compression type connectors as specified and approved by the equipment manufacturer; for all other types of connections provide connectors of one of the types specified:


2. Protect insulated cable terminations from accidental contact, deterioration of coverings, and moisture by using proper terminating devices and materials.

D. Splicing Wire and Cable: 1. All new conductors shall be continuous from end to end without splices, except

where indicated on the drawings or with the special written permission of the Engineer, on a case-by-case basis, where the Contractor can demonstrate that installation without splices is not practical.

2. If permitted as noted above, splice cables in accessible locations. a. Splices shall NOT be made in conduit bodies.

3. Within outlet or junction boxes, make wire and cable splices that conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). a. Install these outlet or junction boxes in accessible locations.

4. Below-Grade Splices: Below grade splices shall NOT be permitted.

E. Wiring Identification: 1. Color code all feeder wires and cables as indicated in Table 26 05 19-1:

Table 26 05 19-1 Feeder Wire and Cable Color Coding

Phase 480Y/277 Volts 208Y/120 Volts A Brown Black B Orange Red C Yellow Blue

Neutral Gray or White with Yellow Tracer

White

Electrical Ground Conductor Green Green

2. Identify all power wiring by circuit and panelboard or switchboard number. 3. Identify all control wiring with wire numbers. 4. Provide additional electrical identification of cabling and wiring as specified in

Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.

F. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for requirements for measuring and recording of conductor lengths.


A. Site Tests: 1. Prior to energizing wire and cable, field test the wire and cable as specified in

Section 26 05 63 Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems.

B. Inspection: 1. Record the actual installed elevations and locations of grounding cables and rods,

both concealed and exposed, on the record drawings specified in Division 01.

C. Verify that the control wiring wire numbers correspond to the numbers indicated in the record drawings.


END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 26-1 Grounding and Bonding for Elec. Systems Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning, and protecting

grounding and bonding systems.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 3. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables 5. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Public Works Association (APWA): 1. APWA Public Works Management Practices Manual.

B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B 1; Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire 2. ASTM B 3; Standard Specification for Soft-Drawn Copper Wire 3. ASTM B 8; Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft 4. ASTM C 653; Standard Guide for Determination of the Thermal Resistance of

Low-Density Blanket-Type Mineral Fiber Insulation 5. ASTM D 5; Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials 6. ASTM D 149; Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and

Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies

7. ASTM D 257; Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials

8. ASTM D 570; Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA): 1. ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. National Electrical Manufacturing Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA TC-2; Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit


2. NEMA TC-3; Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

3. NEMA WC-7; Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

F. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 467, Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment 2. UL 486A-486B, Wire Connectors 3. UL 486C, Standard for Splicing Wire Connections 4. UL 486D, Standard for Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use

or in Damp or Wet Locations 5. UL 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum

and/or Copper Conductors.


A. Design the electrical system installation to conform to Article 300 of NFPA 70, Wiring Methods, and to other applicable articles of NFPA 70 governing methods of wiring.

B. Ground the conduit systems, metal enclosures, equipment frames, motors, and receptacles in accordance with Article 250 of NFPA 70, Grounding. 1. Ground all metallic conduits, wiring channels, and armored cables continuously

from outlet to outlet, and from outlets to cabinets, junction boxes, or pull boxes. a. Bond each run of raceways to form a continuous path for ground faults from

end to end. b. When liquid tight flexible metal conduit sizes larger than 1-inch or flexible

metal conduit are installed, provide external bond wires. 2. Grounding Bushings:

a. Provide all 1-inch or larger metallic conduits with grounding bushings unless they enter metallic enclosures via integral threaded hubs.

b. Provide grounding bushings for conduits entering the bottom of freestanding equipment.

c. Bond wire from every grounding bushing to the equipment ground stud or ground bus in the enclosure.

d. Bond the grounding bushings to ground studs or ground buses in the enclosures.

3. Provide insulated, internal equipment ground wire in all conduits. a. Bond the internal wire to all pullboxes, junction boxes, equipment enclosures,

and other enclosures as required by NFPA 70.

C. Equipment Grounds: 1. Design all feeders and branch circuits to include an equipment grounding

conductor consisting of a copper wire within a raceway or cable and sized as specified herein. a. Where conductors are run in parallel in multiple raceways, run the equipment

grounding conductor in parallel to the related conductors.


b. Size each of the parallel equipment grounding conductors on the basis of the ampere rating of the circuit overcurrent protecting device.

2. Ground enclosing cases, mounting frames, rack mounted components, rack struts, switches, breakers, control panels, motors, and other electrical or electrically operated equipment by providing an equipment grounding conductor with phase conductors from an established equipment ground source.

D. Ground Wire Sizes: 1. The minimum size for bonding jumpers, equipment ground conductors, grounding

electrode conductors, and ground grid conductors is as follows: a. Under 600 volts:

1) Provide #12 AWG, minimum. 2) Control power circuits, Provide #14 AWG, minimum.

b. Over 600 volts: 1) For transformers, provide #2 AWG ground wire, minimum.

2. When the ground wire size is not specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide wire sized in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

E. Within 60 days of the Contract award, submit the following: 1. The Submittals required by Section 26 05 00.

a. Include Product Data and Catalog Cuts for all products provided and describe the usage of each product. Where data sheets contain information for multiple products, clearly identify which product is being submitted.

F. Project Record Documents: 1. Prepare and submit record drawings showing the actual installed elevations and

locations of grounding cables and rods for both concealed and exposed work provided under this Contract.

G. Project Closeout: 1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals that include the record drawings and

all Product Data in accordance with Division 01.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 01: 1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer’s product data. 2. Quality Assurance/Quality Control Submittals:

a. Certificates: 1) Testing agency product certification.

b. Qualification Statements: 1) System installers’ qualifications 2) Installation supervisors’ resumes.

3. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.




a. Employ installers who specialize in the work of this Section, and who can demonstrate a minimum of three years documented experience.

b. Submit the system installers’ qualifications. 2. Supervisor’s Qualifications:

a. Employ supervisor to supervise the installation work who are skilled licensed electricians.

b. Submit the installation supervisors’ resumes. 3. All products are to be certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL),

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All grounding and bonding Work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70,

the National Electrical Code.

C. Certifications: 1. Testing Agency Product Certification:

a. Verify product quality by certifying products as meeting the requirements of one of the following: 1) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a) Provide products listed and labeled by UL.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Transport materials, both on site and from Contractor's storage to site, in

accordance with the recommendations of the respective manufacturers.

B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials, both on and off site, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. 2. Store products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Conduit and Conduit Fittings: 1. For conduit and conduit fittings that enclose single ground wires without

accompanying circuit conductors provide one of the following: a. Schedule 40, non-metallic conduit and fittings conforming to the

requirements of Section 26 05 33.13 and the conduit additionally conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC-2, and the fittings additionally conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC-3.


2. For other conduit and conduit fittings, provide conduit of the types specified or indicated and that conform to the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13.

B. Wire: 1. Bare Ground Wire:

a. Soft drawn copper, Class A or Class B stranded, meeting the requirements of ASTM B3 for sizes #6 or larger.

b. Soft drawn solid copper, meeting the requirements of ASTM B3 for sizes #8 or smaller.

2. Insulated Ground Wire: a. Provide insulated Class B copper stranded wire rated for 600 volts that

conforms to the requirements of NEMA WC-7 and is green in color. Insulation type shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Continental Wire & Cable Company b. SouthWire c. General Cable d. Okonite Co. e. Or Approved equal.

C. Clamps and Non-Welded Connectors: 1. Provide bronze or brass clamps and connectors that are UL listed for use below

grade. a. All bolts and other material must be bronze or brass, plated steel screws are

unacceptable. b. Fabricate multi-bolt, solderless compression clamps from high strength

electrical bronze, and provide silicon bronze clamping bolts and hardware. 2. Provide bolts, nuts, lock-washers, and similar hardware designed not to damage

ground wire. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ilsco b. Framatone Connectors Inc. (FCI), Burndy c. Or Approved equal.

D. Exothermic Welding Kits: 1. Provide molds, thermite packages, and other material for exothermic welds that

are rated to carry 100 percent of the cable ratings, and which are letter-coded exothermic welded type.

2. Provide all items such as tees, crosses, splices, and cable connections necessary for connecting ground and bonding cables to the following items: a. Ground rods b. Reinforcing steel bars c. Ground-bus d. Structural steel e. Water pipe f. Bonding to the main-ground-grid g. Bonding to Copper Grounding Bus Bar.


3. Provide all exothermic welding molds, thermite packages, and other material used throughout the Work from a single manufacturer.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Erico, Cadweld® b. Continental Industries, Inc., Thermoweld® c. Or Approved equal.

E. Ground Rods: 1. Provide UL listed, sectional ground rods fabricated using an electrolytic plating

process to copper clad a medium carbon steel core 2. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 3. Length: 10 feet.

a. To obtain longer length rods, join rod sections using copper clad rod couplers.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Erico International Corp. b. Galvan Industries, Inc. c. South Atlantic, LLC d. A.B. Chance Co. e. Or Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. The Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, but due to their

small scale, it is not possible to indicate some offsets and fittings required nor the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered. a. Perform field measurements to discover offsets and fitting requirements not

shown. b. Locate all on-site utilities and other obstructions in the area of construction

and verify that interferences will not occur.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Layout electrical work to suit actual field conditions and in accordance with accepted standard practice.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform required earthwork including excavation, backfill, and compaction, as specified in Division 31.

B. Construct each ground system and connection so it is mechanically secure and electrically continuous.


1. Secure grounds to boxes in such a manner that each system is electrically continuous from the point of service to each outlet.

2. Terminate conduits using double locknuts and bushings. a. Unless a conduit run enters a metallic enclosure via integral threaded hubs,

provide the conduit run with two locknuts. 3. Clean paint, grease and such other insulating materials from the contact points of

grounds.

C. Ground Grids: 1. Installing Ground Rods:

a. Drive ground rods head to 6 inches below grade by using a ground rod cap to protect the head of the rod. 1) If the top of the rod is damaged during driving operations, cut it off.

2. Installing Ground Wires: a. Excavate the trenches for the ground grid cables and lay the ground cable in

the trenches from ground rod to ground rod, without splice, and from one side of the grid to the other as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1) Lay the ground grid cables cable allowing 10 percent slack. 2) Form 12-inch minimum radius bends at changes in direction. 3) At intersections, place cables so they diverge 60 degrees or more from

other cables at the intersection. 4) Connect service entrance grounds directly to the ground grids without

splices in the cable. b. Route connecting cables from the ground grid in the trenches to the building

structure. 1) Route exposed cables parallel to the building lines, except for bends;

form all bends with a 12-inch minimum radius. 2) Wherever the cable breaks grade, provide schedule 40 conduit from 2-

feet below finished grade to 3-feet above finished grade for protection; and provide conduit at other points where the cable may be subject to damage.

c. Clamp the conduit to the building structure’s wall at the ends and at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. 1) Whenever cable exits from the conduit, clamp the cable to the wall at

intervals not to exceed 5 feet and at each entrance to equipment. 2) Allow a 1/4-inch space between ground cables, conduit, and the surface

it is mounted on. d. Remove any damaged or kinked cable.

3. Welding ground wires to the ground rods and equipment connections. a. Follow the procedures of the exothermic welding kits manufacturer. b. Prior to welding ground wires to the ground rods and equipment connections

perform the following: 1) Clean the proposed welding area of combustible and flammable

materials; and block access to personnel to protect them from harm; and provide a shield to prevent damage to other materials.


2) Remove insulation from ground wire for a distance of 12 inches and clean the exposed wire to a bright finish.

3) Clean paint, grease, and other similar insulating materials from contact points.

4) Inspect the molds for damage; and discard any faulty mold or any molds used over 40 times.

c. Exothermically weld the ground wires to the ground rods per manufacturer’s recommendations, including to ground rods at grid crossings, to ground rods at grid intersections on the sides of the ground grid, and at all equipment connections.

d. After completing the welding, replace the insulation removed from insulated wires, and coat connections and the area around connections with coating compound. 1) Coating Thickness: 1/8-inch, minimum. 2) Make sure the coating is free from pinholes and voids.

4. Make all connections to electrical equipment and ground buses with compression, two-hole lugs and studs. a. Clean paint, grease, and other similar insulating materials from the contact

points for the ground lugs and studs. b. Clean all wires to a bright finish prior to construction the connections.

D. Equipment Grounds: 1. Install equipment grounds in spaces accessible to authorized personnel only. 2. Equipment Grounding Connectors:

a. Only use approved grounding connectors. 1) Terminate grounds with closed lugs with star washers on both sides and

a 1/4-20 bolt and nut, minimum; spade lugs are not allowed. 2) For portable electrical equipment, provide electric cords having an

equipment grounding conductor and a NEMA and UL approved cord cap.

b. Do not install grounding lugs on flanges, mounting screws, or standoffs in switches, distribution boxes, or panels.

c. Cover or coat grounding clamps and connectors with coating compound.

E. Grounding Transformers: a. If a transformer is a separately derived system as defined in NFPA 70,

provide a ground wire in both the primary and secondary conduits; and bond the ground wire and metallic conduits, if used, to the nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe or nearest effectively grounded structural steel column.

b. Provide an additional bond between cold or hot water pipes and structural steel located near a transformer bond connection.

c. For exterior distribution transformers, provide a ground ring or grid as detailed on the Drawings.



A. Replace any finished exothermic welded splice connections that inspections find to be defective.

B. After inspection by Engineer and Owner’s representative, backfill the direct buried cables and around ground rod protectors. 1. Begin backfilling with clean washed sand to 6 inches above the ground rods or to

the depth shown on the Contract Drawings, whichever is greater. 2. Backfill using select fill in accordance with the requirements of Division 31. 3. Slope the finish grade away from ground rods at a slope of 1 inch in 18 inches for

a distance of 27 inches from the rods in all directions.

C. Install underground warning tape above all buried cables/conduits at a depth of 12” below finished grade.


A. Site Testing: 1. Prior to energizing any system, test the resistance to ground for the system in

accordance with Section 26 05 63. a. Perform a continuity test from all utilization and distribution equipment to the

ground grid on a run-by-run basis.

B. Inspection: 1. Prior to completion of the Work of this Section, inspect the items provided for

conformity to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect finished exothermic welded connections for the following defects:

a. Conductors appear within the splice area. b. Top of splice risers are below conductors. c. Surfaces exhibiting more than 20 percent slag material. d. Surfaces with over slag material that has flowed into conductors. e. Mold blowouts. f. Excessive porosity:

1) Small pores less than 1/32 inch are permitted.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished insulated wires from being painted.

B. Protect all ground grid installations and ground wires from damage during the work of other Sections.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 28-1 Hangers and Supports for Elec. Systems Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 28

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, cleaning, and protecting hanger and

support systems for electrical wiring, conduit boxes, and equipment.

B. Related Section: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 3. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 25 01 – Cable Bus Assemblies.


A. Refer to drawings and specification for all required work.

B. Existing Fiberglass Cable Tray: 1. Provide additional supports for the cable tray per NEMA VE2-2006, and as

shown on the drawings. 2. All mounting hardware to be 316 SST.

C. Cable Bus Assemblies: 1. The intent is to utilize the existing galvanized steel angles to support the cable

buses. 2. Additional galvanized steel angle supports will be added on an as-needed basis. 3. Provide an insulating pad between the galvanized steel support and the aluminum

cable bus to avoid galvanic corrosion.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. AISI Standard Steels (Handbook).

B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 3. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on

Iron and Steel Hardware 4. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates


5. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi, Minimum Tensile Strength

6. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

7. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 8. ASTM A 575 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,

M-Grades 9. ASTM A 576 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,

Special Quality 10. ASTM A 635/A 635M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-

Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot-Rolled 11. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-

Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

12. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

13. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts maximum).

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 258 - Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation

of Solid Materials.

F. Society of Automotive Engineers International (SAE): 1. SAE J 429 - Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally Threaded

Fasteners.

G. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SSPC Painting Manual.

a. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning b. SSPC-Paint 15 - Paint Specification No. 15, Steel Joist Shop Paint, Type I,

Red Oxide Paint, Type II, Asphalt Coating c. SSPC-Paint 20 - Paint Specification No. 20, Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,

“Inorganic,” and type II, “Organic”).

H. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 568 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems 2. UL 635 - Standard for Insulating Bushings 3. UL 870 - Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings 4. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops


5. UL 2239 - Hardware for the Support of Conduit, Tubing, and Cable.

I. U. S. General Services Administration (GSA) 1. Federal Specifications:

a. A-A-1922A - Shield, Expansion (Caulking Anchors, Single Lead) b. FF-S-107C (2) - Screws, Tapping and Drive.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 1. Product Data:

a. Provide product data and catalog cuts for the products provided under this Section.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items:

1) Hanging supports for conduit 2) Supports for cable tray and cable bus assemblies.

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Design Data:

1) Provide structural calculations for the following items: a) Hanging supports for conduit b) Supports for cable tray and cable bus assemblies.

2) b. Certificates:

1) Testing Agency/Quality Verification: a) With the product data for electrical hangers and supports, provide

evidence of quality verification, listing, and labeling by the Electrical Testing Agency (ETA); either by a printed mark on the data, or by a separate listing card.

b) If an item does not have ETA quality assurance verification, provide a written quality assurance verification statement from the product manufacturer indicating why the item does not have the specified quality assurance verification. (1) Such quality assurance verification statements are subject to

approval by the Owner and the Engineer. 2) Manufacturers’ Certificate of Compliance.

c. Qualification Statements: 1) Manufacturers’ qualifications.


A. Qualifications; 1. Electrical Testing Agency (ETA) Qualifications:

a. Use the Electrical Testing Agency (ETA) qualified as specified in Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.


2. Manufacturers’ Qualifications: a. Provide electrical support framing made by manufacturers that have been

manufacturing support framing for a minimum of 5 years, and who carefully controls their operations to ensure that excellent product engineering, quality, safety, and reliability are achieved.

b. Submit the manufacturer’s qualifications to the Engineer for approval.

B. Certifications: 1. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Certification:

a. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products.

2. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance: a. Submit a manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance certifying that both the

galvanizing and the products meet the requirements of the ASTM standards.


A. Packaging, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Deliver, store, and handle the hangers and supports in accordance with Section 26

05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as specified herein. 2. Deliver material to Site in the original factory packaging.

B. Storage and Protection: 1. Shelter and store the components under cover and supported off the ground and

floors on blocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Carbon Steel Shapes: 1. Provide shapes of the sizes specified and as indicated on the Contract Drawings: 2. Provide steel shapes complying with the following material specifications for the

type of steel shape listed: a. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A 36M b. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B c. Plates: ASTM A 283/A 283M d. Sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M e. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Schedule 40, hot-dipped, zinc-coated.

B. Welding materials: 1. Provide welding materials complying with the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M

for the type of material being welded.


2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Metal U-Channel Electrical Support Framing Systems and Fittings: 1. Carbon Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems:

a. Provide 1-5/8-inch nominal size U-channel supports fabricated from 12-gauge carbon steel electrolytically galvanized with a zinc-coating thickness commensurate with Service Condition SC 1 (mild) in conformance with the requirements of ASTM B 633. 1) For Type II ASTM B 633 galvanized finishes, fabricate the framing from

steel complying with the requirements for Grade 33 specified in ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2) For Type III ASTM B 633 galvanized finishes, fabricate the framing from steel complying with the requirements of ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, ASTM A 635/A 635M, or ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Where combination members are required, spot-weld the members on 3-inch centers.

c. Provide 1-3/8-inch or larger depths, except where supports are mounted directly to walls 13/16-inch or larger depths may be provided.

d. Provide metal framing systems and fittings for metal framing systems from a single manufacturer.

e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut Corporation, Unistrut® Metal Framing System 2) Thomas & Betts, Kindorf® 3) Cooper B-Line®, Inc. 4) Power-Strut 5) Or Approved equal.

2. Stainless Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems: a. Provide U-channel supports, fittings, threaded rod, and hardware fabricated

from Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Conduit Supports: 1. Malleable Iron Conduit Supports:

a. Provide one-hole style galvanized malleable iron fasteners with pipe straps similar to those as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.

b. Provide support devices consisting of threaded rods, channel supports, and conduit straps/fasteners.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts b. Or Approved equal.

C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. For bolts, nuts, and washers smaller than 1/4-inch trade size, provide 316 stainless

steel fasteners complying with the requirements of ASTM A 325. 2. For fastening galvanized components, provide stainless steel bolts, nuts, and

washers galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 325.

D. Anchors and Fasteners:


1. Drive (Deep-Pitch) Screws: a. Provide Type 316 stainless steel self-tapping type drive (deep pitch) screws

that comply with the requirements of FF-S-107C (2). 2. Drilled-In Anchors and Fasteners:

a. Provide drilled-in anchors and fasteners that comply with the requirements of FF-S-107C (2).

b. Masonry Anchors: 1) Provide masonry anchors designed to accept both machine bolts and

threaded rods as fasteners. a) Provide SAE J 429 Grade 2 machine bolt fasteners fabricated from

AISI Type 316 stainless steel. b) Provide nuts and washers conforming to the requirements of

ASTM A 563. 2) Provide masonry anchors consisting of an expansion shield and expander

nut contained inside the shield. a) Expander Nuts:

(1) Fabricate square expander nuts with their sides tapered inward from the bottom to the top.

(2) Design the expander nuts to simultaneously climb the bolt or rod thread and expand the shield as soon as the threaded expander nut reaches and bears against the shield bottom when being tightened.

b) Expansion Shields: (1) Provide expansion shield bodies consisting of four legs, the

inside of each tapered toward the shield bottom, or nut end. (2) The end of one leg shall be elongated and turned across shield

bottom. Outer surface of shield body shall be ribbed for grip-action.

3) Masonry Anchor Material: a) Provide die cast Zamac No. 3 zinc alloy having a 43,000-psi

minimum tensile strength. 4) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) U.S.E. Diamond, Inc., FORWAY System b) Or Approved Equal.

c. Concrete Anchors: 1) Stainless Steel Anchor/Fastener:

a) Provide one-piece AISI Type 303 or 304 stainless steel studs (bolts) with integral expansion wedges, AISI Type 316 stainless steel nuts, and AISI Type 316 stainless steel washers.

b) Provide stainless steel anchor/fasteners complying with the physical requirements of FF-S-325 for Group II, Type 4, Class 1.

2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) U.S.E. Diamond, Inc.; SUP-R-STUD b) Hilti Fastening Systems; KWIK-BOLT c) Molly Fastener Group; PARABOLT d) Phillips; RED HEAD Wedge-Anchor.


3. Hammer drive-type explosive charge drive-type anchors and fastener systems are unacceptable.

4. Lead shields, plastic-inserts, fiber-inserts, and drilled-in plastic sleeve/nail drive systems are unacceptable.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Seals: 1. Provide a hydrostatic seal to fill the annular space between conduit and through

structure openings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. PSI-ThunderLine/Link-Seal Corp., Link-Seal® b. Or Approved equal.

B. Fire Seals: 1. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls, floors, partitions, and ceiling, provide

approved fire seals to ensure that the fire rating is maintained. 2. Provide a fire seal system which is UL-listed for the application.

a. Provide fire seal compound or a mechanical seal for fire rating of 2 hours or less.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Compound Fire Seals:

1) Dow Corning Corporation 2) 3M 3) Or Approved equal.

b. Mechanical Fire Seals: 1) PSI-ThunderLine/Link-Seal Corp. 2) Or Approved equal.

c. Through-Wall Barrier Fire Seals: 1) Cooper Crouse-Hinds 2) Or Approved equal.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in the largest sections practical for delivery to the Site.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Prime paint non-galvanized steel items. 1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with the requirements of SSPC-SP 2.

a. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 2. Prime Painting: Apply one coat of primer.

B. Galvanizing items specified above as galvanized. 1. Galvanize the items after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of

ASTM A 123/A 123M.


2. Provide a minimum galvanized coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot (380 grams per square meter).

C. Touch-Up Primer: 1. For un-galvanized metal surfaces: Provide primer complying with the

requirements of SSPC-Paint 15 for Type I, Red Iron Oxide. 2. For galvanized surfaces: Provide primer complying with the requirements of

SSPC-Paint 20 for Type I, Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurement: 1. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take field

measurements to verify actual conditions. a. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered during the Work.

2. Carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions, and other construction work, at the Site which may affect the work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. After carefully investigating structural and finish conditions and other in-place construction work, produce detailed Shop Drawings showing proposed departures from the original design due to field conditions or other causes. 1. Layout the electrical work according to accepted standard electrical trade practice

to suit actual field measurements. 2. Arrange the electrical work to consider existing conditions and to preserve access

to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar features of the construction. 3. Provide plan and profile views of duct banks and details for equipment

backboards and support structures not directly fastened to the walls on the Shop Drawings.

4. Indicate the location and details of conflicting utility construction and slopes on the Shop Drawings.

5. Submit the Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to performing the Work of this Section.

B. Obtain roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment, including equipment being installed by both electrical and other construction trades. 1. Set conduit and boxes only after receiving approved dimensions and checking

such equipment locations. 2. Arrange electrical Work accordingly and furnish such fittings and apparatus as

required to accommodate such conditions and to preserve access to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar spaces.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical Work in conformance to the requirements of NFPA 70 for wiring methods general requirements, and to other applicable Articles of the NEC governing methods of wiring.

B. Installing Anchors and Fasteners: 1. For anchoring or fastening applications in masonry and hollow-core precast

concrete structural elements, provide masonry anchors as specified herein. 2. For anchoring or fastening applications in cast-in-place concrete and solid precast

concrete structural elements, provide concrete anchors as specified herein. 3. Threaded Bolts:

a. Draw threaded bolted connections up tight using 316 stainless steel lock washers to prevent the bolt or nut from loosening.

4. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: a. Install expansion anchors in strict accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and the following. 1) Drill holes to the required diameter and depth in accordance with anchor

manufacturer's instructions for the size of anchor being installed. 2) Minimum Embedment:

a) Embed expansion anchors to four and one-half bolt diameters minimum unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.

C. Installation of U-Channel Support Framing Systems in accordance with Table 26 05 28-1 below:

Table 26 05 28-1 U-Channel Support Framing Selection

Condition 1 Condition 2 Type

Aboveground Outside vertical support within 6” of concrete

Stainless Steel

Outside other locations

Stainless Steel

Interior NEMA 1/12 Carbon steel or Stainless Steel

Interior NEMA 4X Stainless Steel

D. Installing Conduit Supports: 1. For exterior locations provide malleable iron conduit supports.

E. Field Fabrication: 1. Fabricated Items:

a. Fabricate backboards, backboard supports, equipment supports, conduit supports, and the other items as detailed on the Contract Drawings. 1) Hot-dip galvanize mild-steel fabrications in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM A 153/A 153M.


b. Fabricate backboard posts as detailed on the Contract Drawings from concrete filled steel pipe with a crowned cap; and apply a prime paint finish.

c. Supply components required for the anchorage of fabrications. 1) Except where specifically noted otherwise, fabricate anchors and related

components from the same material as the fabrication and apply the same finish.

2. Tightly fit and secure joints. a. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. b. Weld fabricated assemblies in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1) Continuously seal joined members using intermittent welds and plastic filler.

2) Dress welds smooth and free of sharp edges and corners. c. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with the adjacent finish surface.

3. Ease exposed edges to a small uniform radius. a. Cut all backboard corners to a 1-inch radius.

4. For the attachment of work and for bolted connections, accurately drill or punch holes for the fasteners as required. a. Burned holes are unacceptable. b. Provide holes no more than 3/32-inch larger than the fasteners.

5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: a. Except where specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents,

provide flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located, and consistent with the design of the component.

6. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), maximum difference in diagonal

measurements b. Maximum offset between faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) c. Maximum misalignment of adjacent members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) d. Maximum bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m) e. Maximum deviation from plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).


A. Coatings: 1. Repair damage to coatings.

a. Touch up damaged coating surfaces using the specified primer for primed steel surfaces and zinc-rich primer for galvanized steel surfaces.


A. Inspection: 1. Verify the adequacy of coatings. 2. Inspect the items provided under this Section for adherence to the fabrication

tolerances specified above, and correct any discrepancies:


3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect the items provided under this Section from damage during the work of other trades.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 33.13-1 Conduits for Electrical Systems Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 33.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, energizing, and testing conduit, tubing,

and fittings for communication lines and electrical transmission, distribution, and service lines.

B. Related Section: 1. Division 01, as applicable. 2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 3. Section26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 4. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 6. Section 33 71 19 – Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) 2. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated (GCR).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 568/A 568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and

High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold Rolled, General Requirements 2. ASTM D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds

and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

C. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid

Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 1. ANSI/UL 6 - Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit 2. UL 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in

Devices and Appliances 3. ANSI/UL 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. ANSI/UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes.


F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions for all items are as stated in NFPA 70, IEEE C2, and in other reference documents unless otherwise stated, specified, or noted.


A. Conduit Systems: 1. Provide conduit of the type and material shown in Tables 26 05 33.13-1 and 26 05

33.13-2 for the application indicated, or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide conduit fittings made of material identical to that of the conduit system

with which they are used.

Table 26 05 33.13-1 Conduit System Selection

Location Condition 1 Condition 2 Conduit Type Size

(Minimum) 1

Under-ground

Direct Burial Medium Voltage Cables

PVC Schedule 40 1-1/2 Inch

Fiber Optic Cable PVC Schedule 80 1-1/2 Inch

1 No conduit smaller than 1-1/2-inch trade size is permitted unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

Table 26 05 33.13-2 Conduit System Selection

Location Condition 1 Condition 2 Conduit Type Size

(Minimum) 1

Above-Ground

Outside Exposed to weather NEMA 3R/4 Locations

PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel

¾ Inch

Covered or Protected from weather NEMA 3R/4 Locations

PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel

¾ Inch

Inside

NEMA 1/12

Within 6-inches of floor when exposed

Rigid Galvanized Steel ¾ Inch

Exposed within 10’-0” AFF


Exposed above 10’-0” AFF


1 No conduit smaller than ¾-inch trade size is permitted unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 01, Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data:

a. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit b. Non-metallic conduit solvent c. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit d. Liquidtite flexible metal conduit e. Plastic coated rigid galvanized steel conduit f. Fittings for non-metallic conduit systems g. Fittings for metallic conduit systems h. Wall and floor penetration seals i. Cold galvanize coating.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Proposed departures from the original design.

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualification Statements:

1) Qualifications of the installer 2) Qualifications of the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).

b. Certificates: 1) Testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling.



a. Employ an installation firm with a minimum of three years documented experience installing conduit and tubing similar in type and scope to that required by this Contract to install the Work of this Section.

b. Employ skilled licensed electricians to supervise the Work of this Section. c. Submit information verifying the installer’s qualifications. d. To assure correct installation of PVC Coated Conduit Systems and Fittings;

submit installers current and unexpired certification provided by the Manufacturer of the products being installed.

2. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Qualifications: a. Employ an independent testing agency, qualified as specified in Division 01

and Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, to perform the testing required by this Section.

b. Submit information verifying the ETL’s qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in

NFPA 70 (NEC), and to other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.


2. All items installed from utility service poles to the main service panels must be approved by the serving utility, whether electrical service or telephone service, as listed in Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.


by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location the product is installed in, and the application intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these nationally recognized testing laboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products. a. Submit evidence with the Product Data that the products represented meet

testing agency quality verification requirements, including agency listing and labeling requirements. 1) Such evidence may consist of either a printed mark on the data or a

separate listing card. b. Submit a written statement from those product manufacturers that do not

provide evidence of the quality of their products that indicates why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. 1) Such statements provided in lieu of quality assurance verification are

subject to the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Pack, ship, handle, and unload products in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Acceptance products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section 26

05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00 Common

Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein. a. Store all products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit: 1. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit:

a. Provide high impact PVC conduit conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC 2 at 90 degrees Celsius and made from compounds conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1784.


1) Use material that at 78 degrees Fahrenheit has a tensile strength exceeding 5500 psi, a flexural strength exceeding 11,000 psi, and a compressive strength exceeding 800 psi,

b. Provide PVC conduits that are UL listed, labeled, or approved for both underground and above ground use.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. JM Eagle b. Queen City Plastics, Inc. c. Prime Conduit Inc. d. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduit e. Or Approved equal.

B. Non-Metallic Conduit Solvent: 1. Provide solvent for non-metallic conduit joints from the same manufacturer as the

conduit and conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 2564.

2.02 METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Liquidtite Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Provide PVC coated flexible metal conduit conforming to the requirements of

Article 350 of NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses and ANSI/UL 360. 2. Provide conduit with interlocking spiral strip construction capable of bending to a

minimum radius of five times its diameter without deforming the spiral strips both inside and outside of the conduit. a. Provide conduit with a flexible, galvanized, interlocking spiral strip steel core

jacketed with smooth, liquid-tight polyvinyl chloride designed to withstand temperatures from minus 40 degrees Celsius to plus 60 degrees Celsius.

3. Finish the interior and exterior of flexible conduit smooth and free from burrs, sharp edges, and other defects that may injure wires; and place the manufacturer’s trademark on each length.

4. Furnish an integral continuous copper ground in 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch PVC coated flexible metal conduit.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Electri-Flex Company, Liquatite®, Type LA b. ANAMET Electrical, Inc., Anaconda Sealtite® c. Or Approved equal.

B. PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: 1. Provide PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit bearing the UL label. 2. Provide base conduit of rigid hot-dip galvanized steel conduit as specified in

Paragraph 2.02C, and of the type indicated, specified, or scheduled to be coated. 3. Apply PVC coating in accordance with the following:

a. Apply a 40-mil thick PVC coating on the outside and a 2-mil thick fusion-bonded urethane coating on the inside, exterior coatings conforming to the requirements of NEMA RN 1.

b. Provide PVC coating of one uniform color on all PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit provided for the Contract.


4. Provide 40-mil thick PVC sleeves to protect internally threaded conduit openings. a. Provide sleeves with an inside diameter equal to the outside diameter of the

conduit/pipe protected by it; and extending either one pipe diameter or 2-inches, whichever is less, beyond the opening.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. OCAL b. Plasti-Bond c. Perma-Cote d. Kor-Kap e. O’kote.

C. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS) conforming to the requirements of

Article 344 of NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.1, and UL 6. 2. Fabricate the RGS from mild steel piping, galvanized or sherardized inside and

outside, and protected against corrosion by a dichromate rinse or a zinc chromate coating.

3. Provide defect free conduit bearing the UL label, and furnished in 10-foot minimum lengths with both ends threaded and one end fitted with a coupling. a. Provide tapered NTP 3/4 inch per foot threads complying with

ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduit b. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Company c. Or Approved equal.

2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Fittings for Non-Metallic Conduit Systems: 1. Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit:

a. Provide high impact non-metallic fittings conforming to same requirements as for the plastic tubing and conduit as specified in Article 2.01.

b. Non-Metallic Conduit Expansion Fittings: 1) Provide a two-piece nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonconductive, UL listed

expansion fitting. c. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Lamson & Sessions, Carlon® 2) Queen City Plastics, Inc. 3) Or Approved equal.

B. Fittings for Threaded Metallic Conduit Systems: 1. Construct conduit bodies/fittings from cast malleable iron or cast steel. 2. Conduit Outlet Bodies:

a. Provide malleable iron threaded entry type conduit outlet bodies with neoprene gaskets and cast steel cover.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) EGS/Appleton Electric


2) EGS/O-Z/Gedney 3) Or Approved equal.

3. Conduit Expansion Joints: a. Provide telescoping sleeve type galvanized, weatherproof, and vapor tight

conduit expansion joints designed for 4-inch maximum expansion with an insulated bushing and lead-wool packing.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) EGS/Appleton Electric 2) EGS/O-Z/Gedney 3) Or Approved equal.

4. Conduit Unions: a. Provide conduit unions capable of completing a conduit run when neither

conduit end can be turned. b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, UNF and UNY Unions 2) Thomas and Betts Company, Erickson® Coupling 3) Or Approved equal.

5. Conduit Sealing Fittings: a. Provide, triple coated, malleable iron conduit sealing fittings.

1) Coat the conduit sealing fittings with zinc electroplate, dichromate, and an epoxy powder coat.

b. Provide drain fittings in conduit sealing fittings where required. c. Provide sealing covers for junction boxes where required. d. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric a) Sealing hubs: ES b) Sealing fittings: EY, EYS, EYSF, EYSM, EUS, EYD, EYDM.

2) EGS/O-Z Gedney 3) Approved equal.

2.04 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION SEALS

A. Provide watertight mechanical seals capable of holding up to 20 psig, and sealing against water, soil, and backfill material.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., Thunderline/Link-Seal 2. Flexicraft Industries, PipeSeal 3. Or Approved equal.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Cold Galvanize Coating: 1. Provide a cold galvanize coating to provide protection against corrosion by

forming an insoluble zinc salt barrier from a cathodic reaction when the coating is damaged by abrasion and exposed to weather.


a. Provide a single component pre-mixed liquid organic zinc compound producing 95 percent zinc in the dry film.

b. Provide a coating that bonds to clean iron, steel, or aluminum through electrochemical action.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. ZRC. Worldwide b. Clearco c. Krylon d. Rustoleum e. Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take field measurements to verify actual conditions. 1. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate all

offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered during the Work.

B. Inspect the condition of existing conduit that is required for the Work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. After carefully investigating structural and finish conditions and other in-place construction work, prepare and submit detailed Shop Drawings showing proposed departures from the original design due to field conditions or other causes. 1. Layout the electrical work according to accepted standard electrical trade practice

to suit actual field measurements. 2. Arrange the electrical work to consider existing conditions and to preserve access

to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar features of the construction. 3. Include plan and profile views of duct banks. 4. Indicate the location and details of conflicting utility construction and slopes. 5. Submit these Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to performing the

Work of this Section. 6. Submit Product Data and catalog cuts for all products provided under this Section.

Clearly indicate the usage of each product on the submittal.

B. Obtain roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment, including equipment being installed by both electrical and other construction trades. 1. Set conduit and boxes only after receiving approved dimensions and checking

such equipment locations.

C. Remove dirt, debris, and other obstructions from existing conduit required for the Work of this Section by blowing out and mandreling the conduits as applicable.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform the Work of this Section as specified in Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Fabricate and install conduit and wireway systems in accordance with accepted electrical trade standard practice. 1. Layout the electrical work of this Section to suit actual field measurements. 2. Install the electrical Work of this Section in conformance to the wiring methods

general requirements of Article 300 in NFPA 70 (NEC), and to all other applicable Articles of NFPA 70 governing wiring methods.

3. Cut conduit and wireway square and ream the cut ends according to the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC) to deburr the openings so that they are not restricted more than cuts made by the material manufacturer.

4. Avoid bending conduits as much as possible and practical; but if bends are made, use an approved conduit bending tool or machine to make the bends.

5. Do not install crushed or deformed conduit; remove crushed or deformed conduit from the Site.

6. Provide flexible conduit only to the extent permitted by NFPA 70 (NEC). a. In flexible conduits that do not have an integral ground wire, install a green

insulated wire in addition to the neutral wire for grounding purposes. 1) Form a ‘J’ or ‘S’ hook with a drip loop to allow flexibility. 2) Provide a second equipment grounding conductor on outside conduit and

provide fittings with built-in ground lug for bonding.

b. Use flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connection to recessed lighting fixtures and rotating and vibrating equipment. 1) Flexible Metal Conduit is only permitted for final connections to lighting

fixtures in dry, environmentally conditioned spaces. 2) Liquid tight flexible metal conduit, as herein specified, for final

connection to recess mounted lighting fixtures in unconditioned spaces and to all rotating and vibrating equipment including transformers, motors, solenoid valves, pressure switches, limit switches, generators, engine-mounted devices and pipe-mounted devices.

3) Flexible conduit not to exceed 18 inches in length for motor connections, 36 inches in length for equipment connections or 72-inches for lighting fixture connections.

7. Provide fittings and apparatus as required to construct the approved electrical design. a. Running threads on conduit are not permitted.

1) Where couplings and connectors are required for metal conduits, use approved threaded couplings and connectors.

b. Provide conduit unions where necessary to complete a conduit run when neither conduit end can be turned.

c. Where conduit and raceway cross building expansion joints, make provision for expansion in the conduit and raceway systems.

d. Provide sealing fittings with drain fittings in all lower runs and vertical runs.


e. Provide sealing covers for junction boxes where required. f. Provide weatherproof conduit hubs on all conduit connections exterior to the

building, and on instruments, process equipment, and pump motors. 8. Installing RGS:

a. Installation of the RGS Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Threading Conduit: 1) Field thread the conduits per the manufacturer’s instructions.

a) For PVC coated conduit, first use a cylindrical guide, oversized to fit over the plastic coating, to neatly cut the coating off at the proposed end of the threads.

b) Do not damage or remove the coating beyond the proposed end of the threads.

2) Once the threading operation is complete, protect the newly cut threads against corrosion by applying a "sealing" compound as recommended by the manufacturer.

c. Assembling RGS Fittings: 1) Just prior to assembling each conduit joint, apply the conduit

manufacturer's touch-up compound to the end of the conduit in the area normally covered by the fitting sleeve.

2) Use cloth or other material over strap type wrenches to protect the coating while tightening conduits.

9. Breathers and drains shall be provided at the low point(s) of all conduit runs in NEMA 3R, 4, 4X and 7 areas, and where otherwise subject to the accumulation of condensation. Conduits shall be arranged to drain away from dry areas toward damp or wet areas, and away from equipment and enclosures.

C. Exposed Work: 1. In exposed work, run conduit and raceway parallel to centerlines and structure

surfaces; or perpendicular to centerlines where required, with right angle turns consisting of symmetrical bends or fittings.

2. Maintain at least 6 inches clearance between conduit and raceway runs and pipes, ducts, and flues of mechanical systems.

3. If a portion of a metallic conduit run, whether plastic-coated or not, extends above grade or is otherwise exposed to personnel, ensure that the conduit is properly bonded to an equipment grounding conductor at both ends. a. Install the equipment grounding conductor either inside or outside the box.

D. Concealed Work: 1. When performing electrical work in concealed spaces, provide the same quality

workmanship as in exposed work. 2. Install below grade conduit in conformance with the requirements of Section 33

71 19, Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes. a. For conduits that pass under building support walls, provide a minimum of 3

inches of concrete encasement all around.


E. Hangers and Supports: 1. Install auxiliary support structures, anchors, and fasteners as specified in Section

26 05 28, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. a. Mount or suspend conduit and wireway systems directly on structural

members of the structures and walls. b. Do not attach conduit or raceway systems to suspended ceiling members or to

the suspending mediums. c. Securely attach anchors into walls.

2. At all conduit attachments, allow space between the mounting surfaces and the conduit by providing U-channel supports, clamp-backs, or spacers. a. Attach wall-mounted conduit runs close to the walls following the contour of

the walls, parallel to the walls and other building lines except at bends.

F. Structure Penetrations: 1. Make penetrations in existing concrete structures by core-drilling.

a. Drill the penetrations true, clean, and free from spalling. 2. At penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and similar assemblies, provide

firestopping as required to maintain fire rating. 3. Make floor penetrations as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

a. Seal all conduit penetrations through floor slabs on grade in buildings with a floor penetration seal.

4. Install a wall penetration seal at all wall penetrations. a. Size wall penetrations to accommodate the conduit outside diameter plus

either 1/4 inch or a hole allowance to allow the installation of the wall penetration seal.

G. Wiring: 1. Install wiring in conduit as indicated. 2. Prior to the installation of any wire, verify that the conduit is clean and free of

debris. 3. Install a separate ground conductor within every conduit.


A. Inspection: 1. Inspect installed conduit runs for obstructions, proper support, proper grounding,

and completeness. 2. Record the actual installed elevations and locations of conduit and tubing on

record drawings specified in Division 01.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 33.23-1 Boxes for Electrical Systems Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 33.23

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, cleaning, and protecting

electrical pull and junction boxes.

B. Related Section: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 3. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 6. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables 7. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.


A. Refer to the Electrical Drawings for additional information.

B. Fiberglass Cable Tray: 1. After routing new primary feeders through existing fiberglass cable trays, new

solid fiberglass tops shall be furnished (Omnitray or equal) and installed.

C. Provide stainless steel type 316 NEMA 4X boxes for fiber optic cabling systems.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,

Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z55.1 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus & Equipment

(withdrawn 1990, no replacement).


A. Product Data:


1. Submit a list of the materials proposed to satisfy the requirements of this Section. 2. Submit the manufacturer's comprehensive calculations used to determine size

requirements for the boxes. 3. Submit Product Data and catalog cuts of the materials and equipment proposed to

be used to satisfy the requirements of this Section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 01:

1. Product Data: a. List of the proposed materials b. Catalog cuts of sheet metal boxes for general purpose applications in dry

locations c. Catalog cuts of stainless-steel boxes for applications in wet locations d. Catalog cuts of equipment and control device enclosures for all areas except

outdoor and corrosive locations e. Catalog cuts of equipment and control device enclosures for outdoor

locations. 2. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Design Data: 1) Manufacturer's comprehensive calculations.

b. Test Reports: 1) Factory test reports.

c. Certificates: 1) Testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling.

d. Qualification Statements: 1) Qualifications of the licensed electricians 2) Qualifications of the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).



a. To supervise installation of the Work of this Section, employ licensed electricians. 1) Submit the qualifications of the licensed electricians supervising the

Work of this Section. 2. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Qualifications:

a. Employ an independent testing agency, qualified as specified in Division 01 and Section 26 05 63, Electrical Testing, to perform testing required by this Section.

b. Submit information verifying the ETL’s qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements:


1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in Articles 250, 300, and 370 of NFPA 70 (NEC), and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.


by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and listed and labeled or approved for the application intended as indicated or specified, unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. a. Provide products that are approved, listed, and labeled for the short circuit

currents, voltages, and currents indicated or specified to be applied.

1.07 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Accept products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05

00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00, Common

Work Results for Electrical.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names: 1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the

basis of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required. 2. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose

products are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contract requirements.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes for General Purpose Applications: 1. For general purpose applications in dry locations, provide small sheet steel pull and

terminal boxes and covers that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 12 enclosures with continuously welded and ground smooth seams, and having no holes or knockouts. a. Cover:


1) Provide overlapping sheet steel screw covers with captivated screws for each box.

2) Provide a means of bonding on the cover. b. Gasket: Provide an oil resistant cover gasket for each box. c. Mounting Brackets:

1) Provide 12-gauge steel wall-mounting brackets. d. Finish:

1) Provide polyester powder coating applied over phosphatized surfaces. 2) Color: ANSI Z55.1 Number 61 gray.

e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pentair, Screw Cover SC Junction Boxes 2) Rittal Corp 3) Milbank Manufacturing 4) Or Approved equal.

2. For outdoor locations, provide stainless steel 14-gauge Type 316 enclosures with covers that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X enclosures, and as follows. a. Covers:

1) Provide a removable slip-on cover with plated stainless-steel captivated screws along the bottom edge for each enclosure.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pentair, Screw Cover Type 4X Enclosures 2) Rittal Corp 3) Milbank Manufacturing 4) Or Approved equal.

B. Ground Lug/Bus Bar: 1. Provide a copper ground lug or a 1/4-inch by 2-inch copper bus bar in large pull

and junction boxes.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: 1. Submit factory test reports to the Engineer as specified for the products in this

Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Install the work of this Section only under the supervision of licensed electricians.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conduit stub-ups to be mated with electrical boxes and enclosures are of the correct type and size and are at the proper location.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes for General Purpose Applications: 1. For general purpose applications in dry locations, provide small sheet steel pull and

terminal boxes that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 12. 2. Provide boxes that are fabricated from the same type of material as the conduit

with which the boxes are used.

B. Equipment and Control Device Enclosures: 1. For all areas except outdoor and corrosive locations, provide enclosures that meet

the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4 or 12 enclosures, depending on Contract requirements.

2. For outdoor locations, provide enclosures with covers that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X enclosures.

C. Installing Boxes for Other than Electrical Outlets and Devices: 1. Accurately punch holes for conduit openings using a hydraulic punch and punches

sized for the conduit to be installed. 2. Install a conduit breather in the top of the box and a conduit drain fitting in the

bottom of all boxes not located in bone-dry areas that are at least 100 feet from a hose-bib.

3. Support boxes for other than electrical outlets and devices using one of the following methods: a. Mount the boxes directly to the structure using 4 or more stainless steel type

316 anchors. 1) Attach mounting screws to feet located outside of the box interior or seal

the screw holes to prevent water penetration. 2) Provide 1/4-inch spacers behind the boxes unless the box has raised

pads. b. Mount the box on U-channel and structural supports conforming to Section

26 05 28, Hangers and Supports.

D. Make up all conduit connections to boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13, Conduit and Tubing.

E. Install wiring in boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Wire, Cable, and Accessories.

F. Ground boxes in conformance with Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.


A. Touch up damaged coatings on electrical boxes and enclosures.


A. Site Tests: 1. Test all boxes to verify that they are properly connected to the grounding system.


B. Inspection: 1. Inspect flush boxes to verify that the opening between the box and the wall finish

is less than 1/16-inch. 2. Inspect flush boxes to verify that each box is flush with the wall, or protrudes less

than 1/16-inch, and is not set behind the wall surface. 3. Inspect surface mounted boxes to verify that they are level and plumb within 1/16-

inch as specified. 4. Record the actual installed elevations and locations of pull and junction boxes on

record drawings specified in Division 01.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Clear and dispose of waste materials in accordance with the requirements of

Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Except for surfaces to be painted, mask electrical boxes to protect them from paint overspray or over-brushing during painting operations.

B. Protect boxes against damage from other work.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 53-1 Identification for Electrical Systems Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, and protecting identification signs and

labels for electrical systems.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 2. Section 26 05 13 - Medium-Voltage Cables 3. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Conductors & Cables 4. Section 26 11 13 – Medium Voltage Unit Substations 5. Section 26 24 16 – Switchgear Modifications 6. Section 26 25 16 – Cable Bus Assemblies.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee

Workplaces.

D. International Code Council 1. International Fire Code (IFC).

E. U. S. Government: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

a. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and Section 26 05 00:

1. Product Data: a. Provide catalog cuts for the actual products provided and indicate clearly

the usage of each product. 2. Shop Drawings:


a. Provide a schedule depicting all nametag legends. b. Provide drawings of typical nametags.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the all applicable requirements of OSHA, but particularly those

stated in 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Comply with the requirements of NFPA 70E that are applicable to electrical

identification items as listed below in this Specification Section.


A. Protect items from damage during delivery, storage, and handling in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and as detailed below.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products meeting the specified requirements from one of the following manufacturers, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Brady Worldwide, Inc., P. O. Box 2131, Milwaukee, WI 53201-2131, Telephone (414) 358-6600.

2. Seton Identification Products, 20 Thompson Road, P. O. Box 819, Branford, CT 06405-0819, Telephone (800) 243-6624.

3. LEM Products, Inc.; P. O. Box 190, 4089 Landisville Road, Doylestown, PA 18901, Telephone (800) 220-2400 or (215) 348-9900.

B. To serve as examples of the quality required of the specified products, several Brady Worldwide, Inc. Product Numbers are listed for informational purposes only.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Laminated Phenolic or Plastic: 1. Provide rigid, thermosetting resin or polymer material that is heat- and fire-

resistant, abrasion resistant, electronically non-conductive, and non-corroding. 2. Extrude the thermosetting resin or polymer into sheets; laminate the sheets

together so that colored top and bottom layers sandwich a contrasting color core in the middle.

B. Mounting Hardware: 1. Provide number 10 hex-head machine screws and lock-washers, or hex-head

bolts, lock-washers, and nuts for mounting identification nameplates onto electrical equipment.

2. Provide either type 316 stainless steel or brass fasteners; however, all fasteners used on the same nameplate must be of the same material.


2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES

A. Provide laminated phenolic or plastic equipment identification nameplates having beveled edges and engraved lettering.

1. Drill holes for mounting hardware in the equipment identification nameplates as follows:

a. For nameplates that are more than 2 inches wide, drill four holes. b. For nameplates that are more than 1-1/2 inches high, drill four mounting

holes. c. For smaller nameplates, drill holes for two fasteners.

2. Provide equipment identification nameplates long enough to ensure that the heads of fastening hardware do not extend beyond the nameplate material, and come no closer than 1/16-inch to the nearest letter of the nameplate legend and no closer than 1/16-inch to the nearest edge.

B. Engrave the following information on each equipment identification nameplate, similar to that shown in Examples 1 and 2 below except appropriate for the specific equipment being identified:

1. In the first line, indicate the equipment type and identification number. 2. In the second line, indicate the equipment Voltage, the equipment current if

known, the phase, and the number of wires. a. If the current is listed, provide a description that further identifies the

current, such as “overload protection current”, full load amps (FLA), or other information identifying the current indicated.

3. In the third line, indicate the words “SERVED FROM” followed by the serving equipment and the branch circuit.

EXAMPLE 1:

POWER PANELBOARD PPB-2

208/120 VOLTS, 10.8 FLA, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE SERVED FROM

PPB-1, CIRCUITS F1 THROUGH T1

4. For motor starters, circuit breakers, transformers, and disconnect switches, provide an additional line with the word “SERVES” and the equipment served.

C. Engrave the following information on identification plate for any distribution equipment (i.e. switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, switchgear, etc).

1. The conductor insulation color coding for feeder and branch circuit wiring originating from each piece of distribution equipment per NFPA 70. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 19 for wire and cable color coding requirements.


EXAMPLE for 208Y/120-volt equipment:

PHASE COLOR A BLACK B RED C BLUE

GROUNDED CONDUCTOR (NEUTRAL)

WHITE

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR

GREEN

D. Engrave equipment identification nameplates with all capital, Helvetica Medium font, or equal, lettering.

1. Provide white letters on a black background, except for warning nameplates provide white lettering centered on red backgrounds.

2. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch border between the nameplate lettering and the tops and bottoms of the nameplates.

3. Use 3/8-inch high letters for the first line, and 1/4-inch letters for succeeding lines; except, in cases where the tag will not fit because the equipment is too small, use 3/16-inch letters for the first line and 1/8-inch letters for succeeding lines.

2.04 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY LABELS

A. Conduit Voltage Markers: 1. Provide conduit markers consisting of polymer-coated cloth tape with a

printable topcoat and a rubber-based pressure sensitive adhesive on the back to provide oil and water resistance, good print durability, and the flexibility to allow it to be wrapped around curved surfaces.

2. Clearly mark the voltages in white lettering on red colored backgrounds.

B. Conduit Wiring System Identification: 1. Provide companion type labeling markers to indicate the wiring system in each

raceway and consisting of a vinyl film substrate with a pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive backing.

2. Clearly mark the wiring systems: a. Power and control in white lettering on red colored background b. Fiber optics in black letters on orange background.

3. To properly identify each electrical system in the raceway, provide the following, or similar, wording on the labeling markers corresponding to the systems:

a. For electrical power systems, word the labels "POWER" b. For control systems, word the labels "CONTROL" c. For fiber, word the labels “FIBER”.

C. Conduit Feeder Identification:


1. Provide conduit feeder identification markers consisting of polymer-coated cloth tape with a printable topcoat and a rubber-based pressure sensitive adhesive on the back to provide oil and water resistance, good print durability, and the flexibility to allow it to be wrapped around curved surfaces.

2. Provide conduit feeder identification labels that identify the feeder circuit with 3/4-inch high white lettering on red backgrounds.

D. Conduit and Raceway Label Dimensions: 1. Provide label color field lengths and lettering height as indicated in Table 26 05

23-1:

Table 26 05 23-1 Conduit and Raceway Label Sizes Raceway Outside Diameter

(Inches) Background Length

(Inches) Lettering Height

(Inches) 3/4 to 2 7 1

1-1/2 to 2 7 1 2-1/2 to 6 14 1-1/4

E. Product Examples: 1. Conduit Voltage Markers: Brady Worldwide, Inc., B-946 custom self-sticking

pipe markers or color code tape. 2. Conduit Wiring System: Brady Worldwide, Inc., B-946 custom self-sticking

pipe markers or color code tape. 3. Conduit Feeder Identification: Brady Worldwide, Inc., Product Number 31964.

2.05 DANGER WARNING LABELS:

A. Provide danger signage in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.145 and NFPA 70E.

1. For enclosures, provide signs with the caption “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT”.

B. Product Examples: 1. Enclosure danger signs: Brady Worldwide, Inc Product Number 84083.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installing electrical identification items, verify with the Engineer that the data on each is correct.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Identification:


1. Identify wiring in conformance with the requirement s of Section 26 05 13 and Section 26 05 19.

B. Conduit and Raceway Identification: 1. Identify the wiring systems in conduit and raceway by providing companion

type labeling markers to indicate the systems in each. 2. Identify the Voltages carried in conduit and raceway by providing voltage

labeling markers on all accessible raceways. 3. Identify feeders by providing identification labels.

C. Electrical Box Identification: 1. For each pull box and junction box, if it is not otherwise indicated, install a

laminated phenolic identification nameplate with 1/8-inch white letters on a black background on box identifying its source of power; for example, indicate the panelboard and circuit number supplying power to a box with an identification nameplate.

2. For above ground pull boxes and junction boxes, install nameplates on box in a visible location.

a. For all enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250, fasten the nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or an approved equal.

D. Electrical Equipment Identification: 1. Provide identification nameplates on the front of the following electrical

equipment: a. Medium Voltage Unit Substations, as specified in Section 26 11 13.

2. Install nameplates in the top center of the front face of the electrical equipment in a visible location.

a. For all enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250, fasten the nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or an approved equal.

E. High Voltage Warning Signage: 1. Install high voltage warning signage on all equipment enclosures.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 63-1 Acceptance Testing of Elec. Systems Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 05 63

ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of materials to performance test electrical systems and equipment. 1. Items Supplied Under This Section:

a. Electrical System Testing b. Thermographic Testing c. Ground System Testing d. Insulation Testing e. Test Procedure f. Test Report.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Division 26, as applicable.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Documents and Testing Requirements of: 1. America National Standards Institute (ANSI): as applicable, including:

a. ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code b. ANSI Z244.1 American National Standards for Personnel Protection.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), as applicable. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), as applicable, including:

a. IEEE C.57.13, IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), as applicable, including:

a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) b. NFPA 70E - Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

5. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA), as applicable. 6. State and Local Codes and Ordinances as applicable. 7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), as applicable, including:

Title 29, Parts 1907, 1910 and 1936. 8. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) as applicable, including:

a. ATS-2017: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems

b. MTS-2015: Maintenance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation as required by this Section of the Contract to the Design Engineer in strict accordance with the provisions of Section 26 05 00 for review, comments and subsequent approval.

B. Submission to include the following: 1. Field inspection report as required for each item of material and/or equipment

outlined herein. 2. Manufacturer's directions for use of ground megger with proposed method

indicated.

C. Test Reports: 1. Each test report prepared by the respective testing firm(s) comply, where

applicable, to all stipulations specified in Section 26 05 00 for Operation, Maintenance and Installation Manuals with reference to preparation, paper requirements, indexing and binders. Include in each test report the following: a. Summary of project b. Description of equipment tested c. Description of test d. Test results e. Conclusions and recommendations f. Appendix, including appropriate test forms g. Identification of test equipment used. h. Signature of responsible test organization authority i. Furnish five copies of each completed report to the Design Electrical

Engineer no later than 30 days after completion of each test. Assemble and certify the testing firm each final test report, which must be submitted to the Design Engineer for review, comments and subsequent approval.


A. Qualifications of Testing Laboratory: Select an independent nationally recognized testing laboratory that is independent from electrical contractor that either is a member of The International Electrical Testing Association or meets the following qualifications: 1. Is nationally recognized as an electrical testing laboratory 2. Has been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical systems and equipment for

at least 2 years 3. Is independent from the electrical contractor, the Owner, the Engineer and all

other contractors on the job 4. Has at least one Professional Engineer on staff that is licensed in the State where

the project site is located 5. Derives more than 75 percent of its income from electrical testing. 6. Owns or leases sufficient calibrated equipment to do the testing required 7. Has a means to trace all test instrument calibration to The National Institute of

Standards and Technology.


B. Membership in the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) shall be considered evidence of meeting items A. 1. through and including A. 5

C. Testing shall be done under the supervision of a technician certified by International Electrical Testing Association or by technicians that are both certified by the National Society of Professional Engineers and experienced in electrical testing with 5 years of testing experience.

D. The testing laboratory shall supervise or perform all testing of equipment and oversee setting of all circuit breakers and calibration of all instruments.

E. The testing firm used must be approved by the Engineer.

F. Include the cost of such tests in the Contractors Bid Price for the applicable bid item.

1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Field Inspection: 1. This Contractor is responsible for a complete inspection of all equipment, prior to

testing and energizing to ascertain that it is free from any damage, scratches, or missing components and that all power connections are correct, and that they are tight in conformance with recommended standard practice. The inspection is to also include a check of control wiring, terminal connections and all bolts and nuts.

2. Perform field inspection by this Contractor during a time when the Owner’s Representative, Field Engineer, and the Design Engineer are present to witness each inspection and its performance.

3. Correct any deficiencies found during the inspection by this Contractor prior to the energizing and testing of the equipment.

1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule all testing with work of other contractors to ensure an orderly sequence of startup and completion of work.

1.07 5 KV CABLE ACCEPTANCE CHECKS

A. Acceptance Checks and Tests: Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the latest IEEE, NEMA and ICEA standards. Perform work in a careful and safe manner so as not to endanger personnel or equipment. 1. Acceptance Checks and Tests: Shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Inspect exposed sections for physical damage. b. Verify cable is supplied and connected in accordance with single line

diagram. c. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support, and termination. d. Check visible cable bends against ICEA or manufacturer's minimum

allowable bending radius. e. Inspect for proper fireproofing in common cable areas.


f. If cables are terminated through window type CT's, make an inspection to verify that neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for normal operation of protective devices.

g. Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition. h. Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.

1.08 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEM INSPECTION

A. General Requirements: Perform inspection of the underground conduit systems installation by a representative of the Owner as the work progresses. Inspect each of the following prior to proceeding to the next phase of the installation: 1. Trench bed / lower sand bed for conduits 2. Each layer of conduits 3. Upper sand bed for conduits 4. Warning Tape 5. Soil backfill.

B. Failure to comply with any of the above, indicated sequential inspection requirements is just cause for the Engineer to request removal of the work and reinstall as per these specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Perform, supervise, and furnish all test equipment needed to perform tests and provide safety measures, procedures and equipment required for each test.

B. Schedule all testing with the Engineer. Perform testing in the presence of the Engineer except when the Engineer approves in writing conducting a specific test without the Engineer’s presence.

C. Notify all involved parties including the Engineer prior to tests, advising them of the test to be performed and the scheduled date and time.

D. Coordinate the tests with others involved.

E. Prepare written test procedures and forms used in the test reports and submit for approval prior to commencement of testing.

F. Include in each test report the following information: 1. Job title


2. Date of test 3. Equipment, system or cable identification 4. Type of test 5. Description of test instrument and date of latest calibration 6. Section of specification defining test along with description of test and

evaluations as reported by the testing company 7. Test results (correct all readings at 20 degrees C) 8. Signature of person supervising test 9. Signature of Contractor 10. Space for Engineer's signature.

G. Refer to individual tests and inspections hereinafter specified for any additional or specified requirements.

H. Test Instrument Calibration: 1. The testing firm is to have a calibration program, which assures that all applicable

test instrumentation are maintained within rated accuracy. 2. The accuracy is to be directly traceable to The National Institute of Standards and

Technology. 3. Instruments are to be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency

schedule: a. Field Instruments: Analog, 6 months maximum Digital, 12 months maximum b. Laboratory Instruments: 12 months c. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months.

4. Make dated calibration labels visible on all test equipment. 5. Keep up-to-date records which show date and results of instruments calibrated or

tested. 6. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for each

test instrument. 7. Calibrating standard is to be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

I. Safety and Precautions: 1. Safety practices are to include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970-OSHA b. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety

Council, Chapter 4 c. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures d. IETA Safety/Accident Prevention Program e. Owner's safety practices f. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 70E g. ANSI Z244.1 American National Standards for Personnel Protection.

2. Perform all tests with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise specifically required.

3. The testing firm is to have a designated safety representative on the project to supervise operations with respect to safety.


3.02 TESTING TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor is required to obtain copies of NETA ATS-2017 and MTS-2015, and to keep at least one copy of each at the project site, to use as reference for testing requirements.

B. Continuity Test: Make test for continuity and correctness of wiring and identification on all conductors installed.

C. Wire and Cable: 1. Test all wires and cables sized No. 2 and larger in accordance with NETA ATS-

2017. 2. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical tests on all No. 4 and No. 6 power

cables that operate at voltages exceeding 150 volts to ground in accordance with NETA ATS-2017.

3. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical tests on all other wires and cables in accordance with NETA ATS-2017.

4. Replace any wires which have been damaged. 5. Correct causes of all readings which do not meet the acceptable minimum

insulation readings are as stated in NETA ATS-2017. Exceed the nominal expected temperatures for the actual load.

6. Retest items requiring correction.

3.03 TESTING TO BE PERFORMED BY THE TESTING LABORATORY

A. Select, hire and pay an independent nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory to perform all testing specified in this article. Obtain Owner’s approval of the testing laboratory and the testing laboratory proposed test procedure prior to commencement of any tests.

B. Set all adjustments for all overcurrent protection devices in accordance with the protection and coordination study of Section 26 05 00.

C. Visually and mechanically inspect and electrically test items as scheduled in attached schedule for equipment in attached schedule equipment as listed in attached schedule in using the procedures of NETA ATS-2013. When a test for a particular item is not called out in ATS, test using the procedures in NETA MTS-2011.

D. 5 KV Cable, Splice and Termination Tests: 1. General:

a. Tests on 5 KV A.C. voltage cables, splices and terminations shall consist of a non-destructive, direct current, dielectric test on the insulation of medium voltage cable systems using ICEA standard procedure.

b. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer ten days prior to the date of tests. Tests must be witnessed by authorized representatives of the Engineer and Owner with their names included in the report. Certified copies of test data shall be submitted to the Engineer for final approval.


c. The testing must be done by an independent testing agency meeting the criteria of this specification and certified by the Engineer as an approved agency for direct current dielectric testing.

d. All tests shall be made by qualified field technicians especially trained for dielectric testing and interpretation of results and regularly engaged in dielectric testing and shall be an independent organization having no affiliation with the construction Contractor.

e. All new cables shall be tested at 80 percent of the manufacturer's original D.C. Over-Voltage Acceptance Test.

f. All cables, including all splices and terminations shall be tested after installation and prior to being energized. All cables not under test shall be properly grounded and tied to the shield of the cable through ground under tests. If it is necessary to repeat a test, the capacitance and absorption current shall be discharged by grounding the conductor in an approved manner. All cable terminations must be thoroughly cleaned immediately before testing and must be covered by a protective boot to limit corona. The protective boot shall consist of a glass bottle or plastic bag covering the conductor and test probe or other approved method.

2. Preliminary Testing Procedure: a. Test procedure shall be as follows and the results for each cable test shall be

recorded as specified herein. 1) Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter

method. Ohmic value shall be recorded. 2) Perform an insulation resistance test utilizing megohmmeter with a

voltage output of at least 15,000 volts. a) Individually test each conductor with all other conductors and

shields grounded. b) Test duration shall be for 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30

seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index.

3. High Potential Testing Procedure: a. Perform a dc high potential test on all cables. Adhere to all precautions and

limits as specified in the applicable NEMA Standard for the specific cable. Perform tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 400. Test procedure shall be as follow and the results for each cable test shall be recorded as specified herein. 1) Current sensing circuits in test equipment shall measure only the leakage

current associated with the cable under test and shall not include internal leakage of the test equipment.

2) Record wet and dry bulb temperatures or relative humidity and temperature.

3) Test each section of cable individually. 4) Individually test each conductor with all other conductors grounded at

both ends. Ground all shields. 5) Terminations shall be properly corona suppressed by guard ring, field

reduction sphere, or other suitable methods.


6) Ensure that the maximum test voltage does not exceed the limits for terminators specified in IEEE Standard 48 or manufacturer's specifications.

7) Apply a dc high potential test in at least five equal increments until maximum test voltage is reached. No increment shall exceed the voltage rating of the cable. Record dc leakage current at each step after a constant stabilization time consistent with system charging current.

8) Raise the test conductor to the specified maximum test voltage and hold for a total of 15 minutes or as specified by the manufacturer. Record readings of leakage current at 30 second and 1 minute and at 1 minute intervals, thereafter.

9) Reduce the conductor test potential to zero and measure residual voltage at discrete intervals.

10) Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation stored charge. Proper notification must be made to all concerned parties if grounds are left in place.

11) Test shielded cable with an ac power factor test set. a) Test procedure shall be in accordance with test set manufacturer's

instructions. b) Test results shall be compared to results on similar cables.

4. Minimum Test Values: a. The results obtained from each D.C. high potential test shall be plotted in the

form of a curve on Kilovolt-Megohm paper and submitted to the Design Engineer for review, comments and subsequent approval.

b. A graphic plot shall be made with leakage current (X axis) versus voltage (Y axis) at each increment for each cable test. 1) The step voltage slope should be reasonably linear. 2) Absorption slope should be flat or negative. In no case should slope

exhibit a positive characteristic. c. Shielding must exhibit continually. Investigate resistance values in excess of

10 ohms per 1000 feet (305m) of cable. d. The dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index should be above 1.5

unless an extremely high value is obtained initially, such that when doubled will not yield a meaningful value.

e. Each plot shall be identified as to location, humidity and size and length of cable. All graphs shall show equivalent D.C. voltage of A.C. operating voltage. Manufacturer's name and cable identification numbers shall be recorded on the data sheets and certified copies of the data shall be submitted for approval.

f. Cable Test Results: 1) Following the completion of the tests and the plotting of all curves, the

testing organization shall interpret these results and render a written summary as to the condition of the tested cable installation.

2) Equipped with the above information, the Engineer shall make a decision as to whether or not the tested cable installation should be energized or whether additional testing is required.


E. Thermographic Inspection: 1. Perform thermographic inspection of the electrical equipment and installations as

listed below in accordance with NETA ATS-2013, and as detailed below. The following equipment is to be scanned: a. 5 kV Main Switchgear b. Transformers PM3A and PM3B c. Switchboards DS3A and DS3B.

2. Provide report including the following items: a. Items scanned b. Whether item passed or failed c. All items in NETA ATS-2013 d. The probable cause e. Severity of defect f. Recommended corrective measures g. Video recording of test.

3. Scan using an infrared camera with video scanner output to a display screen with a range of at least 1 degree C to 75 degrees C with an accuracy of 0.1 degree C and with the following equipment: a. One 7 degree telephoto lens b. One 20 degree wide angle lens c. One 40 degree extra-wide angle lens.

4. Record output of camera during testing onto a DVD or store digital images of each piece of equipment inspected onto a CD as a record of the temperature variations. Record either by order or by digital imprinting the actual equipment being scanned. Turn off recordings during inactive periods or edit DVD to eliminate dead periods.

5. Display data on a monitor capable of providing both a gray step mode and color monitor. These capabilities allow distinct temperature levels to be shown in black and white and color on the thermogram.

6. Submit three copies of report and two copies of the DVD or CD. 7. Include DVD or CD of thermographs of the defective equipment and installations.

Also include in report. 8. Submit both copies of the report to the Engineer who will make the determination

of corrective measurements.

F. Liquid Filled Transformers Tests: 1. Visually and mechanically inspect and electrically test liquid filled transformers

in accordance with NETA ATS-2013. 2. Acceptable values are as stated in NETA ATS-2013.

G. Instrument Transformer Tests: 1. Visually and mechanically inspect and electrically test all instrument transformers

in accordance with NETA ATS-2013. 2. Acceptable values are as stated in NETA ATS-2013.

H. Metering Tests:


1. Visually and mechanically inspect and electrically test all meters using standards traceable to The National Institute of Standards and Technology in accordance with NETA ATS-2013.

2. Meters should be accurate to within their stated calibration.

I. Grounding Electrode System Tests: 1. Visually and mechanically inspect and electrically test all made grounding

electrode systems in accordance with NETA ATS-2013. For the point-to-point tests of NETA ATS-2013, measurements are only required for equipment conductors run with services, and feeders and branch circuits rated over 400 amperes.

2. Determine acceptable values as follows: a. Main service entrance ground: 5 ohms.

3. Prior to the electric service being energized and prior to the installed products being covered, measure the ground resistance to earth in the presence of the Engineer and/or Construction Manager.

J. Voltage Adjustment: 1. Measure the plant voltage with the plant operated at both no load and at nominal

load at the following locations: a. Switchboards DS3A and DS3B.

2. Adjust transformer taps to bring the no-load voltage above nominal, but in no case, higher than 105.8% of nominal. Adjust the operated loaded voltage to a value above 91.7%, (ANSI Range A), with only momentary excursions to a maximum of 105.8% and a minimum of 88.3% for all loads and 86.7% for motor loads. (ANSI Range B).

3. After all adjustments have been made, re-measure all voltages. 4. For record purposes measure and record on all 3-phases, actual plant load at all

switchboard and panelboard buses. 5. With a minimum/maximum recording voltmeter measure starting voltage dip for

the largest motor at: a. Starter terminals. b. Panelboard. c. Main Distribution Switchboard.

6. Measure minimum/maximum/average voltage at Main Distribution Switchboard over a 24-hour period with the plant running on at least one phase with recording voltmeter.

3.04 TESTING TO BE PERFORMED BY MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Medium-Voltage Unit Substations: 1. Provide the field services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s

representative to assist with functional testing and commissioning of unit substations as required by Section 26 11 13.

B. Low-Voltage Cable Bus:


1. Provide the field services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to assist with functional testing and commissioning of cable bus assemblies as required by Section 26 25 13.

3.05 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES

A. Report all unacceptable values immediately. Correct all deficiencies found in work of this contract and separately report deficiencies in work of items of other contracts. 1. Retest items requiring correction. Correct or have corrected any remaining

deficiencies and retest until work is acceptable.

3.06 RETESTING

A. After equipment has been in service for a period of nine months repeat the following tests: 1. Thermographic testing.

a. Correct all causes of readings above the nominal expected reading for the load encountered.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 11 13-1 Medium Voltage Unit Substations Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming, Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 11 13

MEDIUM VOLTAGE UNIT SUBSTATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision required,

including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation

for Medium Voltage Unit Substations (which may also be identified as secondary unit substations, MV USS, or USS) as required for the complete performance of

the work, as shown on the Drawings, and as herein specified. 2. Medium Voltage Unit Substations shall consist of a primary MV (>1000 V)

incoming section, a MV substation transformer, and a secondary LV (≤600 V)

outgoing section to distribute power; as indicated on the drawings and as specified hereinafter.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical

3. Section 26 05 13 – Medium-Voltage Cables 4. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

5. Section 26 25 16 – Cable Bus Assemblies.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. General, Publications: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to

the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced publications shall be the latest date as of the

date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM D877, “Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating

Liquids Using Disk Electrodes”. 2. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA):

a. NETA ATS, “Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems”.

3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

a. ISO 9001, “Quality Management Systems - Requirements” 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3, “Standard for Metal-Enclosed Switchgear” b. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4 - Standard for Indoor AC Medium Voltage Switches

used in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

c. IEEE/ANSI C37.121, “IEEE Guide for Switchgear – Unit Substations – Requirements” (ANSI approved)


d. IEEE C57.12.00, “Standard for General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers”

e. IEEE C57.12.10, “Standard Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Power Transformers”

f. IEEE C57.12.36, “Standard Requirements for Liquid Immersed Distribution Substation Transformers”

g. IEEE C57.12.70, “Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and

Power Transformers” h. IEEE C57.12.80, “Standard Terminology for Power and Distribution

Transformers” i. IEEE C57.12.90, “Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution

Power, and Regulating Transformers”

j. IEEE C57.13, “Requirements for Instrument Transformers” k. ANSI/IEEE 48, “Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for High

Voltage Alternating Current Cable Terminations”. 5. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

a. NECA 400, “Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards”.

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA PB 2, “Deadfront Distribution Switchboards”

b. NEMA PB 2.1, General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less”.

7. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): a. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code (NEC)”

b. NFPA 70B, “Electrical Equipment Maintenance” c. NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace”.

8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), as applicable.

9. USA Federal Regulations, Policies and Acts: a. Energy Policy and Conservation Act 1975 & Energy Policy Act 2005

b. 10 CFR 429 - Certification, Compliance, and Enforcement for Consumer Products and Commercial and Industrial Equipment

c. 10 CFR 431 – Energy Efficient Program for Certain Commercial and

Industrial Equipment. 10. Federal Specifications (FS):

a. FS W-C-375, “Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service”.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless specifically defined within the Contract Documents, the words or acronyms

contained within this specification shall be as defined within, or by the references listed within this specification, the Contract Documents, or, if not listed by either, by

common industry practice. 1. LV: Low Voltage (≤600 V); in the context of the USS, may also refer to the

secondary side of the MV transformer

2. HV: High Voltage; in the context of the USS, refers to the primary side of the MV transformer

3. MV: Medium Voltage


4. USS: Unit Substation 5. XFMR: Transformer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and

Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical, in addition to those specified herein. 1. Submit sufficient information to determine compliance with the Contract

Documents. Identify submittal data with the specific equipment tags and/or service descriptions to which they pertain. Submittal data shall be clearly marked

to identify the specific model numbers, options, and features of equipment and work proposed.

2. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be indicated within the submittal.

Each deviation shall reference the corresponding drawing or specification number, show the Contract Document requirement text and/or illustration, and

shall be accompanied by a detailed written justification for the deviation. 3. Submit required Product Data and Shop Drawings specific to each product and

accessory proposed. In addition, include the following information:

a. Front view of enclosure with overall dimensions b. Single line diagram

c. Top and bottom conduit entrance / exit locations with dimensions d. Electrical characteristics of the primary equipment, transformer, and

secondary equipment

e. Each type of overcurrent protective device f. Specified ratings

g. Bill-of-material h. Shipping splits and weights i. Wiring diagrams and schematics

j. Specified accessories.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of unit substations and assemblies of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of ten (10) years.

1. The manufacturer shall have a valid ISO 9001 certification and an applicable quality assurance system that is regularly reviewed and audited by a third -party

registrar. Manufacturing, inspection, and testing procedures shall be developed and controlled under the guidelines of the quality assurance system.

2. The manufacturer or their representative shall have service, repair, and technical

support services available 24 hours 7 days a week basis.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of ten (10)

years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing equipment similar in type and scope to that required for this Project.


C. All work performed and all materials used shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and with all applicable local regulations and ordinances. Equipment

assemblies, materials, and component equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriter’s Laboratories, or by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction; and marked for intended use.

D. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards:

1. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer

in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment.

2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral

required response spectra as specified in above codes. 3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for

proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be

considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prior to delivery to the Project site, ensure that suitable storage space is available to store materials in a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling,

extreme temperatures, humidity, and corrosive atmospheres. Materials shall be protected during delivery and storage and shall not exceed the manufacturer stated

storage requirements. As a minimum, store indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. In addition, protect electronics from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage.

B. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers, labeled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product

brand name, and equipment tag number or service name as identified within the Contract Documents.

C. Inspect and report any concealed damage or violation of delivery storage, and

handling requirements to the Engineer.

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be provided in accordance with the minimum requirements specified in Division 01, Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical, and additional requirements specified herein.

1. Submit required O&M data specific to each product and accessory proposed. In addition, include the following information:

a. Installation information


b. Operational instructions c. Test reports

d. Other specialized instructions, as required. 2. The final (as-built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the final

approved submittal drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing or installation process.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. General: Conform to requirements of Division 01 and Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. The manufacturer shall warrant products against defects in material and workmanship for 24 months from the date of commissioning or 36 months from the date of shipment, whichever comes first, provided that the manufacturer performs functional

testing, commissioning and first parameter adjusting of equipment.

C. During the warranty period the manufacturer shall repair or replace defective products.

This warranty shall be in addition to any provided by the Contractor. The warranty shall exclude normal wear and tear under normal usage and any damage caused by abuse, modification, or improper maintenance by entities other than the manufacturer

or its approved representative.

D. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the

Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.09 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall provide a recommended spare parts list with the following

information provided as a minimum: 1. Contact information for the closest parts stocking location to the Owner. 2. Critical spare parts shall be identified as those parts being associated with long

lead times and/or those being critical to the unit's operation. 3. Maintenance spares shall be identified as being those parts required to regularly

perform scheduled maintenance on the furnished equipment. These spares shall include, but shall not be limited to, consumable spares that are required to be exchanged during scheduled maintenance periods.

B. Spare parts shall be provided for each type and size of unit installed. At a minimum, the following shall be provided:

1. Provide the minimum spare parts recommended by the manufacturer 2. Provide one (1) complete set of each type of power and control fuse installed

within equipment.


C. Any manufacturer specific special tool, not normally found in an electrician’s toolbox, required to remove and install recommended or furnished spare parts shall be

furnished.

D. Spare parts shall be properly marked and packaged for long term storage. Printed

circuit boards shall be provided in separate anti-static containers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Unit substations shall be manufactured and assembled by a single source as multiple pieces of equipment and coordinated to create a single product when it is installed at

the jobsite.

B. Acceptable Products: Products and manufacturers specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Products shall be modified

as necessary by the manufacturer for compliance with project requirements. Provide products of the specified manufacturers without exception, unless approved as a

substitute by addendum to the Contract Documents prior to the bid date: 1. Eaton/Cooper Power Systems 2. Schneider Electric/Square D

3. ABB/General Electric.

C. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their

products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.


A. Secondary MV unit substations shall consist of a primary MV (>1000 V) incoming section, a MV substation transformer, and a secondary LV (≤1000 V) outgoing section

to distribute power.

B. Any items not specifically mentioned or specified herein, but obviously necessary for proper operation of the USS, are implied by this specification and shall be provided as

if specifically called out or identified.

C. The following information is typically depicted on the Drawings: bus configuration,

bus ratings, interrupting ratings, transformer kVA ratings, circuit breaker ratings, main and feeder connections, elevation and footprint, etc. 1. Where not shown on or able to be derived from the Drawings, the minimum

requirements specified herein shall be provided.

D. The sound level of the unit substation shall not exceed the levels as per NEMA Std.

TR-1 for liquid-filled transformers.


E. The unit substation consists of three sections: the primary incoming line section, the transformer section, and the secondary outgoing distribution section. These sections

are to be integrated to form a single lineup of metal-enclosed structures with metal barriers separating the incoming section from the transformer and the secondary from

the transformer. The manufacturer is to furnish the necessary hardware, cables/wires and connectors to complete the unit substation's interconnections.

F. The equipment shall be totally assembled, adjusted and tested at the factory and then

sectionalized for shipment.

G. Enclosures shall be outdoor NEMA 3R, non-walk-in type. Enclosures shall be

fabricated of code gauge steel and shall be painted the manufacturer's standard finish (ANSI 49 or as otherwise approved).

H. Cables entry locations for the incoming and/or outgoing section(s) shall be as

indicated on the Drawings. 1. Cable data, i.e. cable sizes and quantities per phase, shall be as indicated on the

drawings.

I. The manufacturer will provide a nameplate depicting the single line diagram of the entire unit substation.

J. All nameplates are to be provided with a white background with 3/16-inch-high black letters. Nameplates should be mounted with screws.

2.03 PRIMARY INCOMING SECTION

A. A full height, bottom-entry cabinet / air terminal chamber shall be provided.

B. The air terminal chamber shall consist of a single section and be of outdoor non-walk-

in type construction, close-coupled to the USS MV XFMR. The cabinet shall enclose the substation transformer’s sidewall mounted HV bushings and be designed for

underground feed and provided with facilities for distribution arresters. The cabinet shall include a hinged door with padlockable handle and a penta-head bolt.

C. In establishing the requirements for the enclosure design, consideration shall be given

to such relevant factors as controlled access, tamper resistance, protection from ingress of rodents and insects, and the possibility of arcing faults within the enclosure.

D. System Voltage: 4.16 kV, 3-phase, 60 Hz, solidly grounded; 3-phase, 3-wire without neutral bus.

E. Incoming Cable Terminations:

1. The transformer shall be provided with three (3) sidewall mounted high-voltage bushings with 200-amp wells and inserts for deadfront application, arranged for

radial feed configuration. HV bushings, overcurrent and overvoltage protection shall be located within the air terminal chamber.

2. Include a ground pad with lug.


F. Overcurrent Protection: 1. The high-voltage overcurrent protection scheme provided with the transformer

shall be a loadbreak Bay-O-Net assembly with a flapper valve to minimize oil spillage. Overcurrent protection shall be provided by a Bay-O-Net expulsion fuse

mounted in series with partial range under-oil ELSP current-limiting fuses with a maximum interrupting rating of 50,000 A rms symmetrical.

G. Overvoltage Protection:

1. Primary overvoltage protection shall consist of elbow-type “MOVE” arresters in conjunction with deadfront bushing wells and inserts.

H. All torqued bolts that are used for insulators or direct support of any current carrying parts shall be marked with a bead of highly visible bright orange "torque seal", that will readily show when a bolt has loosened.

I. All steel parts, except galvanized (if used), shall be cleaned and a zinc-phosphate pre-treatment applied prior to paint application.

2.04 MV LIQUID FILLED SUBSTATION TRANSFORMERS

A. The transformer(s) shall be UL listed and labeled substation type per UL1561. Transformers shall comply with 10 CFR 431 as registered on US Department of

Energy’s Compliance Certification Database per 10 CFR 429.

B. Transformers shall include sidewall mounted primary terminations as specified in

paragraph 2.03 above. The secondary of the transformer shall be close coupled to a low voltage switchboard section containing the transformer secondary disconnect/ overcurrent protective device, as per Paragraph 2.05 below.

C. The average temperature rise of the windings, measured by the resistance method, shall be 55/65° C when the transformer is operated at rated kVA output. The

transformer(s) shall be capable of being operated at rated load in a 30° C average, 40° C maximum ambient, as defined by IEEE C57.12.00, without loss of service life expectancy.

D. The transformer manufacturer shall certify that the transformer is Non-PCB, containing less than 1 part per million detectable PCBs. Coolant and insulating fluid

shall be XIAMETER PMX-561 polydimethyl silicone transformer liquid, by Dow Corning; or Approved Equal. 1. The cooling and insulating fluid shall be a non-toxic, environmentally safe, non-

halogenated fluid with high thermal stability and oxidation resistance. 2. The cooling and insulating fluid shall meet the requirements of IEC 836,

“Specifications for Liquid for Electrical Purposes” (Silicone Type T-1); ASTM D 4652-92, “Silicone Fluids for Electrical Insulation”; and IEC 1100, “Classification of Insulating Liquids According to Fire Point and Net Calorific

Value” (Class K3).


3. The cooling and insulating fluid shall be non-sludging, classified as non-hazardous, and have a higher fire point and a lower heat release rate than other

types of class K insulating liquids. 4. Transformers shall be vacuum filled; the process shall be of sufficient vacuum

and duration to ensure that the core and coil assembly is free of moisture prior to filling the tank.

E. HV and LV locations shall be as follows:

1. HV (primary): ANSI Segment 2, i.e. to the observer’s left when facing the front of the transformer

2. LV (secondary): ANSI Segment 4, i.e. to the observer’s right when facing the front of the transformer.

F. Bushing location and phase rotation shall be coordinated with primary and secondary

switchgear to provide correct alignment when switchgear and transformer are connected in the field.

G. Transformer ratings shall be as follows, unless otherwise shown on the drawings: 1. kVA Rating: 1500 kVA ONAN/FONAF 2. High Voltage: 4160V 3-phase (delta), 60 Hz. Provide with two (2) 2-1/2% full

capacity above normal and two (2) 2-1/2% full capacity below normal HV (de-energized) taps

3. Low Voltage: 480/277V 3-phase, 4-wire (wye), 60 Hz 4. Impedance: Manufacturer's standard, ±7-1/2% 5. HV Basic Impulse Level: 60 kV

6. LV Basic Impulse Level: 30 kV.

H. Accessories: Include the following on all substation transformers:

1. Tap changer with silver-plated stationary and movable contacts, for de-energized operation only; externally operable from ground level and pad-lockable

2. Upper filling plug and filter press connection

3. Drain valve, with a 3/8-inch sampler 4. Dial type thermometer

5. Pressure/vacuum gauge [with] [without] bleeder connection 6. Magnetic liquid level gauge 7. Pressure relief valve, with manual bleeder and automatic resealing; set to operate

at 10 psi 8. Gas sampling valve

9. Non-PCB label 10. Sudden pressure relay, permitting remote alarm due to a predetermined rate of

pressure rise

11. Winding temperature relay 12. Alarm contacts.

I. The transformer shall be designed for the future addition of forced air cooling. The fan control equipment will be actuated by contacts that sense the temperature of the top


liquid of the transformer. Temperature sensors, and provisions for future mounting of fans and controls, will be provided on units designated ONAN/FONAF.

1. Fan motors shall operate from a 120 V, single-phase, 60 Hz external source of power; external power to be provided by the Owner when/if required in the future.

2. Contractor shall provide an empty underground 1” conduit, with pull string, from the fan control equipment on each transformer to the Electrical building, to facilitate future fan power wiring by Owner.

J. Sound level, as measured by the NEMA audible sound-level test procedure, shall be less than the values specified in IEEE for liquid filled transformers, when operated at

normal voltage and frequency and no load.

K. The transformers shall be of sealed-tank construction of sufficient strength to withstand a pressure of 7 psi without permanent distortion. The cover shall be welded.

The transformer shall remain effectively sealed for a top oil temperature range of -5° C to 105° C. When required, cooling radiators will be provided on the back and front

of the tank. Lifting eyes and jacking pads will be provided.

L. Coils shall be wound with copper conductors.

M. All cores to be constructed of high grade, grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel with

high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point.

N. Tank, radiators, and terminal chambers, if provided, shall be treated to remove oil and scale by either shot blast or phosphatizing treatment to provide proper paint adhesion. All exterior surfaces shall be primed, using a high quality solid two-paint catalyzed

epoxy. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2 mils. A durably hard polyurethane topcoat with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil shall be applied to all primed

surfaces. The finish coat shall be coordinated with the switchgear manufacturer to match the color of the primary and secondary switchgear.

2.05 SECONDARY OUTGOING SECTION

A. Provide a low-voltage switchboard section containing a fixed, individually mounted circuit breaker for overcurrent protection on the secondary side of the transformer.

B. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 VAC, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 4-wire.

C. Main Bus: 2,000 ampere continuous current rating.

D. Short Circuit Current Rating: 65,000 amps RMS symmetrical. Fully rated.

1. Series rating shall not be acceptable.

E. Configure switchboard/substation outgoing section for direct connection on the load

side of the circuit breaker/secondary overcurrent device, to feeder busway as indicated on the Drawings.


F. Enclosure: Provide steel enclosure, in compliance with UL 891, NEMA Type 3R.

G. Enclosure Finish: Provide factory applied finish in manufacturer's paint over a rust

inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. Finish coat color as previously specified.

H. Strip Heaters: Provide factory installed electric strip heaters of sufficient wattage in

each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point. 1. Strip Heater Control: Provide humidistat to control humidity of each section. 2. Strip Heater Power Source: Provide transformer of required ratings, factory

installed in the switchboard.

I. Front Covers and Doors:

1. Front covers shall be screw removable with a single tool 2. Doors shall be hinged with removable hinge pins.

J. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire, unless otherwise indicated, with

100% rated neutral. Provide hard drawn plated copper of 98 percent conductivity. 1. Ground Bus: Size per current NEC and UL 891 Tables 28.1 and 28.2, hard drawn

copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at

intervals in vertical run. 2. Bus Composition: Tin plated copper. Plating shall be applied continuously to bus

work. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL 891 temperature rise requirements. The phase and neutral through bus shall have an ampacity as shown on the Drawings. For four wire systems, the neutral

shall be of equivalent ampacity as the phase bus bar. Tapered bus is not permitted. Full provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. Bussing shall

include, but shall not be limited to, necessary hardware to accommodate splicing for future additions.

K. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style, unless otherwise required; suitable for number, size, and

ampacity of conductors and conductor material. 3. Ground Fault Protection: Integral to circuit breaker with adjustable pickup and

time delay settings, push to test feature, and ground fault indicator.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; the "a" contacts shall mimic the circuit breaker contacts, and the "b" contacts shall operate in

reverse of circuit breaker contacts. 5. Zone Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking

ground fault protection function.

L. Accessories: Provide accessory set including, but not limited to, tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device testing, inspection,

maintenance, and operation.


2.06 MARKINGS AND LABELING

A. All identification and warning labels and nameplates exterior to the USS shall be

resistant to weather, UV, and their intended installation environment.

B. Each MV Transformer shall be provided with an engraved nameplate identifying the

project specific equipment tag and service description.

C. Warning labels and nameplates shall be present at access locations to advise personnel of possible hazard.

2.07 FACTORY TESTING

A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided

under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection.

2. Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections 3. Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connections

4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection 5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection.

7. Applied Potential test 8. Induced Potential test

9. QC Impulse test 10. Temperature test (typical test data from previous testing may be used) 11. Sound test (typical test data from previous testing may be used).

B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports to the Engineer upon request.

1. The following special factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI and NEMA standards.

2. Temperature test(s) shall be made on the one unit of this project. 3. ANSI impulse test on all windings.

C. Factory tests outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner’s representative. 1. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests

are to be performed.

2. The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to two (2) representatives of the owner.

3. The cost of meals and incidental expenses shall be the owner’s responsibility.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. In addition to the requirements specified herein, execution shall be in accordance with all applicable requirements of Division 26 of these Specifications, the Contract

Drawings, and the National Electrical Code.

B. Verify that all items and accessories are in accordance with the Project Specifications and Contract Drawings.

C. Examine equipment exterior and interior prior to installation. Report any damage and do not install any equipment that is structurally, moisture, or mildew damaged.

D. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the

work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencing the installation, an onsite pre-installation conference shall review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination with other trades. Attendees shall include, but shall not be limited to,

the Contractor/Installer, manufacturer’s representative(s), and any subcontractors that require coordination with the work. Date and time of the pre-installation conference

shall be acceptable to the Owner and the Construction Manager.

F. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the Installer.

G. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer that shall help ensure that the equipment is without damage at time of

Substantial Completion.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings,

manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations, recognized industry practices, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Conform installations to applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code.

C. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the contractor.

D. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as instructed by the Engineer.


E. Adjust the primary taps of the transformer so the secondary voltage is within 1/2% of the rated voltage.


A. Functional testing, commissioning, and first parameter adjusting shall be carried out

by a factory-trained manufacturer’s field service representative. This manufacturer’s field service technician shall provide all material, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform inspection, testing and adjustments to ensure equipment is

installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and is ready for operation. The manufacturer’s field service technician shall replace

damaged or malfunctioning equipment and report to the Engineer any discrepancies or issues with the installation.

B. The manufacturer’s representative shall, upon satisfactory completion of inspection

and testing, attach a label to all serviced devices indicating the date serviced and testing company responsible.

C. Check torque of all bolted connections, including cable terminations, either by observing the bead of indicating compound to confirm that it is still intact, or with a torque wrench to confirm the joint is tightened to the manufacturer's specifications.

3.04 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Operational Readiness Testing:

1. The Contractor shall inspect and test furnished equipment and associated systems for conformance to the contract documents, including equipment manufacture’s recommendations, and readiness for operation. The test shall include the

following as a minimum: a. Visually inspect for physical damage and proper installation

b. Perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions c. Perform tests to ensure compliance with Contract Documents d. Perform tests that equipment is ready for operation

e. Touch-up paint all chips and scratches with manufacturer-supplied paint and transfer remaining paint to Owner.

2. Contractor shall submit an operational readiness test report documenting all test results, including all assumptions, conditions, allowances and corrections made during the test. The report shall provide a listing of all modifications and

adjustments made onsite to include any settings / parameters not identified as factory defaults within the equipment’s O&M documentation. The test report

shall include a signed statement from the Contractor, installer(s) and the factory-trained manufacturer’s representative(s) certifying that the furnished equipment and associated system have been installed, configured, and tested in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations, completely conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is ready for operation.

B. Functional Demonstration Testing:


1. Prior to scheduling functional demonstration testing, the Contractor shall submit a signed statement from the Contractor/Installer and the factory-trained

manufacturer’s representative(s) certifying that the furnished equipment and associated system have been installed, configured, and tested in accordance with

the manufacturer’s recommendations, completely conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is ready for operation.

2. The Contractor shall completely demonstrate the functionality and performance of

the equipment and associated systems in the presence of Owner and Engineer, observing and documenting complete compliance with the Contract Documents.

3. The Contractor shall submit a written report documenting successful completion of functional demonstrating testing including all assumptions, conditions, allowances and corrections made during the test.

3.05 TRAINING

A. O&M Training: Onsite training specific to the equipment furnished shall be provided

to the Owner’s staff by a factory trained manufacturer’s representative. Training duration shall be sufficiently adequate to cover the operation and maintenance of the equipment and shall consist of not less than one (1) 4-hour session of onsite classroom

and hands-on instruction, for a minimum of four attendees per session. 1. The instructor shall provide sufficient time and detail in each session to cover the

following as a minimum: a. Theory of operation b. Major components of equipment

c. Operation of equipment d. Configurations of equipment

e. Maintenance, troubleshooting and repair f. Replacement of component level parts.

B. The submitted O&M manuals shall be utilized as the basis for training. The instructor

shall provide additional copies of training materials and/or supplemental materials for training as required.

3.06 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjust taps to deliver appropriate secondary voltage as previously specified.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 13 16-1 Switchgear Modifications Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 26 13 16

SWITCHGEAR MODIFICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of services and work requirements for medium voltage metal enclosed interrupter switchgear.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical

2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems.


A. 5kV Switchgear, Existing: 1. Replace a total of fifteen (15) Cutler-Hammer (Eaton) metering and Basler

mechanical relaying assemblies with SEL 751 Feeder Protection relays, having built in metering capabilities. a. This scope of work includes the replacement of fifteen switchgear cubicle

doors, one for each 5kV breaker. b. Contact Eaton Engineering Services to procure new circuit breaker cubicle

doors, with SEL 751 relays installed. 2. The following 5kV breakers shall be provided with the new SEL751 relays and

replacement doors:

a. INCOMING LINE 1 MAIN BREAKER b. INCOMING LINE 2 MAIN BREAKER

c. TIE BREAKER d. CHLORINE CONTACT FACILITY TX1 e. CHLORINE CONTACT FACILITY TX2

f. HIGH PRESSURE PUMP STATION SUB 1A g. HIGH PRESSURE PUMP STATION SUB 1B

h. SUBSTATION 4A FEEDER i. SUBSTATION 4B FEEDER j. SUBSTATION 3A FEEDER

k. SUBSTATION 3B FEEDER l. MCC 1 FEEDER

m. MCC 3 FEEDER n. PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER FEEDER o. DEWATERING BUILDING FEEDER

3. Provide manuals, programming software and cables to connect to the relays.


4. The installing contractor will be provided relay setpoints during the construction phase. The installing contractor will program the setpoints into the relays, test,

and provide final setpoints on printed sheets and electronically. 5. For Substation 3A Feeder Breaker and Substation 3B Feeder Breaker, connect the

new SEL 751 relays to the new SEL 787 relays (located in the 480V MCC/Switchgear building, refer to paragraph 1.02 B below) via fiber optic, multimode, 1-pair cables, one for each SEL751 and SEL787 pair. Fiber cables

shall be continuous from end to end, with no intermediate spices or connectors. 6. All relays shall be powered from a 120 VAC UPS.

B. 480V Switchgear, Existing: 1. Furnish and install two (2) SEL 787 Transformer Protection relays, within

enclosures, with FT-1 test switches.

2. The SEL 787 relays shall be powered from 120 VAC UPS located in new Control Panel CP-480. Connect the relays to the primary and secondary CTs of the

transformers. 3. Provide manuals, programming software and cables to connect to the relays. 4. Replace the trip units on the existing 480V Main Circuit Breakers.

5. The installing contractor will be provided relay setpoints during the construction phase. The installing contractor will program the setpoints into the relays, test,

and provide final setpoints on printed sheets and electronically. 6. Contact Eaton Engineering Services for breaker testing after the 480V, 1600A trip

units have been installed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Include shop drawings, manufacturer's descriptive literature and

published details with performance/capacity rating schedules or charts as applicable, and where required by the cited reference standards.

B. Shop Drawings: All mechanical and electrical components specified herein must

be included to be considered a complete shop drawing. 1. Product Data: For each mechanical and electrical component include

manufacturer's descriptive literature; product specifications; published details; technical bulletins; performance and capacity rating curves, charts, and schedules; catalogue data sheets, and other submittal materials as required to verify that the

proposed products conform to the quality and functional ability of the specified products.

a. Identification - Clearly indicate by an arrow on submissions, covering more than one product or style, exactly which product is being submitted for approval.

b. Manufacturer - Include the catalogue name, company name, address, and telephone number for each product submitted.

2. Product List: Provide a list of equipment and components on all drawings with each product identified by legend reference. Include Product name, manufacturer, and model number.


3. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical apparatus showing numbered wiring terminals where applicable. In addition, submittal to contain

detailed three-line diagrams and assembly wiring diagrams. 4. Certified copies of factory test results shall be submitted.


A. Products for, and the execution of, the work of this Section shall satisfy the applicable requirements of the latest NEC Codes and Regulations of Jurisdictional

Authorities.

B. Equipment and components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with the latest standards of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, ASTM and UL. All major components shall be of the same manufacture as the existing switchgear except as specifically indicated otherwise.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals shall include detailed parts list, lists

of recommended spare parts, circuit diagrams, fuse coordination curves, maintenance procedures and operating instructions.

1.06 FACTORY TESTS

A. Upon receipt of all approved shop drawings for the switchgear, the manufacturer shall fabricate and factory-test the equipment in question.

B. Upon completion of the factory tests, and prior to shipment, the following shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review and comments:

1. A certified quality control report indicating the items checked, the date when

checked and initialed by the individual performing the quality control. 2. Provide with this submittal the Operational and Maintenance Manuals for the

referenced equipment as specified herein in this Section of the Specifications.

C. Equipment shall not be accepted at the job site without prior receipt of the associated certified quality control report referenced to above.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXISTING MEDIUM VOLTAGE 5KV SWITCHGEAR

A. Control Power: 1. Control power shall be supplied from CP-4160.

B. Control Wiring: All auxiliary power, control and alarm circuits requiring

connection to external circuits shall be brought to suitable terminal blocks marked with circuit identification. These terminal blocks shall be located within the


respective switchgear control section of the lineup. All terminal blocks shall be of the heavy, duty type and adequate for the service intended. The switchgear shall

be wired with type SIS No. 14 AWG copper wire, except where larger size wire is specified and/or as required. All wires shall be tagged and identified using Brady

type wire markers.

C. Nameplates: 1. Interior of Enclosure: Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switch, and

device to identify its function, and where applicable, its position. Laminated plastic 1/8-inch thick phenolic plastic conforming to Fed. Spec. L.P.387 white

with black center core. Surface: matte finish, corners, square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the black core. Size of nameplates: One inch (25mm) by 2 ½ inches (64mm) minimum; lettering: minimum 1/4 inch-high (7mm)

normal block lettering. Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two

tamper-proof screws or two pop-rivets. 2. Exterior of Enclosure:

a. Provide nameplates for each cubicle to identify its service function or

electrical load served consisting of fiberglass reinforced plastic panels 1/8-inch thick with matte white finish and square corners. Lettering to be of the

one-inch high condensed Gothic Style of B.933 vinyl film having a permanent adhesive. Vinyl film shall be extremely durable and resistant to fading, temperature extremes and common solvents.

b. Each nameplate designation shall conform to information indicated on the Drawings and fastened to each cubicle with four sealed tamper-proof screws

or pop-rivets. Nameplates shall be as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Company, or approved equal.

c. Contractor shall submit nameplate schedule with product shop drawings for

approval.

2.02 EXISTING 480V SWITCHGEAR (SWITCHBOARDS DS3A & DS3B)

A. Control Power: 1. Control power shall be supplied from CP-480.

B. Control Wiring: All auxiliary power, control and alarm circuits requiring

connection to external circuits shall be brought to suitable terminal blocks marked with circuit identification. These terminal blocks shall be located within the

respective switchgear control section of the lineup. All terminal blocks shall be of the heavy, duty type and adequate for the service intended. The switchgear shall be wired with type SIS No. 14 AWG copper wire, except where larger size wire is

specified and/or as required. All wires shall be tagged and identified using Brady type wire markers.

C. Nameplates: 1. Interior of Enclosure: Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switch, and

device to identify its function, and where applicable, its position. Laminated


plastic 1/8-inch thick phenolic plastic conforming to Fed. Spec. L.P.387 white with black center core. Surface: matte finish, corners, square. Accurately align

lettering and engrave into the black core. Size of nameplates: One inch (25mm) by 2 ½ inches (64mm) minimum; lettering: minimum 1/4 inch-high (7mm)

normal block lettering. Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two tamper-proof screws or two pop-rivets.

2. Exterior of Enclosure: a. Provide nameplates for each cubicle to identify its service function or

electrical load served consisting of fiberglass reinforced plastic panels 1/8-inch thick with matte white finish and square corners. Lettering to be of the one-inch high condensed Gothic Style of B.933 vinyl film having a

permanent adhesive. Vinyl film shall be extremely durable and resistant to fading, temperature extremes and common solvents.

b. Each nameplate designation shall conform to information indicated on the Drawings and fastened to each cubicle with four sealed tamper-proof screws or pop-rivets. Nameplates shall be as manufactured by the W.H. Brady

Company, or approved equal. c. Contractor shall submit nameplate schedule with product shop drawings for

approval.

2.03 SAFETY EQUIPMENT

A. Provide the following safety equipment:

1. All doors and/or panels giving access to the enclosure and to high voltage components or bus work shall be provided with a "Danger - High Voltage - KEEP

OUT" sign. 2. High voltage signs shall be constructed of heavy-gauge metal having red letters

imposed on a white background conforming to ANSI Z35.1. These signs shall be

of the type as generally deemed acceptable for installation at substations and other areas where primary voltages are encountered.

2.04 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. Grounding materials shall be as specified in Section 26 05 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. As per ANSI C2, NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein.

1. Metal enclosed switchgear installation shall conform to the manufacturer's shop drawings and mounting. Completed installation shall conform to the requirements of ANSI C2.


3.02 GROUNDING

A. Metal enclosed switchgear shall have all ground pads connected to a solid earth

ground using cone pointed driven grounds rods as specified in Section 26 05 26 of these specifications. Install as indicated to provide an earth ground having a test

resistance of no more than 5 ohms.

3.03 SIGNS

A. Install ANSI Approved "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT" signs with

tamper-proof screws on each side of metal enclosed switchgear.

3.04 TESTING/CERTIFICATION

A. Consult Section 26 05 63 for requirements for field inspection and testing of the metal enclosed switchgear.

B. Consult Section 26 05 63 for requirements for field inspection and testing of the

grounding systems.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 26 05 16-1 Cable Bus Assemblies

Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020

August 2020

SECTION 26 25 16

CABLE BUS ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Provide labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision required, including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, configuration and installation for low voltage cable bus assemblies as required for the complete performance of the

Work, as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein. 1. Cable bus assemblies / systems shall include all necessary straight sections,

fittings, entrance fittings, conductors, cable connectors, cable terminations, and other accessories required to form a complete system.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01, as applicable 2. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical

3. Section26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 4. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems

6. Section 26 11 13 – Medium Voltage Unit Substations.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): 1. IEC 60529, Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code).

B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. ISO 9001, Quality Management Systems – Requirements.

C. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

1. NECA 1, Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2. NECA 105, Standard for Installing Metal Cable Tray Systems.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2. NEMA VE 1, Metal Cable Tray Systems

3. NEMA VE 2, Metal Cable Tray Installation Guideline.

E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC)

2. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), as applicable.



August 2020

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless specifically defined within the Contract Documents, the words or acronyms for all items contained within this specification are as defined by NFPA 70, IEEE C2,

other reference documents, or common industry practice.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the

requirements of Division 01, Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data:

a. Catalog cut sheets and other descriptive literature b. Ratings including short-circuit, voltage, impedance, and continuous current c. Weights, Finishes, and Dimensional data

d. Mounting, including seismic data, supports and fittings, fire stops, wall/floor flanges, and weather seals.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Riser or Isometric diagram b. Dimensioned layout diagram

c. Component list, including associated cable terminal sizes d. Details on installations and connections to other equipment

e. Details on wall and floor penetrations. 3. Submit sufficient information to determine compliance with the Contract

Documents. Identify submittal data with the specific equipment tags and/or

service descriptions to which they pertain. Submittal data shall be clearly marked to identify the specific model numbers, options, and features of equipment and

work proposed. 4. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be indicated within the submittal.

Each deviation shall reference the corresponding drawing or specification

number, show the Contract Document requirement text and/or illustration, and shall be accompanied by a detailed written justification for the deviation.

5. Submit required product data and shop drawings specific to each product and accessory proposed.

B. Operation & Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be provided in accordance with the

minimum requirements specified in Division 01, Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and additional requirements specified herein.


A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the

manufacture of specified products of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of five (5) years.



August 2020

a. The manufacturer shall have a valid ISO 9001 certification and an applicable quality assurance system that is regularly reviewed and audited by a third -

party registrar. Manufacturing, inspection, and testing procedures shall be developed and controlled under the guidelines of the quality assurance

system. 2. Installer Qualifications:

a. Installer shall be a firm with a minimum of ten years documented successful

installation experience with projects utilizing products similar in type and scope to that required by this Contract.

b. Employ skilled licensed electricians to supervise the Work of this Section. c. Submit information verifying the installer’s qualifications.

3. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Qualifications:

a. Employ an independent testing agency, qualified as specified in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, to perform the

testing required by this Section. b. Submit information verifying the ETL’s qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in NFPA 70 (NEC), and to other applicable state, local, and national governing

codes and regulatory requirements. 2. Cable bus assemblies shall comply with Article 370 of the NEC and shall be

suitable for indoor and/or outdoor use.


by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location the product is installed in, and the application intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these nationally

recognized testing laboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products.

a. Submit evidence with the Product Data that the products represented meet testing agency quality verification requirements, including agency listing and labeling requirements.

1) Such evidence may consist of either a printed mark on the data or a separate listing card.

b. Submit a written statement from those product manufacturers that do not provide evidence of the quality of their products that indicates why an item does not have a quality assurance verification.

1) Such statements provided in lieu of quality assurance verification are subject to the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer.



Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.



August 2020

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Accept products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05

00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein. a. Deliver products to the Project site in manufacturer’s original wrappings and

containers, labeled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and equipment tag number or service name.

b. Inspect and report any concealed damage to the Engineer.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00 Common

Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein. a. Store all products indoors on blocking or pallets.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. General: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 01 and Section 26 05 00, Common Results for Electrical.

B. The manufacturer shall warrant products against defects in material and workmanship for 24 months from the date of commissioning or 36 months from the date of shipment, whichever comes first, provided that the manufacturer performs functional

testing, commissioning and first parameter adjusting of equipment. During the warranty period the manufacturer shall repair or replace defective products. This

warranty shall be in addition to any provided by the Contractor. The warranty shall exclude normal wear and tear under normal usage and any damage caused by abuse, modification, or improper maintenance by entities other than the manufacturer or its

approved representative.

C. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the

Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.08 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall provide a recommended spare parts list with the following

information provided as a minimum: 1. Contact information for the closest parts stocking location to the Owner. 2. Critical spare parts shall be identified as those parts being associated with long

lead times and/or those being critical to the unit's operation.

B. Any manufacturer specific special tools not normally found in an electrician’s toolbox,

required to remove and install recommended or furnished spare parts, shall be furnished to the Owner. 1. Spare tools shall be properly marked and packaged for long term storage.



August 2020

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Products: Low voltage cable bus assemblies specified herein shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Products and manufacturers specified are to

establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Products shall be modified as necessary by the manufacturer for compliance with requirements. Provide the following specified product and manufacturer without

exception, unless allowed as a substitute by addendum to the Contract Documents prior to the bid date:

1. MP Husky 2. MDF Cable Bus 3. Advanced Cable Bus.

2.02 GENERAL

A. This specification describes the electrical and mechanical (physical) requirements for

metal enclosed cable bus assemblies / systems.

B. Cable bus assemblies / systems to be provided shall consist of all required straight sections, fittings, tap boxes, entrance fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary

for a complete operating system, whether specifically mentioned in these specifications or not.

C. System ampacity shall be designed based on heat rise testing. Conductor temperature rise shall not exceed 50 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient temperature.

D. Cable bus enclosure shall be grounded in accordance with NEC Section 250.

E. Each section of cable bus shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trade designation and the maximum diameter, number, voltage rating, and ampacity of the

conductors to be installed.

2.03 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. System Ratings:

1. Voltage Rating: 480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W, 60 Hz 2. Ampere Rating: 2,000A or as indicated on the drawings

3. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 100,000 Amps RMS symmetrical 4. Configuration shall be as follows:

a. 3 phase, 4-wire (100 percent capacity neutral), with 50 percent capacity

integral housing ground.

B. All current carrying conductors shall be fully insulated and rated for the specified

voltage. Cable insulation shall be rated for an operating temperature of 90 degrees C for the ampacity and voltage specified. Cables shall be suitable for indoor and/or outdoor use.



August 2020

C. System voltage drop shall not exceed two percent (2%) line-to-line.

D. Conductor material shall be copper. Conductors shall be continuous, running the full

length of the system. Electrical connectors shall be utilized only at the termination points of the bus assembly. All electrical connectors shall be furnished by the

manufacturer of the bus assembly.

E. Conductors shall be installed in the cable bus enclosure after the enclosure has been completely installed in the field.

F. Current phase balance between paralleled conductors shall be insured by proper phasing and spacing arrangements between conductors.

G. Transposition of conductors to balance conductor currents is to be avoided. If required, transposition may only occur at termination points; transposing of cables within the bus housing/enclosure shall not be permitted.

2.04 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Enclosure:

1. The cable bus enclosure shall be manufactured from mill-finished aluminum suitable for indoor and/or outdoor use. Side rails, rungs, and splice plates shall be manufactured from 6063-T6 or 6061-T6 aluminum alloy and shall be a minimum

of 1/8-inch in thickness for maximum strength and equipment ground ratings. 2. The enclosure shall have ventilated top and bottom covers with a minimum of

fifty percent (50%) open area for the passage of air to provide cable cooling. The top cover shall be removeable; the bottom cover shall be factory welded in place.

3. Cover ventilation openings shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign

objects and rodents. Ventilation openings shall not permit entry of a round rod measuring 5/16” in diameter.

4. The enclosure shall be designed to withstand forces due to the fault current specified and shall be designed for a maximum support span of twenty feet. Additional supports shall be provided for all fittings and elbows.

5. Outdoor assemblies shall also be designed to withstand environmental loads, such as wind, ice, and snow.

6. Enclosure splice joints shall be high pressure splined bolts. 7. All cable bus hardware, including splice plate, cable support block, and cover

hardware, shall be non-magnetic, stainless steel.

8. All elements of the bus enclosure shall be so designed to eliminate any sharp edges or projections that may injure personnel or conductor insulation.

9. Top covers shall be fastened to the enclosure with self-tapping screws spaced approximately 2 feet on centers.

B. Cable Support Blocks:

1. Cable support blocks shall have chamfered cable bores to prevent undo stress or damage to the cable insulation.



August 2020

2. Cable support blocks shall be manufactured from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) UV-resistant material that is suitable for indoor and/or outdoor use.

3. Conductor support blocks shall be designed in segments to maintain a minimum of one conductor diameter separation in both the horizontal and vertical planes as

required for free air conductor rating. 4. Support blocks shall be spaced to withstand forces due to the fault current

specified but in no case spaced greater than 36 inches for horizontal bus runs or

18 inches on vertical risers.

2.05 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard fittings, transitions, joints, hardware, etc. as required for a complete and operable installation per the intent of the Contract Drawings.

B. Bus enclosure fittings shall have a radius of 24 inches, unless the minimum bend

radius of the conductor requires a larger fitting radius.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. In addition to the requirements specified herein, execution shall be in accordance with the requirements of specification Sections 26 05 00, 26 05 26, and 26 05 38 and as

indicated or noted on the Drawings.

B. Examine equipment exterior and interior prior to installation. Report any damage and

do not install any equipment that is structurally, moisture, or mildew damaged.

C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Construction Manager in writing, with a copy to the Owner

and the Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

1. Do not proceed with the work until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take field

measurements to verify actual conditions. 3. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate all

offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered during the Work.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencing the installation, an onsite pre-

installation conference shall review the material selections, installation procedures, and overall project coordination. Attendees shall include, but shall not be limited to,

the Construction Manager, the Installer, and the manufacturer’s representative(s). Date and time of the pre-installation conference shall be acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer.



August 2020

E. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the Installer.

F. Install equipment in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings, manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations, and as indicated on the

Drawings.

G. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer that shall help ensure that the equipment is without damage at time of

Substantial Completion.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL – MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Functional testing and commissioning specified in paragraph 3.04 shall be carried out by a factory-trained manufacturer’s field service representative. This manufacturer’s field service technician shall provide all material, equipment, labor and technical

supervision to perform inspection, testing and adjustments to ensure equipment is installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations

and is ready for operation. The manufacturer’s field service technician shall replace damaged or malfunctioning equipment and report to the Engineer any discrepancies or issues with the installation.

B. The manufacturer’s representative shall, upon satisfactory completion of inspection and testing, attach a label to all serviced devices indicating the date serviced and

testing company responsible.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install cable bus assemblies in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions

and accepted best industry practices.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange the cable bus assemblies to be parallel to or

perpendicular to building lines. Install cable bus enclosures plumb and level, with sections aligned and with horizontal runs at the proper elevation. Arrange cable bus assemblies to provide required clearances and maintenance access.

C. Maintain proper phase sequence throughout cable bus systems, accounting for phase transitions where applicable.

D. Provide suitable expansion fittings where cable bus assembly is subject to movement, including but not limited to: 1. Where cable bus assembly crosses structural joints intended for expansion.

2. Long straight cable bus runs, in accordance with the assembly manufacturer's instructions.

E. Cable Bus Assembly Support: 1. Use manufacturer's recommended hangers and supports, located at intervals

complying with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements. Provide required



August 2020

support and attachment components in accordance with applicable requirements of Section 26 05 28, where not furnished by the cable bus assembly manufacturer.

2. Use suitable spring hangers for vertical riser applications where cable bus assembly penetrates and is supported by building floors.

3. Provide independent support for cable bus assemblies from building structure. Do not support assemblies from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

4. Provide sway bracing as required to keep cable bus runs straight and prevent

rotation and movement, accounting for unbalanced weight distribution where applicable.

F. Penetrations: 1. Install integral weather seal where cable bus penetrates exterior wall or roof.

Provide appropriate flange and seal around the opening to maintain a weather-

tight installation. 2. Install integral fire stops where cable bus penetrates fire-rated walls or floors.

Seal around opening to maintain fire rating equal to the rating of the wall or floor assembly.

G. Provide grounding and bonding of cable bus assemblies in accordance with the


H. Identify cable bus assemblies in accordance with requirements of Section 26 05 53.

3.04 FUNCTIONAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. To be performed by the manufacturer’s factory-trained authorized field service representative in accordance with Paragraph 3.02 above.

B. Operational Readiness Testing: 1. Inspect and test furnished equipment and associated systems for conformance to

the contract documents, including equipment manufacture’s recommendations, and readiness for operation. The test shall include the following as a minimum: a. Visually inspect for physical damage and proper installation

b. Perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions c. Perform tests to ensure compliance with Contract Documents

d. Perform tests that equipment is ready for operation e. Touch-up paint all chips and scratches with manufacturer-supplied paint and

transfer remaining paint to Owner.

C. Submit an operational readiness test report documenting all test results, including all assumptions, conditions, allowances and corrections made during the test. The test

report shall include a signed statement from the Installer and the factory-trained manufacturer’s representative(s) certifying that the furnished equipment and associated system have been installed, configured, and tested in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations, completely conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and is ready for operation.



August 2020

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 27 00 00-1 Communications


August 2020

SECTION 27 00 00

COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of materials for furnishing, installing connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting a structured wiring system for voice and data.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical

2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems

5. Section 27 10 23 – Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/Electronics Industry Alliance (EIA):

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 1: General Requirements

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 802.3ab Physical Layer Parameters and Specifications for

1000 Mb/s Operation over 4 pair of Category 5e

Balanced Copper Cabling, Type 1000BASE-T.

C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

1. ANSI/ICEA S-80-576 Communication Wire and Cable for Wiring of Premises.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA WC 63.1 Telecommunications Cables.



August 2020

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 444 Communications Cables

2. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 3. UL 1863 UL Standard for Safety for Communications-Circuit Accessories.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).


A. Provide a completely cabled and terminated communication system (voice/data/fiber) in a star topology.

B. Communications system cabling, raceways, pathways, and spaces shall at minimum comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, -568-B.2, -568-B.3, -569-A and -607.

C. Provide grounding and bonding per, at minimum, ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, NFPA 70 and

UL 467.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence of testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on the data or by a separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a written

statement indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Such statements are subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Submit product data for all products provided. Indicate clearly the usage of each product.

C. Installer Qualifications: Prior to installation, submit data of installer's experience and

qualifications. Installers shall be a Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installation Technician or have experience that shall

include 3 years on projects of similar complexity. Include names and locations of two projects successfully completed using optical fiber and copper communications cabling systems. Include written certification from users that systems have performed

satisfactorily for not less than 18 months. Include specific experience in installing and testing structured telecommunications distribution systems using Category 5/5e and

Category 6 cabling systems.


A. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved by

Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are

not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. Provide products that are listed and labeled or approved as stated above for the location



August 2020

installed in and listed and labeled or approved as indicated and specified for the applications the items are intended for.

B. Provide products that have been third party performance tested by a Nationally Recognized Independent Testing Laboratory. Test results shall be provided upon

request of the Engineer.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installing work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience in construction of similar equipment.

D. Conform all work to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

E. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installing work of this Section with

minimum three years documented experience.

F. Install work under supervision of skilled licensed electricians.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONNECTORS

A. UTP Copper Cable (Data):

1. Connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68.5, and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 4-pair, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall comply with Category 5e

requirements and be 1000BASE-T compliant. Connectors shall be terminated using a 110-style PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B

wiring. Each jack shall be wired T568B. UTP connectors shall comply with EIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. The Siemon Company 2. Leviton Voice and Data Division

3. Hubbell Premise Wiring 4. Or Approved equal.

2.02 COPPER CABLE

A. Category 5e (Data): 1. Listed as Complying with Category 5E of TIA/EIA-568-B.2.1: Provide evidence

of listing for all products specified in this Article. 2. Conductors: Solid copper. 3. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.1, TSB

36. Multipair, No. 24 AWG, color-coded, thermoplastic-insulated conductors in a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket unless specified as plenum rated.



August 2020

a. UTP cable shall have a CM jacket, a PVC internal individual jacket and be marked at regular intervals with the manufacturer's name, part number,

Category rating, sequential footage, and UL listing. b. UTP cable shall be constructed of four pairs of 24 AWG solid copper

conductors twisted together at different lay lengths to limit cross talk between pairs.

c. Individual pairs shall be color coded in accordance with ANSI TIA/EIA-854

requirements. d. Category 5E, 4-pair UTP shall have maximum nominal O.D. of .25 inches.

For newer flat design cables, comparable fill allowances to meet specific conduit or pathway designs must meet or exceed like fill allowances for .25 inches OD cables.

e. Cable shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of ANSI TIA/EIA-854

f. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend of 1.0 inch without damage or distortion to the copper conductors or degradation of cable performance.

g. Cable shall be able to withstand a maximum pulling tension of 25 lbf without

distortion of the copper conductors or degradation of cable performance. h. All UTP cable shall meet the minimum electrical requirements detailed in

ANSI/TIA-854 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2.1 for Category 5e cable. These parameters include but are not limited to: attenuation, NEXT, DC resistance, and characteristic impedance.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Belden b. CommScope c. General Cable

d. Hubbell Premise Wiring e. HCM (Hitachi Cable Manchester, NH)

f. Or Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that painted surfaces that will be covered by items of this Section have a prime and finish coat of paint.

B. Ensure that all indoor areas are enclosed from the weather.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Outside wire and cable shall be installed in ducts conforming to Section 33 71 19.

Inside wire and cable shall be installed in conduit conforming to Section 26 05 33.13 or cable tray conforming to Section 26 05 36.



August 2020

B. Cable Installation in Conduits and Ducts: During the installation of cables in conduits and ducts, the cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tension shall not be

exceeded. A suitable lubricating medium, harmless to the cable jacket, shall be used when pulling cables into conduits, pipes or duct banks. No oil or grease substances not

specifically manufactured for cable installation will be permitted for such use on this project.

C. Cable Attachment and Support: Lengths of cables which are not installed in conduits

and are run inside equipment rooms shall be secured to cable trays or cable ladders using nylon cable ties and attached to walls and backboards using nylon cable clamps

or hangers or using a plastic wiring system such as manufactured by Panduit, or Approved Equal. Cables shall be attached or otherwise supported at intervals not to exceed 18 in.

D. Strain Relief: Provide sufficient strain relief (slack) in all cables, cable conductors, and wiring to avoid stress on all cables, wires, and wiring connections.

E. Bends: Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than ten (10) times the diameter of the cable, or less than the manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radius, during installation or as finally installed.

F. Continuous Cable Sections: All cable runs shall be continuous without splices between cable terminating locations.

G. Conduit/Cable Entrances to Facilities: All conduit and cable entrance openings into equipment rooms and huts shall be sealed with a pliable sealing compound after the cable is in place. Sealing compounds for rooms, huts, walls, or other partitions shall be

fire retardant per ASTM E 814. Sealing compound shall be used to seal the area around the cable where the cable emerges from the end of a conduit, pipe, or duct

bank. All spare conduits shall be sealed or plugged in an approved manner.

H. Fire retardant pliable sealing compound shall be an intumescent firestop putty, reusable and repenetrable, conforming to ASTM E 814 and UL 1479, Nelson FSP

Firestop Putty, or Approved Equal.

I. Conduit Bushings: At all transition points where a cable runs from inside a conduit

into a cable trough; or onto a cable tray or plywood backboard, the end of the conduit shall be fitted with a plastic bushing to prevent abrasive damage to the cable.

J. Protection of Cables: Provide appropriate special protection for cables in areas where

the cables are unavoidably exposed to hazardous conditions, such as sharp corners on equipment. Cables damaged due to neglect by the Contractor, during installation, shall

be replaced by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.

K. Cable Continuity and Integrity: All cables shall be continuous and without splices between the specified termination locations. The cable termination points shall be

located within communication interface cabinets, equipment enclosures, splice cases,



August 2020

and equipment termination boxes as shown on the Drawings and as described in the Specifications.

L. Cable Shield Continuity and Integrity: The shield of each section of communication cable shall be electrically continuous for the entire cable length.

M. Cable and Wiring Identification: All cables shall be terminated in standard order, according to the EIA/TIA and ICEA color codes. Individual cables shall be identified at each cable termination with self-adhesive labels. All spare pairs in each cable shall

be terminated and identified.

N. All data wires and cables shall be installed in raceways as specified in Section 26 05

33.13.

O. Provide pull rope in all empty conduit runs with not less than 12 inches (30 cm) of slack both ends.

P. Conduits shall be restricted to no more than two 90-degree bends or equivalent without a pull box.

Q. Maintain minimum bending radius of changes in direction as follows: 1. 10 times diameter of 4” (100 mm) and larger conduits. 2. 6 times diameter of smaller conduits.

R. Avoid bends in conduits from pull boxes.

S. Except as noted hereinafter for telecommunications cabling and pathways with copper

media, keep conduit and cable tray minimum 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of electrical power equipment, flues, steam, and hot water pipes.

T. Telecommunications cabling and pathways with copper media shall be installed in

accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment.

1. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.

2. Pathways shall be installed in accordance with the following minimum clearance

distances of 4 feet (1.2 meters) from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment or uninterruptible power system, 12 inches (300

mm) from power conduits and cable systems, 5 inches (125 mm) from fluorescent or high frequency lighting system fixtures.

U. Install data telecommunications cabling and pathway system as detailed in

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and -569-A. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection

(IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not untwist Category 5e UTP cables more than one half inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide service loop on each end of the cable, 10 ft (3 m) in the

telecommunications closet, 3.3 ft (1 m) in the work area outlet for optical fiber and 12



August 2020

inches (30 cm) for UTP. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not

exceed 25 pounds (110 N) pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer.

Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter.

V. All communications cables for inside and outside plant shall be terminated. Provide

excess cable at both ends of horizontal cable to facilitate future re-termination. Provide all cross-connecting hardware and jumper cables, including 100% connection

capability of all patch cords. 1. Terminate all copper data cabling on Category 5e type data patch panels with

jacks. Data outlets shall be activated with cross-connect jumper cables between

the backbone cable patch panels and the horizontal cable patch panels.

W. Terminate UTP cable in accordance with ANSl/TIA/EIA-568-B and wiring

configuration as specified.

X. Telecommunications Grounding: Provide per ANSI/TIA/EIA-607. Run grounding conductors with the backbone cable plant. Bond racks, conduits, raceways cable trays,

etc. in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA standards, NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 26. Grounding conductors shall be compatible with raceways. Protect all grounding and

bonding conductors from physical damage. Contractor shall individually and properly ground all relay racks, ladder rack, equipment cabinets and inside and outside plant cable shields, wherever the cables leave the sheaths, to ground bars shown on Contract

Drawings. Contractor shall individually and properly ground all voice punch-down cable frames and other supplied hardware to the ground bars shown on the Contract

Drawings. Daisy-chaining of equipment grounding is not permitted. Grounding shall conform to EIA/TIA 607 and NEC articles 250 and 800.

Y. Provide identification and labeling of communications cables, outlets and equipment

per ANSI/TIA/EIA-606. 1. All cables shall be labeled at least at each end of each cable section, using cable

tags or labels. Inside plant cables shall be labeled using self-adhesive waterproof labels; outside plant cables shall be labeled using approved waterproof cable tags.

2. .

3. Cable Tags: a. Attach to cable using two nylon cable ties through holes in the tag.

b. Use pre-printed plastic tags marked with a durable, abrasion resistant, waterproof ink.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After wiring, vacuum out interior and wipe clean of all foreign material.

B. After painting in areas, remove all over paint, drips and splashes.



August 2020


A. Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in

accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.

B. Inspection: Visually inspect cabling jacket materials for UL or third-party

certification markings. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color code for tip and ring pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm

compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. Visually confirm Category 5e marking of outlets, wallplates, connectors, and patch panels.

C. Perform testing after cables are terminated, but not cross connected.

D. Performance Tests: 1. Category 5e Links (Data): Perform UTP permanent link tests in accordance with

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. Tests shall include wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT, Power Sum NEXT, ELFEXT, Power Sum ELFEXT, return loss, propagation

delay and delay skew. Each and every link shall be tested and shall pass the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B for Category 5e. Any failing link shall be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed by a new test to

prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided in the test results

documentation.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. During painting, mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, and all items not to be painted.

B. Protect all items during work of other trades including welding and cutting.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 27 10 23-1 Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories


August 2020

SECTION 27 10 23

FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber Optic Cable 2. Fiber Optic Patch Cords

3. Fiber Optic Connectors 4. Fiber Optic Patch Panels

5. Fiber Optic Splices 6. Innerduct

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 – General Requirements 2. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping

3. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 4. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems

6. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems

8. Section 27 00 00 - Communications 9. Section 33 71 19 – Underground Ducts and Manholes 10. Section 40 90 00 – Common Work Results for Process Monitoring and Control

Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to latest version of all listed references.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/Electronics Industry Alliance (EIA):

1. EIA-455-21A FOTP-21 Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss Measurement of

Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer

Premises 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard – Part 1: General Requirements

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.



August 2020

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial

Buildings 9. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 383 Vertical Wire Flame Test.

D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA S-104-696 Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Fiber Cable.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 13 Power Limited Circuit Cables 2. UL 444 Communications Cables 3. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

4. UL 1277 Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical Fiber Members

5. UL 1666 Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

6. UL 1685 Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for

Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cable 7. UL 1863 UL Standard for Safety for Communications-Circuit Accessories.


A. Provide a completely cabled and terminated fiber optic cable system.

B. Installation shall comply with NFPA 70 Article 770.

C. Provide communications system cabling, raceways, pathways, and spaces in conformance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.1, -568-C.3, -569-A and -607.

D. Provide all multi-mode and single-mode fiber optic cables as industry rated components and of the best-performing design for the intended application as judged by the Engineer.

E. Provide grounding and bonding systems in conformance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, NFPA 70 and UL 467.

F. Coordinate fiber optic cabling requirements with the IC-01 drawing and PMCS Contractor. Refer to Sections 40 90 00.



August 2020

G. It is the intent of this Section to provide a complete fiber optic cabling system which is 1000BASE-SX Ethernet compliant across all network segments.

1. For the purposes of this Section, the term "network segment" shall be defined as the sum total of all cables and related passive hardware (patch panels, etc.)

between two communicating transceivers.


A. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved by

Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are

not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. 1. Provide products that are listed and labeled or approved as stated above for the

location they are to be installed in.

2. Provide products listed and labeled or approved as indicated and specified for the applications the items are intended for.

B. Provide products that have been third party performance tested by a Nationally Recognized Independent Testing Laboratory. Provide test results upon request of the Engineer.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in manufacturing products for work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience in production of similar

products and equipment.

D. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installing work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience constructing systems of similar size and

type.

E. Install work under supervision of skilled and experienced installers.

1. Submit current qualifications of all installation employees who will work on the job.

2. Submit current qualifications of all supervisory personnel who will work on the

job. Qualifications will consist of: a. Summary history of employee showing projects recently completed.

b. Copy of current employee certifications.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence of

testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on the data or by a separate listing card. If no quality assurance verification is available for a

product, provide from product manufacturer a written statement indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Acceptance of such manufacturer’s statements are subject to the approval of the Engineer.



August 2020

B. Third Party Performance Testing: Provide with all product data, evidence of third-party performance testing by a Nationally Recognized Independent Testing

Laboratory.

C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer’s data for all products provided.

Indicate clearly by markup the usage of each product. Submit product data and catalog cuts for all material and equipment covered by this Section all together as either a single submittal package or as multiple submittal packages but all at the same

time.

D. Installer Qualifications:

1. Prior to installation, submit data of installer's experience and qualifications. 2. Installers shall be a Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI)

Registered Cabling Installation Technician or have experience that shall include

3 years on projects of similar complexity as this project. 3. Submit copies of all current employee certifications installing or managing

installation. 4. Include names and locations of two projects successfully completed using optical

fiber cabling systems. Include written certification from users that systems have

performed satisfactorily for not less than 18 months. Include specific experience in installing and testing structured telecommunications distribution systems using

optical fiber.

E. Test Plan: Provide a complete and detailed written test plan for the optical fiber cabling system including a complete list of test equipment.

1. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing. 2. Include current test instrumentation calibration certificates.

3. Include copy of all current certifications for testing personnel and supervisors. 4. Include blank test documentation form.

F. Test Reports:

1. Furnish factory reel tests for optical fiber cables. 2. Furnish all field test reports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Consistency of Fiber Optic Cable Application: It is the Owner’s intent for the

manufacturer of fiber optic cable to be consistent across the project; multiple fiber optic cable manufacturers will not be permitted for different applications.

B. Except where indicated otherwise, provide multi-fiber cables with optical fiber counts as follows: 1. Cross Patch Cables: Provide single or duplex fiber cables as required

2. Less than 50 feet: minimum 6 fibers



August 2020

3. Greater than 50 feet: minimum 12 fibers.

2.02 OPTICAL FIBERS

A. Provide all fibers for use on this job as part of a manufacturer’s standard cable assembly. Do not provide bare fibers unless specifically shown on the drawings.

B. All fibers in the cable must be usable and meet required specifications.

C. Each optical fiber shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification.

D. Each optical fiber shall consist of a Germania-doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding.

E. Each optical fiber shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi.

F. The fiber shall be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective coating. The coating

shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface.

G. The attenuation specification shall not exceed the manufacturer’s rated maximum

value for the cable product at the design passband center frequency. Test each strand on each cable at 23°C ± 5°C on the original shipping reel and label reel with test results.

H. Multimode 62.5/125 OM1 Fibers: 1. Standards: EIA/TIA-492AAAA-A-1997, IEC 60793-2-10 (Type A1b 62,5/125

μm graded index fiber) 2. ISO/IEC 11801 Nomenclature: OM1 3. Characteristics:

Core Diameter (μm) 62.5 ± 2.5

Core Non-Circularity 5.0% max

Cladding Diameter (μm) 125.0 ± 2.0

Cladding Non-Circularity 1.0% max

Core-to-Cladding Concentricity (μm) 1.5 max

Coating Diameter (μm) 242 ± 5

Wavelength (nm) 850 1300

Maximum Attenuation (dB/km) 3.4 1.0

Minimum Over Filled Launch Bandwidth

(MHz*km)

200 500

Minimum Effective Modal Bandwidth (MHz*km)

220 ---

Serial 1 Gigabit Ethernet Distance (m) 300 500

Serial 10 Gigabit Ethernet Distance (m) 33 ---



August 2020

2.03 INDOOR/OUTDOOR INDUSTRIAL GRADE GENERAL PURPOSE CABLE (TYPE OFN-LS)

A. Provide gel-free loose tube optical fiber cable, suitable for use in harsh industrial environments.

B. Fibers: 1. Number and type of fibers: Twelve single fiber pairs to be installed between the

5kV switchgear enclosure and the 480V MCC/Switchgear Building.

a. Eight pairs shall terminate in Control Panel CP-4160 in the 5kV enclosure and in Control Panel CP-480 in 480V MCC/Switchgear Building.

b. Two single pairs shall terminate in the Incoming Line 1 Main Breaker SEL751 relay in the 5kV enclosure and in the corresponding SEL787 relay located in the 480V MCC/Switchgear Building.

c. Two single pairs shall terminate in the Incoming Line 2 Main Breaker SEL751 relay in the 5kV enclosure and in the corresponding SEL787 relay

located in the 480V d. Cables shall be continuous end to end with no intermediate splices or

connectors.

2. Fibers shall comply with the requirements given elsewhere in this specification.

C. Provide cables with the following Basic characteristics:

1. Low-Smoke/Zero-Halogen jacket 2. Suitable for outdoor installation (aerial and duct) 3. Suitable for indoor general-purpose installation in accordance with NFPA 70

Article 770 requirements for Type OFN Optical Fiber Cable 4. Approvals and Listings:

a. NFPA 70 Type OFN-LS b. Sunlight Resistant c. Suitable for Direct Burial

d. IEEE 383 Flame Test e. Tray Rated.

5. Maximum Tensile Load: a. Short Term (less than 1 hour): 600 pounds force b. Long Term (greater than 1 hour to 30 years): 180 pounds force.

6. Temperature: a. Installation: -22°F to +140°F

b. Operation: -58°F to +167°F. 7. Design and Test Criteria: ICEA S-104-696, UL 13, UL 444, and UL 1277.

D. Cable Construction:

1. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube. The buffer tubes shall be made of polypropylene. The nominal outer diameter of the buffer tube shall be

2.5 mm. 2. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers. The fibers shall not adhere to the

inside of the buffer tube.



August 2020

3. Each fiber shall be distinguishable by means of color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding."

a. The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks. The UV curable ink shall be applied to the outside of the optical fiber protective

coating layer and not be an integral component of the coating layer itself in order to produce more distinguishable colored fiber.

b. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color coded with distinct and

recognizable colors in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding." Buffer tube colored stripes shall be inlaid in the tube by

means of co-extrusion when required. The nominal stripe width shall be 1 mm.

c. For dual layer buffer tube construction cables, standard colors shall be used

for tubes 1 through 12 and stripes shall be used to denote tubes 13 through 24. The color sequence shall apply to tubes containing fibers only and shall

begin with the first tube. If fillers are required, they shall be placed in the inner layer of the cable. The tube color sequence shall start from the inside layer and progress outward.

d. In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors shall be stable across the specified storage and operating temperature range and not subject to fading or

smearing onto each other or into the gel filling material. Coloring material shall not cause fibers to stick together.

4. The buffer tubes shall be resistant to kinking.

5. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed.

a. Fillers shall be placed so that they do not interrupt the consecutive positioning of the buffer tubes.

b. In dual layer cables, any fillers shall be placed in the inner layer.

c. Fillers shall be nominally 2.5 mm in outer diameter. 6. The central member shall consist of a dielectric, glass reinforced plastic (GRP)

rod. The purpose of the central member is to prevent buckling of the cable. The GRP rod shall be overcoated with a thermoplastic, when required, to achieve dimensional sizing to accommodate buffer tubes/fillers.

7. Provide all water blocking yarns or tapes as swellable materials for the intended use of preventing liquid water migration through cables.

8. Buffer tubes shall be stranded around the dielectric central member using the reverse oscillation, or "S-Z,” stranding process. Water blocking yarn(s) shall be applied longitudinally along the central member during stranding.

9. Two polyester yarn binders shall be applied contrahelically and with sufficient tension to secure each buffer tube layer to the dielectric central member without

crushing the buffer tubes. The binders shall be non-hygroscopic, non-wicking and dielectric with low shrinkage.

10. For single layer cables, a water blocking tape shall be applied longitudinally

around the outside of the stranded tubes/fillers. The tape shall be held in place by a single polyester binder yarn. The water blocking tape shall be non-nutritive to

fungus and electrically non-conductive. It shall also be free from dirt and foreign matter.



August 2020

11. For dual layer cables, a second (outer) layer of buffer tubes shall be stranded over the original core to form a two-layer core. A water blocking tape shall be applied

longitudinally over both the inner and outer layer with each being held in place with a single polyester binder yarn. The water blocking tape shall be nonnutritive

to fungus and electrically non-conductive. It shall also be free from dirt and foreign matter.

12. The cable shall contain at least one ripcord under the sheath for easy sheath

removal. 13. Flame-retardant tape may be applied to provide resistance to flame propagation.

a. A water blocking tape shall be applied longitudinally around the outside of the flame-retardant tape.

14. The tensile strength shall be provided by the central member, and additional

dielectric yarns as required. The dielectric yarns shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core.

15. Cables shall be sheathed with a flame retardant low-smoke zero halogen jacket. Jacketing material shall be applied directly over the tensile strength members and water blocking tape. The flame retardant low-smoke zero halogen outer jacket

shall contain carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus. The jacket shall be continuous, free from

pinholes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections. The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness; jackets extruded under high pressure are not acceptable. The jacket shall be smooth, as is consistent with the best commercial

practice. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible, protective coating, able to withstand the stresses expected in normal installation and service.

16. Cable jackets shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or file number, month and year of manufacture, sequential meter or foot markings, a telecommunication handset symbol as required by Section 350G of the National

Electrical Safety Code, fiber count, and fiber type, flame rating and listing marking. The actual length of the cable shall be within -0/+1% of the length

markings. The print color shall be white, with the exception that cable jackets containing one or more coextruded white stripes, which shall be printed in light blue. The height of the marking shall be approximately 2.5 mm.

E. Cable Physical Performance: 1. Tensile Loading and Fiber Strain:

a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-33, "Fiber Optic Cable Tensile Loading and Bending Test," and FOTP-38, “Measurement of Fiber Strain in Cables Under Tensile Load,” a length of cable shall be tested to the rated

tensile load. The rated tensile load shall be 2670 N (600 lbf). b. While under the rated tensile load, the fiber shall not experience a measured

fiber strain greater than 60% of the fiber proof test level. c. After being held at the residual load (30% of the rated tensile load) the fiber

shall not experience a measured fiber strain greater than 20% of the fiber

proof test level nor an attenuation change greater than 0.60 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).



August 2020

d. After the tensile load is removed, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.60 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).

2. Compressive Loading Test: a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance

of Fiber Optic Cables," the cable shall withstand a minimum compressive load of 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in) applied uniformly over the length of the sample. The 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in) load shall be applied at a rate of 2.5 mm

(0.1 in) per minute. The load shall be maintained for a period of 1 minute. The load shall then be decreased to 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in).

b. Alternatively, it is acceptable to remove the 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in) load entirely and apply the 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load within five minutes at a rate of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) per minute. The 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load shall be

maintained for a period of 10 minutes. c. Attenuation measurements shall be performed before release of the 110 N/cm

(63 lbf/in) load. The change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.60 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber.

3. Cyclic Flexing:

a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test," the cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles at a rate

of 30 ± 1 cycles per minute. The flexing arc shall be + 90 degrees from the reference position.

b. The fiber shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.60 dB at

1300 nm (multimode). c. No cracks, splits, tears or other opening shall be present on the inner or outer

surface of the jacket. 4. Twist Test:

a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-85, "Fiber Optic Cable Twist Test," a

length of cable no greater than 2 meters will withstand 10 cycles of mechanical twisting.

b. The fiber shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.60 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).

5. High and Low Temperature Bend:

a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-37, "Fiber Optic Cable Bend Test, Low and High Temperature," the cable shall withstand four full turns around

a mandrel at test temperatures of -10°C and +60°C. The mandrel diameter shall be the larger of 20X cable diameter or 150 mm.

b. The presence of visible cracks, splits, tears, or other openings on either the

inner or outer surface of the jacket constitutes failure. None of the sheath components shall show visible cracking when removed successively and

examined. c. For multimode fibers, the increase in attenuation shall be ≤ 0.60 dB at 1300

nm.

6. Impact Resistance: a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber

Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies," the cable shall withstand a minimum of



August 2020

2 impact cycles at 3 locations spaced 150 mm. The impact energy shall be at least 4.4 N*m.

b. The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.60 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).

c. The presence of visible cracks, splits, tears, or other openings on the outer surface of the jacket constitute a failure. The presence of broken fibers within the specimen constitutes a failure.

7. Temperature Cycling: a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure

Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fiber, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components," the change in attenuation after 2 cycles at extreme operational temperatures (-40 °C to +70 °C) shall not exceed 0.60

dB/km at 1300 nm (multimode). The change in attenuation is measured with respect to the baseline values measured at room temperature before

temperature cycling and after the last low and last high temperature. 8. Water Penetration:

a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-82, “Fluid Penetration Test for Fluid-

Blocked Fiber Optic Cable”, a one-meter length of unaged cable shall withstand a one-meter static head or equivalent continuous pressure of water

for one hour without leakage through the open cable end. 9. Cold Impact Test:

a. When tested in accordance with FOTP-25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber

Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies," the cable shall withstand a minimum of 2 impact cycles at 3 locations separated by 150 mm. The impact energy shall

be at least 2.94 N*m. The cable shall be conditioned for at least 4 hours at the minimum installation temperature (-10 °C).

b. The presence of visible cracks on either the inner or outer surface of the

jacket constitutes a failure. c. No optical measurements are required.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Corning Cable Systems, FREEDM (Basis of Design) 2. Optical Cable Corporation, DX Series

3. Belden 4. Berk Tek

5. Commscope 6. Siemon 7. Superior Essex.

2.04 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS

A. Plenum rated, two-fiber cable. Fiber type as indicated on the Drawings, and/or as

required for the application.

B. Tight buffered fiber surrounded by an all-dielectric strength member and continuous outer jacket. Suitable for operation from +32°F to +158°F.



August 2020

C. With factory installed connectors on both ends. Connector type(s) as required for the application. Connectors shall comply with the requirements for connectors given

elsewhere in this specification.

D. Length as indicated on the Drawings, or as required for the application.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Corning Cable Systems, Zipcord (Basis of Design) 2. Belden

3. Berk Tek 4. Commscope

5. Siemon 6. Superior Essex.

2.05 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS

A. Provide fiber optic cable connectors consistent with those selected for the fiber ports of the fiber patch panel and those selected for the managed network switch.

B. Provide connectors for proper interface with equipment.

C. Connectors shall be heat-cured epoxy, polished end type. Connectors shall be simplex, unless indicated otherwise or otherwise required for proper interface with equipment.

D. Connector shall provide a strain relief mechanism for installation on a single fiber cable that contains strength elements. The fiber within the body of the connector shall

be isolated mechanically from cable tension, bending and twisting. Provide fan-out kits for each cable to protect the un-jacketed fiber strands.

E. Connectors shall comply with EIA/TIA-455-A, as well as TIA/EIA-604-2 (FOCIS-2

for Type ST connectors), TIA/EIA-604-3 (FOCIS-3 for Type SC connectors), and TIA/EIA-604-10A (FOCIS-10 for Type LC connectors).

F. Connectors for multimode fibers shall be rated for OM1, OM2, OM3, or OM4 to match the fibers they are being applied with.

G. When installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, the

connectors shall be capable of achieving the following performance.

Performance Requirements for Simplex Multimode

Type ST, LC, and SC Connectors

Test

EIA/TIA-455-A

Test Method

(FOTP #) Test Conditions

Performance

Requirement

Insertion Loss (IL)

171 Concatenation method

Average: 0.1 dB Max IL : 0.5 dB



August 2020

Performance Requirements for Simplex Multimode

Type ST, LC, and SC Connectors

Test

EIA/TIA-455-A

Test Method

(FOTP #) Test Conditions

Performance

Requirement

Return Loss (RL)

107 Coupler with power source and meter

Minimum RL: ≤-20 dB Minimum RL: ≤-26 dB

LOMMF

Low Temp Soak 188 4 days @ 0°C Max IL : 0.75 dB Min RL: 20 dB

Temperature

Life

4 4 days @ 60°C Max IL : 0.75 dB

Min RL: 20 dB

Humidity 5 4 days @ 40°C RH

90-95%

Max IL : 0.75 dB Min RL: 20 dB

Impact 2 8 impacts from 1.8

meters (height)

Max IL: 0.75 dB

Min RL: 20 dB

Strength of Coupling

Mechanism

185 33 N at 0° for 5 seconds

Max IL: 0.75 dB Min RL: 20 dB

Durability 21 500 rematings, clean every 25


Cable Retention 0°

6 0.5 lb. on 900μm buffered fiber for

5 seconds

Delta IL: ≤ 0.5 dB Max IL: 0.75 dB

Min RL: 20 dB

Cable Retention 90°

6 0.5 lb. on 900μm buffered fiber for

5 seconds

Delta IL: ≤ 0.5 dB Max IL: 0.75 dB

Min RL: 20 dB

Flex 1 ±90° for 100 cycles @ 0.5 lb. load on

900μm buffered fiber


Twist 36 10 cycles 5 turns, 0.5 lb. load on

900μm buffered fiber


H. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Corning Cable Systems, Heat-Cure Single-Fiber Connectors (Basis of Design) 2. Belden 3. Berk Tek

4. Commscope 5. Siemon.



August 2020

2.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPLICES

A. Only fusion splices are permitted; mechanical splices shall not be used.

B. Splice equipment shall be either by the cable manufacturer or approved by the cable manufacturer for the fibers in question.

C. Splice equipment shall be capable of producing typical splice loss of not greater than 0.10 dB.

2.07 INNERDUCT

A. Provide continuous innerduct runs from each conduit access point.

B. Plastic Innerduct (Indoor/Outdoor Applications)

1. UL Listed, Plenum Rated, flexible, non-metallic, corrugated, optical fiber/communication raceway.

2. Orange in color.

3. Outside marked with size and sequential length in feet. 4. Compatible fittings as required.

5. Provide innerducts in all conduits used for fiber optic cables. Unless noted otherwise, provide innerducts as follows:

a. 2" conduit: two 3/4" innerducts

b. 3" conduit: three 1" innerducts c. 4" conduit: three 1-1/4" innerducts

6. Provide 900 lb rated pull tape/string in all spare innerducts. 7. Provide gastight and watertight seal at outdoor points of cable entry to innerduct

to preclude water vapor or liquid from entering interstitial space.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Carlon Plenum-Gard (Basis of Design)

b. Or Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that painted surfaces that will be covered by items of this Section have a primer and finish coat of paint.

B. Ensure that all indoor areas are enclosed from the weather.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of fiber optic cables and all related accessories and hardware shall strictly

conform to the recommended installation procedures of their respective manufacturers.



August 2020

B. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, each fiber optic cable run shall be installed as one continuous length between the indicated termination points, with no intermediate

splices.

C. Provide sufficient strain relief (slack) in all cables, cable conductors, and wiring to

avoid stress on all cables, wires, and wiring connections.

D. Conduits, Ducts, and Innerducts: 1. Outside fiber optic cable shall be installed in ducts conforming to Section 33 71

19 and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Inside fiber optic cable shall be installed in conduit conforming to Section 26 05

33.13. 3. Innerducts shall be provided in all conduits over 1-1/2” trade size used for fiber

optic cables. Provide pull string or tape in all spare innerducts.

4. Provide pull rope in all empty conduit runs with not less than 36 inches of slack at both ends. Tie rope off to prevent loss into conduit.

5. Conduits shall be restricted to no more than two 90-degree bends or equivalent without a pull box.

6. Maintain minimum bending radius of changes in direction as follows:

a. 10 times diameter of 4” (100 mm) and larger conduits. b. 6 times diameter of smaller conduits.

7. Avoid bends in conduits from pull boxes. 8. At all transition points where a cable runs from inside a conduit into a cable

trough, or onto a cable tray or plywood backboard, the end of the conduit shall be

fitted with a plastic bushing to prevent abrasive damage to the cable.

E. Cable Dress Loops:

1. Provide cable dress loops at each location as listed below. a. Manholes: 25 feet b. Handholes: 15 feet

c. Floor Mounted PMCS Cabinets: 10 feet d. Wall Mounted PMCS Cabinets: 5 feet

e. Equipment Racks: 10 feet. f. Wall Mounted Patch Panels & Splice Enclosures: Per the manufacturer’s

installation instructions.

2. Refer to the Drawings for additional designed excess (spare) cable lengths.

F. Spare Fibers:

1. All spare fibers shall be terminated, neatly coiled and tied with cable ties for future use.

2. Label all spare fibers as such.

G. Cable Pulling Tension: 1. Calculate expected pulling tension based on the manufacturer's

recommendations. If calculated tension exceeds 90% of the cable manufacturer's stated maximum short-term tension, take necessary steps to reduce the expected



August 2020

tension below 90%. Submit the tension calculations for approval prior to installation of the subject cable.

2. Monitor actual pulling tension throughout installation. Actual tension shall not exceed 90% of the cable manufacturer's stated maximum short-term tension at

any time during pulling. 3. For pulls where the calculated expected tension exceeds 75% of the cable

manufacturer's stated maximum short-term tension, utilize a tension monitoring

device with recording capability throughout pulling. Submit the recorded tensions to the Engineer immediately after installation.

H. Ensure that the cable manufacturer's stated minimum bend radius of the cable is not exceeded during installation. Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than ten (10) times the diameter of the cable, or less than the manufacturer's recommended

minimum bending radius, during installation or as finally installed.

I. At penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and similar assemblies, provide

firestopping as specified in Section 07 84 00.

J. Lengths of cables which are not installed in conduits and are run inside equipment rooms shall be run in and secured to cable trays or cable ladders using nylon cable ties

and attached to walls and backboards using nylon cable clamps or hangers or using a plastic wiring system such as manufactured by Panduit, or Approved Equal. Cables

shall be attached or otherwise supported at intervals not to exceed 18 inches. Mechanically fasten all cable accessories, i.e., do not rely only upon adhesive component fasteners.

K. All conduit and cable entrance openings into equipment rooms and huts shall be sealed with a pliable sealing compound after the cable is in place. Sealing compounds for

rooms, huts, walls, or other partitions shall be fire retardant per ASTM E 814. Sealing compound shall be used to seal the area around the cable where the cable emerges from the end of a conduit, pipe, or ductbank. Seal all cables where they enter

innerducts. All spare conduits shall be sealed or plugged in an approved manner. 1. Fire retardant pliable sealing compound shall be an intumescent firestop putty,

reusable and repenetrable, conforming to ASTM E 814 and UL 1479, Nelson FSP Firestop Putty, or Approved Equal.

2. Seal all outdoor spare conduits with gastight mechanical expanding sealing

plugs.

L. Provide appropriate special protection for cables in areas where the cables are

unavoidably exposed to hazardous conditions, such as sharp corners on equipment. Cables damaged due to neglect by the Contractor, during installation, shall be replaced by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.

M. All cables shall be terminated in standard order, according to the EIA/TIA and ICEA color codes. Individual cables shall be identified at each cable termination with

permanent, heat shrink labels. All spare fibers in each cable shall be terminated and identified. Identification of cables and conduits shall comply with Section 16075.



August 2020


A. Comply with Section 26 05 63.

B. Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.

C. Inspection: 1. Prior to installation: visually inspect cable visible defects, as well as for UL or

third-party certification markings.

2. After installation: thoroughly visually inspect all accessible portions of the installation for visible defects.

D. Optical Fiber Testing: 1. Perform all testing specified herein for each fiber, including spares, of each

installed cable.

2. All instruments used to perform the testing specified herein shall be calibrated as specified in Section 16080.

3. For all tests specified herein, submit results for each fiber tested as follows. a. Detailed (numerical) results. b. Pass/fail based on the requirements given herein and applicable industry

standards (also clearly state the numerical pass/fail criteria). 4. Prior to installing optical fiber cable, perform end-to-end attenuation tests using

an OTDR while cable is on the reel at the jobsite. 5. Perform tests in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.3 and the cable

manufacturer's recommendations, as well as ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A Method B

(multimode) and ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 Method B (single-mode). Perform verification acceptance tests and factory reel tests.

6. Perform testing at both operational windows (850 and 1300 nm for multimode fibers, 1310 and 1550 nm for single-mode fibers).

7. Perform end-to-end optical attenuation testing, in both directions.

a. Calculate expected optical attenuation based on the manufacturers' stated worst-case attenuation values for the installed cable, connectors, and splices.

b. Actual measured attenuation shall not exceed the calculated expected attenuation by more than 20% or 1.0 dB, whichever is less.

c. Submit both calculated and actual measured attenuations.

8. Perform Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) trace testing, in both directions.

a. Submit graphical results for each test, with all anomalies (connectors, splices, defects, etc.) identified by type, location (distance), and attenuation.

b. No single connector shall result in more than 0.75 dB attenuation. No single

splice shall result in more 0.3 dB attenuation. No single anomaly, other than connectors and splices, shall result in more than 0.5 dB attenuation.

E. Correction of Deficiencies:



August 2020

1. Report all unacceptable values immediately. Correct all deficiencies found in work of this contract and separately report deficiencies in work of items of other

contracts. 2. Retest items requiring correction. Correct or have corrected any remaining

deficiencies and retest until work is acceptable.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect all new and existing work.

B. During painting, mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, and all items not to be painted.

C. Protect all items during work of other trades including welding and cutting.

D. Schedule installation of fiber optic components to occur later in the construction activity to avoid periods of excessively wet or dirty construction.

E. If necessary, seal and cover cable, enclosures, boxes, openings, and other components

to preclude contamination.

F. Leave protective caps in place on unconnected components. Replace caps after testing

or other work.

G. Completely clean all system components of dust, dirt, and debris accumulations.

H. Replace components which cannot be cleaned or restored back to a new condition at

not cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 33 71 19-1 Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes


August 2020

SECTION 33 71 19

ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for underground electrical work, materials and products and raceway systems.


1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

3. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 13 – Medium Voltage Cables 5. Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

6. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Equipment Manufacturer: 1. In cases where the Contractor contemplates using equipment not made by the first

named manufacturer of these specifications, refer to Section 26 05 00 of these

specifications for special requirements and/or substitution requirements.


A. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical, with the following additions and modifications.

B. Factory Tests:

1. Determine applicable soil-density relationships for underground electrical installation bedding per applicable soil tests as defined in Division 31 of the

Specifications. 2. Determine soil-density relationships for compaction of backfill material as

defined in Division 31 of the Specifications.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval:

1. Catalog Information: a. Conduit (All Types).



August 2020

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Basic Electrical Materials: Those products such as building wire, connectors, fittings and similar devices as required for work of this Section are as specified in other

Sections of these Specifications.

B. Provide materials and equipment listed by UL, when such equipment is listed or approved.

C. Conduit: Conform to Section 26 05 33.13.

D. Wire and Cable: Conform to Sections 26 05 13 and 26 05 19.

E. Grounding Material: Conform to Section 26 05 26.

2.02 WATERPROOFING OF CONDUIT JOINTS

A. General: Ensure that equipment and materials for waterproofing conduit joints

complies with the following manufacturers for quality, installation procedures and guaranteed end results.

1. Rigid Metal Conduit: a. Thread sealant: As recommended and approved by the conduit manufacturer. b. Cleaning solvent: As recommended and approved by the conduit

manufacturer. 2. Non-Metallic Conduit:

a. All weather, quick-set joint cement: Approved by the conduit manufacturer. b. Cleaning solvent: As recommended and approved by the conduit

manufacturer.

2.03 WATERSTOP MATERIALS

A. Surface Applied Hydrophilic Waterstop:

1. Non-bentonite, modified chloroprene rubber which expands to 8 times its original volume when exposed to water. Expansion delay coating to allow concrete cure prior to expansion.

2. 100-year service life. 3. Sika/Greenstreak, Hydrotite, or Approved equal.

B. Water Swelling Sealant: 1. Single component water swelling sealant which increase in volume not less than

50% when exposed to water, while retaining rubberlike elasticity.

2. Adheres to concrete, metal, glass, etc. when applied. 3. Suitable for waterproofing irregular shaped joints, rough surfaces, and odd

penetrations. 4. Sika/Greenstreak, Leakmaster LV-Z, or Approved equal.



August 2020

2.04 MODULAR-BASED SEALING SYSTEMS

A. Furnish and install modular-based rectangular sealing systems inside existing

underground trench duct as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Sealing systems shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:

1. Rectangular frame / aperture 2. Sealing modules 3. Stay plates

4. Compression unit / wedge.

C. Basis of Design: Roxtec, Inc.

1. The system concept illustrated on the drawings is based upon standard Roxtec components. Installation requirements, however, mandate that the overall system be of a custom or modified design.

2.05 CONDUIT SPACERS

A. Provide non-metallic, interlocking type conduit spacers which snap together to join

any combination of intermediate and base units together, both vertically and horizontally.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Underground Devices Inc. 2. The George-Ingraham Corp.

3. Or Approved equal.

2.06 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Metal detectable polyester material, with minimum one-inch high lettering.

Overcoated graphics to read, "CAUTION-BURIED ELECTRIC LINE" for electric lines, and/or “CAUTION - BURIED FIBER-OPTIC CABLES” for fiber-optic lines.

APWA color to be red for electric lines and orange for telecommunication or fiber-optic lines.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Brady 2. LEM Products, Inc

3. Seton 4. Or Approved equal.

2.07 GROUNDING

A. Ground rods are to be copper clad steel with diameter adequate to permit driving full length of the rod minus 6 inches, which extends above the finished concrete slab.

Conform to Section 26 05 26 of these Specifications.

B. Ground Wires: 600Volt, size as indicated or required by code minimum #6.



August 2020

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: (For Underground Work) 1. Install underground conduit systems in accordance with Article 300-5 of the NEC,

in accordance with previous requirements of this Section, and the following requirements exceeding NEC: a. Perform earthwork for buried conduit as specified previously for electrical

work under Trenching: b. Use of separators for direct buried conduits is prohibited. Maintain required

separation of direct buried conduits with screening materials and removable placement forms.

c. Lay conduit lines to grade a minimum of three inches per 100 feet. Grade

conduit lines away from buildings, except conduit lines running between buildings, without intervening handholes or manholes shall be level.

d. Construct underground conduit lines to be watertight. Stagger conduit couplings in banks of conduits.

e. Unless otherwise indicated on drawing or details, where conduits change

direction or turn up at equipment, transformers, buildings, terminal poles, etc., use long sweep rigid galvanized steel conduit elbows.

f. Provide two feet minimum cover over conduits and over concrete encasement of conduit, unless indicated otherwise or specified.

g. Where conduits are to be turned up into equipment or transformer pads,

extend the concrete encasement for the conduits up to the top of the concrete pad and provide a 3/4" chamfer around exposed top edges. Isolate the

concrete encasement for the conduits from the concrete pad for the equipment or transformer pad. Provide 2" high crushable fiber materials around duct bank encasement.

h. Extend conduits 6 inches above concrete slab surface. Install insulating grounding bushing on all conduits. Perform concrete work as specified in

Division 03 "Concrete". i. Where conduits are to be turned up at terminal poles, extend the concrete

encasement for the conduits up pole to grade and be provided with a 3/4"

chamfer around all exposed top edges. Perform concrete work as specified in Division 03 " Concrete".

j. Provide underground conduit of the types indicated in Section 26 05 33.13.

B. Provide separators for encased conduits compatible with the conduit utilized and conforming to those specified in these Specifications. Stagger the joints of the

conduits by rows and layers so as to provide a duct bank line having the maximum strength. During construction, protect partially completed duct bank lines from the

entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a duct bank line is completed from manhole to manhole, from manhole to building or structure and/or from handhole to handhole, draw a testing mandrel not

less than 12 inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the size of the conduit, through each conduit, after which draw a brush having the diameter of the duct bank



August 2020

and stiff bristles through until the conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand, and/or gravel; immediately install conduit plugs. Provide a plastic pull rope, having a

minimum of 3 additional feet at each end, in telephone and spare duct banks.

C. Conform concrete to that specified in Division 03 of this Specification.

D. Backfilling: Provide a continuous plastic warning tape centered above the top of the underground duct bank about 12 inches below grade. Conform concrete to that specified in Division 03 of this Contract. Progress backfilling as rapidly as the

construction, testing and acceptance of the work permits. Ensure backfill is free from roots, wood, scrap material, and other vegetable matter and refuse.

3.02 CONDUIT WATERPROOFING

A. Non-Metallic Conduit: 1. Plastic PVC Conduit: Liberally coat the end of the conduit with an approved all

weather, quick-set clear cement before joining. Insert joint into the coupling, pushing firmly and rotating conduit until it reaches the pre-formed stopping ridge

within the coupling.

3.03 EARTHWORK

A. Perform Earthwork in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 31.

B. Excavate to depths as required for conduit and expose trench.

C. Remove waste excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill on the project

from the site as directed. Provide sheeting and shoring as necessary for protection of work and safety of personnel. Remove water from excavation by pumping or other approved method.

D. Restore surface as required to match existing.

3.04 GROUNDING

A. Provide non-current carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment with a maximum resistance to solid "earth" ground not exceeding the values indicated in Section 26 05 63 of these Specifications.

3.05 TEST

A. Field Tests: Field test of electrical equipment and conform systems to those specified

in Section 26 05 63 of these Specifications.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 90 00-1 Common Work Results for PMCS Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 90 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of the supply of material, the installation, scope of work of the Process Monitoring and Control System herein designated as PMCS.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

2. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control 3. Section 01 66 00 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements 4. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents

5. Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data 6. Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

7. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduits for Electrical Systems 8. Section 27 10 23 - Fiber Optic Cabling 9. Section 40 90 02 - Process Monitoring and Control System Testing

10. Section 40 90 03 - Process Monitoring and Control System Training 11. Section 40 95 00 - Process Control Hardware

12. Section 40 95 43 - Process Control Hardware Interfaces

1.02 REFERENCES

A. International Society of Automation (ISA):

1. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification (NRC ADOPTED). 2. S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial Process

Instruments. 3. RP55.1, Hardware Testing of Digital Process Computers, Recommended Practice. 4. S5.3 Graphic Symbols for Distribution Control/Shared Display Instrumentation,

Logic and Computer Systems. 5. RP7.3, Quality Standards for Instrument Air.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA 250-85, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

C. Underwriters Laboratory Inc. (UL): UL 508, Standards for Safety, Industrial Control

Equipment.

D. Deutsche Industrie-Norm (DIN), VDE 0611, Specification for modular terminal

blocks for connection of copper conductors up to 1,000V ac and up to 1,200V dc.


1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations:

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute. 2. FAT - Factory Acceptance Test.

3. HMI - Human Machine Interface. 4. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 5. ISA - International Society of Automation Standards.

6. I&C - Instrumentation and Control. 7. I/O - Input and Outputs.

8. JIC - Joint Industrial Council. 9. NEC - National Electrical Code. 10. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

11. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act. 12. O&M - Operation and Maintenance.

13. PC - Personal Computer. 14. PMCS – Process Monitoring and Control System. 15. P&ID - Piping and Instrumentation Diagram.

16. PLC - Programmable Logic Controller. 17. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

18. CSA - Canadian Standards Association.

B. Enclosure: Control panel, console, cabinet, or instrument housing.

C. Work Day: 8 hours of actual work.

D. Software: 1. Programming of digital devices using all types of programming language.

2. Configuring of digital devices using all types of configuring process. 3. Programs or configuration data stored in read only memory, programmable read

only memory, read/write memory, disk, tape, or other storage device.

E. Types of Software: 1. Standard Software: Software packages that is independent of project on which

they are used. Standard software includes system software and process monitoring and control software.

2. System Software: Application independent software developed by digital

equipment manufacturers and software companies. Includes, but is not limited to, operating systems; programming languages such as PASCAL, C, and BASIC;

assemblers; file management utilities; text editors; debugging aids; and diagnostics.

3. Process Systems Software: Software packages independent of specific process

control project on which they are used. Includes, but is not limited to, providing capability for, data acquisition, monitoring, alarming, human-machine interface,

data collection, data retrieval, trending, report generation, control, and diagnostics.

4. Application Software:


a. Software to provide functions unique to this Project and that are not provided by standard software alone.

b. Configuring data bases, tables, displays, reports, parameter lists ladder logic, and control strategies required to implement functions unique to this Project.

F. Rising/Falling: Terms used to define action of discrete devices about their set point. 1. Rising: Contacts close when an increasing process variable rises through set

point.

2. Falling: Contacts close when a decreasing process variable falls through set point.

G. Signal Types: 1. Analog Signals, Current Type:

a. 4 to 20 mA dc signals conforming to ISA S50.1.

b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PMCS Subsystem components, use the following ISA 50.1 options:

1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two-wire. 2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L. 3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers.

2. Analog Signals, Voltage Type: 1 to 5 volts dc within panels where a common high precision dropping resistor is used.

3. Discrete signals, two-state logic signals using 120Vac or 24Vdc sources as indicated.

4. Pulse Frequency Signals:

a. Direct current pulses whose repetition rate is linearly proportional to process variable.

b. Pulses generated by contact closures or solid state switches as indicated. c. Power source less than 30V dc. Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and digital

information between field elements, transmitters, receivers, controllers, and digital devices.


A. PMCS Provider 1. All PMCS work is to be provided by a single PMCS provider.

2. The PMCS provider shall provide work described in this Section and related Sections.

3. PMCS Provider Qualification: a. The PMCS provider must have successfully completed at least three or more

PMCS projects, similar to the work described in this Section and the related

Sections, in the last five years. b. The PMCS provider must have successfully completed PMCS projects of a

similar size and complexity as described in this Section and the related Sections.

4. The Contractor shall submit for the PMCS Provider:


a. A detailed project management proposal with the bid, including staffing and resumes of the project management team assigned to this project. The

Contractor’s project team shall include a Project Manager, who will be the key contact person. The team shall include a Project Site Supervisor, who

will provide onsite assistance during installation, start-up and training. The Project Site Supervisor shall be responsible for starting up the complete system and providing onsite training of the Owner's supervisors, operators

and service technicians. b. The Contractor shall submit with the bid, a reference list of at least three

similar system installations, including the name and location of the facility, the name and location of the Engineer, and the name and telephone number of at least one member of the facility supervisory personnel completely

familiar with the installation and operation of the system. In addition, two sets of drawings for a completed system shall be submitted with the proposal.

1.05 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General This Section covers the furnishing and installation of a Process Monitoring and

Control System (PMCS). The PMCS has a primary purpose of providing monitoring and control of various system operating parameters, equipment and alarms.

1. The power and relay modules to be monitored and/or controlled by the PMCS are listed in Section 40 95 00 – Appendix B (Directory Labeling Schedule).

2. The Contractor shall schedule a PMCS kickoff meeting within thirty (30) days

after the award of the Contract to coordinate all aspects of the design, fabrication, delivery, installation and start-up of the PMCS system. In attendance shall be

representatives of the Contractor (and as required, and any of their major equipment suppliers), Owner, and Engineer. Subsequent meetings shall be scheduled, as required, to assure timely completion and start-up of the PMCS.

Meetings will be held at the office of the Owner. The Contractor shall be prepared to provide and discuss:

a. Equipment Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule b. Wiring Diagram Submittal Schedule c. PMCS Testing Plan and Schedule

d. PMCS Training Plan and Schedule e. Equipment Delivery Schedule

f. Start-up Schedule 3. The PMCS provider shall provide the Division 26 provider approved drawings for

all interconnection wiring between all PMCS control enclosures and field devices.

4. Field cables and raceways shall be supplied and installed by the Division 26 provider unless otherwise noted (Refer to Electrical Drawings). Control panels

supplied by the PMCS provider shall be installed by the Division 26 provider unless otherwise noted (Refer to Electrical Drawings). The Contractor shall provide coordination support for the installation of control panels, cables and

raceways for the PMCS system. The PMCS Contractor shall terminate all signal conductors in all control panels.


5. Fiber optic cables and raceways shall be supplied and installed by the Division 26 provider unless otherwise noted (Refer to Electrical Drawings). The Contractor

shall provide coordination support for the installation of fiber optic cables and raceways for the PMCS system. The PMCS Contractor shall provide all fiber

optic terminations and patch cabling. 6. All RTU enclosures shall be completely installed by the Contractor including all

wire and conduits and site preparation and installation. See specification 40 95 00

“Process Control Hardware” appendix A and contract drawings for the list of all RTU enclosures and locations.

7. All network equipment as outlined in specification section 40 95 00. 8. The PMCS provider shall provide training of the owner’s personnel in regard to

operation, maintenance, and programming of the PMCS system as specified in

PMCS Training: Section 40 90 03. All training sessions and topics shall be pre-approved by the Owner and Engineer.

B. Specific PMCS Work 1. Provide new control panels as indicated in the specifications and on the

drawings.

2. Provide the programming, testing, and setup for all new communications and networks. The PMCS provider is solely responsible for configuring all

communications in the contract and must demonstrate proper configuration to the engineer for approval.

3. Provide complete installation, wiring, and conduit of all control panels at the

project site. Control Panel locations include: a. CP-480, 480V MCC/Switchgear Building

b. CP-4160, 5KV Switchgear Enclosure 4. Provide as-built drawings for all facilities or equipment worked on as part of the

project.

5. Provide all fiber optic terminations and patching. Provide all terminations of communications cables in the telecom closet and at the field locations.

C. Control Panel CP-480 Operation Concept: 1. Enclosure Type: Wall mounted NEMA 12, height and width not critical, depth not

to exceed 12 inches.

2. Location: 480V MCC/Switchgear Building. 3. Provide 20 amp, single phase main breaker and ground bar.

4. Connect breaker to duplex receptacle. 5. Provide 1500 VA Uninterruptible Power Supply. Provide with dry contact alarm

output.

6. Provide 6 feet 2#12, 1#12 G type SO cord with plug. Under normal conditions, SO cord and plug will be connected to the output of the UPS and the input cord of

the UPS will be plugged into the duplex receptacle. In the event of UPS failure, input cord of the UPS will be disconnected from the receptacle and the SO cord with plug will be plugged into the receptacle effectively bypassing the UPS

7. Provide 7– 10A din rail mounted circuit breakers to power new devices, reference Appendix B below for breaker size and labeling.

8. Provide typed panel directory


9. Connect breakers to end of SO cord. 10. Provide separate power, neutral, and ground terminals for each breaker.

11. Provide minimum 4 port managed Ethernet Switch for connection of two CAT5E cables from the two main breakers power monitors and one CAT5E cable

connection to existing Ethernet switch located in DCU panel on floor above. Provide switch with fiber connection to provide communications to remote CP-4160.

12. Provide properly sized 24VDC power supply to power Ethernet switch. 13. All conductors shall be labelled. All conductors shall be 300-volt, Type MTW

stranded copper No. 12 AWG for main power circuits and No. 14 AWG for other circuits.

14. Provide multimode fiber adapter panel for termination of 8 single pairs fiber

cables.

D. Control Panel CP-4160 Operation Concept:

1. Enclosure Type: Wall mounted NEMA 12, height and width not critical, depth not to exceed 12 inches.

2. Location: 5kV Switchgear Enclosure.

3. Provide 20 amp, single phase main breaker and ground bar. 4. Connect breaker to duplex receptacle.

5. Provide 1500 VA Uninterruptible Power Supply. Provide with dry contact alarm output.

6. Provide 6 feet 2#12, 1#12 G type SO cord with plug. Under normal conditions,

SO cord and plug will be connected to the output of the UPS and the input cord of the UPS will be plugged into the duplex receptacle. In the event of UPS failure,

input cord of the UPS will be disconnected from the receptacle and the SO cord with plug will be plugged into the receptacle effectively bypassing the UPS

7. Provide 17, 10A din rail mounted circuit breakers to power new devices,

reference Appendix B below for breaker size and labeling. 8. Provide typed panel directory.

9. Connect breakers to end of SO cord. 10. Provide separate power, neutral, and ground terminals for each breaker. Field

connections shall be 14 AWG.

11. Provide minimum 16 port managed Ethernet Switch for connection of CAT5E cables from protection relays and power monitoring. See panel directory in

Appendix B for description of the 15 relays/monitors to be connected. Provide switch with fiber connection to provide communications to remote CP-480. Switch shall be Schneider, no exceptions.

12. Provide properly sized 24VDC power supply to power Ethernet switch. 13. All conductors shall be labelled. All conductors shall be 300-volt, Type MTW

stranded copper No. 12 AWG for main power circuits and No. 14 AWG for other circuits.

14. Provide multimode fiber adapter panel for termination of 8 single pairs fiber

cables.

E. Requirements


1. Provide the following equipment and services required under this Section and related sections:

a. Required Submittals. b. Equipment as indicated on the Project Drawings.

c. Instructions, details, and recommendations to, and coordination with, Contractor for Certificate of Installation.

d. Verify readiness for operation.

e. Verify the correctness of final power and signal connections (lugging and connecting).

f. Adjusting and calibrating. g. Starting up. h. Testing and coordination of testing.

i. Training.

F. Interconnections Coordination

1. Verify the following work not provided by the Contractor is provided: a. Correct type, size, and number of signal wires within their respective

raceways.

b. Correct electrical power circuits and raceways. c. Correct type, size, and number of fiber optic cables/strands and their

raceways. d. Correct size, type, and number of related pipes, valves, fittings, and tubes. e. Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process mechanical piping

for in-line primary elements.

G. Equipment Coordination

1. For equipment not provided under this section, but directly connected to equipment required by PMCS: a. Obtain from provider, manufacturers' information on installation, interface,

function, and adjustment. b. Coordinate with provider to allow required interface and operation with

PMCS. c. For operation and control, verify that installations, interfacing signal

terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. d. Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PMCS.

e. Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the following: 1) Motor control centers and switch gear. 2) Adjustable speed drive systems.

3) Packaged process control systems. f. Examples of items not in this category:

1) Internal portions of equipment provided under Division 26 - Electrical, that are not directly connected to equipment required under PMCS.

2) Internal portions of package process control systems that are not directly

connected to equipment provided under this section.


1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation to the Engineer in accordance with the applicable provisions of

Section 01 33 00 and as specified herein.

B. Submit shop drawings for the system which is documented in accordance with

International Society of Automation (ISA) Standard ISA-S5.1/.2/.3/.4. 1. Product Data: For each electrical component, include manufacturers descriptive

literature; product specifications; published details; technical bulletins;

performance and capacity rating curves, charts, and schedules; catalogue data sheets; and other submittal materials as required to verify that the proposed

products conform to the quality and function ability of the specified products. 2. Identification: Clearly indicate by an arrow on submissions covering more than

one product type or style exactly which product is being submitted for approval.

3. Equipment Characteristics: Size, location, weight, and electrical requirements. 4. Manufacturer: Include the catalogue name, company name, address, and

telephone number for each product submitted.

C. Submit copies of the Equipment O&M manuals for equipment supplied within two (2) weeks prior to start up and final acceptance test. The submission and approval of this

manual is considered to be an integral part of furnishing and delivery of the system equipment. Include the following elements in each manual in addition to all submittal

items listed above. 1. Erection and installation sequence and instructions. 2. Exploded view drawings and illustrations with sequence description for assembly

and disassembly of equipment. 3. Comprehensive parts and materials list for each equipment element indicating

manufacturer and manufacturer's identification number. Include name, address, and telephone number of sales and service office nearest to the final destination of the PMCS, for each major equipment item.

4. Schedules of recommended spare parts to be stocked, including part number, inventory quantity, and ordering information.

5. Performance rating and nameplate data for each major system component. 6. Procedures for starting, operating, adjusting, calibrating, testing, and shutting-

down system equipment.

7. Emergency operating instructions and trouble-shooting guide. 8. Schedule of routine maintenance requirements and procedures, and preventative

maintenance instructions required to insure satisfactory performance and equipment longevity.

9. Maintenance instructions for extended out-of-service periods.

10. Complete listing of all software programming. 11. Complete Operator's Supervisors Manual for the Control System which includes

system hardware and software, and a “how to” description of the system. 12. Testing Reports. 13. ISA Data Sheets, filled out to reflect final field instrument calibration.

14. “As-built” drawings of control panels, wiring, instruments, etc. Final as-built drawing shall be provided on compact disks in AutoCAD format.


D. Submit 2 preliminary copies of the PMCS O&M Manuals for the PMCS system within two (2) weeks prior to start up and final acceptance test for review. After

completion of startup and final acceptance of the PMCS O&M manual, the Contractor shall provide 4 finalized copies of the O&M manuals. The submission and approval

of this manual is considered to be an integral part of furnishing and delivery of the system. Include the following elements as a minimum in the O&M manual. 1. System Information to include:

a. Description of the PMCS system b. Printout of the finalized system architecture drawing

2. Provide an comprehensive IP Address list to include all PLCs, PCs, OITs, printers, switches and any other equipment used in the PMCS system that uses an IP Address

3. Provide an comprehensive serial address list for each device used in the PMCS system that uses a Serial Address

4. PLC Control Panels: Provide the following information for each individual supplied control panel. a. System Architecture Diagram (if applicable)

b. Enclosure and Panel Layout Drawing(s) c. Equipment Build Sheet

d. Equipment manufacturers’ product information e. Power Distribution Ladder Drawing(s)

5.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS, BASIS OF DESIGN, AND ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Submit a statement listing any deviations from or exceptions to these specifications as

prescribed in the Instructions to Bidders. Include specification reference and proposed alternative, with reasons stated for deviations or exceptions for review by the Engineer. Reference to a particular equipment model of a named manufacturer is

made only to identify a particular equipment design, style, and arrangement. The Contractor is completely responsible to provide equipment which fully satisfies the

mechanical and electrical integrity, materials quality, and functional intent established by the specifications. Products, components, and materials prescribed throughout the specifications constitute the Engineer's acceptable level of quality. Modifications to a

manufacturer's standard design may be required to meet these specifications. Equipment not complying with the mechanical, electrical, and material integrity

established by these specifications will not be acceptable as determined by the Engineer.

B. All substitutions to identified materials or equipment shall comply with the applicable

requirements of Division 1. In any case of conflict between such requirements of Division 1 and this paragraph, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Whenever an item of material or equipment is identified by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the identification

or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or “or-


equal” item or no substitution is permitted, material or equipment of other Suppliers may be proposed.

D. Where substitutions to identified items are permitted, any proposed substation or alternate must fully comply with the following in order to be considered by the

Engineer: 1. Be of a reputable manufacturer, 2. Be fully compliant with the requirements of this Section and the Drawings,

3. Be fully compatible with all interfacing items and work, and with the installation environment,

4. Be appropriate (as determined by the Engineer) for the proposed application, and 5. Be equivalent (as determined by the Engineer) in character, performance, and

quality to any identified Basis of Design.

E. Where a specific manufacturer or product is identified as the Basis of Design or listed first in a list of acceptable manufacturers, the overall project design is based on the

identified manufacturer or product. If the Contractor elects to substitute a manufacturer or product which differs from the identified Basis of Design, the Contractor shall bear all efforts and costs of any design changes necessary in order to

achieve finished work which is equal in character, performance, and quality to the original design depicted in the Contract Documents. Such changes shall include, but

not necessarily be limited to: changes to ratings and/or features of other equipment, changes to material sizes and/or types, new material and/or equipment, and changes to structural and/or architectural features (including room sizes). Approval by the

Engineer of a proposed substitute item shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

F. The listing of specific manufacturers is solely intended to identify reputable manufacturers who are known to provide quality products of the general type specified. Such listing is in no way intended to imply that the identified manufacturers

product(s) have been verified to satisfy the specified requirements, or to be equivalent to any identified Basis of Design manufacturer. Nor does such a listing imply

acceptance of products which do not meet the specified requirements, ratings, features, dimensions, and functions as indicated.


A. The drawings and specifications are based on instrumentation and control equipment manufactured by the first named manufacturer. Any changes to the structure, piping,

electrical work, etc., required for other approved manufactures shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval, showing changes in the equipment, piping, structure and electrical work.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved by Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing

Laboratory unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. Provide


products that are listed and labeled or approved as stated above for the location installed in and listed and labeled or approved as indicated and specified for the

applications the items are intended for.

C. All components (i.e. hardware, software, etc.) of the PMCS shall be the most current

proven design available at the time of installation of the system. The Contractor shall provide a warranty for all PMCS components for a period of one year after start up and owner acceptance. In addition, the Contractor shall provide software upgrades for

a period of one year after plant start up and owner acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner. All components shall be suitable for the intended application and shall be

installed and wired in strict accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

The PMCS equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the successful production of high quality equipment and systems

of the type specified for at least 10 years, has supplied such equipment for at least five years of the ten year period, and has at least three similar system installations in

successful operation for at least five years.

D. The Contractor shall assume complete system responsibility for the adequate and proper operation of all equipment furnished regardless of original source or

manufacturer.

1.09 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store all PMCS equipment and accessories specified in this Section, which are delivered to the project site prior to the time the Contractor is ready to install them, as specified in Section 01 66 00. Verify from the Manufacturer the maximum and

minimum temperature and maximum relative humidity for storing the equipment, and conform to the Manufacturer’s requirements. In any case, the minimum storage

requirements will be those specified in Section 01 66 00 and the minimum storage temperature shall not be less than 50 degrees F. Protect the equipment from humid conditions which might cause corrosion of the electrical and electronic parts of the

equipment. Failure to store equipment in the specified or approved manner shall be sufficient reason for not accepting the equipment, regardless of the outside appearance

or warranty of the manufacturer. Protect all electronic equipment from a dusty environment by sealing the equipment in plastic, etc.


A. Environmental Design Requirements: The following defines certain types of environments. PMCS Subsystems refer to these definitions by name to specify the

environments requirements for individual equipment units. 1. Inside, Air Conditioned:

a. Temperature:

1) Normal: 60 to 80 degrees F. 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruptions: 40 to 105 degrees F.

b. Relative Humidity:


1) Normal: 10 percent (winter) to 70 percent (summer). 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruption: 10 to 100 percent.

c. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous. 2. Inside:

a. Temperature: 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing. c. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

3. Inside, Corrosive: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F.

b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing. c. Corrosive Environment: Chlorine gas/sodium hypochlorite. d. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

4. Inside, Hazardous: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F.

b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing. c. NEC Classification: Class 1, Division 1, Group D.

5. Outside:

a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 100 percent rain, snow, freezing rain.

c. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous. 6. Outside, Corrosive:

a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F.

b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 100 percent, rain, snow, freezing rain. c. Corrosive Environment: Chlorine gas.

d. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous. 7. Outside, Hazardous:


b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 100 percent rain, snow, freezing rain. c. NEC Classification: Class 1, Division 1, Group D.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty for all PMCS equipment for a period of one (1) year after start-up and Owner acceptance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall check and verify that all manufacturers’ part numbers indicated on the drawings and specifications are current for the specified application.

2.02 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts as specified in this section and the related sections.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment as shown on the Drawings and approved shop drawings and as directed by the manufacturer's representative.

1. Mount enclosures on 1/4-inch (6mm) minimum spacers or U-channel supports to provide a space between enclosures and mounting surfaces.

2. Set the top of enclosures 6’-6” above the finished floor or grade unless otherwise

indicated or specified.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 90 02-1 PMCS Testing Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 90 02

PROCESS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING


1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work specified in this Section is the testing requirements of the Process Monitoring and Control System.


1. Section 40 90 00 - Common Work Results For Process Monitoring and Control Systems

2. Section 40 95 00 - Process Control Hardware

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to the references in Specification 40 90 00.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to the abbreviations in Specification 40 90 00.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation to the Engineer in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 01 33 00 and as specified herein.

The Contractor shall submit a signed and dated (completed) copy of the Panel Inspection & Testing check list document for each panel at least eight (8) weeks prior to the execution

of the Site Acceptance Testing (SAT). 1. See Appendix A for an example of the panel inspection & testing check list and

the minimum required data.

2. The Final Site Acceptance Testing (SAT) plans. See Appendix B for an example of this testing document.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PANEL INSPECTION & TESTING

A. General:


1. The intent of the Panel Inspection & Testing is to uncover and correct all PMCS Control Panel wiring errors and defective devices prior to the Site Acceptance

Testing. These test procedures do not include electrical insulation test or point-to-point continuity test (which should be included as part of the suppliers standard

tests) and are performed after such tests. 2. The Contractor shall perform all the testing and documentation as required in this

section.

B. Inspection 1. Verify that all enclosure devices are installed and labeled per the control panel

drawings and the bill of materials. 2. Verify that the control panel has been fabricated per the control panel

specification section and the control panel drawings.

3. Confirm proper grounding of the control panel devices (refer to the control panel drawings).

4. Confirm all component communications cables are installed per the control panel drawings.

C. Voltage Test

1. Confirm that the required input supply voltage is supplied to the enclosure, by measuring the input voltage, with a voltmeter, across the input terminals.

2. Confirm that all 120 VAC power supplies are functioning properly, by measuring the output voltage, with a voltmeter, across the power terminals.

3. Confirm 24 VDC power supply is functioning properly, by measuring the output

voltage, with a voltmeter, across the power terminals. 4. Confirm proper voltage is available at each control panel device, including the I/O

modules wetting voltage.

D. Communications 1. Verify that all communication cables are installed as shown on the control panel

drawings. Verify proper communication between control panel devices, where practical.

E. Backup Power Test 1. Verify that the installed UPS system delivers power when the normal AC power

source is removed. Verify that proper status lights indicate correctly.

F. Hardwired Circuits Test 1. Functionally test all hardwired control circuits as shown on the control panel

drawings. Verify that all devices (i.e. selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights, relays, alarm horns, etc.) are wired and function correctly.

2. Functionally test all discrete and analog devices and circuits as shown on the

control panel drawings. Verify that all devices (i.e. signal isolators, process indictors, single loop controllers, direct current alarms, etc.) are wired and

function correctly.

G. Test Documentation


1. Maintain a copy of all the test documents used for the testing of the control panel. The test documents should include all notations made during the test. The

notations should include all modifications made to the hardware and/or wiring to correct any deficiency.

2. The person performing the test should initial and date any control panel drawings used as a checklist or guide for the control panel testing.

3. One complete set of test documentation should be sent to the Engineer after

testing is completed and shipment of the control panel. 4. A standard form or cover letter shall accompany the test documentation,

certifying that the control panel has been tested. 5. Examples of the minimum required information on the Panel Inspection &

Testing check lists are provided in the attached Appendix A.

3.02 FINAL SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING (COMMISSIONING)

A. Final Site Acceptance Testing

1. Test all systems under process conditions. The intent of this test is to demonstrate and certify the operational interaction of the PMCS. Testing shall include, but not limited to, taking process variables to their limits (simulated or actual process) to

verify all alarms, failure interlocks and/or transfers, and operational interlocks. 2. Examples of the minimum required information on the Final SAT check lists are

provided in the attached Appendix D. 3. The Engineer, Owner and Contractor shall witness each testing task. The

Engineer will provide the final approval for the acceptance of each task.

4. The Contractor will immediately correct defects and malfunctions with Engineer approved methods and materials and repeat the test. Upon completion of the final

site acceptance testing, submit the test results and a certified report indicating that all required PMCS tests have been completed satisfactorily and the systems meet the functional requirements of their applicable specifications.

B. The PMCS shall operate without a system fault for thirty (30) consecutive days to qualify for Final SAT. Final SAT shall be witnessed, documented and signed off

upon satisfactory completion by the Owner.

C. After completion of the Final SAT (Commissioning), the system performance will be evaluated by the Engineer, Owner and Contractor to evaluate the operational

performance of the system. The system performance will be evaluated by reviewing the system historical data, system reports and operational logs. The Contractor will

correct system problems and retest as required.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 90 02-1A PMCS Testing Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 90 02

APPENDIX A

EXAMPLE: PANEL INSPECTION & TESTING CHECK LIST

(REFER TO SECTION 3.01)

Item No. Panel Inspection Testing - Check List Inspected

A-1 INSTALLATION

1 All equipment is installed as shown on the approved version of the Panel Layout Drawings and in according to the manufacturer's requirements. □

Remarks:

A-2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

1

Fasten all devices inside the enclosure with steel screws, steel bolts, and/or other means as appropriate. For devices without distinct means for fastening, provide suitable metal bracket or

mounting adapter as a means for fastening. Fasten devices that plug directly onto power

receptacles with self-locking nylon tie wraps to the receptacle or support for the receptacle. No

device shall be permitted to be laid loose inside the enclosure.

□

2

All exposed electrical terminations in the enclosure shall be guarded or covered to eliminate

the possibility of accidental contact by an object the size of an average finger. Provide

appropriate additional protection where this requirement is not met. Provide appropriate warning labels for voltage levels used within the enclosure.

□

3 Segregate all TVSS devices by types and size. Locate the TVSS devices as close, as practical,

to the non-isolated ground bus in the enclosure. □

Remarks:

A-3 WIRING

1 All wiring shall conform to Nation Electric Code's latest revision Article 310 - "Conductors for General Wiring," table 310-17. All wire shall be copper. □

2 Control wiring shall be 16-gauge, 600-volt, type THHN/MTW. Power wiring shall be 12-

gauge 600-volt type THHN/MTW sized as required. □

3 All analog signal wiring shall be 18-gauge twisted pairs with foil shield and drain wire. The

insulation shall be 600-volt, 90 C. Drain wires shall be grounded at the panel only. □


4

All wiring shall conform to the following color code:

1. 480 VAC power, 3-phase: Phase A-Brown; Phase B-Orange; Phase C-Yellow 2. 120 VAC power wires 1 phase (i.e. lights, heaters): Line-Black, Neutral-White

3. 120 VAC control wires: Red

4. 24 VAC control wires - Orange

5. 120 VAC signals powered from an external source - Yellow

6. Powered circuits which are not de-energized by opening of the Main Disconnect (ie. Circuits powered by a UPS internal to the enclosure): 24V Orange, 120V Yellow

(per NFPA-79)

7. 24 VDC digital inputs and output signals: (+) Blue, (-) Blue/White

8. 24 VDC powered 4-20mA analog signals, Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP): (+) Red, (-) Black

9. Ground: Green 10. Isolated Ground: Green/Yellow

□

5

To avoid inductive pickup power wiring or control wiring shall have a maximum possible

separation from signal wiring. A practical distance is not less than 6 in. If power wiring has to cross the signal wiring, the crossing should be as close to a right angle as possible.

□

6

Wires shall be run in open slot vinyl wire duct with covers. Wireduct shall be held to the back

plate with nylon "push" type rivets filled no more than 75%. Where it is not practical to use

wireduct, wire ties shall be used to bundle the wires together in a neat and professional manor. □

7 Where wire is required to flex often (i.e. around door hinges) high strand wire and spiral wrap

shall be used. □

8

Provide at least 10% spare I/O of each type in each control enclosure by adding spare I/O

modules as necessary. Spare and not-used I/O is to be fully wired to terminal blocks in the

same manner as the used I/O. □

9 Wires that are not de-energized by the main breaker shall be of the same color and labeled with a warning label stating same. □

10 Control power and neutral shall not be jumped from device to device. Power distribution

blocks shall be used. □

Remarks:

A-4 GROUNDING

1

For enclosures 48” high and 36” wide and larger provide: Two 1/4" x 1" copper ground buses

(non-isolated and isolated) shall be supplied with each enclosure.

For enclosures smaller than 48” high and 36” wide provide: One 1/4" x 1" copper ground bus

(non-isolated) shall be supplied with each enclosure.

□

2

The non-isolated ground bus shall be electrically bonded to the panel and shall be used to

ground all equipment. All equipment ground wires shall be run directly from the equipment to

the non-isolated ground bus. □

3

The isolated ground bus shall be used to ground the drain wire of signal wiring. No more than

5 drain wires shall be jumpered together before being run to the isolated ground bus. The isolated ground bus shall be connected to the non-isolated grounded bus with one piece of 10-

gauge wire.

□

4

Connect all TVSS devices to the non-isolated ground bus with a dedicated green colored

ground conductor that is a minimum #10 AWG. The TVSS ground conductor shall be as short as possible. Reliance on the TVSS mounting channel alone for the ground connection is not

acceptable

□

Remarks:


A-5 PAINTING

1

Interior and exterior surfaces of all enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with rust-inhibitive primer. The interior and mounting plates shall be painted white with

polyurethane enamel. All pits and blemishes in the exterior surface shall be filled. Exterior

surface shall be smooth and painted with two coats to a film thickness of 4 mils. Paint color

for carbon steel enclosures shall be ANSI 61 Gray, polyurethane enamel. One pint of finish

color paint shall be furnished with the panels to repair future scratches. Stainless Steel enclosures shall not be painted but shall have a “brushed” finish.

□

Remarks:

A-6 NAMEPLATES

1 General: All nameplates shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication ISA-

RP60.6. □

2

1. Nameplates shall be used to display basic information including function.

2. Letters shall be gothic upper case (capital letters); minimum height shall be 1/8 inch with a 3/64 inch space between lines.

3. Nameplates shall be made of laminated engraving stock having a black core with a white

surface.

4. The characters shall be engraved using an industry standard engraving machine.

5. Nameplates shall be attached to the enclosure using double-faced pressure-sensitive tape. Where the environment is not conducive to tape i.e. outdoors, NEMA 4, 4X, and 3R

environments stainless steel screws shall be used in place of the tape.

6. Enclosure identification nameplates shall be larger sized letters, 3/16 inch minimum.

7. Abbreviations shall conform to appendix B of ISA Recommended Practice publication ISA-

RP60.6.

□

Remarks:

A-7 LEGEND PLATES

1 General: All legend plates shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication ISA-

RP60.6. □

2

Legend plates shall be used to display basic functions of push buttons, selector switches and

pilot lights. Letters shall be gothic upper case (capital letters); minimum height shall be 1/8 inch with a 3/64 inch space between lines. Legend plates shall be made of laminated engraving

stock having a black core with a white surface. The characters shall be engraved using an

industry standard engraving machine. Legend plates shall be held to the enclosure by the ring

nuts used to hold the operator in place. All legend plates for a particular panel shall be of the

same size and shape. Standard Selector Switch legends shall include: (1) Hand/Off/Auto; (2) Local/Remote; (3) Off/On. Standard Push Button legends shall include: (1) Start; (2) Stop; (3)

Stop Lockout; (4) Low; (5) High; (6) Reset

□

Remarks:

A-8 WIRE MARKERS

1 General: All wire markers & tags shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication

ISA-RP60.6. □


2

Each wire shall be identified on both ends of the wire with wrap around of shrink type wire

markers. The wire marker number shall be a unique number, incorporates the instrument / equipment tag number if applicable, shall be easily cross referenced with schematic drawings,

and shall have the same number on both sides of the wire.

□

Remarks:

A-9 ADHESIVE LABLES

1 All labels shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication ISA-RP60.6. □

2

Adhesive labels shall be used inside the panel to identify equipment. The labels shall be

smudge proof and shall have an adhesive back. The printing on the labels shall be done by

mechanical means only. □

Remarks:

A-10 ENCLOSURE LIGHTING

1

Provide fluorescent lighting kits for all floor mounted control enclosures. Lighting kits supply

voltage shall be 115 VAC, 60 hertz with terminal block for electrical connections. Lighting kits shall use remote mounted door activated switch. Fluorescent bulb shall for two foot where

practical. Provide rigid metal construction with heavy duty mounting bracket and lens

protector for bulb.

□

Remarks:

A-11 CLIMATE CONTROL

1 Provide climate control equipment as necessary for the location and type of equipment to be

provided. □

2

Climate control unit shall be a complete unit with thermostat, heater, and fan integrated into

the same housing. The unit shall be a thermostatically controlled fan-driven heater unit.

Heater supply voltage shall be 115 VAC, 60 hertz with terminal block for electrical connections

□

3

The enclosure shall have a low-point cold air intake vent and a high-point heated air discharge

vent. The heater unit shall be mounted near the cold air intake vent. The heater unit shall

draw cold air from the cold air intake vent and discharge the heated air from the top of the heater unit. The heated air rises and flows through the hot-air discharge vent.

□

Remarks:

A-12 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT (GFI) RECEPTACLE

1

Provide one (1) 15 Amp duplex GFI receptacle in the inside of the enclosure for all enclosures

that may require programming with a lap top computer or handheld programmer requiring 115

VAC supply. □


Remarks:

A-13 CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE DATE

□

Remarks:

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 90 02-1B PMCS Testing Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 90 02

APPENDIX B

EXAMPLE: SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING FORM

(FINAL TESTING SECTION 3.02)

PROJECT: PROJ. No.:

LOCATION: TEST DATE:

CONTRACTORS:

REVIEWER:

___

INSTRUCTIONS:

□ Complete form header information on this and subsequent sheets. Copy as needed. □ Have testing participants sign below as a record of attendance. Use 1 sheet/day.

□ Conduct testing, utilizing the Site Acceptance Testing checklist as a general guide. Record results on shop drawings or as indicated. Record completion of checks on checklist. Use blue or black ink for checks and notes. Use red ink for deficiencies which

must be addressed. □ Attach record documentation to this checklist for use during review. Attach marked I/O

list, calibration sheets, installation certificates, setting sheets, data trends, and any other pertinent information.

□ Once each site has been completely tested, assign and record a disposition.

□ Number pages, copy and distribute completed forms.


ATTENDANCE:

The undersigned have participated as indicated in the testing of the materials and systems

provided as part of this project.

TECHNICIANS:

NAME SIGNATURE ORGANIZATION DATE



WITNESSES:





DISPOSITIONS:

The material dispositions listed in this document are defined as follows: A - APPROVED (for final acceptance) AAN - APPROVED AS NOTED (comply with comments before final acceptance) HFR - HOLD FOR RETEST (refer to comments) NA - NOT APPROVED

TESTING CHECKLIST:


RTU UNDER TEST AND TYPE:

DATE:

DISPOSITION:

INITIALS:

INSTALLATION CHECKS:

Test Procedure #1: Pass/Fail Criteria:

Task: (Example) Verify new PLC Control Panel is located and installed in accordance with the design drawings.

Pass if actual installation matches intended site configuration. Fail if installation does not match documentation.

Test Results: PASS/FAIL (Circle one) Initials:

If FAIL, Insert Comments or Refer to Notes. Comments:

Re-Test Results: PASS/FAIL (Circle one) Initials:


Task: (Example) Verify new field instruments are located and installed in accordance with the design drawings.

Pass if issues are addressed correctly. Fail if issues are not addressed or instructions are incorrectly complied with.




DEMOLITION CHECKS:


Task: (Example) Verify all abandoned equipment has been removed in accordance with the design drawings and returned to a location designated b y the Owner.

Pass if actual equipment removal matches intended site configuration and equipment has been returned to the Owner’s designated location. Fail if demolition does not match documentation or if the Owner is not in possession of the removed equipment.





Task: (Example) Verify all abandoned conduit and wiring has been removed in accordance with the design drawings and has been disposed of properly.

Pass if actual conduit and wiring removal matches intended site configuration. Fail if demolition does not match documentation or if the conduit and wiring has not been disposed of properly.





ELECTRICAL CHECKS:


Task: (Example) Verify PLC Control Panel is powered and functional in accordance with the design drawings.

Pass if the equipment is powered and functional. Fail if the equipment is not powered and functional.





Task: (Example) Verify field instruments are powered and functional in accordance with the design drawings.)

Pass if the equipment is powered and functional. Fail if the equipment is not powered and functional.




Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 90 03-1 PMCS Training Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 90 03

PROCESS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING


1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section addresses the requirements for training of the Owner’s personnel with regards to operation, maintenance, and programming of the PMCS.

B. The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with training except travel and per diem expenses for the Owner's personnel. The cost of training shall be included in the

contract price.

C. Materials supplied under this section: 1. None

D. Products supplied but not installed under this section: 1. None

E. Products installed but not supplied under this section: 1. None

F. Related Sections:

1. Process Monitoring and Control System: Section 40 90 00.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation to the Engineer in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 01 33 00 and as specified herein. 1. The Contractor shall submit a training plan to the Engineer for approval. The

training plan shall include a proposed schedule, course descriptions and outlines, proposed Operator proficiency examination, and resumes and job descriptions of

the trainers. The training plan shall be approved at least 30 days prior to beginning any training. The Contractor shall coordinate all on-site training with the Engineer and owner to accommodate shift personnel.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. The Contractor's standard training courses shall be utilized to meet the training specified herein. Where a Contractor's standard courses do not meet the specified training, the Contractor shall develop and provide additional course work. Any

training the plant personnel receives during PMCS testing and start-up shall not meet the requirements of this Section.

B. The on-site training program shall be scheduled for one, two-hour session, which shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer.

C. Operator and maintenance personnel training shall be coordinated with system start-

up.

3.02 OPERATOR TRAINING

A. Operator training shall be provided by the Contractor. This training shall equip operators with the skills necessary to operate the Owner's system. As a minimum, the operator training program shall provide operators with the ability to do the following:

1. Use operator station hardware. 2. Acknowledge alarms.

3. Respond to software and hardware errors.

3.03 MAINTENANCE TRAINING

A. Maintenance training shall be provided by the Contractor. This training shall equip

technicians with the skills necessary to diagnose, trouble shoot and repair the components of the Owner's system provided by the Contractor. As a minimum, the

maintenance training program shall provide technicians with the ability to do the following: 1. Power-up, bootstrap, and shut down of all hardware devices.

2. Perform scheduled maintenance functions on all components. 3. Describe theory of operation of all circuit boards.

4. Set up and use off-line diagnostics to determine hardware failures to the fault board or module.

5. Use operator station hardware to retrieve and interpret displays which provide

on-line diagnostic information. 6. Remove and replace all removable boards/modules.

B. The maintenance training program shall include at least 50% hands-on instruction and shall be designed for personnel who have electronics maintenance and repair


experience and a general knowledge of power monitor systems, but shall not assume any familiarity with the specific hardware furnished.

C. The Contractor shall provide a standard System Training Manual and a course manual for each student. Student course manuals shall include copies of all overheads used by

the instructor, as well as detailed hands-on exercise instructions.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 95 00-1 Process Control Hardware Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 95 00

PROCESS CONTROL HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: General requirements for Control Panels.

B. Related Sections: 1. None

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers/American National Standards Institute

(IEEE/ANSI)

B. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA)

C. National Electrical Code (NEC)

D. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

F. Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA)

G. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL)

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations: 1. Controller - The logic processor that monitors and controls the input/output

signals of a PLC. 2. I/O - Input and Output modules and signals of a PLC. 3. Interposing Control Relay – An electrically actuated relay whose coil is energized

in order to provide a dry (un-powered) isolated digital control signal (on/off) to another electrically actuated device.

4. Module - An individual electronic card in the PLC rack. 5. PCP - Process Control Panel, the enclosure containing the PLC. 6. PLC - Programmable Logic Controller; includes the controller and the I/O

modules. 7. Rack - The housing which contains the controller and I/O modules of a PLC.

8. Slot - The portion/section of a PLC rack into which a controller or I/O module is inserted.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation to the Engineer in accordance with the applicable provisions of

Section 01 33 00 and as specified herein.

B. Submit shop drawings for all components as follows:

1. Product Data: For each component, include manufacturers descriptive literature; product specifications; published details; technical bulletins; performance and capacity rating curves, charts, and schedules; catalogue data sheets; and other

submittal materials as required to verify that the proposed products conform to the quality and function ability of the specified products.

2. Identification: Clearly indicate by an arrow on submissions covering more than one product type or style exactly which product is being submitted for approval.

3. Equipment Characteristics: Size, location, weight, and electrical requirements.

4. Manufacturer: Include the catalogue name, company name, address, and telephone number for each product submitted.

C. Arrangement Drawings: 1. Provide Arrangement Drawing for external front panel, and internal side and rear

mounting sub-panels.

2. Provide Bill of Materials, on Arrangement Drawing, identifying equipment shown and all software specified in this section. Equipment shall be referenced by a

numerical item number. Material schedule shall include the following information: a. Item

b. Identity c. Quantity

d. Description e. Manufacturer f. Catalog Number

g. Remarks 3. Provide nameplate schedule, on the Arrangement Drawings, and include the

following information: a. Item b. Quantity

c. Line 1 Text d. Line 2 Text

e. Line 3 Text f. Text Height g. Nameplate Size

4. Provide Legend schedule, on the Arrangement Drawings, and include the following information:

a. Item b. Quantity c. Line Text

D. Ladder Diagrams:


1. Provide power distribution diagrams, relay control wiring diagrams, and PLC I/O wiring diagrams drawn with circuitry arranged in functional sequence on ladder-

type diagrams. Assign each horizontal line or “rung” on the ladder diagram a sequential number and write that number to the left the ladder.

2. For Power distribution and relay control wiring diagrams, use the rung number to develop the wire numbers. Form the first wire number on any rung by adding a “1” to the end of the rung number. When a wire passes through any device

capable of breaking the circuit (i.e. circuit breaker, fuse, switch, relay contact), number the wire on the opposite side of that device with the next wire number in

the sequence. Form the second wire number on any rung by adding a “2” to the end of the rung number. Continue the wire numbering in this manner from left to right along the circuit on that particular rung. Generated rung numbering on all

wiring diagrams using the following sequence: a. Use rung numbers 000 to 099 for power distribution drawings.

b. Use rung numbers 100 to 199 on the drawing for the module in Slot 1. c. Use rung numbers 200 to 299 on the drawing for the module in Slot 2. d. Use rung numbers 300 to 399 on the drawing for the module in Slot 3.

e. Use rung numbers 400 to 499 on the drawing for the module in Slot 4. f. Use rung numbers 500 to 599 on the drawing for the module in Slot 5.

g. Use rung numbers 600 to 699 on the drawing for the module in Slot 6. h. Use rung numbers 700 to 799 on the drawing for the module in Slot 7. i. Use rung numbers 800 to 899 on the drawing for the module in Slot 8.

j. Use rung numbers 900 to 999 on the drawing for the module in Slot 9. k. Use rung numbers 1000 to 1099 on the drawing for the module in Slot 10.

l. Continue rung numbering on each drawing for subsequent slots in the same manner as indicated above.

3. Draw relay coils on the right side of the ladder. Show the rung numbers on which

the relay contacts appear to the right of each coil. Designate a normally closed contact by drawing a diagonal line through the contact. Designate a timed contact

by adding the letters "TR" to the right and below the contact. a. Number relay coils on power distribution and digital control wiring

drawings shall be numbered sequentially from R-01 to R-99.

b. Number relay coils on PLC digital output module I/O wiring drawings by an “R” followed by the slot number followed by a dash followed by the two

digit point number. 1) Examples are “R1-02” or “R2-15”, where:

a) “R1” or “R2” designate the digital output module slot number and

b) “02” or “15” designate the digital output module point number. 4. Show field and control panel terminal blocks on the drawing with the terminal

numbers of devices. 5. Show all standard symbols used on the drawings on a symbols sheet. 6. Show field wiring as a dashed line with cable number identified.

7. Draw PLC input modules on the right side of the ladder and PLC output modules on the left side of the ladder.

8. Draw the AC power line voltage (120VAC) wire on the left side of the ladder and the AC power neutral (120VAC) wire on the right side of the ladder.


9. Draw the DC power positive (24VDC+) wire on the left side of the ladder and the DC power negative (24VDC-) wire on the right side of the ladder.

E. Test Documentation 1. Provide a complete set of test documentation to the Engineer after testing is

completed and shipment of the control panel.

F. Operations and Maintenance Manual 1. Submit the following As Built documentation to be included in the O & M

manual. a. System Architecture Diagram (if applicable)

b. Enclosure and Panel Layout Drawing(s) c. Equipment Build Sheet d. Equipment manufacturers’ product information

e. Power Distribution Ladder Drawing(s) f. Print out of all software component programs, if component programming is

provided g. Print out of the programming code with programming comments for all

software based controlled components

h. Print out of all logic code inside any function block(s) used in the control programming

i. Print out of the functionally of all timers, digital inputs, digital outputs, averages, PID or other software vendor supplied modules used in the control programming


A. The drawings and specifications are based on the components manufactured by the

first named manufacturer. Any changes to the required for other approved manufactures shall be borne by the Contractor in accordance with Division 01 of these Specifications. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval,

showing changes in the equipment, piping, structure and electrical work.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. The control panels shall be the standard products of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the successful production of high-quality control panels of the type specified for at least 3 years.

C. Examination of Equipment for Safety 1. Control Panels shall be UL-508A listed and labeled by the Supplier. The Control

panel shall be built in compliance with NEC Article 409. 2. Equipment and materials installed within the control panel shall be U.L. Listed,

Labeled or identified.

3. Equipment and materials shall have been tested by a testing laboratory; and shall meet, or exceed, nationally recognized standards, or have been found suitable for

use in the specific manner as intended by the Engineer.


4. Equipment and materials utilized shall be included within published listings prepared by testing laboratories, inspection agencies or other organizations

concerned with product evaluations.

1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store all control panels and accessories specified in this Section, which are delivered to the project site prior to the time the Contractor is ready to install them, as specified in Section 01 66 00. Verify from the Contractor the maximum and minimum

temperature and maximum relative humidity for storing the equipment and conform to the Contractor's requirements. In any case, the minimum storage requirements will be

those specified in Section 01 66 00 and the minimum storage temperature shall not be less than 50 degrees F. Protect the equipment from humid conditions which might cause corrosion of the electrical and electronic parts of the equipment. Failure to store

equipment in the specified or approved manner shall be sufficient reason for not accepting the equipment, regardless of the outside appearance or warranty of the

manufacturer. Protect all electronic equipment from a dusty environment by sealing the equipment in plastic, etc.

B. The control panel shall be internally wired before delivery to the job site. Field

modifications to existing equipment or internal wiring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Field work shall be performed under the prevailing labor conditions.

C. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Accept equipment, materials, and other Products on site in factory containers,

bundles, and shipping skids.

D. Delivery and Acceptance at Site: 1. Deliver material in original packages, containers, skid loads, or bundles bearing

brand names and identification of source of manufacture or supply. 2. Inspect deliveries for damage. Process any damaged shipments for replacement

through the responsible delivery company or supplier at no additional cost to the

Owner.

E. Storage and Protection:

1. Store materials inside, under cover, and in a dry location. 2. Protect from weather, direct sunlight, surface damage, corrosion, and construction

traffic and activity.

3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

F. Handling: 1. Handle material to prevent damage to edges, ends, surfaces, and finishes.



A. Environmental Design Requirements: The following defines certain types of

environments. Refer to these definitions by name to specify the environments requirements for individual devices.

1. Inside, Air Conditioned: a. Temperature:

1) Normal: 60 to 80 degrees F.

2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruptions: 40 to 105 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity:

1) Normal: 10 percent (winter) to 70 percent (summer). 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruption: 10 to 100 percent.

c. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

2. Inside: a. Temperature: 20 to 104 degrees F.

b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing. c. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

3. Inside, Corrosive:

a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing.

c. Corrosive Environment: Chlorine gas/sodium hypochlorite. d. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

4. Inside, Hazardous:

a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing.

c. NEC Classification: Class 1, Division 1, Group D. 5. Outside:


b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 100 percent rain, snow, freezing rain. c. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

6. Outside, Corrosive: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 100 percent, rain, snow, freezing rain.

c. Corrosive Environment: Chlorine gas. d. NEC Classification: Non-hazardous.

7. Outside, Hazardous: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 100 percent rain, snow, freezing rain.

c. NEC Classification: Class 1, Division 1, Group D.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. General 1. Coordinate telecommunications equipment installation with required utility

services.

2. Coordinate telecommunications equipment installation with other interfacing equipment located on the site as shown on the Drawings.


B. Sequence installations to ensure utility connections are made in an orderly and timely manner.

1.09 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Designate a system startup period in the construction schedule following the

installation of the equipment and in conjunction with the initial system performance testing.

B. Make available manufacturer’s representatives to provide installation certificates and

assist with the system startup as required.

C. Initially power the system once manufacturer’s installation certificates are received for

all radios, control panels, and other active devices.

D. Perform initial operational testing during this period. Correct defects as they are detected to put the system into operation.

1.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Designate a commissioning period in the construction schedule for time dependent

testing.

B. Provide at commissioning period of minimum 7-day duration.

C. Conclude the commissioning period by conducting the final acceptance testing.

D. If the system does not pass the final acceptance testing due to deficiencies, continue the commissioning period until the final acceptance testing is completed and the

system is accepted.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Hardware Warranty - The Contractor shall provide a hardware warranty for all PMCS

supplied hardware for a period of one (1) year after successful completion of the Hardware Factory Acceptance Testing (HFAT) and acquisition of an approval signoff

of successful completion by the Owner or the Owners representative.

B. Extended Warranties: 1. Provide description of applicable Manufacturer’s extended Warranties that exceed

system Warranty period as part of “System Warranty Statement.”

C. Insurance:

1. Identify any Supplemental Insurances provided by TVSS, SA, UPS, or other manufacturers that provide guarantees against protected equipment damage.

D. Submit manufacturer’s warranty and verify that forms are completed in Owner’s name

and registered with manufacturer.


1. Date warranties to Date of Final Acceptance for project.

E. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Final Acceptance.

1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:

1. None

B. Maintenance Service: 1. Provide service and maintenance of entire supplied system for one year from date

of final acceptance. 2. Provide any routine maintenance as recommended by the supplied equipment

manufacturers. 3. Provide service and maintenance to restore the system after any outages resulting

from equipment, installation, or material deficiencies during the service period.

4. Provide 11-month service and maintenance check. Correct deficiencies covered under the system warranty at this time. Specifically check:

a. Power supply voltages b. Standby and UPS batteries. c. Grounding system interconnection for electrical integrity.

d. Corrosion protection systems and coatings for integrity. e. Enclosures for integrity.

f. Fasteners and threaded connectors for correct tightening torque. g. Lamps (if provided). h. All components provided as spares to assure readiness for service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Refer to Appendix A for the Control Panel Schedule for the required control panels.

2.02 ENCLOSURES

A. Construction:

1. NEMA 12 Enclosures: These enclosures shall be for indoor use only and shall provide a degree of protection against dust, dirt dripping water and external

condensation of non-corrosive liquids. a. Control enclosures shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel minimum, with

continuously welded seams. All seams shall be ground smooth.

b. Body stiffeners shall be added where required to prevent the enclosures from sagging or bowing.

c. Enclosures shall have piano type hinged doors with neoprene gaskets. d. Enclosure doors shall be held closed by a 3-point roller latching mechanism

operated by an oil-tight key-locking handle.


e. A minimum of two removable lifting eyes shall be attached to the top of floor mounted enclosures.

f. Print pocket shall be attached to one door of each enclosure. g. Mounting plates/ panels shall be of one-piece construction 14 gauge steel

minimum. The panel shall cover most of the rear of the enclosure. Where required, panels shall be mounted on the sides of the enclosures for additional mounting space.

h. Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman Engineering Company

2) Saginaw Control & Engineering (SCE) 3) APX

B. Construction:

1. Refer to Appendix A of the Control Panel Schedule for the required control panels.

2.03 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL

A. Special Provisions: 1. Provide FO Patch panel for termination of fiber-optic cables in each

control/communication enclosure where the main fiber-optic cables are routed into. Each fiber strand of the cables, including all spare fibers, shall be

terminated at the patch panel.

B. Construction: 1. Each FO Patch panel shall be equipped with an internal metal plate separating the

enclosure into two compartments: FO Trunk line compartment and Local jumper compartment. This metal plate shall be equipped with minimum six ST style

pig-tailed connector bulkheads for cross connection between FO strands in the FO trunk line and the local FO jumpers. The pig-tailed connector bulkheads shall be factory-assembled.

2. Each FO Patch panel shall be equipped with a cable coiling guide assembly in each of the two compartments for coiling up of extra cable lengths. The cable

coiling guide assembly shall be such to impose a minimum cable-bending radius of 6 inches.

3. Each enclosure for FO Patch panel shall be equipped with a bracket near the

entry point of the FO trunk cable to provide strain-relief to the FO cable. The FO trunk cable shall be fastened to this bracket.

C. Spare Parts: 1. Provide 10 percent, but not less than one, of the internal metal plates.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Corning Cable Systems WCP/CCH series 2. DINSPACE SNAP series

3. 3M Compact Fiber Distribution Box


2.04 MANAGED SWITCHES

A. Special Requirements:

1. Modems used in ring LAN architecture shall be managed type and comply with IEEE 802.1w rapid spanning tree standard.

2. Provide switch management software for the proposed unit. 3. Where possible with switch management configuration, inhibit all unnecessary

communication paths among the network ports of the Ethernet switch to optimize

usage of LAN communication bandwidth.

B. Construction:

1. The Fiber Optic Modem shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and shall be DIN rail mounted inside the panels.

2. They shall be capable of fiber optic communications over multimode glass fiber

and shall provide switched Ethernet ports for Category 5e cabling. 3. The modem shall have a minimum 6 ports, 2 of which are 100BASE-FX and 4 of

which are 10/100 Base-TX auto-negotiation RJ45 female connectors, shielded. 4. The modems shall be powered from 24VDC. Power for the modems shall be

derived from the control panel.

5. Provide software required for configuration, startup and diagnostics of the system.

6. Control Panel Switch Requirements: a. CP-480: Provide minimum 4 port managed Ethernet Switch for connection of

two CAT5E cables from the two main breakers power monitors and one

CAT5E cable connection to existing Ethernet switch located in DCU panel on floor above. Provide switch with fiber connection to provide

communications to remote CP-480. b. CP-4160: Provide minimum 16 port managed Ethernet Switch for connection

of CAT5E cables from protection relays power monitoring. See panel

directory above for description of the 15 relays/monitors to be connected. Provide switch with fiber connection to provide communications to remote

CP-480. c. Reference 27 10 23, 2.03 B for fiber type and quantity.

7. Spare Parts:

a. None.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Schneider Electric

2.05 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Construction:

1. In general, provide circuit breakers for control panel circuit protection where possible in lieu of fuses and fuse holders.

2. Provide UL listed supplementary protectors for general control enclosure circuit protection applications up to 30 Amperes.


3. Provide circuit breakers as indicated on the project drawings and as required to make a complete project.

4. The circuit breaker shall be able to be used as a disconnecting means. 5. Identify each circuit breaker with a permanent machine printed marking in

accordance with the shown in 40 95 00, Appendix B, Directory Labeling Scheduling or as submitted to uniquely identify all components.

B. Control Panel Requirements:

1. CP-480: Provide seven (7), 10A din rail mounted circuit breakers 2. CP-4160: Provide 17, 10A din rail mounted circuit breakers

C. Spare Parts: 1. Provide 10% installed spare circuit breakers in each enclosure for each type used

on the panel.

D. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Telemecanique

2. Allen Bradley 3. Phoenix Contact 4. Siemens

2.06 FUSES

A. Construction:

1. All fuses shall be sized per NEC Code, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations, and as required for the application.

2. Provide midget fuses, rated 300 VAC or higher.

B. Spare Parts: 1. Provide 10% spare fuses and not less than 10 of each type provided with the

system.

C. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman

2. Littlefuse 3. Gould / Ferraz / Shawmut

4. Or approved equal

2.07 FUSE HOLDERS

A. Construction:

1. Provide midget enclosed fuse holders for general control enclosure fuse applications up to 30 Amperes.

2. Provide fuse holders as indicated on the project drawings and as required to make a complete project.

3. The fuse holders shall be able to be used as a disconnecting means.

4. Provide fuse holders with blown fuse indication.


5. Identify each fuse holder with a permanent machine printed marking in accordance with the terminal fuse block number shown on the project drawings.

B. Spare Parts: 1. Provide 10% installed spare fuse holders in each enclosure for each type used i.

C. Manufacturers: 1. Marathon 2. Phoenix Contact

3. Weidmuler 4. Square D

5. Allen Bradley 6. Siemens

2.08 TERMINAL FUSE BLOCKS

A. Construction: 1. Terminal fuse blocks shall be provided as indicated on the project drawings. The

terminal fuse blocks shall be able to be used as a disconnecting means and shall be provided with a blown fuse indication. Each terminal fuse block shall be identified with a permanent machine printed marking in accordance with the

terminal fuse block number shown on the project drawings. 2. Fuse Terminal Blocks shall be designed for din rail mount. Provide fuse inserts

for midget fuses, rated 300VAC or higher 3. Provide light indicator for energized Circuit.

B. Spare Parts:

1. Provide 20% spare terminal fuse blocks in each enclosure.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Marathon 2. Phoenix 3. Allen Bradley

4. Square D 5. Weidmuler

2.09 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Construction: 1. Terminal blocks shall be provided for all external connections. The spare points

shall be so arranged that each series of blocks in a given area shall have a reasonable proportion of the spare points. Each spare input/output and

annunciator point shall be wired to identified terminal blocks for connections. 2. Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts, 30 amperes, barrier-type screw

terminals. Terminal blocks shall be furnished with compression terminals.

Where possible, solderless spade tongue connectors with insulating sleeves shall be used for connecting wires to terminal blocks. Each terminal shall be identified


by a suitable engraved or painted wire number on the marking strip attached to the block. No more than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal. Electrical

power, control and alarm wiring shall be terminated in terminal block assemblies separate and apart from terminal blocks used for analog signal wiring. Splices are

not permitted in control panels, all wiring shall terminate on terminals.

B. Spare parts: 1. Provide 20% installed spare terminal blocks in each control panel for each type of

terminal block provided on the panel.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Marathon MIK5 2. Phoenix 3. Allen Bradley

4. Square D 5. Weidmuler

2.10 DC POWER SUPPLIES

A. Construction: 1. Power supplies shall convert nominal 120 VAC, 60 Hertz power to DC power.

2. Output, overvoltage, and overcurrent protective devices shall be provided with the power supply to protect the instruments from damage due to power supply failure

and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure. 3. Power supplies shall be sized with a minimum of 100% spare capacity. Submit

load calculations showing margin with product information shop drawing.

B. Spare parts 1. Provide 10 percent spare, but not less than one complete unit of each type of

power supply provided on the project.

C. Manufacturers: 1. Accopian, Gold, Regulated

2. Phoenix Contact 3. Or approved equal

2.11 GENERAL PURPOSE RELAYS

A. Construction: 1. Provide all relays which may be required to make a complete system.

2. Relays shall be designed for multiple switching applications as indicated on the drawings.

3. Standard contact arrangement shall be DPDT rated at a minimum of 10 Amps at rated voltage, with pilot light indicating on/off status.

4. Relays shall plug into an 8 or 11 pin single tier screw terminal socket.

B. Spare Parts:


1. Provide 10% spare, but not fewer then 2, of each type provided on the project.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Square D class 8501 (2 & 3 pole); Square D Telemecanique (> 3 poles) 2. Allen Bradley 700-HA

3. Releco 4. IDEC 5. Tyco (Potter & Brumfield KRPA)

6. Tyco (Agastat)

2.12 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS)

A. Provide UPS where shown on the project drawings or where otherwise required to make a complete system.

B. Construction:

1. Provide UPS to power to critical control system components such as Controllers, Instruments, Operator Interface Terminals, DC power supply, and other sensitive

electronic equipment. 2. Where enclosure mounted, the UPS shall be mounted on the bottom of the

enclosure, unless otherwise noted on the project drawings, and shall be securely

fastened to prevent damage during shipment. 3. Provide fabricated bracket to fasten UPS in place. Ensure bracket is fitted prior to

shipment of enclosure to job site so interference with conduit can be avoided. Place no components on panel behind UPS to facilitate access.

4. Lightning and surge protection: The UPS shall be tested using lightning standard

per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category A test (6000 volt spike and 3000 amp) and C62.45 test procedures. The UPS must reduce the input spike to no less than 3

volts on the output, for a 2000 to 1 spike attenuation. 5. Isolation (including output neutral to ground bonding): The UPS shall provide a

true, separately derived power source as defined by National Electrical Code

Article 250-5d with output neutral bonded to ground. There shall be no direct connection between input and output and less than 2 pF of effective input to

output capacitance. 6. Regulation: The UPS output shall be regulated to within the CBEMA and ANSI

C84.1 point of utilization range of 104 to 127 VAC over the full dynamic range

from no load to full load, low line VAC to high line VAC, and low battery voltage to high battery voltage.

7. Continuous, no break power double conversion: The UPS shall provide continuous, no break power during a power outage or momentary interruption. Standby power systems which have any measurable transfer time and interruption

of the output wave form are unacceptable. 8. Sine-Wave Power: The UPS shall provide computer-grade sine-wave power with

5 percent or less total harmonic distortion capability. It must meet or exceed CSA standard 22 Part 2-107 for harmonic distortion.


9. Switch-Mode Power Supply: Rated capacity shall be in volt amperes (VA) when loaded with typical computer-grade switch-mode power supplies having a power

factor of 0.5 to 0.7 and crest factor of 2.7 to 3.5. 10. The output load capacity of each UPS shall be capable of full load runtime of up

to sixty (60) minutes. Supplier shall submit backup time calculations with the shop drawing submittal. UPS submittal shall be returned for corrections without such calculations.

11. Provide UPS inverter of no less than 1000 VA capacity. a. UPS less than 1600 VA may be plug and cord connected.

b. UPS 1600 VA or larger must be hardwired.

C. Spare Parts: 1. None

D. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton- 1500VA

2. APC Smartups Pro

2.13 NAMEPLATES

A. General: All nameplates shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication

ISA-RP60.6.

B. Construction:

1. Nameplates shall be used to display basic information including function. 2. Letters shall be gothic upper case (capital letters), minimum height shall be 1/8

inch with a 3/64 inch space between lines.

3. Nameplates shall be made of laminated engraving stock having a black core with a white surface.

4. The characters shall be engraved using an industry standard engraving machine. 5. Nameplates shall be attached to the enclosure using double-faced pressure-

sensitive tape. Where the environment is not conducive to tape i.e. outdoors,

NEMA 4, 4X, and 3R environments stainless steel screws shall be used in place of the tape.

6. Enclosure identification nameplates shall be larger sized letters, 3/16 inch minimum.

7. Abbreviations shall conform to appendix B of ISA Recommended Practice

publication ISA-RP60.6. 8. Margins shall conform to the following:

a. With holes 1) Top/bottom - 1/16" min 2) Sides left/right - 5/16" min

b. Without holes 1) Top/bottom - 1/16" min

2) Sides left/right - 1/8" min


2.14 LEGEND PLATES

A. General: All legend plates shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication

ISA-RP60.6.

B. Construction:

1. Legend plates shall be used to display basic functions of push buttons, selector switches and pilot lights.

2. Letters shall be gothic upper case (capital letters), minimum height shall be 1/8

inch with a 3/64 inch space between lines. 3. Legend plates shall be made of laminated engraving stock having a black core

with a white surface. 4. The characters shall be engraved using an industry standard engraving machine. 5. Legend plates shall be held to the enclosure by the ring nuts used to hold the

operator in place. 6. All legend plates for a particular panel shall be of the same size and shape.

7. Standard Selector Switch legends shall include: (1) Hand/Off/Auto; (2) Local/Remote; (3) Off/On.

8. Standard Push Button legends shall include: (1) Start; (2) Stop; (3) Stop Lockout;

(4) Low; (5) High; (6) Reset

2.15 WIRE MARKERS

A. General: All wire markers & tags shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication ISA-RP60.6.

B. Construction:

1. Each wire shall be identified on both ends of the wire with heat shrink, thermal transfer tube type wire markers. Do not heat-shrink to cable, leave loose for

accessing cable ID number. 2. Adhesive labels are not acceptable. 3. The wire markers shall be white with black lettering. Hand marking of the label is

not acceptable. 4. The wire marker number shall be a unique number, incorporates the instrument /

equipment tag number if applicable, shall be easily cross referenced with schematic drawings, and shall have the same number on both sides of the wire.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Brady 2. Or approved equal

2.16 ADHESIVE LABELS

A. General: All labels shall conform to ISA Recommended Practice publication ISA-RP60.6.

B. Construction:


1. Adhesive labels shall be used inside the panel to identify equipment. 2. The labels shall be smudge proof and shall have an adhesive back. The printing

on the labels shall be done by mechanical means only.

2.17 CLIMATE CONTROL

A. Provide climate control equipment as necessary for the location and type of equipment to be provided. Use the following as environmental conditions depending on the location of the control panel.

1. Inside - Normal Temperature: 20-104F; Normal Humidity: 10-100%; NEC Class: Non-Hazardous.

2. Outside - Normal Temperature: Minus 20-104F; Normal Humidity: 10-100%; Environment: rain, snow, freezing rain; NEC Class: Non-Hazardous.

B. NEMA 12 enclosures for indoor installation (conditioned space)

1. Enclosure shall have a low-point cold air intake vent and a high-point air discharge vent.

2. Provide heat calculations for the control panel.

C. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman Engineering Company

2. Saginaw Control & Engineering (SCE) 3. Pfannenberg


2.18 GENERAL POWER RECEPTACLE (UPS POWER SOURCE)

A. Provide one (1) 15 Amp duplex receptacle on the inside of the enclosure for all

enclosures that require 115 VAC supplied UPS units.

B. Manufactures:

1. Hubbel 2. Leviton 3. Phoenix Contact

2.19 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT (GFI) RECEPTACLE

A. Provide one (1) 15 Amp duplex GFI receptacle in the inside of the enclosure for all

enclosures that may require programming with a lap top computer or hand held programmer requiring 115 VAC supply.

B. Manufactures:

1. Hubbel 2. Leviton

3. Phoenix Contact


2.20 WIRE

A. All wiring shall conform to Nation Electric Code's latest revision Article 310 -

"Conductors for General Wiring," table 310-17. All wire shall be copper.

B. Power Wiring shall be annealed, tin coated, class B stranded, soft copper, conforming

to ASTM Stranded B-8. Conductor size shall be #12AWG through 750kcmil. Insulation shall be rated 600V.

C. Control wiring inside of the control panel assemblies shall be annealed, tin coated,

class B stranded, soft copper, conforming to ASTM Stranded B-8. Conductor size shall be #16AWG. Insulation shall be rated 600V.

D. All analog signal wiring shall be stranded soft copper. Conductor size shall be #16AWG. The insulation shall be 600V. Drain wires shall be grounded at the panel only. Exposed shield wire shall be protected with a PTFE electrical insulation tubing

for the continuous length until terminated, to help guard against ground noise.

2.21 WIRE DUCT

A. Wires shall be run in open slot vinyl wire duct with covers. AC wireways shall be gray and labeled with “AC” and DC wireways shall be white and labeled with “DC”. Wireduct shall be held to the back plate with round head machine screws and washers.

Wireduct shall be filled no more than 75%. Where it is not practical to use wireduct, wire ties shall be used to bundle the wires together in a neat and professional manor.

B. Manufacturer: 1. Panduit 2. Thomas & Betts


2.22 GROUNDING PRODUCTS

A. Two 1/4" thick x 1" wide x required length (for required ground wires plus 10% spare mounting points) minimum tin-plated copper ground bus bars shall be supplied with each enclosure.

B. One ground bus shall be a chassis (non-isolated) ground bus that is electrically bonded to the panel and shall be used to ground all equipment. All equipment ground wires

shall be run directly from the equipment to the chassis ground bus.

C. Manufacturer: 1. Harger

2. Georgia Copper, LLC 3. TGB & TMGB

4. Storm Copper Components, Co. 5. Chatsworth Products, Inc.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install as shown on the approved shop drawings and according to the manufacturer's requirements.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Control panels with 480V supply source shall have a well-designed disconnecting means that extends through the panel front cover. This disconnect will shut off a main

circuit breaker inside the control panel and be lockable in the off position with a standard padlock.

B. Control voltages shall not exceed 120 VAC. Control transformers shall be sized one size larger than the computed load and be protected by properly sized fuses or circuit breakers on the primary and secondary sides.

C. Fasten all devices inside the enclosure with steel screws, steel bolts, and/or other means as appropriate. For devices without distinct means for fastening, provide

suitable metal bracket or mounting adapter as a means for fastening. Fasten devices that plug directly onto power receptacles with self-locking nylon tie wraps to the receptacle or support for the receptacle. No device shall be permitted to be laid loose

inside the enclosure.

D. All exposed electrical terminations in the enclosure shall be guarded or covered to

eliminate the possibility of accidental contact by an object the size of an average finger. Provide appropriate additional protection where this requirement is not met. Provide appropriate warning labels for voltage levels used within the enclosure.

E. Enclosure components that are electrically connected to devices external to the building that the enclosure is located shall be protected with surge protectors in

accordance with the TVSS specifications of this Section. Segregate all TVSS devices by types and size. Locate the TVSS devices as close, as practical, to the non-isolated ground bus in the enclosure.

F. Provide fuse and fuse terminal blocks with blown fuse indicators for all PLC analog inputs, PLC analog outputs, and PLC discrete inputs provided in the control panel.

G. All PLC discrete outputs provided in the control panel shall be provided with an interposing relay, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

H. Provide fuse and fuse terminal blocks with blown fuse indicators for each power

circuit required for field instruments powered by the control panel.

I. Bond the negative of the 24 VDC power supplies to ground.


3.03 WIRING

A. Drain wires shall be grounded at the panel only. Exposed shield wire shall be

protected with a PTFE electrical insulation tubing for the continuous length until terminated, to help guard against ground noise.

B. All wiring shall conform to the following color code: 1. 480 VAC power, 3-phase: Phase A-Brown; Phase B-Orange; Phase C-Yellow 2. 120 VAC power, 1-phase: Line-Black: Neutral-White

3. 120 VAC control wires – Red 4. 120 VAC externally powered – Yellow/Black

5. 24 VDC (+) – Blue 6. 24 VDC (-) – Blue/White 7. Ground – Green

C. To avoid inductive pickup AC power wiring or AC control wiring shall have a maximum possible separation from DC analog signal or DC control wiring. A

practical distance is not less than 6 in. If power wiring has to cross the signal wiring, the crossing should be as close to a right angle as possible.

D. A maximum of two conductors shall be connected to any one terminal.

E. Wire splices are not permitted within the enclosure.

F. Wire and cable mounting methods

1. Metallic Enclosures: The use of self-adhesive type cable tie mounting pads is prohibited. Wires, wire bundles, and cables that are not routed through wire duct shall be supported utilizing stud-mounted nylon or neoprene bushed steel loop-

type cable clamps. The maximum distance between mounting points shall be 12 inches. Cables mounted on enclosure doors shall have a minimum of three

mounting points. a. Threaded mounting studs shall be 1/8 inch in diameter or larger as required

and made of the same material as the cabinet. The cable clamp shall be

retained with: 1) One nylon washer between the nylon clamp and panel

2) One metal washer and metal/nylon locking nut on top of the clamp 2. Non-Metallic Enclosures: The use of self-adhesive type cable tie mounting pads is

prohibited. Wiring, wire bundles, and cables that are not routed through wire duct

shall be supported utilizing epoxy type cable mounting systems that are designed for the application. The maximum distance between mounting points shall be 12

inches. Cables mounted on enclosure doors shall have a minimum of three mounting points. The mounting surface of the enclosure where the epoxy type cable mount is going to be installed shall be prepared in accordance with the

manufacturer’s written instructions.


G. Where wire is required to flex often (i.e. around door hinges) or susceptible to damage; high strand wire and spiral wrap shall be used. Route and secure wires so that

they will twist and not bend around the hinge.

H. Provide at least 20% installed spare I/O of each type in each control enclosure by

adding spare I/O modules as necessary. Spare and not-used I/O is to be fully wired to terminal blocks in the same manner as the used I/O.

I. Wires that are not de-energized by the main breaker shall be of the same color and

labeled with a warning label stating same.

J. Control power and neutral shall not be jumped from device to device. Each device

shall be wired back to individual terminal blocks. It shall be permissible to jumper one side of the terminal blocks to provide a common buss system.

3.04 PAINTING

A. Interior and exterior surfaces of all enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with rust-inhibitive primer. The interior and mounting plates shall be painted white

with polyurethane enamel. All pits and blemishes in the exterior surface shall be filled. Exterior surface shall be smooth and painted with two coats to a film thickness of 4 mils. Paint color for carbon steel enclosures shall be ANSI 61 Gray, polyurethane

enamel. One pint of finish color paint shall be furnished with the panels to repair future scratches. Stainless Steel enclosures shall not be painted, but shall have a

“brushed” finish.

3.05 TESTING

A. Provide control panel testing as specified in Section 40 90 02.

END OF SECTION

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 95 00-A1 PMCS Control Panel Schedule Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SECTION 40 95 00

APPENDIX A

PMCS CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE

SCHEDULE OF CONTROL PANELS SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR

DIVISION 40

Item Tag No. Service NEMA Mounting Nominal

Size Comm’s Req’d

1 CP-480 480 V MCC/Switchgear

Building 12

New

Wall Mount

Sized By Contractor Maximum

Depth No Greater

Than 12”

Fiber

Optic/ CAT 5e

2 CP-4160 5KV Switchgear

Enclosure 12

New

Wall Mount

Sized By Contractor

Maximum Depth No

Greater

Than 12”

Fiber

Optic/ CAT 5e

Notes:

1. Contractor shall size enclosures to accommodate UL-508A standards. 2. Final Panel sizes shall be submitted by contractor and approved by the Engineer.

END OF APPENDIX A

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 95 00-B1 PMCS Circuit Directory Schedule Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

APPENDIX B

CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT DIRECTORY & LABELING SCHEDULE

SCHEDULE OF CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT DIRECTORY AND LABELING SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR

Item Control

Panel Service/Label Amperage Mounting

1 CP-480 MAIN BREAKER 20A Din Rail

2 CP-480 TRANSFORMER 3A PROTECTION RELAY 10A Din Rail

3 CP-480 TRANSFORMER 3B PROTECTION RELAY 10A Din Rail

4 CP-480 MAIN BREAKER NO. 1 POWER MONITOR 10A Din Rail

5 CP-480 MAIN BREAKER NO. 2 POWER MONITOR 10A Din Rail

6 CP-480 24VDC POWER SUPPLY 10A Din Rail

7 CP-480 SPARE 10A Din Rail


9 CP-4160 MAIN BREAKER 20A Din Rail

10 CP-4160 INCOMING LINE 1 MAIN BREAKER

RELAY 10A Din Rail

11

CP-4160 INCOMING LINE 2 MAIN BREAKER

RELAY 10A Din Rail

12 CP-4160 TIE BREAKER RELAY 10A Din Rail

13 CP-4160 CHLORINE CONTACT FACILITY TX1

RELAY 10A Din Rail

14 CP-4160 CHLORINE CONTACT FACILITY TX2

RELAY 10A Din Rail

15 CP-4160 HIGH PRESSURE PUMP STATION SUB 1A

RELAY 10A Din Rail

16 CP-4160 HIGH PRESSURE PUMP STATION SUB 1B

RELAY 10A Din Rail

17 CP-4160 SUBSTATION 4A FEEDER RELAY 10A Din Rail

18 CP-4160 SUBSTATION 4B FEEDER RELAY 10A Din Rail

19 CP-4160 SUBSTATION 3A FEEDER RELAY 10A Din Rail

20 CP-4160 SUBSTATION 3B FEEDER RELAY 10A Din Rail

21 CP-4160 MCC 1 FEEDER RELAY 10A Din Rail

Moores Bridges Water Treatment Plant 40 95 00-B2 PMCS Circuit Directory Schedule Transformers and Cable Replacement ©Gannett Fleming Inc. 2020 August 2020

SCHEDULE OF CONTROL PANEL BREAKER ASSIGNMENT AND DIRECTORY LABELING SUPPLIED BY

CONTRACTOR (cont.)

22 CP-4160 MCC 3 FEEDER RELAY 10A Din Rail

23 CP-4160 PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER FEEDER

RELAY 10A Din Rail

24 CP-4160 DEWATERING BUILDING FEEDER

RELAY 10A Din Rail

25 CP-4160 24VDC POWER SUPPLY 10A Din Rail



Notes:


APPENDIX A

Substance Abuse and Drug-Free Workplace Ordinance


APPENDIX B

Procurement Information Form

Sheet 1 of 2

CITY OF NORFOLK DEPARTMENT OF UTILITIES

PROCUREMENT INFORMATION FORM

In an effort to document the extent of our minority and Norfolk procurement activities, the Department of Utilities, Division of Engineering, P. O. Box 1080, Norfolk, VA 23501, requests that you complete this form and return it to us with the signed construction contract or professional services agreement. This information will be used for statistical purposes only. PROJECT NAME: ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ FIRM’S NAME: ________________________________________________________ 1. What is your firm’s minority status (based on the Federal or State criteria)? 1a. Please circle the alpha description that applies to your firm. Is the majority ownership of

the firm:

a) African American male owned b) African American female owned c) White female owned d) Other female owned e) Hispanic f) Eskimo g) Asian American h) American Indian i) Aleut

2. Does your firm intend to use minority firms in conduction the work? ___Yes ___No. If

yes, please list the minority firm’s name and dollar value of the work.

FIRM’S NAME DOLLAR VALUE

3. Please state your firm’s intention to procure materials from minority firms and the dollar value of those procurements.

FIRM’S NAME DOLLAR VALUE

Sheet 2 of 2

4. Please list the dollar value of your firm’s minority payroll for the project (to be provided quarterly).

1st Quarter 2nd Quarter 3rd Quarter 4th Quarter

5. Please list the dollar value of the firm’s payroll for the project paid to Norfolk residents (to be provided quarterly).

1st Quarter 2nd Quarter 3rd Quarter 4th Quarter

6. What is the dollar value of your firm’s procurement for project materials and services from

firms located in Norfolk? FIRM’S NAME DOLLAR VALUE I certify that the above information is correct to the best of my knowledge, as of the below date. Signature: Date: Title:


APPENDIX C

City of Norfolk Modifications to the HRPDC Regional Standards, 5th Edition

Section Sub-Section NameAdd/

DeleteModification

All Sections

Sections 200 -

800

Measurement for

Payment. Replace

See Appendix D for City of Norfolk Department of Utilities Measurement

and Payment Item Descriptions. Replace all references to Mesaurement

for Payment in the technical specifications with Appendix D.

109 XIStandard Bid

Items and UnitsDelete

Use City of Norfolk Measurement and Payment descriptions. Refer to

Appendix D.

All 100

sections

General

ProvisionsReplace

Revise all HRPDC General Provisions with Norfolk City Modifications

and Department of Utilities Modifications

200 II.2.2 Quality Assurance Add

Norfolk Arboricultural Specifications and Standard Practice Manual

III.3.6 Submittals Add

Add the following sentences: “Requests for substitutions shall be

submitted at the pre-construction meeting and must be approved in

writing by the Engineer prior to the start of any construction.”

V.5.6.A.1.c.Hydraulic Cement

ConcreteDelete Delete the words, "fly ash"

V.5.6.A.1.c.(1)Hydraulic Cement

ConcreteDelete Delete the entire paragraph

V.5.6.A.1.d.Hydraulic Cement

ConcreteDelete Delete the words, "the fly ash content shall not exceed 30% for Class F,"

V.5.6.A.6.g.Hydraulic Cement

ConcreteDelete Delete the entire section

V.5.6.A.6.I.Hydraulic Cement

ConcreteDelete Delete the entire section

V.5.10.A.9 Ductile Iron Pipe AddDuctile Iron pipe shall have Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lining, or equal

hydrogen sulfide resistant lining approved by the Department.

V.10.B.5 PVC Pipe ModifyCorrect the second sentence to read: “When Compact fittings are used,

they shall have a minimum acceptable pressure rating of 350 psi.”

V. 5.10.D. HDPE Pipe Delete HDPE shall not be used

V.5.10.E.1.a.b Valves Delete Delete “with threaded connections” from the first sentence.

V.5.10.E.1.a.c Valves Add

Accessories: Provide zinc plated bonnet bolts, studs and nuts for

unsubmerged service. Provide stainless bonnet bolts, studs and nuts for

submerged service. Make wedging devices bronze to iron or bronze to

bronze. Provide glands which are bronze or bronze bushed and bronze

gland bolts and nuts.

V.5.10.E.1.c Valve Operators Delete“A valve key wrench of adequate length and of each type required shall be

provided for each project.”

V.5.10.E.1.dValve Stem

ExtensionsDelete Strike out section

200 V.5.10.E.3. Check Valves Add

Provide single disc swing check valves designed to allow a full diameter

passage and to operate with a minimum loss of pressure. Provide 1/8

through 3 inch check valves that meet the requirements of MSS SP-80.

Provide 4 inch through 24 inch check valves that meet the requirements of

AWWA C508. Equip check valves with bronze renewable seat rings,

bronze discs or disc rings and bronze disc hinge bushings and pins.

Carefully mount discs and provide discs that swivel in disc hinges.

Provide pins, discs and other parts that are noncorrosive, nonsticking and

properly cured to operate satisfactorily within a temperature range of 34 to

100 degrees Farenheit and with the fluids specified. Equip 6 inch and

larger check valves with outside levers and weights. Provide check valves

manufactured by American Flow Control, Clow Valve, M&H Valve,

Mueller Valve, or approved equal.

THE CITY OF NORFOLK MODIFICATIONS TO HRPDC REGIONAL STANDARDS, 5th Edition

Janurary 2014 Norfolk Revisions to HRPDC Spec, 5th Edition MOD - 1 of 7


DeleteModification


V.5.10.G.3.cJoint Restraint

DevicesAdd

Harnessing: For ductile-iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joints that

require harnessing, provide ductile-iron mechanical joint retainer glands.

V.5.10.G.4.cJoint Restraint

DevicesAdd

Harnessing: For PVC joints requiring harnessing, provide Series

1300/1390 restraining fittings as manufactured by Uni-flange, Corp.,

Series 1110 HV and Series 2000 PV as manufactured by EBAA Iron

Sales, Inc., or equal.

V.5.11.A.5Ductile Iron Pipe

FittingsModify

Correct the second sentence to read: “When Compact fittings are used,

they shall have a minimum acceptable pressure rating of 350 psi.”

V.5.11.A.7.aDuctile Iron Pipe

FittingsAdd

After ANSI/AWWA add “Current department approved linings include

Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lining. Other hydrogen sulfide resistant

linings shall be submitted for review and approval as equal”.

V.5.11.B.8 PVC Pipe Fittings AddAdd paragraph “For Mains installed, where cover is 10’ (ten feet) or

greater, the pipe shall be C900/C905 DR 18 or Ductile Iron.”

V.5.11.B.9 PVC Pipe Fittings AddAdd paragraph “All fittings shall be molded or ductile iron. No fabricated

fittings will be allowed.”

V.5.19.A.5Ductile Iron Pipe

fittingsModify

Correct the second sentence to read: " When Compact fittings are used,

they shall have a minimum acceptable pressure rating of 350 psi."

V.5.19.B.3. PVC Pipe Delete “couplings, and fabricated fittings” and “or fitting”.

V.5.19.B.6 PVC Pipe AddAdd as the final sentence in the paragraph: "Where Schedule 80 PVC is

used, solvent cement shall meet the requirement of ASTM D-2564."

V.5.19.B.7. PVC Pipe Delete Strike out paragraph

V.5.19.ECopper Water

PipeDelete Strike the sentence that starts, “Fittings shall be wrought…”

V.5.19.F.1.c. Valves Delete Strike out “with threaded connections”.

V.5.19.F.1.d. Valves Add All gate valves for water shall open right (clockwise).

V.5.19.F.3.a Butterfly Valves Modify Replace “16 inches” with “20 inches”.

200 V.5.19.F.1.d. Valve Operators ModifyStrike out the sentence that begins, “A valve key wrench…” Add the

following: “NOTE: Water valves open right (clockwise).”

V.5.19.F.5.Valve Stem

ExtensionsDelete Strike out paragraph

V.5.19.H.2. Fire Hydrants Delete"The fire hydrant shall be painted with a high gloss, alkalyd industrial

enamel (colors to be selected by Owner)".

V.5.19.H.3 Fire Hydrants Delete Strike out paragraph

V.5.19.H.6 Fire Hydrants Delete Strike out paragraph

V.5.19.H.7 Fire Hydrants Add

"All fire hydrants shall be manufactured in complete accordance with

American Water Works Association Specification C502, latest revised

edition, and shall be as manufactured by the Darling Valve &

Manufacturing Company (Model B-50-B), Mueller Centurian A-421,

Pacer Model W-67, Kennedy K-81, or approved equal. Hydrants shall

have full 360 degree revolving heads and shall open by turning the

operating nut to the right (clockwise).

V.5.19.K.4.a.

Concrete

Reaction

Blocking

AddAdd the phrase, ", or as designated by the Engineer," after the word,

"Drawings".

V.5.19.K.4

Concrete

Reaction

Blocking

Delete subsections b and c

V.5.19.L.2. Tapping Valves

and SleevesDelete Strike out the sentence, “The valves shall be subjected to a factory test…”

V.5.19.L.3.a.

Tapping Sleeves

for DI Pipe and

PVC C-900

Modify

In the first sentence insert “full bodied” between “shall be” and

“mechanical joint”. Delete “in accordance with ANSI/AWWA

C110/A21.10. and” from the sentence beginning with “Tapping sleeves

shall be…”



DeleteModification


V.5.19.L.3.b. PVC pipe (Other

than C-900)Delete

Strike out the first paragraph, which begins, “Tapping sleeves shall be

complete…”

V.5.20.B. Subsurface Utility

Warning TapeModify Replace “metalized” with “non-metallic”.

V.5.21.F.1

Manhole

Rehabilitation

Using

Cementious

Products

Delete Delete entire section

V.5.21.I.2Manhole Frame

SealsDelete After "only be installed with" delete " the cementious lining and"

303 II.2.2.E.1 Trench Bedding

and BackfillingModify Replace “Contractor” with “Inspector”.

II.2.2.E.4. Trench Bedding

and BackfillingModify

Replace the paragraph with: “Backfill material shall be solidly compacted

around the pipe in 6” layers up to sub-base of the roadway or the existing

ground elevation. As a minimum, compact each layer of the backfill

material to 95% maximum density as determined in accordance with

VTM-1.


and BackfillingModify

Replace in the first sentence, "...material to not less than the following

percentages at the maximum…" with "…material to 95% maximum…".


and BackfillingDelete sub sections “a – c”.

II.2.2.E.7.G. Trench Bedding

and BackfillingAdd

“The City may, at any time, require compaction testing to ensure

compliance with the specifications. A recognized testing laboratory that is

selected by the City will conduct all tests. The testing laboratory is to be

qualified in the field of the materials to be tested. If applicable, all tests

will be conducted in accordance with V.D.O.T.’S “Manual for Virginia

Testing Methods” (Current Edition, as Revised). Payment for all tests

will be in accordance with the following:

A) The cost of all tests failing to meet the minimum requirements will be

borne by the Contractor.

B) The costs of all tests that either meet or exceed the minimum

requirements shall be borne by the City.

II.2.2.G.2.

Pavement

Removal for

Placement of

Pipelines

Modify

Replace the sentence beginning with “The minimum requirements for a

….” with ”Temporary paving shall be installed and maintained to provide

a suitable driving surface on residential streets. Contractor shall allay

dust. Acceptable daily temporary pavement shall be VDOT 21A Stone,

BM-25, recycled asphalt pavement and crush concrete. Crushed concrete

shall be permited on a case by case basis. The inspector has the final

decision of the acceptability of temporary paving”.

II.2.3. Tolerances Delete Complete Section

801 II.2.2.C.7. Pipe Installation Modify Replace “300” with “100”

II.2.2.F. Tracer Wire ModifyReplace “attached every 10 feet to” with “Directly on top of the pipe

secure by placing acceptable Fill Material by hand.”.

II.2.2.G. Subsurface Utility

TapeModify

Re-write the paragraph to read,” All non-metallic water mains shall be

identified by a subsurface non-metallic utility warning tape placed at an

elevation of 12” above the copper tracer wire or as directed by the owner,

conforming to Section 200.”

II.2.3.A. Valve Installation Modify

After “direction of openings” insert the following, “(All water valves open

right)”. Re-write the second sentence to read, ”Valves found not opening

to the right, or determined to be defective by the Owner shall be rejected,

removed from the site, and replaced by the Contractor at no additional

cost to the Owner.”



DeleteModification


II.2.6.C. Restraint Add After “…coating” add the following, “or as directed by the Owner.”

II.2.7.C. Connections to

Existing MainsDelete Delete the sentence that begins with, “Connection shall be…”.

II.2.7.F.4 Connections to

Existing MainsModify

Replace the paragraph with, "Tie-ins to existing mains shall only be

performed after the new main has been satisfactorily pressure tested and

chlorinated. The contractor may not tie-in the new main to the existing

main until after the results of the bacteriological tests have been

completed and approved by the owner."

801 II.2.7.G.

Tapping Existing

Mains Under

Pressure

Delete Delete subsections 3,4, and 6.

II.2.7.G.5.

Tapping Existing

Mains Under

Pressure

ModifyChange the sentence to read, "Pressure shall be maintained for one (1)

hour period without evidence of leakage."

II.2.7.G.7.

Tapping Existing

Mains Under

Pressure

AddIn the first sentence, after “…branch are acceptable” add the following,

“unless otherwise directed by the Owner.”

II.2.8.B.1. Pressure Test Modify

In the sentence which begins, “Water mains shall be…” remove the

portion that states, “1.5 times the expected working pressure or” and the

portion that states, “,whichever is greater”.

II.2.8.B.7. Pressure Test Modify

Replace this subsection with, “The test pressure shall be maintained at the

pressure stated in the project specifications throughout the duration of the

test period. The water used to maintain the test pressure shall be

measured and shall be less than the allowable leakage in order for the

main to have passed the test.”

II.2.8.C.2. Leakage Test Modify Insert the word “excess” between “…until the” and “leakage.”

802 II.2.1.E. General AddProvide cut sheets for all manholes, 100 ft. stations and end-of-line

cleanouts.

II.2.1.F. General Add

All Services which are reconnected to the replaced sewer main shall be

shown on the "As Built" drawings with the exact distance from the nearest

manhole and with the details of the method of reconnection.

II.2.2.C.4. Pipe Laying Add"If a swab is in the pipe for cleaning, the grade shall be checked and

recorded for each joint of pipe.

II.2.2.C.6 Pipe Laying ModifyAfter"…shall be closed" insert " by use of a temporary bulkhead" and

delete " to the satisfaction of the Owner".

II.2.2.D.1.Alignment and

GradeModify Replace "Drawings" with "approved laying schedule".

II.2.2.D.2.Alignment and

GradeDelete Entire subsection

II.2.3.B.Manhole

InstallationAdd

To the end of the second sentence after: non-shrink grout-"and coated to

match surfaces of manholes."

II.2.4.B.1.a. (5).Pipe Testing -

Gravity LinesAdd

"Contractor is responsible for uncovering and restoring spot check sites at

no additional cost to the Owner."

II.2.4.B.1.a. (8)Pipe Testing -

Gravity LinesModify Replace the last sentence with, "See Section 811."

802 II.2.5.B Connections ModifyIn parentheses should read (where stubs are bricked up or openings do not

exist).

II.2.6Manhole Coating

WarrantyModify In third line change to Final Completion.

803 II.2.2.F Tracer Wire ModifyReplace "attached every 10 feet to" with "Directly on top of the pipe

secure by placing acceptable Fill Material by hand."

II.2.2.GSubsurface Utility

TapeModify

Re-write the paragraph to read "All non-metallic water mains shall be

identified by a subsurface non-metallic utility warning tape placed at an

elevation of 12" above the copper tracer wire or as directed by the Owner,

conforming to Section 200."



DeleteModification


II.2.3.A Valve Installation Modify

After "direction of openings" insert the following; "(All sanitary sewer

valves open left)". Re-write the second sentence to read "Valves found

not opening to the left, or determined to be defective by the Owner shall

be rejected, removed from the site, and replaced by the Contractor at no

additional cost to the Owner."

805 I.1.2.B.2Unusual

ConditionsModify

Replace the second half of the sentence that begins, “pressure tested in

place…” and ends “…and tested in place.” with, “, and meets current

Virginia Department of Health Sewage Collection and Treatment

Regulations.”

810 II.2.2.F.3

Acceptance of

Cleaning

Operation

Add

A television inspection shall be completed after cleaning to verify that the

cleaning operation was successful. The television inspection shall be in

accordance with Section 811 - Television Inspection.

811 I.1.2.D. Submittals Add Overflow Prevention Plan

I.1.2.E. Submittals Add Overflow Containment and Cleanup Plan

II.2.1.B.1. Equipment AddSewer scanner and evaluation technology, similar to the Blackhawk

pipeline assessment system, is an acceptable alternative to CCTV.

II.2.2.A.2. Flow Control ModifyThe end of the last sentence to read, "…unless approved by the Owner in

advance".

Standard

Details

CI_08

Residential

Entrance w/out

Curb and Gutter

Delete Use Norfolk Public Works/Codes Standard Driveway Entrance Detail

DS_02Precast Concrete

Conflict ManholeDelete

EW_01Pipe Bedding

DetailsDelete

EW_02

Payment Limits

Trench

Excavation and

Backfill

Delete

EW_03

Trench Width

Detail for

Payment of

Contingent Items

Delete

EW_04

Typical trench

Detail for HDPA

9Type S) Storm

Drain Pipe

Delete

FE_01

Typical Chain

Link Fence &

Gate Detail

Delete

LS_01Tree Planting -

SlopesDelete

RC_01

Pavement

Patching for

Flexible

Pavement

Delete

RC_02 Utility Locations Delete

RC_03

Continous

Shoulder Rumble

Strips

Delete

WD_02Water Service

Installation DetailReplace Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Typical Tap Installatioin, CW 01

WD-03Water Meter Box

(Type I)Replace Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Water Meter Box & Cover, CW 02

WD_04Water Meter Box

(Type II)Delete



DeleteModification


WD_05Blow Off

AssemblyReplace Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Air Vent/ Blow-Off Valve, CWS 03

WD_06Fire Hydrant

Setting (TypeI)Replace

Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Fire Hydrant Installation, CW 04 and

Fire Hydrant Connection, CW 05.

WD _07Fire Hydrant

Setting (Type II)Delete

WD _08Fire Hydrant

Setting (Type II)Delete

WD_09

Temporary

Manifold For Test

and Chlorination

Delete

WD_10

Precast Concrete

Vault - Non-Load

Bearing

Delete

WD_11

Precast Concrete

Vault - H20

Loading

Delete

WD_12Metal Meter

VaultDelete

WD_13Water Sampling

StationDelete

WS _01

Standard Valve

Box Frame and

Cover

DeleteUse the Norfolk Standard Detail for Large Valve Box Frame and Cover,

CWS 01 and CWS 02 for Small Valve Box Frame and Cover.

WS _02Valve Setting

DetailDelete

WS _03Manual Air Vent

AssemblyReplace Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Air Vent/ Blow-Off Valve, CWS 03

WS_04Steel Casing

DetailReplace

Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Water Line Casing, CWS 07A and

CWS 07B

WS _05Standard Thrust

BlocksDelete

WS _06

Obstruction By-

Pass Uniform

Offset

Replace Use the Norfolk Standard Detail For lowering or new construction CW06

WS _07Restraining Rod

DetailDelete

WS _08

Typical Tracer

Wire Box

Installation

Delete

SS_01

Standard Precast

Concrete

Manhole

w/Extended

Monolithic Base

Replace Use Norfolk Standard Detail for Standard Precast Sewer Manhole, CS 03

SS_02Precast Concrete

Shallow ManholeReplace Use Norfolk Standard Detail for Shallow Precast Sewer Manhole, CS 04

SS_03Sanitary Sewer

Straddle ManholeDelete

SS_04

Sanitary Sewer

Interior Drop

Manhole

ReplaceUse Norfolk Standard Detail for Standard Precast Sewer Drop Manhole,

CS 05

SS_05

Sanitary Sewer

Exterior Drop

Manhole (For

Existing Manhole

Only)

ReplaceUse the Norfolk Standard Detail for Standard D.I. Drop Connection for

Existing Brick Manhole, CS 01



DeleteModification


SS_06

Sanitary Sewer

Manhole

Adjustment

Delete

SS_07

Sanitary Sewer

Manhole Invert

Shaping

Delete

SS_08Connection into

Existing ManholeDelete

SS_09

Sanitary Sewer

Manhole Casting

(24")

ReplaceUse the Norfolk Standard Detail for standard 30" manhole casting and

cover C06

SS_10

Sanitary Sewr

Manhole Cover

(24")

ReplaceUse the Norfolk Standard Detail for standard 30" manhole casting and

cover C06

SS_11

Saniary Service

Lateral Clean Out

Frame and Cover

ReplaceUse Norfolk Standard Detail for Mainlline Cleanout Casting and Cover,

CS 10

SS_12

Sanitary Service

Lateral Clean Out

Frame and Cover

For Heavy Loads

Delete

SS_13

Sanitary Sewer

Main Line Clean

Out Box

ReplaceUse Norfolk Standard Detail for Mainlline Cleanout Casting and Cover,

CS 10

SS_14

Sanitary Sewer

Service

Connection

ReplaceUse Norfolk Standard Detail for Typical Wye/Lateral Layout and Property

Line Cleanout, CS 11

SS_15

Dual Sanitary

Sewer Service

Connections

Delete Dual Service connection not allowed.

SS_16

Deep Sanitary

Sewer Service

Connection

Delete

SS_17Force Main

SaxophoneReplace Use the Norfolk Standard Detail for Force Main Saxophone, CS 14

SS_18

Force Main to

HRSD Force

Main

Delete



APPENDIX D

Measurement and Payment Items

1

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ITEM DESCRIPTIONS Item 1: Storm Water Improvements Payment shall be lump sum for storm water improvements, including replacement of a flat round grate with a heavy-duty dome grate and installation of an inline drain connection to the existing 24” RCP storm water pipe. The lump sum price shall be the full compensation for furnishing and installing new storm water components complete and in place. Also included in the cost shall be excavation, bedding and backfill, stakeout, furnishing of a written cut sheet, trench dewatering, erosion and sediment control, sheeting and/or shoring in accordance with OSHA regulations, clearing, grubbing, grading, care and protection of existing utilities and structures, backfilling, and compaction. Additionally, the on-site properly contained temporary storage and drying of trench soils is also included. A minimum of 4” of clean pliable topsoil (submittal required) and vegetation that matches the original vegetation in size and species are included. The cost of temporary relocation of the stormwater flow to facilitate installation of the pipe shall be included in the price.

Item 2: Temporary Power Payment shall be per month of temporary power system installed and in use. The unit price for this item shall be the full compensation for furnishing, installing, testing, operating and maintaining temporary power equipment, appurtenances, and fuel. Item 3: 5kV Switchgear Modifications Payment shall be per EACH 5kV switchgear modified. The unit price for this item shall be the full compensation for demolition of instruments/meters and doors, furnishing and installation of SEL 751 feeder protection relays and switchgear replacement doors, and inspection and testing of electrical equipment. Item 4: Transformer 3A/3B Primary Feeders Payment shall be for LINEAR FOOT of primary feeder replaced. The unit price for this item shall be the full compensation for removal, storage, protection, and reinstallation of electrical trench duct covers (approximately 80 linear feet); transfer of power between alternate primary feeders; demolition of the existing 5kV 3x250kcmil primary feeder cables; furnishing and installation of: new 5kV 3x250kcmil EPR cable, installation of 600V 1x#1/0 XHHW copper stranded wire, water-tight barrier in the existing trench duct at the flood control berm, and all terminations, clamps, and testing. Additionally, conduit for transition from underground trench duct to above-grade cable tray and painting and labeling of exposed conduit shall be included. Note that only one feeder may be replaced at a time. Also included in the costs are full compensation for all earthwork, excavation, bedding, backfill, and vegetation restoration associated with accessing the trench ducts and replacing the feeders. Additionally, the on-site properly contained temporary storage an drying of soils is also included, as is any disposal of material, and the trench lids shall be stored, protected, and reinstalled as part of this work. A minimum of 4” of clean pliable topsoil (submittal required) and vegetation that matches the original vegetation in size and species are included for areas that are vegetated.

2

Item 5: Fiberglass Cable Tray Additional Supports Payment shall be for EACH new fiberglass cable tray support. The unit price for this item shall be the full compensation for furnishing and installing fiberglass cable tray supports including anchors and hardware. Item 6: Fiberglass Cable Tray Replacement Covers Payment shall be for LINEAR FOOT of fiberglass cable tray. The unit price for this item shall be the full compensation for furnishing and installation of new fiberglass cable tray covers, including fiberglass hold-down clips. Item 7: 5kV Transformers Payment shall be made for each 5kV transformer. The unit price for this item shall be the full compensation for demolition of the existing transformer, pad and appurtenances and furnishing and installation of the new transformer pad, 5kV substation liquid filled transformer, grounding equipment, inspection and testing. Also included in the costs are the proper disposal of demolished items as well as furnishing and installing concrete forming, sub-base, reinforcement, concrete, finishing and coating for the transformer pads. Note: One transformer will be replaced while the other remains in service. Item 8: 480V Feeders Payment shall be made per LINEAR FOOT of 480V cable bus feeders. The unit price for this item shall include demolition of the existing bus duct, hangers and supports; and furnishing and installation of 2000A, 480/277V cable bus; support framing for cable bus; and inspection and testing. Item 9: 480V Switchboard 3A/3B Modifications Payment shall be made for EACH 480V switchboard modification. The unit price for this item shall include demolition of existing MCB trip units and furnishing and installation of PXM 4000 power meters, new 2000AT MCB Trip Units, and inspection and testing. Note: One switchboard will be replaced while the other remains in service. Item 10: Control and Instrumentation Wiring Payment shall be made per unit of each sub-item listed below. The unit price for each item shall include furnishing and installation of the item. Additionally, inspection and testing of all cables and fibers including test reports shall be included. Also included is the cost of any earthwork, excavation, trenching, backfill, topsoil, and vegetation restoration. 10A: GRC Conduit 3/4” 10B: GRC Conduit 1” 10C: GRC Conduit Fittings 3/4” 10D: GRC Conduit Fittings 1” 10E: Conduit Hangers 10F: THHN-THWN Stranded Fiber 10G: Stakon Lugs, #12-#10 10H: Wire Terminations, #16-#14 10I: Control Panel, CP-4160 10J: Control Panel, CP-480

3

10K: Transformer Protection Relays, SEL-787 10L: Protection Relay Enclosures, with Test Switches 10M: UTP Copper Cable, 4-pair CAT 5E 10N: UTP Cable Connector, RJ45 CAT 5E 10O: UTP Patch Cord, RJ45/RJ45 CAT 5E, 5ft 10P: Data Outlet, Outlet Box

Item 11: Fiber Optic Cables Payment shall be made per unit of each sub-item listed below. The unit price for each item shall include furnishing and installation of the item. Additionally, inspection and testing of all fiber optic cables including test reports shall be included. Also included is the cost of any earthwork, excavation, trenching, backfill, topsoil, and vegetation restoration.

11A: PVC #80 Conduit & Fittings 1-1/2" in Trench with warning tape “BURIED FIBER OPTIC LINE” above the conduit

11B: GRS Conduit & Fittings, 1-1/2" 11C: Fiber Optic Cable, Outside Plant Multi-Mode, 12-strand 11D: Innerduct, 1" Diameter, UV Resistant 11E: Fiber Optic Cable, Indoor Multi-Mode, 12-strand 11F: Fiber Optic Connectors, Jumpers, Etc.


APPENDIX E

Norfolk Details

(SEE CONTRACT DRAWINGS FOR REFERENCED DETAILS)

LATEST CITY OF NORFOLK, DEPARTMENT OF UTILITIES DETAILS MAY ALSO BE VIEWED AND DOWNLOADED AT: http://www.norfolk.gov/Utilities/engineer/Std_Detail_Drawings.htm


APPENDIX F

Project Sign Detail


APPENDIX G

Application to Perform Utility Work in Right of Way

NOT USED


APPENDIX H

Soil Borings

NOT USED


APPENDIX I

Tree Protection Notes

CITY OF NORFOLK - TREE PROTECTION NOTES

1. PROTECTED TREE:

With exception of those trees specifically shown to be removed, all existing trees on public and private property shall be actively preserved and protected by the Contractor, and any subcontractors, from damage to the crown area, trunk, root system, or rooting environment (soil system) during construction.

2. CRITICAL ROOT ZONE:

GENERAL: The critical root zone (CRZ) is defined as the surface area of the ground directly beneath the limits of the crown (branch) spread of a tree. The CRZ is also commonly referred to as the dripline. (see Tree Protection Fencing detail). It is within this zone that the majority of larger roots that provide support for the tree, and transport water and nutrients, exist. A relatively high percentage of absorptive roots also typically occur within the CRZ. In urban areas rooting depths within the CRZ rarely occur below 30 inches, with most roots found within the upper 18 inches of the soil profile. Paved street surfaces (curb face to curb face) are not included in the CRZ.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: No construction vehicles, equipment,

materials, supplies, or temporary facilities (trailers, portable toilets) may be placed within the CRZ of protected trees, paved streets (curb to curb) excepted. The following types of items are restricted from the CRZ: Vehicles (construction or personal), construction equipment not specifically approved and incidental to the work, concrete washout, fuel or chemical storage, temporary stockpile of soil, piping and other construction materials and supplies. Parks & Forestry may grant exemptions for work within the CRZ where suitable tree protection measures are implemented, i.e. hand digging, installation of mulch construction mat, etc.

3. HAND DIG ZONE:

GENERAL: The Hand Dig Zone (HDZ) is the area of the root system that is likely to contain the majority of support and transport roots 2 inches and larger in diameter. Hand dig zones vary based on tree size and species characteristics, soil conditions, and other site factors that affect rooting patterns.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: The City Forester will determine the

extent of all hand dig zones within the CRZ once the proposed location of

the sewer/water service lateral has been determined following a joint preconstruction field review with the Contractor, Engineer or Project Inspector, and City Forester. All roots 2 inches and larger in diameter (any dimension) encountered to a 30” depth in the HDZ, outside the actual space occupied by pipes or other elements being constructed, shall be preserved and protected from abrasions, cuts or other significant wounds. Excavation shall be tunneled beneath these roots. It is strongly recommended that an air spade powered by an air compressor (AIR-SPADE 150/90 manufactured by CEG, INC. Verona, PA, or approved equal) be utilized to expose protected roots without injury. Protected roots bridging any open excavation for more than 24 hours shall be loosely wrapped in wet burlap to prevent excessive dehydration of the exposed root surface. Roots less than 2 inches in diameter in any dimension may be cut, where necessary, with a sharp ax, sharpened flat spade or hand pruning saw at the edge of the excavation. Once excavation reaches 30 inches, and larger roots do not prohibit access, mechanical equipment may be used to deepen the excavation. In areas where roots are encountered, work shall be performed and scheduled to close excavations as quickly as possible over exposed roots.

4. PRECONSTRUCTION FORESTRY REVIEW - LAYOUT OF

SANITARY SEWER/WATER LATERALS AND OTHER UTILITY EXCAVATION, AND EQUIPMENT CLEARANCE PRUNING REVIEW:

A. SEWER/WATER LATERAL LAYOUT - GENERAL: The location of

existing/proposed sewer and water piping, private clean-outs, property line clean-outs, water meter boxes, and points of discharge from private/commercial dwellings shown on the construction plans are approximate based on current records and some preliminary field investigation.

LATERAL LAYOUT - CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all existing and proposed sewer/water connections at the main, clean-out/meter, and within five feet of the residence or building serviced (where applicable). The Contractor shall also determine and field verify all service connections along all utility lines scheduled for replacement, including all point repairs.

For the purposes of identifying and resolving any conflicts with

existing trees, once all existing and active service connections have been determined, and prior to beginning any utility improvements, the Contractor shall tour the job-site with the Engineer, Plumber (where applicable), and City Forester to determine the location/relocation of sewer and water taps, sewer clean-out and

water meter box locations, alignment of sewer and water piping on public and private property, water valves, point repairs, insertion and receiving pit locations, dewatering pit locations, utility location pits, and pruning requirements for equipment clearance. Where in the sole opinion of the City Forester, excavation with a trencher, back-hoe, or other mechanical equipment for the installation of service piping or sewer clean-outs/water meter boxes would likely result in extensive root damage to existing trees, hand digging will be required. Where feasible, new service piping will be placed in a location that will least impact tree roots and facilitate utility installation. There shall be no utility main replacement work, lateral replacements, or utility tap work performed at any location where utility tap locations and lateral alignments have not been jointly reviewed by the Engineer, Contractor, Plumber (where applicable), and City Forester, and approved by the Engineer.

B. TREE PRUNING – GENERAL: Existing tree limbs indicated to

remain might obstruct construction operations.

TREE PRUNING – CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: All clearance pruning requirements not specifically indicated on the plans shall require the issuance of a separate Tree Work Permit. Equipment clearance and pruning requirements, including any special conditions, will be determined during a required preconstruction review between the Contractor, Equipment Operator, Project Engineer, and City Forester.

5. ROOT PRUNE:

GENERAL: The purpose for root pruning of existing trees adjacent to

construction is to provide a cleaner, more controlled cut than is normally accomplished by conventional excavating machines.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: Root pruning, where indicated, within

the critical root zone shall be accomplished by hand with sharpened spades or hand pruners, or with approved root-pruning machinery. Approved root-pruning machinery includes a rock saw or a vibratory plow (cable puller) with a 30” (min.) blade. In certain applications a sharpened trencher (Ditch-witch) may be permitted. Blades must be sharpened prior to each project start. The location of the cut is at the edge of the proposed excavation, on the side closest to the protected tree(s). Large roots encountered that cannot be severed with root pruning machinery are to be hand cut with a sharpened pruning saw (see detail this sheet). Prior to root pruning, the Contractor shall layout in the field the alignment of the cut for

approval by a Parks & Forestry Inspector. All root prune areas require an open trench forestry inspection prior to backfilling.

6. CONCRETE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL WITHIN THE CRZ:

All concrete and asphalt removal completed within the CRZ must be

completed by a method that prevents any severance or damage to roots located directly beneath or adjacent to the hardscape surface. Equipment working from a hard surface (paved street, sidewalk, driveway, etc.) may be utilized to pick up concrete and asphalt sections.

7. EXCAVATION PROCEDURES WITHIN THE CRZ

GENERAL: Protection of trees adjacent to excavation involves three areas

of operations: Placement of excavated materials (dirt, pipe, etc.) root pruning/hand digging, and protection of trunk and limbs.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: Excavated fill dirt must be placed

outside of the critical root zone of adjacent trees where there is sufficient room. If no room exists due to the location of adjacent structures or trees and the fill cannot be placed on a hardscape surface, the fill must be placed on plywood or other suitable decking to contain the fill and minimize point source soil compaction within the critical root zone (see detail this sheet). Additionally, where it is necessary to operate equipment within the critical root zone (paved streets excepted), a six-inch layer of wood chips shall be placed and maintained within the construction access-way to minimize soil compaction and root damaged caused by the equipment. Following construction the wood chips must be removed with hand tools and the site restored to preexisting conditions.

Hand digging or root pruning will be required where noted on the

drawings or otherwise indicated during the preconstruction forestry review. (See Hand Dig Zone, and Root Prune for specific procedures).

Extreme care must be taken to avoid injury (scarring, breakage, etc.) to the

trunk and crown area (branches) of protected trees. Wherever possible, construction equipment shall be maneuvered as needed to avoid unnecessary pruning or contact with protected trees. Where there is a high probability of equipment contact with the trunk of protected trees, wooden armoring may be required to be installed on protected trees, as specified by the City Forester, prior to conducting any construction adjacent to protected trees.

8. OPEN TRENCH FORESTRY INSPECTIONS:

All excavation within the hand dig zone as noted or otherwise designated by the City Forester require inspection by a Norfolk Parks & Forestry inspector prior to backfilling. The purpose of the inspection is to verify that structural roots 2”and larger in diameter have been protected, and to assess the tree for structural impacts (wind-throw potential). The City Forester may also require inspection of certain areas approved for excavation with mechanical equipment. It is not necessary for all piping to be installed prior to this inspection, provided that excavation within the area designated for hand digging has been dug to the proposed depth of pipe, or a minimum 30-inch depth. Should the Contractor backfill any of these locations prior to inspection by a Parks & Forestry inspector, the City Forester may require the Contractor to remove the backfill material within the hand-dig zone (or mechanically excavated area requiring forestry inspection), at the Contractors expense, as necessary to complete the inspection. Where in the City Forester’s opinion, no immediate hazard is apparent, the Contractor shall be given a maximum period of 72 hours to remove the backfill.

Open trench forestry inspections will not be completed on weekends or City-observed holidays. The Contractor must provide the Bureau of Parks & Forestry with a minimum 24-hour working day notice for all open trench forestry inspections. Open trench forestry inspections will be conducted between the hours of 9:00 a.m. – 3:00 p.m., Monday – Friday, and may be scheduled by calling the Bureau of Parks & Forestry at 823-4023 between the hours of 7:00 a.m. – 4:00 p.m., Monday – Friday.

9. TREE PRUNING:

A. Preconstruction Pruning:

PRECONSTRUCTION PRUNING - GENERAL: The purpose of

clearance pruning is to provide construction equipment access beneath and adjacent to the crown (branch area) of protected trees to prevent unnecessary breakage or scarring of limbs.

Clearance pruning requirements will be determined during the

Preconstruction Forestry Review (see notes, this sheet).

PRECONSTRUCTION PRUNING - CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: All authorized pruning work shall be completed by an approved, licensed, insured Arborist holding current Arborist Certification with the International Society of Arboriculture. The Contractor shall not prune or cause to have pruned any tree located on City property without first securing a separate Tree Work

Permit from the Bureau of Parks & Forestry. The Contractor must seek and receive permission from the property owner prior to pruning any tree on private property. All pruning work shall be completed at the Contractor’s expense. The City of Norfolk may elect, at its option, to complete any equipment clearance pruning on public street rights of way.

B Selective Pruning Of Construction-Damaged Trees:

GENERAL: The purpose of selective pruning is to remove broken or otherwise wounded branches from protected trees that are damaged through construction related activities. The City Forester will direct selective pruning and therapeutic requirements needed to restore tree health or structure. All work must be completed by a professional, ISA Certified Arborist, at the Contractor’s expense.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: The City Forester will assess

all construction-damaged trees and order the appropriate selective pruning requirements. Damages may also be assessed to the Contractor for the value loss of any protected tree damaged through careless or negligent equipment operations, or contractual violations including nonconformance to contract tree protection requirements detailed in the project specifications or drawings, or otherwise directed. Trees that are damaged beyond reasonable aesthetic, structural or physiological recovery will be appraised to determine the value of the tree, and the Contractor will be held liable for the value loss and any associated removal or site restoration costs.

10. DAMAGE TO PROTECTED TREES:

The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to protected trees resulting from negligent or careless operations, including but not limited to limb breakage, trunk wounds or abrasions, excessive root damage, soil compaction, etc. Upon such occurrence the City Forester will evaluate the extent of damage and determine the appropriate remedial action to be taken at the Contractor’s expense, including but not limited to corrective pruning, bark tracing, cabling and bracing, hazard evaluation, removal and soil/site restoration. If in the sole opinion of the City Forester, the amount of damage to any City-owned tree has resulted in a significant loss of functional, aesthetic, architectural, or economic value, the Contractor will also be required to reimburse the City for the full loss in tree value.

Value loss will be determined through an appraisal completed by the City Forester following established procedures published in the “Guide for Plant Appraisal”, authored by the Council of Tree and Landscape

Appraisers. In the event of any dispute between the Contractor and City over the value loss of any tree so damaged or destroyed, the City Forester will take into consideration an independent tree appraisal completed by an experienced consulting Arborist holding current membership in good standing with the American Society of Consulting Arborists (ASCA), in establishing the actual value loss. All costs associated with an independent appraisal shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

11. TREE PROTECTION SIGNAGE:

GENERAL: The purpose of tree protection signage is to alert Contractors and construction trades as to the importance placed upon tree protection within the project area. Two types of tree protection signs are required, Area Signs, and a Concrete Washout Signs.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: Area Signs shall be 11”x 15” heavy duty cardboard, blaze orange colored background with black block letters, 1” high, with the inscription “Keep Out – Tree Protection Area”. The area signs shall be attached to the tree protection fence every 50’ on center.

Concrete Wash-Out Signs shall be large enough to be clearly seen by truck drivers and posted at all locations approved for disposal of concrete rinse. The disposal of any concrete rinse within the critical root zone of any tree, or any area where the rinse could move or leach to the CRZ of a protected tree is strictly prohibited

12. TREE PROTECTION FENCING:

GENERAL: The purpose of tree protection fencing is to prevent unauthorized encroachment of equipment and vehicles, or storage/temporary placement of construction materials, spoils, or debris within the critical root zone of protected trees.

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: Tree Protection Fencing shall be blaze-orange in color, heavy-duty plastic mesh fence, 4 feet tall, securely attached to metal 2” U-channel post, set a maximum of 8’ on center.

Tree protection fencing shall be installed prior to commencing with any

proposed construction activity within 10 feet of any protected tree, paved streets (curb to curb) excepted. The City Forester may waive the requirement for tree protection fencing adjacent to street trees where the placement of such would adversely affect traffic flow or safety, or when the Contractor has clearly demonstrated a capability to manage construction operations adjacent to street trees without undo risk of tree damage. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining tree

protection fencing erect and in good repair throughout the duration of construction activities for which the fencing was required.

13. TREE ORDINANCE AND TREE WORK PERMIT:

The Contractor shall conform to all requirements of the City of Norfolk Tree Ordinance (Chapter 45, Norfolk City Code). A Tree Work Permit authorizing the completion of work as shown or described will be issued directly to the City of Norfolk Department of Utilities. The Contractor will be provided with a copy of the Tree Work Permit at the preconstruction meeting. The Tree Work Permit must be retained on the job-site for the duration of the project. Any work not specifically shown or described including but not limited to tree pruning, tree removal, or any change orders for which a Tree Work Permit would be required in accordance with the Tree Ordinance, will require a separate Tree Work Permit. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to secure all necessary Tree Work Permits prior to proceeding with any activity regulated by the Tree Ordinance.


APPENDIX J

Contractor’s use of Temporary Facilities and Staging Areas

J-1

Appendix J Contractor’s Use of Temporary Facilities and Staging Areas

1. The Contractor shall provide at its own expense and without liability to the City any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary construction facilities, staging areas, or storage of materials. The Contractor shall not use private property in connection with the Work unless prior written permission is obtained from the property owner.

2. The Contractor’s use of the staging area will have the same requirements as the construction activity area in the Contract Documents.

3. The Contractor’s use of the staging area shall be in compliance with all City ordinances to include:

A. Vector Control – the contractor shall be responsible for keeping the grass mowed and keeping the area in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Erosion Control – erosion control such as silt fence, inlet protection, etc. shall be provided at the site in accordance with City code and shall comply with the same requirements included in the contract documents.

C. Noise Control – the Contractor shall be responsible for complying with City noise ordinances and shall comply with the same requirements included in the contract documents.

D. Graffiti Control – the contractor shall remove/erase all graffiti and or other defilement of facilities on the staging area within two working days.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security and safety of all staging area facilities including, but not limited to, all equipment, materials, site structures, and construction thereon. All security measures deemed necessary by the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall be at the Contractor’s expense and at no additional cost to the City. The Contractor shall be responsible for all site security until final acceptance of the Work by the City.

5. The Contractor shall maintain the staging area in an orderly and clean condition and shall at intervals of no more than three (3) days and at its expense, remove and legally dispose of accumulations of rubbish or refuse materials, surplus concrete, mortar and excavated materials not required on the project. Washings from concrete mixers or mixing boxes shall not be deposited directly or indirectly in the drainage or sewer system or on paved streets.

6. The Contractor shall keep the site, inclusive of vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes through the site, free of dirt and dust by periodic blading, power brooming, watering or other approved means. Road surfaces adjacent to the area shall be cleaned of soil with mechanical brooms or other approved methods at the end of each working day.

7. The Contractor shall confine all equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workmen to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, or the requirements of the Contract Documents.

J-2

8. Upon completion of the use of the staging area, the Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of all rubbish, surplus or discarded materials, false work, forms, temporary structures, field offices, signs, temporary erosion and siltation control measures, and equipment and machinery, and shall leave the site in the conditions existing before the Work was started, to the satisfaction of the City.

9. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the Work and as directed by the City, remove from the City’s property and from all public and private property and rights-of-way, at its own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, debris, piles of earth, foreign matter, and waste materials resulting from his operations. The site of the Work shall be restored to the conditions existing before the Work was started, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Lawns, pavements, sidewalks, and other surfaces shall be preserved where practicable, but if damaged, shall be fully restored.

10. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of material furnished by him or to him, and accepted by him and intended for the work.

11. Above ground fuel storage tanks, lubricants, oil, grease and other petroleum products shall be stored in a fashion to prevent spills. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up any spills and shall comply with all applicable regulations pertaining to storage and use of hazardous products.

12. Construction staging areas shall not have more than 2 points of ingress/egress to the site.

13. Construction staging areas shall have a 6 foot high chain link fence around the perimeter and all activities associated with the staging shall be contained within the fenced area. The fence shall have a green and black 8mil woven geotextile screening fabric 6 feet high securely attached to the fence every 24 inches at the top and bottom of the fence.


APPENDIX K

Virginian Clean Water Revolving Loan Fund (VCWRLF) Contract Inserts

NOT USED


APPENDIX L

Test Hole Data Sheets

NOT USED


APPENDIX M

Requirements for As-Built Drawings, Coordinates, Component Tables, and GPS Files

APPENDIX M - 1

APPENDIX M

REQUIREMENTS FOR AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, COORDINATES, COMPONENT TABLES, AND GPS FILES

I. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall record information for projects in accordance with Section 105 V RECORD DRAWINGS.

II. COORDINATES

2.1 The Contractor shall record coordinates for all utility system components including:

A. Water Distribution

1. Water Mains (if specified in Contract Documents) 2. Water Main Fittings 3. Valves 4. Water Service Lines (if specified in Contract Documents) 5. Water Meter Boxes 6. Fire Hydrants 7. Casings 8. Water Sampling Stations 9. Automatic Flushing Devices 10. Pump Stations 11. Water Storage Tanks 12. Remote Pressure Monitors

B. Sanitary Sewer

1. Manholes 2. Gravity Mains 3. Laterals (if specified in Contract Documents) 4. Clean Outs 5. Force Mains (if connects to manhole or specified in Contract

Documents) 6. Sewer Main Fittings 7. Valves 8. Casings 9. Pump Stations 10. Standby Bypass Pumps 11. Emergency Pump Connections

APPENDIX M - 2

C. Abandoned Components 1. All utility components uncovered as part of construction, that are not

removed, shall be included in the component tables, with the exception of:

a. Sewer lateral connection fittings (wyes) b. Sewer cleanouts c. Water service line connection fittings (taps) d. Water meter boxes e. Sewer Gravity Mains

2. Utility components including caps and plugs placed on abandoned mains shall be included in the component table with the status Abandoned

3. Utility components that are removed (not abandoned) during construction will be reflected on the As-built Drawings but, they will not be included in the Component Tables

2.2 The Contractor shall record HORIZONTAL coordinates in accordance with Section 105 VII SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS, for all utility system components (as shown in Section 2.1) in Component Tables as follows:

A. Connections to existing utility components;

B. All utility components listed in Section 2.1 and associated with the Project’s construction, with the exception of pipe, unless specified in the Contract Documents;

C. All locations where exposed pipe enters the ground (for permanently

exposed pipe);

D. Top of pipe locations or other components as specified in the Contract Documents.

2.3 The Contractor shall record VERTICAL elevations in accordance with Section 105 VII SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS, for utility system components in Component Tables as follows:

A. Connections to existing utility components;

B. Utility components associated with construction, including:

1. Manholes (Lowest Invert Elevation) 2. Gravity Mains (Upstream and Downstream Invert Elevations inside

manholes) 3. Valves (Top of Pipe as close to valve as possible) 4. Force Mains (Invert inside manhole, if applicable) 5. Water Mains

APPENDIX M - 3

6. Fittings a. Includes all fittings and connections for Water Distribution System

including Water Service Line connections (Taps) b. Includes all fittings and connections for Sewer Force System c. Does not include Sewer Lateral connections (Wyes) d. Does not include Sewer Gravity fittings

7. Casings

C. Top of pipe elevations or other components as specified in the Contract Documents.

D. VERTICAL elevations are not required for abandoned utility components.

E. All components collected using GPS equipment shall contain Z-value,

however ONLY elevation values in accordance with Section 105 VII SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS 7.4 D shall be recorded in the Component Tables.

2.4 The Contractor shall collect horizontal location and vertical elevation from the top, center of the pipe at the utility component location unless otherwise specified:

A. Invert values are collected from the bottom, center of the pipe (where wastewater flows)

B. Offset valve boxes are collected from the top, center of the valve box

C. Valve elevations collected at the top of pipe, as close to valve as possible

2.5 In addition to the standards referenced above and in accordance with Section 105 VII SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS, coordinates shall include the following:

A. Both ends of casings

B. Each tapping sleeve separate from the valve, where applicable

C. Both valve and valve box if offset

III. COMPONENT TABLES

3.1 All Component Tables shall contain at least the following information:

A. Project Name - Name of the construction project as defined by the City

B. Contractor - Name of the construction company providing construction services

APPENDIX M - 4

C. Contractor’s Representative - Signature of the person (prime contractor)

responsible for the accuracy of information provided in the Component Table

D. Date Submitted – Month, Day, and Year the Component Table is delivered

to Owner

E. Licensed Land Surveyor – Signature of Land Surveyor, Licensed by the Commonwealth of Virginia, to certify the accuracy of collected data in accordance with Section 105 VII. SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS

F. Signature Date – Date Licensed Land Surveyor signed off on the accuracy

of the work in accordance with Section 105 VII. SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS

G. Street Name – Name of the street used to reference the utility system

component to the As-Built Drawings

H. Station Value – Relative position value used to reference utility system component to the As-Built Drawings (pipes and casings will have a station range - start and stop values)

I. Coordinate Location Method – Method used to collect horizontal coordinate values for Northing and Easting: GPS, Survey

J. Component – Type of utility system component in accordance with

APPENDIX N COMPONENT TABLE FORMAT SECTION I COMPONENT DETAILS

K. Component Subtype – Specific subtype of utility system component in

accordance with APPENDIX N COMPONENT TABLE FORMAT SECTION I COMPONENT DETAILS

L. Install Date – Month, Day, and Year utility system component is installed

M. Abandoned Date – Month, Day, and Year utility system component is

abandoned, if applicable

N. Latitude - Geographic coordinate that specifies the north–south position of a point on the Earth's surface - latitude refers to the y-coordinate in accordance with Section 105 VII. SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS

O. Longitude - Geographic coordinate that specifies the east-west position of a point on the Earth's surface - longitude refers to the x-coordinate in accordance with Section 105 VII. SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS

APPENDIX M - 5

P. Elevation - Elevation refers to the utility component in accordance with Section II Coordinates 2.3 above or below a fixed reference point (the z-coordinate) in accordance with Section 105 VII. SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS

Q. Status - Status of utility component: CONSTRUCTED NOT IN SERVICE,

IN SERVICE, or ABANDONED

3.2 Component Tables shall contain additional information for specific utility components in accordance with APPENDIX N COMPONENT TABLE FORMAT SECTION I COMPONENT DETAILS.

3.3 Component Tables, populated with components associated with the project, are included in APPENDIX O PROJECT COMPONENT TABLE for reference.

A. The populated Component Table contains shading and highlighting to

assist the Contractor in completing the appropriate information. 1. Cells highlighted in yellow should be reviewed and updated by the

Contractor as needed based on actual construction. 2. Shaded cells are intended to be left blank. 3. All remaining cells shall be populated by the Contractor.

B. The populated Component Table is being provided for the Contractor’s

convenience, only, and may not include all items to be located by the Contractor as are defined in the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains responsible for developing and submitting complete, comprehensive and accurate Component Tables to the Owner.

3.4 Contractors shall submit Component Tables as an Excel spreadsheet in accordance with

APPENDIX N COMPONENT TABLE FORMAT SECTION II WATER DISTRIBUTION TEMPLATE, SECTION III SEWER FORCE TEMPLATE, and SECTION IV SEWER GRAVITY TEMPLATE. Excel Templates shall be provided to Contractor by Owner upon issuance of a Notice to Proceed with the Work.

3.5 Station values in the Component Tables will be used to correlate the component to the

As-Built Drawing.

A. All components shall have a station value.

B. Water mains, water service lines, sewer gravity mains, sewer force mains, sewer gravity laterals, and casings shall have a station range value that includes the station start and station end values.

APPENDIX M - 6

3.6 Contractors may request to submit Component Tables in GIS data formats. If GIS submittal is approved by the Owner, Component Tables shall be submitted as Esri geodatabases in accordance with APPENDIX N COMPONENT TABLE FORMAT.

IV. QUALITY CONTROL

4.1 Upon receipt of submittals, the Owner will complete a quality review. This may include field verifying coordinates, reviewing DOP data for GPS survey methods, checking the As-Built Drawings redline markups and Component Tables by site inspection.

4.2 Submittal acceptance shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner and will be based on

the error percentage as determined during the quality control process.

A. The Owner will generally accept submittals from the Contractor where fewer than 1 percent of located components are found to be in error.

B. The Owner will return submittals for correction where more than 1 percent

but less than 5 percent of components are determined to have been located in error. Individual files including As-Built Drawings, Component Tables, and GPS files, for coordinates collected utilizing GPS equipment, will be identified by Owner for correction and resubmittal by Contractor if the errors only impact part of the submittal (e.g. missing details from the As-Built Drawing, missing components from the Component Table).

C. The Owner will reject all submittals and require re-collection of coordinates

and component information for a submittal where more than 5 percent of components are determined to be in error. As-Built Drawings, Component Tables, and GPS files, for coordinates collected utilizing GPS equipment, will be required for re-submittal.

D. The Contractor shall be required to correct errors or inaccuracies at no

additional cost to the Owner. 1. This shall include all actions related to excavation, backfill,

compaction, etc. associated with uncovering utility components. 2. This shall include all actions related to coordinate collection, As-Built

Drawing redline markup, and population of the Component Table.

APPENDIX M - 7

E. The Contractor shall be required to submit corrections in accordance with this appendix as well as Section 105 V RECORD DRAWINGS, and VII SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS.

1. Corrections shall be submitted no later than one month following receipt

of the correction request from the Owner. 2. Corrections shall be subjected to the same quality review as the original

submittals. 3. Failure to submit corrections will be basis for the Owner to withhold the

Contractor's payment in partial or in full.

V. MONTHLY SUBMITTALS FOR DATA RECORD PACKAGES (DRP) Submittals listed below shall include the following items with each monthly invoice:

4.1 Data record packages (DRP) including Construction Contract drawings with redline

markups indicating the “As-Built” conditions, completed Component Tables, Statement signed and sealed by a Virginia licensed surveyor certifying the accuracy of coordinates and elevations, and GPS files shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner monthly including the final month when construction is completed.

A. Construction Contract Drawings (“As-Bid” documents, hard copy or pdf format) with redline markups indicating the “As-Built” conditions –Drawings submitted in PDF format shall be scanned in color and shall be named with “AsBuilt Drawing” followed by the project title and number, date, and contractor’s name.

B. Component Table – the Component Table shall be in accordance with Section III COMPONENT TABLES and named with “Component Table” followed by the project title and number, date, and contractor’s name.

C. Statement signed and sealed by a Virginia licensed surveyor certifying the

accuracy of coordinates and elevations may be included as a separate PDF.

D. GPS Files – digital coordinate data captured using GPS equipment shall be submitted in accordance with Section 105 VII SURVEYS AND REFERENCE POINTS 7.5, and further named with the project title and number, date, and contractor’s name.

APPENDIX M - 8

E. Corrections – corrections shall be submitted in the format requested by the Owner in accordance with Section III QUALITY CONTROL.

F. Submittals shall be delivered to the Owner together on a USB drive or other

digital transmittal method approved by the Owner following the issuance of a Notice to Proceed.

4.2 Failure to keep As-Built Drawings, coordinates, Component Tables, and GPS files

accurate, current, and submitted monthly will be basis for the Owner to partially or fully withhold payment of the Contractor's monthly payment request.

4.3 Monthly submittal dates will be determined following the issuance of a Notice to Proceed.


APPENDIX N

Component Table Format

APPENDIX N - 1

APPENDIX N

COMPONENT TABLE FORMAT

I. COMPONENT DETAILS:

1.1 Water Distribution

Component Component Subtype Component Data Columns

Example Values / Pick Lists

Values do NOT supersede the Approved Products List

All (General Values)


Street Name Grove Avenue

Station Value 12+01.4

Install Date 1/1/2017

Abandoned Date 1/1/2017

Coordinate Location Method

Select from one of the following values: GPS Conventional

Latitude 36.844600001

Longitude ‐76.285707225

Elevation ‐01.59'

Status Select from one of the following values: CONSTRUCTED NOT IN SERVICE IN SERVICE ABANDONED

APPENDIX N - 2

Component Component Subtype Component Data

Columns Example Values / Pick Lists


Water Mains Select from one of the following values:DISTRIBUTION LINETRANSMISSION LINE

Enter information in General Values fields

Material Select from one of the following values: ABS ASBESTOS CEMENT CAST IRON CAST IRON W/ MECHANICAL JOINT CEMENT CONCRETE CONCRETE CASING COPPER DUCTILE IRON DUCTILE IRON W/ MECHAN. JOINT EXTRA STRENGTH VITRIFIED CLAY GALVANIZE IRON GALVANIZE WROUGHT IRON LEAD OUTSIDE DIA. STEEL DIPPED & WR PCCP POLYETHYLENE PIPE POLYTHOLENE POLYVINYLCHLORIDE STEEL TERRA COTTA OR SOIL TRUSS PIPE VITRIFIED CLAY WOODEN PIPE WROUGHT IRON HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE

Diameter 8"

APPENDIX N - 3




Fittings Select from one of the following values: Bend Cap Coupling Cross Expansion Joint Offset Plug Reducer Riser Saddle Sleeve Stub Tap Tee Wye


If Component Subtype is: Bend, Tap, Tee, Coupling, Cross, Expansion Joint, Offset, Riser, Reducer, Saddle, Sleeve, Wye, Cap, Plug, Stub, populate component data column

Size 1 8"

If Component Subtype is: Bend, Tap, Tee, Coupling, Cross, Expansion Joint, Offset, Riser, Reducer, Saddle, Sleeve, Wye populate component data column

Size 2 8"

If Component Subtype is Tap and connects water service line to the main

Service Address 400 Granby Street

If Component Subtype is Bend populate component data column

Bend Direction Select from one of the following values: Up (Vertical) Down (Vertical) Level (Horizontal)

APPENDIX N - 4





Bend Degree Select from one of the following values (provide value if not in this list): 5.625 11.25 22.5 45 90

Valves Select from one of the following values: Air Vent APS Insertion Valve Blow off Valve Butterfly Check Cock Gate Horizontal Valve Valve Vault


Diameter 8"

Manufacturer

Select from one of the following values (provide Manufacturer if not in this list): American American Flow Control Atlantic States Capitol Foundary of Virginia Clow Ford Hughes Supply Kennedy M&H MATCO McDonald Mueller Proflow US Pipe Val‐Matic

Manufacturer Year 1994

Turns to Close 21

In Manhole? Select from one of the following values: Yes No

APPENDIX N - 5




Water Service Lines



Diameter 3/4"

Water Meter Boxes

Select from one of the following values: COMMERCIAL METER MASTER METER RESIDENTIAL METER



APPENDIX N - 6




Fire Hydrants Enter information in General Values fields

Hydrant Size Select from one of the following values: 4 1/2" 5" 5 1/4" 6"

Manufacturer Select from one of the following values (provide Manufacturer if not in this list): AMERICAN DARLING AMERICAN FLOW CONTROL AVK CLOW DRESSER KENNEDY LUDLOW M&H MATHEWS MUELLER SMITH WATEROUS WOOD

Manufactured Year 2008

Casings Enter information in General Values fields

Material Select from one of the following values: DUCTILE IRON STEEL CONCRETE

Water Sampling Stations


Address 1200 South Fairwater Drive

Facility ID 032

APPENDIX N - 7




Automatic Flushing Devices


Model Number 9400WC

Manufacturer Mueller

Size 6"

Address 401 N Granby Street

Pump Stations Enter information in General Values fields

Pump Station Name PS 098

Water Storage Tanks


Name East Little Creek Storage Tank

Style Elevated

Capacity 4,000,000 Gal

Foundation Pile Support

Select from one of the following values: Yes No

Material Type Concrete

Remote Pressure Monitors


APPENDIX N - 8

1.2 Sanitary Sewer






Street Name Grove Avenue

Station Value 12+01.4

Install Date 1/1/2017

Abandoned Date 1/1/2017

Coordinate Location Method

Select from one of the following values: GPS Conventional

Latitude 36.844600001

Longitude ‐76.285707225

Elevation ‐01.59'

Status Select from one of the following values: CONSTRUCTED NOT IN SERVICE IN SERVICE ABANDONED

Manholes Enter information in General Values fields

Access Diameter 30"

Rim Elevation 11.75'

Lowest Invert Elevation 6.64'

APPENDIX N - 9




Gravity Mains Enter information in General Values fields


Diameter 8"

Upstream Invert 5.11'

Downstream Invert 3.91'

APPENDIX N - 10




Laterals Enter information in General Values fields


Diameter 4"

APPENDIX N - 11




Clean Outs Enter information in General Values fields


Size 4"


APPENDIX N - 12




Force Mains Enter information in General Values fields


Diameter 6"

MH Invert Elevation 3.91'

APPENDIX N - 13




Fittings Select from one of the following values: Bend Cap Coupling Cross Expansion Joint Offset Plug Reducer Riser Saddle Sleeve Stub Tap Tee Wye


If Component Subtype is: Bend, Tap, Tee, Coupling, Cross, Expansion Joint, Offset, Riser, Reducer, Saddle, Sleeve, Wye, Cap, Plug, Stub, populate component data column

Size 1 6"

If Component Subtype is: Bend, Tap, Tee, Coupling, Cross, Expansion Joint, Offset, Riser, Reducer, Saddle, Sleeve, Wye populate component data column

Size 2 6"

If Component Subtype is Wye and connects sewer lateral to the main populate component data column



Bend Direction Select from one of the following values: Up (Vertical) Down (Vertical) Level (Horizontal)

APPENDIX N - 14





Bend Degree Select from one of the following values (provide value if not in this list): 5.625 11.25 22.5 45 90

Valves Select from one of the following values: AirControl AirGap AirRelease BackFlowControl DoubleCheck GateValve Horizontal Gate Valve ReducedPressureBackflow RPZ SimpleCheck VaccumBreaker VaccumRelease


Diameter 6"

Manufacturer

Select from one of the following values (provide Manufacturer if not in this list): American American Flow Control Atlantic States Capitol Foundary of Virginia Clow Ford Hughes Supply Kennedy M&H MATCO McDonald Mueller Proflow US Pipe Val‐Matic

Manufacturer Year 1994

Turns to Close 21

In Manhole? Select from one of the following values: Yes No

APPENDIX N - 15




Casings Enter information in General Values fields

Material Select from one of the following values: DUCTILE IRON STEEL CONCRETE

Pump Stations Select from one of the following values: Dry Pit Submersible Submersible



Standby Bypass Pumps



Fuel Type

Select from one of the following values: Diesel Natural Gas

Emergency Pump Connections




APPENDIX O

Project Component Table

II. WATER DISTRIBUTION TEMPLATE

Template available as an Excel file

Water

Meter

Box Casings

Pump

Stations

Street Nam

e

Station Value

Component

Component Subtype

Install D

ate

Abandoned Date

Coordinate Location M

ethod

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

Status

Material

Diameter

Size 1

Size 2

Service Address

Bend Direction

Bend Degree

Service Address

Diameter

Manufacturer

Manufactured Year

Turns to Close

In M

anhole?

Material

Diameter

Hydrant Size

Manufacturer

Manufactured Year

Material

Address

Facility ID

Model N

umber

Manufacturer

Size

Address

Pump Station Nam

e

Nam

e

Style

Capacity

Foundation Pile

Support

Material Type

GENERAL VALUES REQUIRED FOR ALL

COMPONENTS

ADDITIONAL VALUES REQUIRED FOR SPECIFIED COMPONENTS

Automatic

Flushing Devices

Fire

HydrantsFittings Valves

Water

Mains

Water

Sampling

Stations

Water

Service

Lines Water Storage Tanks

III. SEWER FORCE TEMPLATE


Casings

Pump

Stations

Emergency

Pump

Connections

Street Nam

e

Station Value

Component

Component Subtype

Install D

ate

Abandoned Date


ethod

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

Status

Access Diameter

Rim

Elevation

Lowest Invert Elevation

Material

Size / Diameter

Material

Size / Diameter

Service Address

Material

Diameter

MH Invert Elevation

Size 1

Size 2

Service Address

Bend Direction

Bend Degree

Diameter

Manufacturer

Manufactured Year

Turns to Close

In M

anhole?

Material

Pump Station Nam

e

Pump Station Nam

e

Fuel Type

Pump Station Nam

e


COMPONENTS


Manholes Laterals Clean Outs Force Mains Fittings Valves

Standby

Bypass

Pumps

IV. SEWER GRAVITY TEMPLATE


Casings

Pump

Stations

Emergency

Pump

Connections

Street Nam

e

Station Value

Component

Component Subtype

Install D

ate

Abandoned Date


ethod

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

Status

Access Diameter

Rim

Elevation

Lowest Invert Elevation

Material

Diameter

Upstream

Invert

Downstream

Invert

Material

Size / Diameter

Material

Size / Diameter

Service Address

Size 1

Size 2

Service Address

Bend Direction

Bend Degree

Diameter

Manufacturer

Manufactured Year

Turns to Close

In M

anhole?

Material

Pump Station Nam

e

Pump Station Nam

e

Fuel Type

Pump Station Nam

e


COMPONENTS


FittingsGravity Mains Laterals Clean OutsManholes Valves

Standby

Bypass

Pumps